^^SgS^£^l!Sr^^si!S:4229!Sr^«SS5SiS:^ The Gastineau Method LIBRARY UNIVERSITY Of CALIFORNIA SDUCA^EIOU LiBBf j^^^t^t.^^^ /^^ / y ^ THE GASTINEAU METHOD THE CONVERSATION METHOD FOR SPEAKING, READING, AND WRITING GERMAN INTENDED FOR SELF- STUDY OR USE IN SCHOOLS WITH A SYSTEM OF PRONUNCIATION BASED ON WEBSTERL^ EQUIVALENTS BY EDMOND GASTINEAU, A.M. AUTHOI* OF THE "CASTINEAU METHOD FOK SPEAKING, READING, AND WltlTINO FliENCH," AND PUINCIPAL OP THE GASTINEAU SCHOOL OF LANGUAGES, NEW YOUK WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF RUDOLF TOMBO, Ph. D. GERMAN INSTRUCTOR IN THE NEW YORK SCHOOLS NEW YORK .:• CINCINNATI •:• CHICAGO AMEEICAN BOOK COMPANY Copyright, 1889, By Edmond Gastineau, w. p. 7 / ditccCho^^ SIFT HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. " I would fain,''^ said John Locke, " have one show me that tongue that any one can learn to speak, as he should, by the rules of grammar. ^^ And, indeed, how many thousands, after months and, often, years of poring over some of the text-books in ordinary use, discover, on going abroad or meeting foreigners in society, that they neither can speak nor understand the first word of the language! This is as unnecessary as it is astounding. We find that, in the last century, a Mezzofanti could speak 58 languages. Bayard Taylor was famous for the rapidity with which he mastered foreign tongues ; and the great explorer, Henry Schliemann, learned to speak modern Greek in six weeks' time! It will not serve to answer that these were excep- tionally gifted men, for we see not only children, but also adults of most ordinary capacity, when thrown among for- eigners, acquire in a few weeks a practical ability to express themselves and to understand others. Yet these same children and adults, when taught by the prevailing methods in the class-room, will spend years of irksome and arduous labor in the study of a language, only to find, in the vast majority of cases, that they are unable to say the simplest things or to understand the simplest questions in it. "WHY IS THIS? Simply because, contrary to the sage advice of Wolfgang Ratke and Erasmus, "the way of nature" is not followed, but the way of the methods instead. Now, WHAT IS THE WAY OF THE METHODS in common use? One and all, whether avowedly grammatical, or claiming, as some do, to be practical and conversational because affecting to discard grammar wholly or in part, these systems are really 737 IV HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. what is called 'grammatical/ that is to sny ' constructive.' For all are based on the following principles : (1) The presentation of words, either in vocabularies, or simple, i. e., formless and meaningless sentences. (2) The drilling of the pupil in con- structing sentences with this material from, the single word up. Let us not forget, in the first place, that a large portion of language can not be constructed, being entirely different from synonymous forms in the language of the pupil. Such idioms as, " Never mind ! " " What is the matter ? " " You don't mean it ! " etc., can not be constructed by foreigners learning English, but have to be taken up in their idiomatic compactness. This applies just as well, of course, to English-speaking pupils who are learning foreign tongues. But, apart from this most important element of language, it is not against grammar and construction per se that a protest is entered. On the contrary, we should finally acquire the power to construct. But it is against grammar and construction being made the great and main dependence of the pupil in expressing himself, and the broad highway to the acquisition of language, that a protest is made. It is evident that, on such a plan, any attempt at expression involves calcidation as to what place this or that word should occupy, or what inflection it should aflect in this or that circumstance. For this, the learner depends upon a multiplicity of rules which he never half understood and never half remembers. Or, if he has used one of those methods which affect to discard grammar, he has to muster up the empyrical substitutes for rules which have been given him, but which he has never either clearly understood or mastered. Any one so taught, whenever attempting to utter a sentence, will ponder, wonder, stammer out something, take it back, try it again, and ultimately end in confusion and silence. Or, in the case of the few who, being either over gifted or persistent, learn to speak in spite of the wrong method adopted, they almost invariably express themselves in faulty, crippled, ^m-French, itn-German little sentences. In a word, they do not really speak French, or German, or Spanish, etc., but English- French, English-Germsin, or English-Fipamsh. And this is no more correctness and propriety of speech {which these systems pretend to impart) than is hobbling along on crutches the per- fection and poetry of motion. HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. V To this first and fatal defect, however, the methods in common use add other mistakes : (1) THE NATURE OF THEIR VOCABULARY. Who does not know how the majority of these books fill their pages witli tlie most formless, useless, and often inexpres- sibly absurd sentences ? Think of poring over page after page of such phrases as (I quote textually throughout) : '*/ have a 'rose, She has a book. You have a stick. My brother has a pen. His sister has an apple,'' etc., etc., etc. ; or of being dragged over such as these: '^ Are you sniffl,ingf{!) I am sniffling! Why are you sniffling ? I am not sniffling now. You are sniffling ! " etc., etc. ; or, of being entertained with such as the following, the source of which will be instantly recognized : ^' Has the baker our bread? No, but he has our fine asses ! Has he our nails and hammers f No, but he has our good loaves!" and so on, for fifty closely printed pages of asses, bakers, loaves, nails, and hammers mixed in the most astonishing and bewildering manner! — Is that, I ask, really learning to speak a sensible, practical tongue? Certainly, all the methods do not sin as grievously as the ones quoted above, but all are tainted more or less with this defect, and give the pupil, in the main, a mass of useless and senseless matter to learn. As if every language did not contain more than twenty times enough practical, sensible, and useful material to teach any one all the combinations and evolutions of which it is capable ! (2) THE EXTENT OF THEIR VOCABULARY. What are we to think, then, in addition to the above, of an attempt to familiarize us with a stock of words of so vast and indigestible bulk that natives themselves would find it impossible to master it ! Yet, several of these methods con- tain a vocabulary far greater than even a Victor Hugo or a Goethe would, or could, have used for the walks and talks of ordinary life. And this, although philologists have assigned very narrow limits indeed to the vocabulary of every-day life, some placing the number of words necessary for the expression of our general thoughts and wants at even less than 2,000, wliile Prendergast shrewdly observes that "there are 200 or 300 common words in VI HO"W TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. every language some of which occur necessarily in every colloquial sentence ; and the profusion of speech which we observe in children, springs from their power of wielding these 200 or 300 words, with a gradually increasing stock of nouns and verbs interspersed." No wonder then, in view of all these facts, that the methods above described fail ignominiously to teach us the art of speaking a foreign tongue, and, indeed, in most cases, even of reading or of WTiting it. But let us now inquire, — "WHAT IS THE WAY OF NATURE? Whether in the case of the child surrounded by those who constantly speak to or before it, or in that of the adult in a foreign land, the ear is incessantly struck with the sounds not of single words, let us remember, but of cotnplete sentences and perfect idiomatic forms. Some of these finally impress themselves on the memory, and, child or adult, according to our need or impulse, we attempt to use one or the other of them. At first, it is in a crippled sort of way, perhaps bringing out but a shred of the sentence. But, let us not fail to observe, even in the case of the child, that the perfect and entire forwj or idiom is aimed at. So, with greater perfection at each effort, we at last use the diffi- cult idiom or phrase with ease and accuracy, — not building it, but reproducing it as a copy of the perfect whole presented and aimed at from the first. In this manner, a limited but sufficient collection or stock of such sentences is gathered. These forms become habitual to us, and we make a constantly recurring use of them, modi- fying them, however, by the introduction of new words to express more and more diversified meanings. Thus do we insensibly yet quickly find ourselves masters of a spoken totigue. Then it is that grammar often is studied, with the purpose of making us conscious of what we know and more critical, but never as a primary means by which we are expected to attempt to speak. This plan, with such modifications as the different circum- stances of real life and study in the class-room necessitate, is the one followed by the " Conversatiox Method." In this, it is partly following in the path traced out as early as the HO^W TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. Vll sevenieenth century by Comenius, a learned Moravian. His work entitled " Janua Linguarum Reserata," or " The Door oj Languages Opened," marked the dawn of a revolution which, in our day, is slowly but surely overturning the present methods of language study. Comenius himself was followed, but not until two centuries later, by Hamilton, Robertson, Toussaint-Langenscheidt, Pren- dergast, and others. All these systems copied nature in presenting us, at the outset, not si4ig]e words or common- place, formless and meaningless phrases, coupled with a confusing mass of incomprehensible rules (or substitutes), but idiomatic and perfect forms of speech, accompanied, gen- erally on opposite column or page, with their meaning in the learner's vernacular. They all led the pupil, then, to re- peatedly utter and handle these sentences until absolutely mastered, and, finally, to analyze, reconstruct, and recombine them. But, although moving in the right direction, they necessarily had to feel their way, and, consequently, were imperfect; some, like Prendergast and Hamilton, entirely excluding grammar; others, like Robertson, introducing it to such an excessive degree as absolutely to prevent that constant repe- tition without which it is impossible by any system to learn to speak a language ; others still, being replete with the grossest errors, and filling page after page with dry lists of synonymous terms that pall upon the mind and bewilder the memory. The Conversation Method, while applying the same great and natural principles, avoids the mistakes committed by its direct predecessors. It supplies the pupil from the outset with sentences of daily necessity coupled with their translation and pronunciation, so that they may be easily memorized and mastered in their perfect and idiomatic completeness, and turned to immediate conversational account. These are now re- hearsed in active colloquial exercise, and, when thoroughly familiar, analyzed, and the words of which they were made up inserted into other forms and idioms to express a still greater variety of meanings. Such is the true basis of practical and perfect language knowledge. It is in this way, says Prendergast, that "for slovenly hesitation, fluency and readiness are substituted. Vlll HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. Instead of translating from the English, the beginner has to learn the genuine foreign forms of speech." When a certain number of these idiomatic and necessary phrases have been mastered by the pupil, a vocabulary — 7iot made up of unrelated and ill-assorted words, as is the case with so many methods, but classified, and all pertaining to the par- ticular topic treated in the sentences — is furnished. These words are used to insert into the ready forms of speech already mastered, thus at a trifling cost of study and memory, broaden- ing a hundred-fold the range of our expression. At the same time, the words contained in the method have been limited to such a number as to render possible and bring about that constant repetition of the same words and phrases, with- out which we canriot expect to learn to think in a language. Now, WHAT IS THINKING IN A LANGUAGE? In reality, there is no such thing. What is meant is, that we become so familiar with the forms of language that we do not hdve to think in using them. This faculty is developed in our own or in any other language only by the constant repetition of the same idioms and words. Now, if a method deluges the pupil, as many do, with an avalanche of useless words, it is evident he can never repeat this mass frequently enough to familiarize himself with any portion of it. This mistake has been avoided in this book by the introduction mainly of words within the range of every-day conversation and necessities, although the other extreme has been shunned, and literary, artistic, and social topics have been freely introduced. So far, therefore, " the way of nature " has been ftiithfuUy copied. But while, owing to the incessant reiteration of the same forms and the constant urging of daily wants in real life, the way of nature is all sufficient to force upon us a fluent and even elegant use of language, the limited hours of the class- room demand the introduction of some element to make plain the by-paths just traversed but still brushy and hampered; something to co-ordinate that practical but still partially cha- otic knowledge, and clear for us the broad, general avenues of language ; something, in fine, to take the place of the ever HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. IX present and despotic tutorship of nature ; and that something is GRAMMAR. Although John Locke would have had us study "without the drudgery of grammar," it is certainly indispensable to the perfect knowledge of a language acquired in the class-room. And grammar has become the bugbear that it is, simply 1)C(:iusc it lias IxxMi made to play a part for which it never was fit. But hrouf/Jit hi at the ivoper time, and, as Erasmus advised, kept in proper limits, Avhy should grammar be other than a help, instead of a hindrance? For, then, it is simply the exptanation of what may be puzzling us. Kow, explanation, if clear and to the point, will not confuse but assist us. For it will give us the rationale of the construction and frame-work of forms already mastered, and teach us how, intelligently, to construct others upon these vivid models. In a word, it will fill the gaps of our practical knowledge and bind its segments firmly together. Thus to complete and cap the edifice, but not to be tlie foundation and main support of it, that is the office of grammar. HOW IT IS TAUGHT IN THIS BOOK. In the first place, notes are given at the bottom of every French (or German) page. These are not expected to be specially memorized, but are rather meant as present answers to whatever queries may arise in the mind concerning the forms and phrases we master. In addition, all the necessary grammatical elements of the language are found together, properly classified, at the end of the book, while the learner is referred to them from time to time throughout the text. In this way, avc are assured a thoroughness not attained by works which cut the grammar into shreds, and sow it piecemeal throughout their pages, so that seeing no end or connection about this straggling grammatical mass, the learner becomes inevitably and hopelessly bewildered. But it will be found that, as a result of the mastery of idio- matic forms obtained through this method, many minor rules ivill have taiu/J;t themsrlvrs ; (bus, isolating the inain aiul m)re difficult rules, which arc then easily mastered. Five of the X HOW TO SPEAK A LANGUAGE. latter, which I consider most important and hence call the " Five Cardinal Rules," are inserted from place to place in the text so as to further isolate them for the pupil. However, the book is so constructed as to allow those who, like John Locke and Herbert Spencer, are adverse to grammar, to study without it. CONVERSATION. Another distinctive feature of this method remains to be explained. Any system of teaching languages not based upon the successive treatment of actual topics will be one-sided and incomplete. For if, as Prendergast says, " disconnected words are not language, ^^ then certainly, disconnected seiitences are not conversation. For this reason, and in view of the manifold and patent advantages of such a plan, every portion of this work (whether sentences, conversations, exercises, or even readings) is cast in conversational form. And in order to create a series of topics at once practical and interesting, we are so to speak, transported to Paris (or Berlin, or Madrid), and then surrounded with the most natural circumstances pertaining to traveling or residing in the country of which we study the language. In this medium, we are made to speak, to read, and to write about things which we would really need to know and to say with foreigners. The book is composed of five parts. At the beginning of each of these, a long idiomatic sentence is given, with its pronun- ciation and translation. This sentence is divided into its clauses, each one of which introduces a number of other sentences modi- fied from or related to it. Then follows a vocabulary, a portion of which is absorbed in "Conversations" and "Exercises." (See Directions, page xi.) Finally, a reading, and, generally, a letter close every section. In order to assure, beyond question, in the execution of the German, that perfect accuracy which characterizes the French book, the able services of Dr. Rudolf Tombo, a native of Ger- many, graduate of the Berlin and Leipsic universities, and an experienced German teacher, have been secured. In short, nothing has been omitted to make the method a complete and interesting, as well as a thorough and practical one. EDMOND GASTINEAU. DIRECTIONS. I. — PREPARATION OF THE LESSONS. Read the sentence found at the beginning of each part a number of times, by means of the figured pronunciation. This reading, if possible, should be done aloud, as first and properly recommended by Langenscheidt. When the sentence begins in this way to grow familiar, attempt to repeat it from the English side, without looking at the German. If any word escapes the memory, however, look at it at once, yet do not finish the sentence from there, but return to the beginning of it ; and again, from the English side, attempt to repeat it from end to end without looking at the German. This will be found a much easier task than one would anticipate, and soon the learner will find himself able to repeat a long and idiomatic sentence with practical fluency. This done, learn the shorter sentences following in the same manner. When one page has been gone over, return to the beginning of it and attempt to repeat all the sentences from the English side, without the help of the German. CONVERSATIONS, EXERCISES, READINGS, LETTERS. — Directions will be found with each of these. But in the case of the Con- versations, write them out in English, if necessary, and repeat the German aloud from this translation. II. — HINTS FOR RECITATIONS. The 'sentences' may be recited in class, either by each pupil separately, or by a section of the class speaking together. The teacher may ask the English, the pupil or pupils repeating the German without aid of the book, or, if the class is apt and forward, the instructor may read one of the German questions, the pupils giving the answer from memory. The Literal Translations accompanying each idiomatic phrase will allow the pupil, once he has mastered the sentence, to study the meaning of each word, while also gi^'ing him a clear conception of what the Germans really say. THE conversations AND EXERCISES. — At first, the English of the conversations may be given, the pupil repeating the German from memory. But the class should be gradually led XU DIRECTIONS. to repeat these as real conversations, with such additions oi alterations as may be brought in by the instructor. With adults, I usually recommend not to have the exercises written out, but only recited orally. THE LETTERS. — It has been my invariable experience that to memorize a few model letters and write them from memory, impresses the usual forms of letter-writing better than months of ordinary exercise writing. But in addition to this, it is well to lead pupils to write letters on topics suggested to them. SELECTION OF THE MATTER. — It is a good plan to omit those X)ortions of a book which appeal least directly to the particular pupil or class. Thus, with children, I would omit sections about needle-work, for instance. If ladies are studying, I would pass over business letters, etc. A good way is to draw a pencil-mark diagonally across the parts thus omitted. This does away with the feeling of incompleteness otherwise engendered. CONVERSATION. — After recitation, whether of Sentences, Conversations, or Exercises, etc., pupils should be drilled, as far as time and size of class permit, in independent conversa- tion over the topics just treated, care being taken to introduce words from the vocabularies. Questions should also be asked of them concerning the facts contained in the readings, and they should be led to answer in the foreign tongue. III. — FOR SELF-STUDY. SENTENCES, ETC. — Follow directions under "Preparation, Etc." Do not stop short of uttering the phrases without any hesitation. CONVERSATIONS. — To be written out into English and the German repeated aloud from that, without help of the book. But learners should gradually apply themselves to repeat these Conversations from beginning to end, without looking at book or paper. EXERCISES should be written out in German, and then re- peated aloud from the English text without looking at the paper. IV. — TIME OF STUDY. Pendergast was right in reconiinemliiig, at least, sliort hnt freqiUMit periods of study, instead of tlie ordinary two or three hours of con- secutive drudgery. Study, then, from five to fifteen or, at niotit, tliirty minutes, as often as practicable each day. A FEW WORDS. A WORD ON THE STUDY OF GERMAN. — It is gratifying to notice that the study of Germfin is constantly on the increase, the necessity for speaking that important language for pur- poses of business, as iveil a^ the fuller understanding of its great literature, being more and more realized. At the same time, great dissatisfaction cert^iinly prevails with the results obtained in the study of Gernmn, not only by private pupils, but also in public and private schools. This absence of satisfactory results is due, beyond anv doubt, to the lack of a conversational method combiw'nq the elements of thoroughness and practicability. The Conversation Method has been published to meet this want, and to supply the public and the schools with a method both thorough and practical. A WORD ON THE USE OF LATIN TYPE, — Latin type is mostly used in the Conversation Method for German. This feature will undoubtedly be welcomed, as it very properly removes from the path of the pupil at the outset one of those difficulties which unnecessarily tend to make German unattractive. It is also justified by the fact that at least one-third of the books now published in Germany are printed in Latin type. However, the pupil is made thoroughly familiar with Gothic text by means of the Headings, printed in Gothic characters. A WORD ABOUT GERMAN SPELLING. — The new spelling, adopted in all German schools since 1880, is used in this method. In reality it differs but little from the old. Its characteristics are as follows : 1. The capital (as well as small) ' modified vowels ' take the Umlaut sign above instead of after them. Thus : A, a; O, 6; tj, u; Au, au; instead of Ae, ae; Oe, oe; Ue, ue; Aeu, aeu, as formerly. 2. The termination nisz is now spelt nis. 3. The terminations thuni, thiim, are now spelt turn, tiim. 4. The letter h is dropped after t at the end of words ; also, at the beginning of words when the t is followed by a vowel which is un- mistakably long. Thus, we now write Mut, rot, Tier, Teil, and no longer Muth, roth, Thier, Theil. 5. The d is dropped from Brodt, Erndte, gescheidt, Schwerdt, now spelt Brot, Ernte, gescheit, Schwert. Ten words having formerly aa, ee, oo, drop one of the vowels. Thus : Hcrde, Los, etc., and no longer Heerde, Loos, etc. 6. The infinitive ending iren is changed into ieren. TABLE OF SIGNS, As taken from Webster and used in this Book. Notp:. — Tlie table is a key to the signs used througliout tlie book; and the pupil will do well to refer to it constantly until mastered. A good plan is also to copy it off on a piece of stiff paper or card-board, so as to have it always before one for ready reference. SIGNS. a = a in father. a = a in what. a = a in ale. a = a in share. 6 = e in spell. e = the first e in eve. i = « in pin. o = in note. 6 = (closer than) o in not oo = 00 in noon. &o = 00 in good. ' = the nearly silent e in heaven. See page xvi. THE MODIFIED VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWELS REPRESENTED. Long sound of a. Soo p. xv. Short sound of a. See p. xvi. First long sound of e. See p. xvi. Second long sound of e. See p. xvi. Short sound of e. See p. xvi. Long sound of i. Short sound of i. Long sound of o. Short sound of o. Long sound of u. Short sound of u. See p. xvi. See p. xvi. See p. xvi. See p. xvi. See p. xvi. See p. xvi. Ex. : Oben. Pron. : o^-b'n. a = a in air. e = e in spell. A = uiu urge, but much deeper. See p. xvii. u = ?t in hut. u. = u in gude. u=u in duenna. VOTVELS. Long sound of a. See p. xvii. Short sound of a. Long sound of 6. Short sound of o. Long sound of ii. Short sound of ii. See p. xvii. See p. xvii. See p. xvii. See p. xvii. See p. xvii. DIPHTHONGS. Sound of au. See p. Sound of ai and ei. Sound of au and eu. THE a-db =: ou in house. \ = i in pine. 6-i = oy in hoy. THE CONSONANTS, cZi = soft sound of eh. See p. xix. hh = hard sound of cli. See p. xix, ii =: ng in singer. See p. xx. xvii. See p. xvii. See p. xvii. PRONUNCIATION. In German, pronunciation and spelling correspond much more closely with each other than is the case in English. As a general rule, each word is pronounced exactly as it is written, there being no silent letters except sometimes li.* Notwithstanding these facts, a thoroughly elaborated system of figured pronunciation is given throughout this book for the following reasons : It will be of material help to those who have to study without a teacher. It will be of help even to those who study under a teacher, as it will recall to them sounds and directions given him which otherwise will fre- quently escape the memory. Finally, it accurately indicates where the accent or accents on any new word may be, — this actually being a most important element of pronunciation. In the Pronunciation and Table of Signs, English values, as taken from Webster, are used to represent equivalent German sounds. This, if properly done, furnishes a perfectly clear and well-nigh absolute criterion for the learner. THE VOWELS. Vowels may be long or short in quantity, while their quality (or shade of sound) is either absolutely or nearly the same. 1. A vowel, when double or followed by the letter h, is always long. Ex.: Haar (har), hair; Kuh (koo), cow. 2. A vowel when followed by a double consonant (as tntn, 8S, W, etc.) is always short. Thus: Kamm (k^m), comb ; lessen (la^-s'n), to let; Bett (b6t), bed, etc. o. A vowel followed by two consonants m the saine syllable is generally short. Ex. : Bald (bait), soon; Kentnis, knowledge. Sounds of A. Long sound = a in father. Sign : a. Examples: \atei, father ; Haar, hair; Bahn, road. Short sound = « in ivhat. Sign : g,. Examples: hat, has; Hand, hand; Mann, man * However, some simple sounds are represented by a combination of two or tliree letters, as sch (pron. : sh), ch, ie (pron. : e), etc. XV XVI PRONUNCIATION. Sounds of E. LONG SOUNDS. First long sound = a in ale. Sign : a. Examples: 'Rede, speech ; Schnee, snow ; Ueh, deer. Second long sound = a in share* Sign : a. Examples: Leder, leather ; Pferd, horse. SHORT SOUNDS. First short sound = 6" in spell.* Sign : 6. Examples: T>enu,for; Belt, bed; Kecke, hedge. Second short sounds the last e in heaven. Sign : '• Ex. : haben (pron. : lia^-b'n), to have; Klager (kld^-g'r), plaintiff. Sounds of I (3, i).t Long sound = the first e in eve. Sign : e. Examples: Mir, to me; lieben, to love ; ihm, to him. Short sound = i in pin. Sign : i. § Ex. : Lippe, lip ; List, deceit. Note 1. — An i followed by e or h is long, the e (or, h) being entirely silent. Thus ; Astronomie, a-stro-no-me'. Exception: le in words of foreign origin, liowever, is pronounced i-g (or, yg). Thus : Faniilic, fa-me'-li-e. Note 2. — Y (Gothic letter, ^), when a vowel, is sounded Hke i. Thus : Syrup (se-roop), Myrte (mir-te). For consonantal sound, see page xx. Sounds of O. Long sound = o in note. Sign : o. Examples: 'H.o\Qn, to fetch ; Loh, praise; Mond, moon. Short sound = in not (but somewhat closer'). \\ Sign : 6. Examples: dort, there ; Gold (g61t), gold. Sounds of U. Long sound = n in rule. Sign : oo. Examples: Schi*le, school; Buch, book. Short sound = ii in _p?(//. Sign: c)b. Ex.: Schu]d, fauUs. * Only, slightly more open. — f Notice that capital I and (•a))itnl J are the same letter in Gotliic print (3). But small i = t, and ^mull j = !• {J Note, however, »liat tlie German sliort i, wliile havinu [\\v quajititu or length of i in ;>///, lias the pure qiiaUty of ihe lirst c in aw II It is really a sound between that of in not and in other. PRONUNCIATION. XVll MODIFIED VOWELS. The letter e following a, o, or u, modifies the sound of these three letters. In modern German, this e is represented by a double sign (") above the vowel modified. Thus: A, a; O, 6; tJ, ii (instead of Ae, ae, etc.). Sounds of A. Long sound = ain air. Sign: ^. Ex.: Thranen (tr^'^-n^u), tears. Short sound = e in spe//. Sign: e. Ex.: Ldchelxi, smile. Sounds of 6. Long sound = u in ur-ge, but much deeper. Sign : u. This sound really does not exist in English. To produce it, sound the u in urge, only deeper, that is to say, not as a throat, but as a profound chest tone. The lips are also slightly contracted, and held much closer. Ex. : schon (shun), beautiful; m gen, may. Short sound = It in hut. Sign : u. Ex. : Worter, words. Sounds of ij. This sound has no equivalent in English, although the u in the Scotch word gude approximates it somewhat. It is really the same sound as that of the French u. To produce it, con- tract tightly (but do not protrude the lips as if about to whistle), then, with the lips firmly held so, attempt to give the sound of ee in meet, but quickly. It may be long or short: Long Sound. — Sign, ii. Ex.: mUde, tired; Schiller^ scholars. Short Sound. — Sign, u, Ex.: Gliickf happiness; Hiitte, hut. THE DIPHTHONGS. Diphthongs are combinations of two vowels. Thus : Sound of ai and ei = i in pine. Sign : i. Examples: Mai (pron. : mi), 3Iay ; Frei,free. Sound of au = oii in house. Sign : a-db. Example: Haws (pron.: lia-dbs), house. Sound of au and eu = oy in hoy. Sign : 6-i. Ex.: Hai^ser (pron. : lio-i^-z'r), houses; Fewer (pron. : f6-i^- 'r), fire. XVlll PRONUNCIATION. THE CONSONANTS. Consonants in German are sounded as in English, with the followKjg exceptions : B at the end of words (or preceding a final consonant) =p;* Lob, praise; pron. : lop. Geliebt, beloved ; pron. : g-e-lepf. C before e, i, a, y, or o = ts. Ex. : Cylinder, Cacilie. Pron. : tse-lin^'-d'r, tsd-tse^-li-6. Note. — Elsewhere c, as in English = A;. Thus: Coiito, account; Cousin, cousin. Ch is pronounced either with a hard or a soft sound. Neither has any equivalent in English. Soft Sound of ch. — Sign, ch. To produce the soft sound, pronounce the y in yes, but aspirate it. Or, let the mouth be slightly open, while the tongue is flattened and its sides pressed against the upper teeth. Then try to pronounce the letter c, hut forcibly, while the tongue is firmly held in position. Ex. : liicht, light ; welche, which ; Bucher, books, etc. Note. — Ch is soft everywhere except after the vowels a, o, and M.f Hard Sound of ch. — Sign, kh. To produce it, open the mouth somewhat widely and make an effort as if to clear the throat, while contracting slightly the aperture of the throat and larynx. As already seen, ch is hard after a, o, and u. Ex. : Dacfe (d^feTi,), roof; ^och (do/cfe), yet; Tuch {tobkh), cloth. K Sound of ch. — Sign, k, Ch, when followed by s (also, generally at the beginning of words) = k. Ex. : Wac/isen (v^lC-s'n), to watch. C/tristus (kris^'-tdbs). Note. — When the s, following ch, is really the first letter of a suffix, ch is no longer pronounced like k, but has the ch or hh sound. Thus : Wac/i-sam, watchful. Pron.: vafcli'-sain; not, vak'-sam, because sam is not an original part of the word, but a suffice, asful is in English. 1 One of the two vowels may be a modified vowel. Ex. : au. * The sound of linal b in German is perhaps a little heavier than the absolutely flat sound of p in English, but very slightly so. t After au and eu, ch is soft, although following u, because the u is then a part of the diphthong, and no longer an independent letter. Thus: Gebrauche, customs; leuchten, ff> ,<>hi.ne. Pron.: gS-br5-i'- ch^, loAch'-Vn. ^ PRONUNCIATION. XIX D at the end of a word = <. Ex. : MileZ, mild. Pron. : milt. At the end of a syllable, followed by a consonant, d has also the sound of t. Ex. : BilcZlich, typical. Pron. : \yiW-\\ch, G at the beginning of words and syllables = (7 in get. Ex.: 6rretchen; Creist, spinY. Pron.: grat^-c/t'n, gist. At the end of words or syllables, or when just preceding a final consonant, g has either the soft or the hard sound of ch. Sign, ch and kh. Ex. : Tagr {tUTch), day; Tagrlich {t^ch^-Wch), daily ; Magrd (mafe/it), girl; erregrt (6r-racM^), excited. H at the end or in the middle of a syllable is silent, and merely lengthens the preceding vowel. Ex. : We/i- (va), pain. After t, h is also silent. Ex. : TJ^un, to do. Pron. : toon. Note. — Elsewhere, li is always aspirated. Thus : Hwt (hoot), hat. 3, as a consonant (latin letter, f) = y m yet. Ex. : «7a, yes. Ng = ng in singer, but not in finger. Sign : n. Example : Singren, to sing. Pron. : zm''-'n. N before k = n^ in singer, but not quite as strong and distinct as ng. Sign : also, n. Example : Danfe (dank). Note. — However, when n and g (or k) belong to the different syl- lables, each is pronounced separately. Ex. : Hinflreben, to give away. R is more hard and gutteral than in English. Qu = A;w. Ex.: Quelle (kw6M6). S (sharp sound). — Sign, s. S has the sound of s in sad when before a consonant, at the end of a syllable, or when double. Ex.: Leisten, to afford; Haus, house; beissen, to bite. S (soft sound). — Sign, z. Before a vowel, at the beginning of words ; also, in the middle of words when preceded by m, n, If or r, s = z. Ex.: Sehen (za^-'n), Gesang (gr6-zan0, Felsen (ffeF-z'n). Sch = sh in short. Ex. : Fisch (fish), fish. St and sp {beginning a word or syllable) are pronounced differently in various parts of Germany. The most current pronunciation is that of sht, shp, the h sound being somewhat lighter than it would be in English. The other propunciation XX PRONUNCIATION. is purely that of st and sp in English. The signs sht and sfep are used in this book to represent both pronunciations. Ex.: /S» To which hotel wishes she to go? 11 Whither wishes he to travel when he Berlin leaves? 12 Whither wishes your Mr. father-in-law to travel when he Beilin leaves? — * For the use of zu, see page 11, note t- 10 DIE ANKUNFT. Er will direkt iiach Venedig reisen. Warum will er nicht mit uiis gehen? Warum will er nicht erst mit uns nach der* Schweiz gehen ?t Note. — Study the "Table of Signs," 9. Er wilrde sehr gem ^ mitg^ehen. f Er wiirde sehr gern erst mit uns nach der Schweiz jgehen.* Aber er hat Geschafte.^ Aber er hat Geschiifte in Italien. Aber er hat Geschafte in Venedig, Florenz und Rom. NOTES. 1 The German adverb gern is used idiomatically with the force of the English verb to like. Tims: Er wiirde, he would; Er wtirde gern, he would like; Er wiirde sehr gern, he would very much like. 2 Geschaft= business. In i^w special phrase, the phiral. Geschafte (lit. : businesses) is used. * Dem (masculine and neuter form for to the), and der (feminine form for to the. See page 459) are used instead of der, das (masc. and neut. for the), and die (fern, for the), after certain prepositions, as: nach {after, or to), mit {with) von, from, etc. Ex.: To the waiting- room = nach dem WartesaaL. THE ARRIVAL. 11 Ar vil di-rekt' n'dkh fe- na'dich , ya-room vil ar nicht mit d6ns ga'-'n? arst mit 56ns nakh d'x stivits' ? He wants to go straight to Venice.^ Why does he not want to go with us ? 2 Why does he not want to go first to Switzerland* with us ? page 459. 9. Ar vur''-d6 zar gfern niit^-g-a'-'n. Ar vur'-de zar gem arst mit dons nakh d'r slivits' . A.'-b'r ar hat ge-shef^'-te. in i-ta'-li-en. in ie-na'-dic7i, flo- rents' 66nt rom . He would like very much^ to go (along). He would very much like to go first to Switzerland with us.** But he has business.* But he has business in Italy. But he has business • in Venice, Florence, and Rome. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 He will directly to Venice travel. 2 Why will he not with us go? 8 Why will he not first with us to the Switzerland go? * He would very willingly with-go. 5 He would very willingly first with us to the Switzerland go. 6 Businesses. t Zu is used before an infinitive after all verbs except the auxiliaries (wollen, to will, konnen, to he able, etc.), and other verbs noted later on. (See page 200.) Ex. : I want to qo = ith. wiinsche (lit. : wish) zu gehea; or: ich will (lit.: will) gehen (no zu, because will is part of the auxiliary wollen). 12 DIE ANKUNFT. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Die* Eisenbahn (de i^-z'n-ban). The railway. Der * Bahnhof (dar ban'-liof '), The depot. Die* Station (s7ita-tsi-on'), The station. Der Stations-Vorsteher (for'-s7jta'-'r), The station-master. Das Billetbureau (bil-yet'-bii-ra'), ) ^, ,. , , ^ _ I The ticket-office. Die Billetausgabe( — ^-oos-ga'-be), ) Das Gepackbureau (ge-pek' — ), The baggage-room. Der Gepackschein (ge-pek'-sMn' ) , The baggage-check. Das Ubergewicht (u'-b'r-ge-vicTif), The overweight. Der Schaff'ner (shaf'-n'r), The conductor. Der Schnellzug (sh.nel'-tsooA;7i')> The express-train. Der BUtzzug (blits'-tsoo7^7i')> The Hghtning express. Der Personenzug (per-zo'-nen — ), The accommodation train. Der erste Zug (ar'-ste tsoo'hh'), The first train. Der Eisenbahnwagen (i'-z'n-ban'- va'-g'n), The railway-carriage. Der Schlafwagen (sblaf'-va'-g'n), The sleeping-car. Die Pferde -Eisenbahn (pfgLi-'-de — ),f The horse-cars (tramway). * The German nouns given in the vocabularies will always be ac- companied by their article, in order to indicate their gender. They should not he memorized ivHhout this article. The German article has three forms for the singular : Der, before masculine nouns ; Die, before femi- nine nouns ; Das, before neuter nouns. In the plural, the German article has one form only in the nominative: Die, for all genders. t Lit. : The horse-railroad. THE ARRIVAL. 13 Ine following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOCABULARY. Die * Stadte (s^t6^-t6), 111 Berlin (in ber-len'), In Wien (ven), In Paris (pa-res'), In London (lon'-don), In Philadelphia (fi-la-del'-fi-a), In Neu Orleans (no-i 6r-la-an'),^ Die Lander (leii^-d'r). In Deutschland (do-itsh'-lanf), In England (en'-lanf), In Schottland (sti6t'-lant'), In Irland (ir'-lanf), In Frankreich (frank'-rioTi'), In Ostreich (ic Schweiz (de Shvits). 8 For pronunciation of an, see page xv. 14 DIE ANKUNFT. The German " Conversations" are intended for oral recitation in the class-room. (For Self-Study, see Directions, before Part I,) CONVERSATIONS. l.-DIE ABREISE. Entschuldigen Sie/ mein Herr; konnen Sie^ mir vielleicht ^ sagen, wo der Potsdamer Bahnhof ist ? — Ja, gnadige Frau> Er^ ist dort, gerade vor Ihnen. — Danke schoii.^ Gepiicktrager, konnen Sie mir zeigen/ wo das Ge- piickbureau ist? — Es ist dort, gnadige Frau, links.^ — Ich will mein Gepack aufgeben.^ Wie viele Stiicke haben Sie ? ^^ — Ich babe drei Stiicke." — Haben Sie Ihr Billet?— Nein, noch nicht.i^ — Dann^^ konnen Sie Ihr Gepack nicht aufgeben. Konnen Sie mir sagen, an welchem Schalter^* man^^ Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Ent-shd6r-di-gen ze, I beg your pardon. 2 Ku'-n5n ze (lit: can you), will you.— » Fi-licM', perhaps, (makes the question more polite). — ■* Gna'-di-ge fra-do, madam. Lit. : gracious lady. * Er (lit.: he) referring to der Bahnhof, the station. Bahnhof being a masculine noun, the pronoun must also be masculine, to agree with it in gender. Hence we say er (he), and not es (it). See page 484, par. 1. — 6 Dan'-ke shCin, I thank you. 7 Tsi'-g'n, show. — s Links, left side. — ^ A-oof'-ga^-b'n, to check. — 10 Ve fe'-lg sMi*'-ke ha'-b'n ze? How many pieces have you? — 11 Ic/i ha'-bg dri s/itle'-ke, I have three pieces. 12 NoJfeJi, nielit, not yet. — i3 Dan, then ; in that case. " Shal'-t'r, wicket, ticket-office. ^ Man nimmt (man nimt), one takes, people take. THE ARRIVAL. 15 die Billette ^ nimmt ? — Nach Potsdam, gnadige Frau ? Links. — 1st dies hier^ der Schalter nach Potsdam? — Ja, gnadige Frau. Links. — Wollen Sie mir ein Billet geben. — Welch e Klasse ? ^ — Ein Billet erster Klasse.* Or^ simply, Eins erster, bitte. Hier ist mein Billet, und dort ist mein Gepack. — Hier ist Ihr Gepackschein. — Wie viel^ Ubergewicht habe ich? — Sie haben kein^ Ubergewicht. Sie haben 25 Kilo 7 frei. Was ist das ? ^ — Es ist das Signal zur Abfahrt.^ — Steigen Sie ein.^^ — Steigen Sie nicht in den Wagen da. Es ist ein Wagen zweiter Klasse.^^ Sie wollen nach Europa reisen, nicht wahr?^^ — Ja. Ich will mit meinem Schwager,^* meiner Mutter, und meiner Schwester hinreisen.^^ — Wann wollen Sie abreisen?^^ — Wir wollen mit dem Dampfer am ., Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Bil-yg'-te, plural of Billet.— 2 Des her, this, here! 3 Vel'-c/te kla'-se, which class?— ^ Ar'-st'r kla'-s5, first-class ticket. Lit. : a ticket of-fint class.— 5 Ve fel? how much? 6 Kin, no.— 7 Funf'-oont-tsvan'-tsieli ke'-15. One kilo is about two English pounds. — 8 What is that? 9 Ks ist das zin-nal' tsoor ap'-fart', it is the signal of departure. 10 S/iti'-g'n ze In', step (you) in (namely, into the carriage). 11 In tliat carriage. Lit. : In the wagon there. Den, accusative of der. — Tsvi'-t'r kla'-sS, of-second class. — 12 Ri'-z'n, traveling. 13 Nicltt var ? Do you not? Lit. : Not true? Is often used to turn an aflfirmative proposition into a question. 14 Shva'-g'r, brother-in-law.— i^ Shves'-t'r, sister; hm'-ri'-z'n, lit. : there to travel. — ^ Ap'-ri'-z'n, start, go ; lit, : away-go. 16 DIE ANKUNFT. Samstag fahren.^ — Wohin wiinschen Sie zuerst zu gehen? — Wir wolleii iiach Irland und England gehen, und von da nach Deutschland. Ich wiinsche meinen * Agenten in Berlin zu besuchen.^ — Wollen Sie dann nach Amerika zuriick^ kommen? — Nein, wir wollen nach Frankreich, Italien, Griechenland, Agypten, und von da vielleicht nach Asien gehen. — Was fiir eine schonef Reise!* — Nicht wahr? Nota — Study the Declension of Dieser, page 460. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Dam'-pf'r am zams'-taA;/i. fa'-r'a ; tlie Saturday boat. Lit. : the steamer on-the Saturday. Am, contraction of an dem, on the. Fahren, to ride, to go. 2 A-gen'-t»n Be-zoo'-fcli'n to visit, to see. 3 Tsoo-rii-k' ko'-m'n, return. Lit. : hack come. 4 Vas fiir i'-ne shu'-ne ri'-ze! What a beautiful trip! Lit.: What for a heautifxd trip ! *■ Meineti-, accusative {masculine) form of mein. In German, ad- jectives agree in gender and number with their noun. Here, tlie adjective mein is made accusative, because its noun Agenten. {nomi- native : Agent), being the direct object of the verb (zu besuchen), is in the accusative. I £ine, schdne, feminine {nominative) forms of ein, schon. THE ARRIVAL. 17 The English " Exercises " should he translated and written into Ger- man, hut also treated conversationally in the class-room. {For Self -Study, see Directions, he/ore Part I,) EXERCISES. l. — THE BAGGAGE* What do you want to do ? ^ — Will you have your baggage carried ?2 — Yes, (please) carry my baggage^ to the* baggage-room. I want to go there to have my heavy baggage checked.^ 2.- THE ARRIVAL. What does he want to do when he gets to Berlin ? ^ — He wants to go straight to the bank. — After that, he wants to go to the hotel.^ — To-morrow,^ he wants to take a walk about the city.^ Aids to Translation. 1 Lit. : What want (or rather will) you to-do? 2 Lit. : Will you your baggage (Ihr Handgepack) carry let? Notice that Ihr {your), and Sie when meaning you, begin with a capital. « Lit. : Yes, carry you (tragen Sie). — '» Nach dem. 5 I wish there (Ich will dorthin) to-go in-order-to (um) my heavy baggage up-to-g\vc (mein schweres Gepack aufzugeben). 6 Lit. : What wisbes he to do when lie in Berlin arrives (wenn er in Berlin ankommt). ^ Lit. : After that (darauf) wishes he to-the hotel to go. 8 Morgen. — » Lit.: He wants a walk about the city to make, (einen Spaziergang in der Stadt zu machen). Das Gepack. Remember that the first letter of German nouns is always written as a capital. Thus, Gepack, Hand; and not, ge- pack, hand. 18 DIE ANKUNFT. 3.— rO TAKE A CAB. Cabman!^ Take me^ to the^ depot. — All right. Get into the carriage,* madam. — I want to catch the two o'clock train.^ — I can get there.^ — Very well, drive fast. * 4:. -IN THE DEPOT. At what time does the Potsdam train start?" — The Potsdam train starts at two o'clock,^ madam. — Please ^ tell me ^^ where the tickets are taken ? " — The tickets are taken ^^ at the second wicket ^^ (to the) right.^* — Thank (you).^^ — A first-class ticket, please. How much is it?^^ — Seven marks f — All aboard for Potsdam! 17 5. — SAME SUBJECT. Do you speak German ?i^ — I speak it a little.^^ — Aids to Translation. 1 Kutscher (koot'-sh'r). 2 Fahren Sie mich (fa'-r'n ze inic^). — 3 Nach dem. * Steigen Sie ein; lit.: Mount you in; from einsteigen (in'-sMi''- g'n), to luouut into, to get in (a carriage). 5 Lit. : T wish tlie train at two o'clock to catch. — ^ Lit. : T can there arrive (liinkommen). — ' Uin wie viel Uhr geht der Zug nach Potsdam ab? Lit. : At how much o'clock goes the train to PotMhim offf 8 Lit. : The train to Potsdam goes at two o'clock (um zwei Uhr) off. » Bitte.— 1" Sagen Sie mir. Lit. : Say ye to-u\e. n Lit. : Where one the tickets takes, wo man nimmt. 12 Lit. : One takes the tickets. — i^ An ^er zweiten Billetausgabe. 1* Rechts (rgcTits). — is Danke. — i6 Wie viel macht es (ve fel makhV es) ? r>it. — makes it ? — ^^ Einsteigen nacli Potsdam ! 18 Sprechen Sie deutsch (s/tprg'-c/i*n ze do-itsh')? Lit. : Speak yon German?— i9 Ich spreche es ein wenig (Ic/i shpre'-ehe Ss in va'-nic/t). — • Gut! Gehen Sie schnell (goot ! ga'-'n ze shneF). t Sieben Mark (ze'-b'n mark). THE ARRIVAL. 19 Well, will you come^ with me^ to the^ baggage- room?^ I want to have my baggage checked for Leipsic* I can read German,^ but I cannot speak it.6 What do you wish, gentlemen ? * — My friend wants to have his baggage checked for LeipsicJ — Please give^ me^ your ^^ ticket. — Here.^^ — Here is your^^ baggage-check, sir. You have for two marks (worth) of overweight.^^ Where do you want to go ? — I want to go to the waiting-room. Will you please tell me where the waiting-room is ?-- Straight before you, sir. — Many thanks. What do you want to do ? — I want to have my baggage carried to the waiting-room. Aids to Translation. 1 Lit.: Will yon then (dann) with me a//er «o-. 14, 9th line.— " Hier (her). — 12 See p. 15, 7th line. 13 Sie haben fiir zwei Mark Ubergewicht. * Meine Herren (mi'-nS hg'-r*ii). Lit. : my musters ; my sirs. 20 DIE ANKUNFT. ITie following alphabet to be learned by heart. GERMAN ALPHABET. LETTERS. NAMES. LETTERS. NAMES. 3t, a =:A,a. a.i %n = N, n. en. 33,0 = B,b. ba. 0,0 = 0,0. 0.2 e,c = C, c. tsa. %P = P, p. pa. ^, b = D, d. da. D, q = Q,q. koo ©, e = E, e. a. ^,r = R,r. er. 5,f = F,f. ef. ©, f, ^5 3=S, S. es. @,g = G,g. ga. ^,t = T,t. ta. §,^ = H h. lia. U, u = U, u. oo. 3,i e. 33, t) = V,v. fa-dt>. 3 J = J,j. y6t. 2B, it) r=W, W. va. SI,! :=K, k. ka. 3E,i' = X, X. iks. S,I = L,L el. ?),V = Y,y. ipsilon< 3Jl, m = M, m. em. 8,S = Z,z. tset. DISTINGUISH BETWEEN; ^ and 33 (B and V). ^ and D (D and 0). g and e (C and E). t and ^Ji (K and R). 3JJ and m (M and W). @ and 6 (G and S). m and ^ (N and R). D and Q (O and Q). h and b (b and d). f and f (f and s). t) and I) (v and y). r and r (r and x). 1 51 (a), however, has tivo sounds, a and a. 2 © (5) lias ten, unb t)on ba t)ielleid)t wad} 2lfien ge^eu. — 3Ba^ fiir eine fc^one D^ieif e ! — mid}i ma^r? 1 For the sound of u, see page xiv. 2 For the sound of ii, see page xiv. * For the sound of ch and fc/t, see page xiv. 22 DIE ANKUNFT. SECOND READING EXERCISE. Read aloud the following: ©in grember, ber ba^ beutfc^e @e(b fe^r gut ^u !ennen A stranger, who the German money very well to know glcxubte, fam einft nad} Berlin. 3((g er ben 33a^nf)of DerUefe, thought, came once to Berlin. When he the depot left, fragte er ben ^utfc^er, tme t)te( er bafiir tjerlange, i^n unb asked he the cabman how much he for -it wanted, him and fein ©epacf nad) bem ^otet gu faf)ren. „5^^f ^^^^ fi^^D^S his baggage to the hotel to drive. " Five and seventy ^fennige/'^ fagte ber Tlann, „gunf unb fieO^ig ^fen= pfennige," said the man. "Five and seventy pfen- nige!" rief ber g^embe, ,,ba§ ift ^u t)ie(. 3d; (affe mid; nige!" cried the stranger, "that is too much. I let myself nid)t fo iiberDorteilen. 3<^ ^^i^ 3(;nen eine Tlaxt^ <^chm, not so deceive. I will to-you one mark give, unb nid)t einen ^^fennig me^r." „ @ut/' fagte ber ^utfc^er, and not one cent more." "Well," said the cabman, ,,tt)mn 6ie mir ni(f)t me^r geben iDotten, fo n)i(l id; eine "if you to-me not more give will, so will I one SJiar! ne^men." mark take." PRONTTNCIATION OF THE PBECEDINa EXEMCISE. In frem'-d'r dSr das do-it'-she gelt zar goot tsoo ke'- nen gla-66p'-te kam inst nakh ber-len'. Als ar dan ban'-hof fer-les^ tvakh'-te ar dan koot'-sh'r ve fel ar da-fur' fer-lafi'-e en obnt zin ge-pek' nakh dam ho- tel' tsoo fa'-r'n. Filni 66nt zep'-tsicTt pfe'-ni-ge zakh'- te dar man ref d§Lr frem'-de das ist tsoo fel! Ych la'-se micTi nicTit zo u'-b'r-for'-ti-l'n. Ich vil e'-nen i'-ne mark g5'-b'n d6nt nicht i'-nen pfe'-nic/i mar. Goot, za7^7i'-te dar kdbt'-sh'r ven 1 A pfennig is the hundredth part of a mark. — 2 i mark = 25 cts. Part I. THE ARRIVAL, DIE ANKUKFT. SECTION II. 1. IN AND OUT OF THE CUSTOM-HOUSE. 2. ABOUT HAVING A DRESS MADE. 3. THE GERMAN CONSTRUCTION. 4. MAKING PURCHASES ; CLOTHING. 5. TO HAVE A THING MADE OR DONE. 6. A HOUSE FURNISHED : A HAT TRIMMED. 7. GOING TO THE DENTIST'S. 8. TO HAVE LINEN LAUNDERED. 9. A STRANGER IN BERLIN. 10. THE WRITING ALPHABET. '24 DIE ANKUNFT. ►■ n. GERMAN. 1. Ich will mir erst das Gepiick geben las- sen.^ Ach ja. Wir iniissen unser Gepack durchsehen lassen. Nein. Wir haben es schon in Bremen durchsehen lassen. Ja, ich weiss, aber ich glaubte man^ wiirde es hier nochmals durchsehen. Nein. Einmal ist genug. 2. In der That, ich hatte in Bremen Zoll zu zalilen. Zuerst glaubte ich, die Zollbeamten wiirden keinen Zoll von Ilinen verlangen. Oho ! Diese Burschen sind scharf dahinterher. Darauf konnen Sie sich verlassen. NOTES. 1 As already seen, lassen is often combined with another verb. Thus : (sich) geben lassen, to get [lit. : to-one s self [anything) give let] ; warten lassen, to keep waiting (lit. : to-make wait) ; holen lassen, to send for {anything or anybody), sehen lassen, le (or even for they, we, etc., when taken in a general sense). The active voice is thus often employed, with man as the subject, instead of the passive voice. THE ARRIVAL. 25 II. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. Ich vil mer arst das §"6- p6k^ g-a^-b'n . A.hh ya.'. Ver inw'-s'n don'-z'r ge-pek' d66rc7i'-za'- 'n la'-s'n. Nin. Ver ha'-b'n es slion in Bra'-men . Ya, Ich vis, a'-b'r Ich dakh'-te, man vilr'-de es her nokh'-mals' dobrch'-za'-n. Nin. In'-mal' ist ge- n66kh.' 2. In-d'r tat^, ich ha'-t6 in Bra^-m6n ts6r tsob tsa^- I'n. Tsoo-arst' gla-obp'-te ich de tsol'-be-am'^'n vur^-d'n ki'-nen tsol fon e'-nen fer- lan'-'n. O-ho' ! De'-ze boor'-sh'n zint sharf da'-liin'-t'r-har'. Da'-ra-oof ku'-nen ze zicTi fer-la'^'n. I want first to get the baggagre.i Why, yes. We must have our baggage examined. '^ No. We have ah-eady had it examined in Bremen.^ Yes, I know. But I thought they would examine it here again.* No. Once is enough. In fact, I (lid have to pay duty in Bremen.^ At first, I thought the custom- house officers would not ask any duty from you.* Oh ! These fellows keep their eyes open."^ You may de- pend upon that.* LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 I will to-me first the baggage give let. 2 We must our baggage examine let. * We have it already in Bremen examine let. * Man (i. you are. feie smd. ze zint. J sie sind. ze zint. they are. NOTES. 1 See page 32, note 3. * Notice the frequent use of dass, in German, when it is omitted in English. 8 The familiar form with Du, thou, is used in Germany among rela- tives and intimate friends. Formerly, it was very generally used in speaking to servants; but now this is going more and more out of fashion. — ^ Or, Es ist. It is. THE AERIVAL. 35 Ze hat mer ges'-tern ge- zakhV, das ze lets'-tes yar tsoo era ge-gan-'n ist. Ich vis virk'-licTi nicJit, va-roora' ze nicTit ve'-d'r tsoo em ga'-'n vil. Fe'-licht denkt ze tsoo to-i'-er ist. nic7itge'-na-o6' za'-g'n. She told me yesterday ^ that she went to him last year.^ 1 really do n't know ^ why she does not want to go to him again.^ Perhaps she thinks he is too dear.^ I can't exactly tell you.* 13. Bin ich? hlnich. bist du ? bist doo. ist er (or sie) ? ^ ist ar (or ze). sind wir? zintver. seid ihr ? zit er. sind Sie ? zint ze. sind sie zint ze. Am I? art thou ? is he (or she) are we ? are you ? are they? LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 She has to-me yesterday said. 2 That she last year to him gone is. 3 I know really not. * Why she not again to him go will. 5 Perhaps thinks she that he too dear is. 6 I can it to you not exactly say. ^ Or, Istes? Isitf 36 DIE ANKUNFT. THE GERMAl^i^ COIS^STRUCTION. I.-NON-INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. IN A PRINCIPAL CLAUSE: 1. If the verb, in a principal clause,l is in a simple tense,* the order is similar to the English. Ex. : Er baut ein Haus. — He builds a house. Er verlasst Berlin. — He leaves Berlin. 2. If the verb, in a principal clause, is in a compound tense,f the past participle (or, the infinitive) is separated from the auxiliary and placed at the end of the clause. Thus : Eng. : He has built a house. — Ger. : He has a house built. Er hat ein Haus gehaut. Eng. : He will build a house. — Ger. : He ivlll a house build. Er wird ein Haus bauen. Eng. : He would leave Berlin. — Ger. : He would Berlin leave. Er wiirde Berlin verlassen, IN A DEPENDENT CLAUSE: 1. If the verb, in a dependent clause, is in a simple tense, it is placed at the end of the clause. Ex. : Eng. : He says he is building a house. — Ger, : He says that ^ he a house builds. Er sagt, doss ^ er ein Haus baut. 1 For construction when dass is omitted, see page 56, note 1. * Simple tenses are those which are simply fornied of one word, containing the root of the verb and a termination. Ex. : Bauen, Ich baue^ Er bau# {Root: bau. Terminations : en, e, *). t Compound tenses are those made up of an auxiliary (liahen, sein, -werden, etc.), and the past participle {or infinitive) of any verb. Thus : Ich Jiabe gehaut, Er ist gegangeny Sie wird. gehen, etc. {Auxiliaries: Imhe, ist, tvird; past jmrt. : gehaut, gegatigen^ infinitive: gelien). t A principal clause is one to which other clauses are united by means of such words as dass, oh {whether), uyer, ivaSf tvelcher {which), uyie, ivann, tvo, etc. A dependent clause is one whicli is united to anotlier by one of these words. Thus : Sie hat mir gesagt, dass sie eiu Haus bauen wurde, She told me {that) she would build a house. Principal clause: Sie hat mir gesagt. Dependent clause : Dass Bie ein Haus bauen wiirde. (Lit. : That she a house build woxdd..\ THE ARRIVAL. 37 2. If the verb, in a dependent clause, is in a compound tense, both parts of the verb come at the end of the clause, hut in reversed order. Ex. : Eng. : He says he has built a house. Ger. : He says that he a house built has. " Er sagt, dcr= fd;iebenen ^erioben feine^ ;^eben§. §ier lebrt ibn bie 9Jiufe @ei'd;id)te; bort ge(;t er in bem ©arten feine» ^a(afte§ fpa^ieren, umgeben Don 2Sinbl;unben, feinen Sieb= Ungen; (;ier fpielt er auf ber glote; I;ier enbtid; entmirft er ben ^lan einer ai3cn 2 oBen baranf? ©rf imirbe l^on 9kv^oIeon al^ Oiege^^^eid^en nadj ^ari^ entfiifjrt, nad) ber Sd;Iad;t bei SSaterloo aber a>ieber nad) Berlin 5nnidi3ebraa;t. 1 From darstellen, to represent, a ^separable' verl). Stri(;tly : Whom places it there?— 2 Strictly: tlie Victory's-car. — * At first a literal translation of those exercises will be given on the page opposite. f Lit. ; he because Siegeswagen is masculine. Anglice, it. THE ARRIVAL. 47 For Self -Study, or preparation for the class-room, use the literal trans- lation below, until the German text on the opposite page is thoroughly understood. Then read the German aloud. READING. A FOREIGNER IN BERLIN. The Stranger. — Good morning. Where will we our rounds begin? The Guide. — We will under " the Linden " ^ begin. The Stranger. — This monument is grand! Whom represents it? The Guide. — It is to honor of-Frederick the Great erected. See {ye) * once. The main ^-figure over the pedestal shows to-you the king on horse (back).t In reliefs on the side-faces of-the pedestal, see you him in different periods of-his life. Here teaches him the Muse history ; there goes he in the garden of his palace to-walk, surrounded by his greyhounds, his favorites; here plays he on the flute; here, finally, designs he the plan of-a battle, after he at Kollin a defeat suffered had. — But what (for)* an imposing arch is there, at the other end of-the street? — That is the Brandenburger Gate. See-you the car-of- victory over upon (it) : he was by Napoleon as trophy to Paris carried off, after the battle at Waterloo however again to Berlin brought-back. 1 "Unter den Linden" (Lit.: "Under the linden-trees") is the name of the main street in Berlin.— 2 Strictly : Head. * Words in italics and bracketed are those not used in English, t Words bracketed but not in italics are those not used in German. 48 DIE ANKUNFT. Copy carefully the following German writing alphabet. "WRITING ALPHABET. — I. GERMAN. ENGLISH. GERMAN. ENGLISH je. /, - <3^. ./ a ^^^, (yui>^^/^^, ^sW^^, 1 Another, but older form of capital f is J/ . — 2 The form '^f is used at the enrf of words and syllables; the long form at the beginning. ' Notice that all nouns in German are written with a capital. — Pron.: Tsa-tse'-li-S, yafcli-t [chase), kam [comb), o'-him (uncle), ill, {oil), kwe'-le [source, spring), roo'-e [rest). 4 S/ipe'-Pr [player), oor [watch), fu'-g'l [bird), ksS'-res [Xeres), yakht [yacht), shlakht [battle), shios [castle). 50 DIE ANKUNFT. PMONUXCIATION OF THE FItECEI>ING BEADINa EXERCISE. Note. — The pupil should try to read the preceding German exer- cise as much as possible without the aid of the pronunciation given below. For this purpose, a study should be made of the chapter on Pronunciation, just preceding this Part First, Further on, no pronunciation will be given, so as to exercise the pupil in reading without aid. In fp6m'-d'r in B6r-len'. I>ar fr6ni''-d6. — Goo'-t'n mor'-g'n. Vo vo'-l'n ver don'- z're toor an'-fan'-'n ? Dar fii'-r^r. — Ver vo'-l'n don'-t'r dan L.in'-d'n an'- fan'-'n. D. fr. — De'-zes sTitant'-bilt ist gros'-ar'-ticTi. Van sTitelt es dar'? D. fii. — Es ist tsob a'-r'n Fre'-dricTis des Gro'-s'n er- ricTi'-tet. Za'-'n ze in-mal' ! De h.a-66pt'-fi-g6or' li'-b'r dam pi-e'-de-stal tslcht e'-nen dan k SECTION III. 1. IN AND OUT OF A CAB. 2. THE RAILWAY. 3. WALKING AND TRAVELING. 4. GOING TO MARKET. 5. ON THE WAY. 6. IN A RESTAURANT. 7. indisposition! 8. BERLIN : THE TIERGARTEN. 9. THE BEGINNING OF LETTERS. 52 DIE ANKUNFT. in. GEBMAN. Dann eine Droschke nehinen. Will Herr Vogel nicht eine Droschke nehmen? Natiirlich. Er verliess sogleich die Ankunftshalle, nachdem er ausgestiegen war.^ Er wollte uns eine Droschke holen, sogleich nach- dem wir hier angekommen waren. 2. Haben Sie ihn seitdem nicht geselien? Nein. Aber hier ist er. Nun, haben Sie uns eine Droschke besorgt? Jawohl. Sie wartet^ auf uns am Eingang. NOTES. 1 War, imperfect of sein, to he. Tntransitive verbs expressing mo- tion are conjugated with sein, when motion from one place to another is understood. They are conjugated with haben, when no cliange of place is meant. — Ausstelgen, lit, : to step out, is always conjugated with sein, because it always indicates moving out of the carriage into another place. For a similar reason ankommen, to arrive, is always conjugated with sein. Ausgestiegen, past participle of aussteigen. 2 Sie wartet = t7 is waiting, or it waits. — Sie, lit. : she, is used here because the pronoun refers to the feminine noun die Droschke. THE ARRIVAL. 53 ni. PRONUNCIATION. 1. Dan 1^-116 dr6sli^-k6 na^-m'n. Vil h.er F5'-g'l nicht V- ne ? Na-tur'-licTi. Ar fer-les' zo-glic7i' de an'- koonfts-lia'-le, naikh-dSiin' ar a-oos'-ge-s^te'-g'n var. — v61'-te dons i'-ne drosh.'- ke tLo'-l'n, zo-glic7t' an'-ge-ko'-m'n va'-r'n. TRANSLATION. And then take a cab. Does not Mr. Vogel want to take a cab?^ Why, certainly.2 He went out of the depot as soon as he got off (the train).^ He wanted to get us a cab just as soon as we got here.* 2. Ha^-b'n ze en zit-dam^' nicht g^-za^-'n? Nin, a'-b'r h.er ist' ar. Noon, h.a'-b'n ze dons i'- ne dr6sh.'-ke be-zorc7it' ? Ya-vol'. Ze var'-tet a-d6f d6ns am in'-gaii'. ^ Have you not seen him since ? No, but here he is. Well, did you get us a cab?^ Yes, I have.® It is waiting for us at the entrance."^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Will Mr. Vogel not a cab take? Eine, feminine form of ein; used here because its noun Droschke is feminine. — 2 Naturally. 3 He left at-once the hall-of-arrival after he out-stepped had (or, strictly : was). See opposite page, note 1. 4 He wanted a cab to fetcli, at-once after we arrived had (or, strictly : were). See opposite page, note 1. 6 Have you for-us a cab provided? 6 Yes- well ; yes indeed. ^ She waits for (upon) us at-Che entrance. Am, abbrev. for an dem. 54 DIE ANKUNFT. 3. 8 nad) bein ^tergarten gel;en. — ©d)du. ^a§ ift gerabe, tx)a§ tc^ it)uufd;te. a(nien nnb ^flan5en atler %xt dUd) miUv fiiblic^ ift ber joologifd^e ©arten. — 2(ber, fonnten wit fie nid)t an einem anbern 3::age fe(;en? §ente mdd)te id)^ (i^()ar(otten6urg feben. — @eti:)i6. SSir fonnen bie g(ora nnb 'i)m ^oologifdjen ©arten morgen ober iibermorgen fef)en. £utfd)er ! gal^ren ©ie \m§> nad) ©l;arlottenbnrg ! . . . . ,— 21!) ! 2)a finb Wix in ^barfottenbnrg. 2Bie ©ie U)iffen, ift biefeio fdibne ©tdbtc^en bie ©omuxerrefiben^ ineter reidicn Berliner. ©e(;en ©ie mal jenen ^alaft, lin!§. @r* ift^ t»on griebrid) bem ©rften erbant. 2lber ^nerft it)erben \v\x ba§ 9}?anfo(eum anfe^en, tt)eld;e§ ber ^onigin Snife ^n ®I;ren erridjtet ift. SSir miiffen bnrd) bie ©drten fa(;ren, urn babin ^n fomnten ©e(;en ©ie jenen gried)ifd;en ^em^cl gerabe t)or nn^? ®a§ ift e§. $ier xniji bie Diel gefeicrte ^bnigin Snife, bie 9}hitter be^ alten ^aifer^ 2Bin;elni, Don ber man fagt, bafe fie bie fd)i)nfte nnb ebelfte gilrftin i(;rer 3eit wax. 1 Anglice : I would like that very much. — ^ Anglice: stop the cab. 8 Sti-ictly : might I. — ■* Lit. : lie. See p. 40, n. f. — 6 Aug. : was. THE ARRIVAL. 69 — Yes, that might I luillingly} Make {ye) f the cab stop.^ — We will ourselves at this table sit. Waiter, two bottles (of) * soda-lemonade ! What (/or)t beautiful music! How much indeed the Germans {the)-t music love! And how many people here are ! Especially, very many officers. — Not more as usual. You must not forget that in Berlin much soldiery is. — That is evident. What {for) large fine people they are! — Now, go we to the collection-of-flowers past, one of the very-prettiest winter-gardens of-Europe with magnificent palm-trees and plants of-all sort. Still further southward is the Zoological Garden. — But could we them not some other day see ? To- day, wished^ I to-see Charlottenburg. — Certainly. We can the flowers and the Zoological Garden to-morrow or day-after to-morrow see. Cab! Take us to Charlottenburg — Ah ! there are we in Charlottenburg. As you know, is this pretty little-town the summer-residence of many rich Berliners. (On the) left see that palace. It is^ built by Frederick I. But first will we the mausoleum look-at which to (the) honor of-the Queen Louisa built isf' We must through the gardens go to get there Do you see that Greek temple just ahead of us? That is it. Here rests the much cele- brated Queen Louisa, the mother of-the old Emperor William, of whom they say that she the most beautiful and noblest princess of-her time was. * Words in brackets, but not italicized, are not used in German. t Words in brackets and italized are used in Ger. but not in Eng. 70 DIE ANKUNFT. Memorize, some or all of the German forms of letter-beginning N. B. — I'hese should be written in German letters. Having" witnessed, so often, the embarrassment and annoy- books of the manner in which to begin a letter, the author has mation. Berlin, ben 10. ^unt.t ©ee^rter^ §err! ^erren (Somrner^ unb Somp.,^ in ^^\\) 3)orf. Sei^^ig, ben* 6. gebruar.§ 3^t genetgter Sluftrag mit ^rief i;)om, etc. 1 The word In may be omitted. — 2 Lit. : Honored. * Abbreviation for Compagnie. Must always be pronounced in full, however. — ^ fije word den may be omitted. * K5-rSs-p5n-dSnts\ Also, Briefwechsel (bref -vSk -s'l). Lit.; Letter-exchange. — f Yoo'-ne. — § Fa'-broo-iir. THE ARRIVAL. 71 and some hours afterward, write them from memory. For models, see page 48. CORRESPONDENCE. ance of learners because left in ignorance by the various text- thought it well, at this stage, to introduce the following infor- THE BEGINNING OF LETTERS. 1. — BUSINESS LETTERS. Berlin, the 10.^ June.f Mr. William Meyer, in Dresden, Dear 2 Sir! Messrs. Sommers and Company, in New York. Leipsic, the 6.3 February. Your esteemed order with letter from, etc. 1 stands for den zehnten, the 10th. 2 Strictly : Honored. 8 Stands for den sechsten, the 6th. t A literal counterpart of these letter-beginnings is given on this page. 72 DIE ANKUNFT. 2» — 5(nt>ctc SSriefe* eutsche) Sprache. 6 Well, what becomes out-of the baggage? — ^ That is true. 78 DIE ANKUNFT. Jedenfalls ist es das beste. Es ist besser in das Hotel zu gehen, Zimmer aus- zuwahlen^ und ein weiiig auszuruhen/ ehe wir friihstiicken. Sie haben recht. Ausserdem sind wir jetzt da.^ Herr Vogel spricht sehr gut deutsch. Er wird mit dem Portier sprechen. 3. Portier, haben Sie Zimmer fiir uiis bereit gehalten ? Ja, mein Herr. Aber sie sind noch nicht ganz fertig. Wir mussten einige neue Teppiche hineinlegei? lassen. Sie werden in einer halben Stunde fertig sein. Vielleicht wiirden die Damen und Herren ihr Friihstiick zuerst nehmen? Schon. Bitte, sagen Sie uns, wo der Speisesaal ist. Gerade vor Ihnen, auf der anderen Seite des Hofes NOTES. 1 Aus«tewahlen, aus^tcruhen. Auswahlen, a-dos'-va'-l'n, and ausruhen, a-oos'-roo -»n, are ' separable ^ verbs. When used with zu, in the infinitive form, zu is inserted between the prefix aus, and the verb. 2 Wir sind jetzt da. Lit.: We are Jtoiy tliere. — Wlien adverbs of time anil place occur in the same sentence, the adverb of time precedes the adverb of place. THE ARRIVAL. 79 Ya'-den-fals' ist es das bes'-te. Es ist be'-s'r in das lio-tel' tsoo ga'-'n, tsi'-m'r a-oos'- tso6-va'-rn dbnt in""va'- nich a-dbs'-tsoo-roo'-'n, a'-e ver — . Ze h.a'-b'n vecht'. A-oo'-s'r-dam' zint ver 3;etst da'. Ar virt mit dam p6r-ti-a' shpre'-dh'n. Any way it is best. It is better to go to the hotel, select (our) rooms, and rest a little before having break- fast.i You are right. Besides we are there now. Mr. Vogel speaks German very well. He will speak to^ the porter. 3. P6r-ti-a^, ha^-b'n ze tsi^-m'r^ur dons b6-rit^ ge-haF-t'n? ii'-b'r ze zint nbhh nicTit gants tev'-XXch. Ver mdos-t'n i'-ni-ge no-i'-e te'-pi-c7ie lii-nin'-la'- giTla'-s'n. Ze var'-d'n in i'-n'r hal'- b'n s7itobn'-de iev'-tlch zin. Fl-llcht'* vwr-d'n de da'- in"n obnl ber'-'n er frii'- sTitwk tsoo-arst' na'-m'n. Sbtin. Bi'-te, za'-g'n ze dons vo dar sTipi'-ze-zal' ist. Ge-ra'-de for' e'-nen a-<56f dar an'-de-r'n zi'-te des lio'- fes. Porter, did you keep (some) rooms for us?^ Yes, sir ; But they are not quite ready yet. We had to have some new car- pets put in. They will be ready in half an hour.* If the ladies and gentlemen would take their breakfast first ?s Very well, please tell us where the dining-room is. Right before you on the other side of the court. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Before we breakfast. — 2 With the porter. 8 Have you rooms for us ready kept ? 4 They will in a half-hour ready be. 5 Perhaps would the ladies and gentlemen their breakfast first take? '• Although ie strictly is long (=e), it is usually pronounced short (i), in vielleicht. 80 DIE ANKUNFT. 4. Gut, lassen Sie uns liinein gehen! Setzen Sie sich hierher, meine Damen und Herren Was haben Sie zum Friihstiick, Kellner? Hier ist die Speisekarte. 5. Ich liebe, ich le^-b6. I love. du liebst, doo lepst. thou lovest. er {or sie) liebt, ar {or ze) lept. he {or she) loves. wir lieben, ver le'-b'n. we love. ihr liebt, er lept. Sie lieben, ze le'-b'n. sie lieben, ze le'-b'n. they love. you love. 6. Was woUen Sie haben, Herr Vogel? Ich mochte gern eine Tasse Kaffee, einige Brot- chen und ein weiches Ei. Vielleicht^ wtirden Sie gern erst einige Austern haben ? Austern mit einem^ Glas alten Chablis? Entschuldigen Sie,^ aber ich trinke niemals * Wein. NOTES. 1 Vielleicht, perhaps, and similar words are frequently used in German in order to give the sentence some special shade of expression. In this case vielleicht makes the question more polite. 2 Kinetn, dative of ein, governed by the preposition mit. 8 Lit. : Excuse ye. — * See opposite page, note 4. * Zum, for zu dem. Lit. : to-the. 4. Goot, la^-s'n ze dbns hi- Ze'-ts'n ze zich tier '-liar' — . Vas lia'-b'n ze ts66m frii'- Her ist de s7tpi'-ze-kar'-te. THE ARRIVAL. 81 Well! Let us go in. Sit down there, ladies and gentlemen.^ Waiter, what have you for* breakfast ? Here is the bill of fare. 5. Liebe ich? liebst du ? liebt er? lieben wir? liebt ihr? lieben Sie ? lieben sie ? Ie^-b6 ich. lepst doo. lept §Lr. le'-b'n ver. lept er. | le'-b'n ze. j le'-b'n ze. Do I love? doest thou love ' does he love ? do we love ? do you love ? do they love ? 6. Vas v6^-rn ze ha^-b'n, li6r Fo^-gr'l. Ich much'-te gem i'-ne ta'-se ka'-fa, i'-ni-ge briit'- ch'n dont in vi'-c7ies i. Fi-lic7it' vwr'-d'n ze gem arst i'-ni-ge a-do'-st'rn. A-d6'-st'rn mit i'-nem gl^s al'-t'n sh.a-ble' ? Ent-sbool'-di-gen ze, a'-b'r ich triii'-ke ne'-mals vin. What will you have, Mr. Vogel? I would like (to have) a cap of coffee, some rolls, and a soft egg. ^ Would you like to have some oysters first ?^ Oysters, with a glass of old Chablis? I beg your pardon, but I never drink wine. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Sit (you) yourselves here. — ^ I would (like) very much, etc. 3 Perhaps would you willingly first some oysters have. 4 I drink never wine. — Notice that adverbs, like niemals, nir- gends, immer, are placed after tlie verb, instead of before. The Ger- mans never can say, I never drink, I nlivajfs read; hut only, / drhik never, I read always, ich trinke niemals, ich lese (IS'-ze) immer. 82 DIE ANKUNFT. Meine Gesundlieit erlaubt es mir nicht. Mein Arzt erlaubt es mir nicht. Daiin brin^en Sie uns imr ein kleines Flasch chen^ Weill, Kelliier. (See page 84, par. 9.) Note — Study the Weak Conjugation, 7. Fraiilein^ Marie, woUen Sie nicht ein Kotelett nelinien ? Ein Hammelkotelett ? Gem. Und fiir Sie, gnadige Frau? Fiir mich ein Beefsteak. Dann, Kellner, bringen Sie uns drei Tassen Kaf- fee, einige Brotchen^ und ein Dutzend Austern. Danach konnen Sie uns ein Hammelkotelett, ein Beefsteak mit KartofFeln, einige Spiegeleier und ein halbes Hiihnchen ^ bringen. (See p. 84, par. 9.) S, Wohin wiinschten '^ Sie nach dem Friili- stucli zu gelien? NOTES. 1 Das Flaschchen, das Brotchen; from die Plasche, das Brot. The suffix chen (or, lein) is added to express diniiiuitioii. All nouns ending in chen (or, lein) are neuter. I>as Madchen {the girl), from die Magd {the maid); das Fraulein, the young ludg. 2 Sie wiinscliten, imp. subj. of wiinsclien, to wish. The imp. subj. is often used in Germ, instead of the first conditiouMl in Eng. Thus: Icli wiinsclite, / wished, instead of, Ich wiirde wunschen, / nunt/d wish. And: Wiinscliten Sie, instead of, Wiirden Sie ^vunscheu. Mi'-ne ge-zoont'-tiit er- la-c56pt' es mer nicTit. Min artst er-la-oopt es n:er nicht. Dan brin'-'n ze dons noor ill kli'-nes flesh'-cTi'n vin. THE ARRIVAL. 83 My health does not allow me. My physician does not permit Then, waiter, bring us only a small bottle of wine.^ pages 507 and 508. 7. Fio-r-liii Ma-re^ v6^- Tii ze uicht in ko-t'-16t^ iia^-in'ii. In lia'-m'l-k5-t'-let' ? Gern. C5bnt fiir ze, gnei'-di-ge fra-oo' ? Fiir mich in bef'-stak. Dan, kel'-n'r, briii'-'n ze 66ns dri ta-s'n ka'-fa, i'-ni- ge brut'-cTi'n 66nt in d66- ts'nt a-66'-st'rn. Da-nakh' ku'-nen ze 66ns in h.a'-m'l-k6-t'-let', in bef''- stak mit kar-to'-fln, i'- ni-ge s7ipe'-g'l-i'-er oont in hal'-b's h-lin'-cTi'n brin'-'n. Miss Marie, take a chop, won't you? 3 A mutton-chop, then?* And for you, madam ? ^ For me, a beefsteak. Then, waiter, bring iis three cups of coffee, some rolls, and a dozen oysters. After that® you can bring us a mutton-chop, a beefsteak, with potatoes, some fried eggs,"^ and for me the wing of a chicken. 8. Vo-hin^ viinsh^-t'n ze . Where would you want ^ iisikh dam . I to go after breakfast? LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 My physician permits it to-me not. — Erlaubt, from erlauben, to nlhm. — 2 Then bring ye to-ns only a small bottle. 3 Will voTi not a chop take? — In some parts of Germany a chop is called Schopskotelett (shups— ). 4 A iiuittoii-choi)? Willingly. 6 Orncioiis woman, or Indy. 6 Tlicreafter can you us bring. — ' Mirror-Eggs. 8 Where to wanted you after the breakfast to go ? 84 DIE ANKUNFT. Zuerst mochte icJi meinen Freund Waldstein besuchen. (See below, paragraph 9.) Er ist nicht zu Hause. Was sagen Sie? Herr Bell schrieb mir, dass er ihn sogleich nach seiner Ankunft besuchte. Er war nicht zu Hause. 9. INVERTED AND I. If, in a German sentence, some other word than the subjeci the sentence is not interrogative (see Interrogative Sentences, After that, you can bring us a mutton-chop = First, I should Hke to see my friend = Of course, when the verb, in any of these inverted sentences, After that, he brought me a mutton-chop. First, 1 should have liked to see my friend. II. This placing of another word than the subject at the sizing that other word. Ex. : He is building a house = Er baut Bat : He is building a house = Likewise: At last, we are on our way to the hotels Exceptions : Note, however, that if one of the conjunctions, is present, the clause is not inverted. Thus: But, they are not yet quite ready = III. When a dependent clause precedes, instead of following, subject of the principal clause comes after the verb instead of Til go with you, if you coine = If you come, Fll go with you — NOTES. * Likewise: For he has built a house = denn er hat ein Haus gebaut [not, Hater); and: You are ri<;ht, hut I did not want to sec him = Sie haben recht, allein ich tviinschte ihn nicht zu sehen. THE ARRIVAL. 85 Tsoo-arst' muc7i'-te ich mi'-nen fro-int valt'-sTitin toe-zoo'-AjTi'nT Ar ist nicTit tsoo ha-oo'-ze. Vas za'-g'n ze? Her Bel shrep mer, das ar en zo-glic7i' nakh zi'-n'r an'-koonft' he-z6okh'-te. I should like first to call on my friend VValdstein.i He is not at home. What do you say? Mr. Bell wrote me that he •called on him as soon as he arrived.^ He was not at home. EMPHATIC FORMS. begins the clause, the subject is placed after the verb, even if page 37). Ex. : Danach konnen Sie uns ein Hammelkotelett bringen. Zuerst mochte ich meinen Freund besuchen. is in a compound tense the subject is placed after the mixiliary : Danach hat er mir ein Hammelkotelett gehracht, Zuerst hdtte ich gern meinen Freund hesucht, beginning of a sentence is often done for the purpose of empha- ein Haus. Ein Haus baut er, Endlich sind wir auf dem Weg zum Hotel. und, aber, oder, denn, allein {but), and sondern (biit),f Aher sie sind noch nicht ganz fertig {not, sind sie, etc.).^ a principal clause, the * inverted order ' also occurs ; that is, the heforr. Ex. : Ich werde mit Ihnen gehen, wenn Sie kommen. — JBut : Wenn Sie kommen, werde ich mit Ihnen gehen. NOTES. 1 First, would I my friend Waldstein visit. 2 Wrote to-nie that l»e liim immediately after his arrival visited. f For the difference between aber, allein, and sondern, see p. 532. 86 DIE ANKUNFT. I<>. Wie sclimeckeii Ihiien cliose Austern? Icli meine, sie sind ausgezeicliiiet. Herrn Werner scheinen sie iiicht zu schmecken.^ Im Gegenteil. Sie sind mir gerade recht. AVie schmeckt Frau Walther das Beefsteak? Ich finde es nicht genug durchgebraten. Der Kellner kann es ein wenig mehr braten lassen. Nein, danke schon. Es ist nicht der Miihe wert. 11. Wariim triiikeii Sie Ihren Kaffee nicht? Er^ ist zu warm. Ich trinke niemals KafFee, wenn er so heiss ist. Fraulein, Sie essen ja gar nicht. Ich bitte sehr, ich habe ganz tiichtig gegessen. Was fehlt Ihnen? Ich befinde mich nicht wohl. Ermiidet von der Reise, wahrscheinlich. NOTES. I Wie schmecken Ihnen? Lit.: How taste to-you? Anglice: How do yon like? When to like refers to eatables it is usually given by schmecken or gern essen. Tlius: Wie sclimecken Ihnen diese Austern? or, Essen Sie diese Austern gern? Lit.: Eat ye these oysters willingly? — ^ Er, lit.: he, is used here because it refers to der Kaflfee, which is a masculine noun. THE ARRIVAL. 87 lO. Ve slini6Mt'n e^-iien de-ze a-ob^-st'ru ? Ich mi'^e ze zint a-o6s'- ge-tsic7i'-net. Hern Ver'-n'r shi-nen ze nicZit tsoo slime'-k'n. im ga'-g'n-til'. Ze zint mer ge-ra'-de rec/it'. Ve slimekt fra-oo Val'-t'r das bef '-stak ? Ich fin '-de es rn.cht ge- noocTi' dobrc/i'-ge-bra'-t'n. Dar kel'-n'r kan es in va'-nic7i mar ko'-cTi'n. Nin, dan'-ke stitin. Es ist nicTit dar mii'-e vart'. HoAV do you like these oysters ? ^ I think 2 they are excellent. Mr. Werner does not seem to like them.* On the contrary, they just suit me.* How does Mrs. Walther like the beefsteak?^ I find it a little rare.® The waiter can have it broiled a little more. No, thank you. It is not worth while.' 11. Va-rdbni trifi^-k'n ze e^-r'n ka^-fa wlcht? Ar ist tsoo varm. Fro-i'-lin, ze e'-s'n ya gar nicTitT Ich bi'-te zar, Ich ha'-be gants tilch'-tich ge-ge'-s'n. Vas fait' e'-nen? Ich be-fin'-de mich nicht vol'. Er-mii'-det fon d'r ri'-ze, var'-shin'-lic/i. Why do you not drink your coifee? It is too warm. I never drink cofl'ee when it is hot. Miss, you are not eating.^ I beg your pardon, I have eaten quite heartily. What is the matter with you ? I don't feel well. The fatigue of the trip, I sup- pose.* LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. How taste to-you these oysters. — 2 Strictly : I mean. To Mr. Werner seem they not to taste. In-the contrary, they are to-nie just riglit. How tastes to-Mrs. Walther tlie beefsteak. Not enouj^h tlirongh-roasted. — ? The trouble. You eat indeed not at all. — ^ Tired from the trip, probably. 88 DIE ANKUNFT. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. I. — Das Friihstuck, Das erste Friihstiick (ar'-ste fru'-sTitwk'), Das zweite Friihstiick (tsvi'-te— ), Das Brot (brot), Der Kaftee (ka'-fa), Die Chocolade (sh.6-k6-la'-de), Ein Beefsteak (bef'-stak), m., Gut durchgebraten, (d.(3brc7i'-ge-bra'-t'n), Nicht gaiiz durchgebraten, Das Kotelett (ko-t'-lef), Mit Kartoffehi (kar-to'-f'ln), Der Pfeffer (pfe'-fr), Das Salz (zalts), Hunger haben (li(56fi'-'r), 'I Hungrig sein (hoon'-ricTi), J Durst haben (dc56rst), 1 Durstig sein (dd6rs'-tic7t), J Haben Sie Hunger ? 1 Sind Sie hungrig? / Ich bin hungrig,^ Ich bin durstig,^ Ich bin nicht durstig, (Early) breakfast. (Second) breakfast, {about 11 o'clock). The bread. The coffee. The chocolate. A beefsteak. Well done. Medium done. The chop. With potatoes. The pepper. The salt. To be hungry. To be thirsty. Are you hungry ? I am hungry. I am thirsty. I am not thirsty. 1 Or, Ich habe Hunger.— 2 Or, Ich habe Durst. THE ARRIVAL. 89 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. II. — Die Geschirre.* Der Teller (tel'-'r), Das Tellerchen {te'-l'T-ch'n), Die Untertasse (oon'-t'r-ta'-se), Das Salznapfchen (zalts'-nepf -cTi'n), Die Essigflasche (e'-sic7i-fla'-slie), Der Loffel (lu'-f 1), Eiii Theeloffel (ta— ), m., Ein Suppenloffel, m., Eii) Loffel voll, (fol), Die Gabel (ga'-b'l), Das Messer (me'-s'r), Das Couvert (kd6-vert'),^ Die Serviette (zer-vye'-te), Das Tischtuch (tistL'-tooTijTi'). Die Suppenschiissel, Der Korkzieher (kork'-tse'-er), Die Ziickerschale (tsd6'-k'r-slia'-le), Die Pfefferbuchse (pfe'-f r-bwk'-se), Die Olflasche (i r), Der Zahnstocher (tsan'-siito' -kh^v), A plate. A dish. A saucer. A salt-cellar. The vinegar-cruet. The spoon. A tea-spoon. A large spoon. A spoonful. The fork. The knife. The cover. The napkin. The table-cloth. The soup-tureen. The corkscrew. The sugar-bowl. The pepper-box. The oil-cruet. The (set of) casters. The egg-cup. The tooth-pick. 1 Or, das Gedeck (gS-dgk'). — * GS-shi'-re, dishes. 90 DIE ANKUNFT. III. In dei* Stadt (sM^t), In town. Aiisie^ alien ^aiScx^ ^i(^elm« — ©iiteu 9}?orgen, Ueber greunb, tt)ie ^abeu ©ie bie erfte '^\a6:)i \\\ Berlin gefd)lafen? — 2)an!c, fef)r gut. — ^aim motlen mir gleid) nad^ bem 5^u(;ftu(f auf6red)en unb eiue ^roineuabe nad) bem fom9Hd)en 6d)lofe unb bem alteu 3}hifeLim mad;en. — D, ja, bamit bin ic^ t)ol(ftanbig eint)erftanben — (Se^en ©ie, bie^ ift ba^ fdnigUc^e ©djlofe. 2)ie beiben gro^artigen @ru)3))en, ujeld^e ben ^ingang 511 bem ©d)(o6 §ieren, finb bie beriU;mten 9f?offebanbiger, \m\d)z m ^eter^= burg gegoffen unb bem ^onig griebrirf) 3Si(be(m IV. Dom ^aifer 9Uco(au^ \:)m Sf^ufelanb pm @efd)en! gemadjt tt)urben. 2Bir tuerben f^ater in ^a^ ©rf)(ofe get)en unb bie 3^'^^^"^^ anfe(;en. 6ie finb ^rcid^tig, befonber^ ber tDeifee ©aal unb "iiCi^ Xfjronjimmer. Slber ^uerft miiffen \v\x nad) bem alten 3}^ufeum ge^en. — 3ft biefe§ ni(f)t bag ©c^Iofe, in it)e(d)em frii^er bie „ SBeifee grau " umging ? ^ — 3a mi)l ^ie „ 3Seifee g^rau '' befuc^te ba§ (Sntn^iirfcn gemalt. ©ie ftelleu^ befaimtUd;* bie ©nttt)id(ung§gefd;id)te Don SBelt unb :^eben bar.^ — Saffen ©ie un§ t)ineinget)en ! — §eute i)ahtn U)ir feine 3^^^/ ^^^ S^nere be§ 9}?ufciim§ ^^11 befudjen. ©^ U)iirbe un§ tDenigftenS einen (;alben Tag foften.^ Saffen ©ie un§ iiber bie ©d^lof^bri'idc ^ ^uriid get)en unb mt^ ber ©tatue griebrid)§ bc§ ©rofeeii l">orbei bie Siiibeii t)inunter fpa^ieren — ^ier finb imx tuieber an bem ©tanbbitbe 5^iebrid)§ be!o ©ro^en. ^a§ ©ebdube, ba» ©ie (infer §anb fet)en, ift ber ^salaft beg alten nt. — 2 j^|t • frosco-paintings. 3 I-'r )in darstellen, to represent, a 'separable' verb. * Lit.: kiioiviii'ilii. — 5 Lit.: cos^ — * The present emperor. THE AKRIVAL. 99 — Not at-all. See ye not right over-there See, here are we already. A¥e have no time this enor- mously large vase to look-at. As you know, is itj out-of one block of granite made. But here stand we before the old gallery. It is a magnificent building, is it not? It is in the purest Grecian style, according to-the plan of Schinkel executed.^ Now, let us these fine, broad-steps up go. I wished to-you the celebrated frescos 2 of the portico of-the museum to show. They are by Cornelius and his pupils after Schinkel's plans painted. They represent^, as-you-know,^ the history-of^ the-development of (the) world and life. — Let us in-go ! — To-day have we no time the interior of the museum to visit. It would us at-least a half day take.^ Let us over the castle-bridge^ back-go, and past the statue of-Frederick the Great down the Linden walk — Here are we again at the statue of Frederick the Great. The building which you on-the-left-hand see is the Palace of-the old Kaiser. — What ! I thought that the old Kaiser in the * castle' lived. — No. The young Kaiser* lives in the 'castle,^ but the old Kaiser t lived here. This first window is the historical corner-window, at which the old Kaiser William every noon with his people a greeting ex- changed. But now must we the Linden down go and the stores, the hotels, and the artillery-school, near by the Brandenburger Gate look-at. 6 The bridge which crosses the river, and thus connects the " castle" and tlie Unter den Linden. — "^ Lit. : at (an) tlie statue of Frederick the Great past (vorbei).— f The old Emperor William. — t T^i*. : She. 100 DIE ANKUNFT. These letter endings should be learned by heart, and written from !♦ — ^riefe an Srcunbe* 1. ©m^fangen (5ie 'om 2lu§bru(f freunbfc^aftUdier ©e- finnung Don 3^rem • ^an§> (5d)mitt. 2. ©m^fangen ©ie bie ^erfic^erung aufridjttger greunb= fd^aft 'oon S^rem 3. (Sie 6eften0 griifeenb,^ t)erb(eibe td^ gan^ ergebener 4. Mil ^er^Ud^en ©riifeen t)erbleibe id^ ^ic^ (iebenbe ©d)tt)efter. 6. 3Jlit bem 3Sunfd)e auf^ red)t balbige^^ ^Sicberfe^en 2)ic^ innig (iebenbe 3Jliitter. 1 strictly : You in-the-best-way greeting. — 2 Strictly : On right soon. * Lit.: Letter — oxc])ange. — Also, ©ricftuedjfcl. THE ARRIVAL. 101 memory, either in class or at home some hours afterward. CORRESPONDENCE. 1,— LETTERS TO FRIENDS. 1. Accept the expression of friendly opinion * from Your Hans Schmitt. 2. Accept (ye) the assurance of-sincere friendship from Your H. S. 3. With best greetings,^ I remain Your Quite devoted H. S. 4. With affectionate greetings, I remain Thy Thee loving sister. 5. With the wish right soon^ to-see-you again, concludes Thy Thee cordially loving mother. * Literal translations of letter endings are here given. This one answers simply to : Your friend. ParI^ ii. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. HOTEL u:n^d PE]srsio]sr^ SECTION I. 1. AT THE HOTEL. 2. ROOMS, MEALS, etc. 3. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 4. TOILET ARTICLES, FURNITURE. 5. BATH-ROOM, TOWELS, SOAP, etc. 6. IN THE MORNING. 7. TO HAVE A ROOM DONE. 8. BERLIN : OPERA AND THEATER. 9. A LETTER FROM BERLIN. 103 n* HOTEL UND PENSION. Man hat uiis Zimmer in der dritten Etag^e ^ g^egeben. Aber es ist ein Fahrstuhl da. Und wo logieren Sie ? — Wir log^ieren in dein Entresol ^ nnd wir haben drei Zimmer niit Anssicht auf das kaiserliche Schloss. PRONUNCIATION. Ho-t6F obnt paii-zyon^. — Man hat CH>ns tsi^'-in'r in (lar dri^-t'n a-ta^-zh6 g6-g'a^-b'n. A^-b'r es ist in far^-sMool' da. OOnt vo lo-zhe^-r'n^ ze^?4— Ver lo- zhe^-r'n in dam ari-tr'-s61^ ^ obnt ver ha^-b'n dri tsi^- m'r mit a-dbs^-zicM' a-obf das ki^-z6r-li-cM shlos^. 1 Also : im dritten Stock (s/»tok). 2 The German word is Halbgeschoss, but is rarely used. 8 Zh denotes the soft sound of s in the English word pleasure. * An accent on a word of one syllable means that the word must be emphasized, for the sake of clearness or euphony, 5 The It er, dative of die, governed by in, 2 In which we in London descended are; i. e., have got down, i. e., out of the carriage. — The dative Mvelchetn is governed by in. 3 In which story could you us lodge. — The (feminine) dative, welcher, is governed by in.— ^ That can I to-you really not say. 5 I know it (my) self not. — * I must the master call. 7 Zu mieten, to hire, to rent. Could also say, nehmen, nS'-m'n. Lit. : to take. — ••■ For hat man instead of man hat, see p. 84, III. 108 HOTEL UND PENSION. Wie viele Zimmer wiinschten^ Sie zu nehmen? Wir mochten vier Zimmer nehmen. Vier Zimmer mit Betten ? * Nein. Konnten^ Sie uns nicht ein Empfangszim- mer, zwei aneinanderstossende Schlafzimmer und ein Boudoir geben? Sehr wohl, mein Herr, das konnte^ ich Ihnen geben. Aber das Empfangszimmer liegt nach dem Hofe. Das macht nichts. Or, Das thut nichts. 3, Wo konnten Sie uns diese Zimmer geben? In der zweiten Etage. Das ist zu hoch. Meine Frau kann nicht so hoch hinaufsteigen. Konnten Sie uns nicht weiter unten Zimmer geben? Ja wohl, mein Herr. Aber ich konnte Ihnen nicht mehr als^ drei Zimmer geben. In welcher Etage? NOTES. 1 Konnten, Wunschten and Mochten, imperfect subjunctives (plural) of konnen, wtinschen and mogen. The imperf. subjunct. of tliese verbs is used instead of the present indicative (see page 504), whcn- evei- it is desired to express one's self more politely and deferentially. 2 Als may he rendered by when, ns, or than. Ex. : Als ich in dem Wartesaal war, kam er = When I was in the waiting-room,, he came. Er weiss nicht so viel als du= lie doea not know as much as you {do). Er weiss mehr als du = //e knows more tJianyou (do). HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 109 Ve fe'-le. Ver mucTi'-t'n fer. Mitbe'-t'n? In em-pfafis'-tsi'-in'r, tsvi an-i-nan'-d'r-s7ito'-s'n-de stilaf'-tsi-m'r d6nt in bd6- doar'. Zar vol'. LecTit na.kh dSLm tio'-fe. Das ma.kht^ nichts, or toot Yiichts. How many rooms do you want to take? "We would like to take four rooms. Four rooms, with beds ?* No, sir. Could you not give us a parlor (or reception- room), two bedrooms adjoin- ing each other, ^ and a dress- ing-room ? Yes,2 sir. I could give you that. But the parlor is in the back.* That does not matter.* 3. Vo kun''-t'n ze obns de^'- z6 tsi^-m'r gSi^-h'u. Tsvi'-t'n a-ta'-ztie. Tsoo loiokh. Mi'-ne fra-o6 kan nicht zo liokh h.i-na^d6f'-s7iti'-g'n. Vi'-t'r don'-t'n tsi'-m'r gS'- b'n? Ya vol', min lier. A'-b'r nicht mar' als dri'. In veV-ch'T a-ta'-zhe ? Where could you give us these rooms? On the second story. It is too high. My wife cannot climb up so high. Could you not give us rooms lower (than that)?^ Why, certainly. Only • I could not give you more than three rooms. On what story?' LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Two at-one-another-joining sleeping-rooms. —2 Very well. See p. H4. 8 Lies towards the yard. Dem (lit. : to-the), dative of der, gov- erned by the preposition nach. 4 That makes nothing, or does nothing. 5 Could you to-us not farther below rooms give? 6 Yes well, sir. But ^ In which story? * Batten, dative plural of Belt, governed by the preposition mit. 110 HOTEL UND PENSION. In der ersten Etage. Gut. Dann wollen wir uns mit drei Zimmern ^ begniigen.i 4. Wie viel werden diese Zimmer kosteii? Fiinf und vierzig Mark^ den Tag,^ or pro Tag. Das ist sehr teuer. Ich kanii Ihneii billigere Zimmer geben. In der zweiten Etage, nicht wahr? Nein, mein Herr. In der Halbetage (or, Im Zvvi- schenstock). 5. Zu welchem Preise? Dreissig Mark den Tag. Und die Woche? {Or, Und pro Woche?) Lassen Sie uns sehen. Ich wiirde sie Ihnen fiir hundert fiinf und siebzig Mark die Woche ^ lassen. Gut. Ich will die Zimmer im Zwischenstock nehmen. Note. — Study the Indicative and Conditional of NOTES. 1 Sich begniigen, to be satisfied, is a reflexive verb. Ich begniige mich = / am satisfied (lit. : / content myself), etc. — See page 84. 2 Fiinf und vierzig Mark may be abreviatod in wiitiiitr, to 45 3!. 8 45 M. den Tag=45 marks a day. Observe tliat in rjcnnaii tlic definite article is used, in English the indefinite article. Tn the suuil way, 175 M. die Woche = 175 marks a week . HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. Ill In d'r ar'-st'n a-ta'-zlie . Goot. Dan vo'-l'n ver dons be-gnii'-g'n. 4. » Ve fel var^-d'n de-z6 tsr-m'r kos^-t'n ? Tiini^ dont tiv'-tsich mark dan lakh. Or, pro lakh. Das ist zar to-i'-'r. E'-nen bi'-li-ge-re. NicTit' var? lialp'-a-ta'-zlie. Or, tsvi'-sh'n-sTitok'. 5. Tsoo Y^V-ch*m pri''-z6? Dri'-sicTi mark dan takh. CDOnt de ^b'-khel La'-s'n ze dons za'-'n. Ich ■vuv'-de ze e'-nen ftir lidbn'- d'rt fnnf odnt zep'-tsicTi mark de -vo'-khe l^'-s'n. On the first fioor.^ Well! Then we will do with three roonis.^ How much will these rooms cost? Forty-five marks a day. That is very dear. I can give you rooms cheaper.^ On the second floor, is it not ? ^ No, sir. On the entresol.^ At what price ?^ Thirty marks a day. And (how much) a week ? ^ Let us see. By the week, I would let you have them at one hundred and seventy- five marks,® Well ! I '11 take the rooms on the entresol. Werden, page 502. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Der erstCM, dative {singular) of die erste. The dative is governed here by the prepos. in. — 2 Then will we us with three rooms satisfy. 3 Billig (hV-lich), cheap ; billiger, cheaper. Nomi. and accu. : billigere.— * Not true? — 5 Hall-floor, or between-story. 6 At whicli price?— 7 And the week?— 8 I would them to-you for hundred five and seventy mark the week let. 112 HOTEL UND PENSION. 6. Wann wunschen die Herrschaften ^ zu speisen ? Speisen Sie table d'hote oder a la carte? Wir speisen table d'hote. Um wie viel Uhr speisen Sie? Das erste Friihstiick von sieben bis neun Uhr. Das zweite Friihstiick von elf bis ein Uhr. Um sechs Uhr wird das Diner serviert. Wie viel kostet das? Zehn Mark die Person. Aber wir haben zwei Kinder. Miissen sie so viel wie Erwachsene bezahlen? Nein, Kinder bezahlen nur die Halfte. Schon. Wir wollen um sechs Uhr an der table d'hote speisen. 7. THE CASES In German, the relation of words is often expressed by an = Der Vater; The father (as the direct object of a verb) = Dew. These endings (or cases) are respectively called: The Genitive (case with of), and the dative (case with to). NOTES. 1 Die Herrschaften, instead of Sie. The direct address Sie may occasionally be changed to an indirect address by using some title or name of honor instead. As: Wollen Euere Majestat gnjidigst geruhen (vo'-Pn 64'-'re ma-ye-stat' gna'-*iic/tst ge-rob'-*n) = M iif if, please ynur most qraci tlie roovm ; ])nt use sollen (or, mdgen), and say either: I will tell her. she tnu.st (he rooms tiji tnake (Ich Trill ihr sagen, sie 8olI die ZimnKM- ferti;? ninv1ien)\ or: / will tell her that she the rooms mahe-up tmist, .... dass sie die Zimmer fertig machen soil. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 119 Mi'-ne fra-oo' zakht nin'. Ze h.at in dan zi'-f'n-napf dont a-oof dan tish.' . Ze Zen'-d'n ze mer zo-glich' in sTttt^k'-cTi'n zi'- ie. • Ki'-ne man'-d'l-zi'-fe le'-b'r kern'-zi'-fe. My wife says no. She looked into the* soap-dish and on the* table. She can't find any soap any- where.^ Send me a cake of soap at once. But do not send me any almond soap.2 I prefer castile soap.^ without an Article, pages 476, 477. 10. Das tsF-m'r-mdt^- ch'n dbn^-z6-re tsi^-m'r ho-F-te in6r^-g''n nlcht riir' ge-maA^/it^? ve s7ita-ob^-bic7^ a^-16s ist. ^ Ze liat ve'-d'r in-mal' fer- ge'-s'n ap'-tsob-stito'-i-b'n. Ge-tsic7it', ve ze ap'- slito-i'-b'n z61'-te. De tsi'-m'r ier'-tich ma'- kh'n zol. Why did not the chamber- maid t clean our rooms this morning?^ See how dusty everything- ^ is. She has forgotten to dust them, once again. ^ I have shown her how to dust them."^ I am going to tell her to (come and) make them up at once.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 She can nowhere soap find. Ein Stuckchen. Lit. : a small piece. 2 Not any almond soap = no (keiue) almond soap. See p. 116, n. 2. 8 I take rather s^one-soap (there is no word in English equivalent to **Kern" as used above). * Why has the chambermaid our rooms to-day morning not clean made?— 5 All. 6 She has again once forgotten off-to-dust. Abstauben, ' separable' verb. — 7 How she ofF-dust should. 8 I shall her at-once tell, that she the rooms ready make shall. *- Den, accusative case of der, governed here by tlie prepositions in and auf. For the government of cases by prepositions, see p. 268. t Ikis Zimmermadchen. See i)age 82, note 1. 120 HOTEL UND PENSION. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Das Zimmer. Die Thiir (tur), Das Fenster (fen'-st'r), Der Teppicb (te'-picT^), Der Fussboden ^ (foos'-bo'-d'n), Die Decke (de'-ke), Die Wand (vant), Der Stuhl (sTitool), Der Schaukelstuhl (slia-d6'-k'l — ), Das Bett (bet), Die Matratze (ma-tra'-tse), Die Springfedermatratze (sTZ'prifi'-fS.'- d'r-ma-tra'-tse) , Das Betttuch 2 (het'-tookh'), Die Bettdecke (bet'-de'-ke), Das Bolster (pol'-st'r), Das Kissen (ki'-s'n), Die Lampe (lani'-pe), Ein Lampenschirm (lain'-pen-sh.irin'),m. Ein Licht (licht), n., Ein Leuchter (16-ic7i'-t'r), m., Ziindholzchen (tswnt'-liiilts'-cTi'n), Streichholzchen (sTitricTi'-liults'-cTi'n), Ein Schwamm (shvam), m., Wichse (vik'-se), /., Ein Handtuch (hant- tookh'), Eine Serviette (zer-vi-e'-te), The door. The window. The carpet. The floor. The ceihng. The wall. The chair. The rocking-chair. The bed. The mattress. The spring-mattress. The sheet. The blanket. The bolster. The pillow. The lamp. ,A lamp-shade. A candle, a light. A candle-stick. Matches. A sponge. Blacking. A towel. A napkin. 1 Lit. : footbottom. — 2 Ljt. : bedcloth. HOTEL AND BOAEDING-HOUSE. 121 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Die Toilette (toa-16^-t6). Der Tisch (tisli), Der Waschtisch (vasli'-tish.'), Die Wasserhiihne (va'-s'r-tL§.'-ne), m., Der Spiegel (sTz-pe'-g'l), Die Haarburste (har'-bur'-ste), Die Zahnbiirste (tsan'-bwr'-ste), Die Nagelbiirste (na'-g'l-bwr'-ste), Die Schuhbiirste (sboo'-bwr'-ste), Die Kleiderbiirste (kli'-d'r-bwr'-ste), Die Hutbiirste (boot'-bwr'-ste), Die Nagelfeile (na'-g'l-fi'-le), Die Puderquaste (poo'-d'r-qua'-ste), Der Kamm (kam), Das Staubkammchen ^ (sTita-ddp'-kem'- cTi'n), Die Pommade (po-ma'-de), Das Federniesser (fa'-d'r-me'-s'r), Das Badezimmer (ba'-de-tsi'-ra'r), Sich baden (zicTi ba'-d'n), The table. The wash-stand. The faucets. The mirror. The hair-brush. The tooth-brush. The nail-brush. The shoe-brush. The clothes-brush. The hat-brush. The nail polisher. The powder-puff. The comb. The fine comb. The pomatum. The penknife. The bath-room. To bathe. Wichsen Sie diese Stiefel (vik'-s'n), Black these boots. Biirsten Sie meine Kleider aus (bwr'-st'n a-dos), Brush my clothes. Biigeln ^ Sie diese Wasche (bii'-g'ln), Iron this linen. Bessern Sie diese Striimpfe aus (be'-s'rn a-dos), Mend these stockings. 1 Lit. : little dust-comb. — 2 Or, Flatten, ple'-t'n. 122 HOTEL UND PENSION. To he learned by heart, and repeated aloud as a conversation, whether for self-study or preparation for the class-room. {See IHrections before Part I,) CONVERSATIONS. l.—DIE TOILETTE. Wo haben Sie die Haarbiifste hingelegt/ Adolf ?2 — . Ich weiss nicht. Ich habe sie seit gestern abend ^ nicht gebraucht.* — Wo haben Sie sie zuletzt^ gesehen? — Ich habe sie zuletzt auf dem Waschtisch gesehen. — Nun, ist sie jetzt^ nicht mehr dort? — Nein. Ich kann sie nirgends finden. — Sehen Sie in die KommodeJ — Sie ist nicht in diesem Fach.^ — Vielleicht in dem da oben?^ — Ja, hier ist sie. 2. -DIE WASCHFRAU* Meine Frau mochte gern wissen/^ wo sie ihre^^ Wasche biigeln lassen kann. — Wir haben eine Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Hin'-gS-lac/it' = (hence) put. 2 A'-dolf. 3 Zit ge'-st'rn a'-b'nt = since last night. 4 Ge-bra-dofc/i-t' = used. s Tsoo-lgtst'=the last time. 6 Ygtst = now. ^ 7 K6-mo'-de = cli est of drawers. * Fafc/t = drawer. 9 Fi-lie/it' in dSm' da o'-b'n= perhaps in the (i. e., the one) above there. — i" Vi'-s'n = to know. — ^ Her. *• Vash'-fra-oo', lit. : washing woman, == laundress. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 123 Waschfrau, die jedeii Montag^ kommt die Wasche zu holen.2 Anna! War sie schon da? — Neiii, mein Herr, noch nicht.^ — Bitte schicken Sie sie herauf,^ wenn sie konimt. — Sehr wolil, mein Herr. 3. -DAS BADEZIMMER. Mein Bruder will wissen, wo das Badezimmer ist. Er mochte heute Nachmittag ein Bad nehmen. — Das Badezimmer ist auf Ihrem Korridor, nahe bei Ihrer Thiir.^ — Danke. A.~DER MORGEN. Wie haben Sie vergangene Nacht geschlafen?^ — Nicht sehr gut. Ich liatte nicht genug Deckeii/ und die Matratze ist zu hart. — Das thut mir sehr leid.^ Ich werde Ihnen fiir heute Abend dickered Deck en und eine weichere^^ Matratze schicken. Note. — Study the Declension of the Adjective with the Definite Article, pages 477| 478. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Ya'"d'n mon'-tafc/i. 2 Tsoo ho'-l'n = to fetch, to take away. ■^ NoAj/i iiic/it' = iiot yet. 4 Shi'-k'n ze ze lie-ra-oof = send her up. 5 Na'-e bi e'-rer tur' = near your door. 6 Fer-gan'-'ne naA;7it ge-shla'-f'n = how did you sleep last night V 7 Not blankets enough. 8 Das toot mer zar lit', lit. : that does me muoh pain •, i. e., i am very sorry for that. 9 Di'-ke-re = thicker. — w Vi'-c/«-e-re = softer. 1.24 HOTEL UND PENSION. To he translated and written into German; hut also to he recited as a conversation in the class-room. (^See Directions before Part I,) EXERCISES. l. — TO MAKE UP A ROOM. Why did n't the servant make the bed yesterday ? ^ — Did she not make it?* That is not possible.^ — Yes, she forgot it.t — Why did you not ring ? ^ I am going to speak to her.* But when you want any- thing done in your room please ring, and she will come at once.^ ^.-BAGGAGE. Please have my trunks brought from the depot.^ — Please give me your baggage-check. — Let me see. I cannot find it." Ah, here it is.^ Make haste.^ I want to change my linen.^^ Aids to Translation. 1 Why has the maid (das Madchen) yesterday the bed not made? 2 Moglich, vAVLch'-Weh. — 3 Why have you not rung (geschellt) ? * I will with her (mit ihr) speak. 5 But when you in your room (in Ihrem Zimmer) anything want (etwas brauchen), ring please (so schellen Sie, bitte), and she will at-once come. — ISec page 84, III. ^ Please, let my trunks (meine KoflFer) from the (von dem) depot fetch (abholen, apMio'-Pn). 7 I can /m;i not find. — 8 Here is he.— ^ Make quick (schnell). 1** I must my linen cluingc (wechseln). * Has she it (es) not inadc. — f She has it forgotten. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 125 3. — CANDLES, SHOES* ETC. Waiter, you didn't bring me any candle.^ — Beg your pardon ,2 sir. I brought you a candle.f — Where is it? — I put it on the washstand.^ — Ah! here it is. — Very well. Now, black these shoes and brush my overcoat.* Note. — Study the Declension of the Adjective with the Indefinite Article, pages 478, 479. 4. — THE BATH. Waiter, please show me the bath-room.^ — There it is, sir. Straight before you. — Bring me some soap and towels,^ please. — You will find soap and towels in the bath-room,^ sir. — Ah ! Very well. Thank you. Aids to Translation. 1 Waiter, you have to-nie no (kein) candle brought (gebracht). 2 Kntschuldigen Sie, gnt-shoor-di-g'n ze. Lit. : Excuse ye. 8 I have it on the (auf den) wash-stand put (gestellt). 4 Meinen Uberrock {accusative, because the object of the verb). 5 Where the bath-room is. 6 Handtiicher, hant'-tii'-c/i'r. 7 You will soap and towels in the (in dem) bath-room find. = Lichte, Schuhe, etc. t I have to-you a (ein) candle brought. 126 HOTEL UND PENSION. To he read by means of the literal translation opposite, then without it, in preparation for reading aloud and translating in class. For Pronunciation, see page 132. Sefefttirf. £)^etn4(iu^ tint) (^((lauf^iet^du^^ — §aben ©ie Gillette ^ur ^eutigeu ^orftetlun^ im D:pern= l^au^ befomincn? — 2ln ber £affe \viax al(e§ au§t>erfauft, bod; ift c^^^ luir gelungen/ Don einem §anb(er ^ttjei Gillette, natiiiiid; init bebeiitenbem Slufgelb,^ ^u er^alten. — ®a§ freut mid) fe^r,^ benn i(f) mod)te fel)r gem 3}kl)cr= beer§ "^ro^^et" ^oren, befonber^ ba 9tiemann unb 3}kri= anne ^ranbt bie ^au^trollcn fingen. — 2BeId)e§ ift 't^txm bie .ganblung in biefer D*per? — 3d) fann S^^^n ben @ang ber ^anblung fur;^ er= gd^Ien. 3ol)ann Don Set;ben, ber ©o(;n einer @aftf)au^= njirtin/ tt)irb t?on ben SBiebertdufern ^um giU;rer ermdMt unb Id^t fid) nad) ®inna(;rne ber ©tabt 9}Hinfter im bortigen ®om ^um ^dnig unb ^ro^^eten fronen. Slber nad)bent feine ^raut if)n i:)erf(ud)t, giebt er fid) felbft 6ei cineni ©aftma^I "iizn ^ob. ®ie Dper toirb S^^i^^'i^ f^^^ gefaUen. 2(ud) ba§ D^ern^au^ felbft it)irb Sbncn gef alien. ^'§ iDurbe unter griebrid) bem ©ro^en erbaut, unb ^a^:> ^antl)eon iu>n 2(tl)en ift babei ^um ^orbilb genomnien. ^!o ift ein ^err= lic^eS @ebdube. — Urn tDie tjiel Ul^r beginnt bie ^orfteHung? 1 strictly: is it to-me succeeded, Anglice: I succeeded in obtaining. — 2 j.jt. : npon-money. — ^ Anylice : I tun very glad of that. 4 Strictly : very willingly. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 127 For Self-Study, should be read by means of the translation, then without it, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. READING. THE OPERA AND THEATER. — Have you the tickets to (the) to-day's represen- tation in the opera-house gotten? — At the ticket-office was all oit^sold, yet to-me has^ it succeeded^ from a dealer two tickets, naturally with (an) important premium,^ to obtain. — That rejoices me very (much),^ for I wished very much * Meyerbeer's " Prophet " to-hear, especially as the principal-parts sing. — What is the plot in this opera? — I can to-you the whole of-the plot shortly relate. John of Leyden, the son of a hotel-keeper, becomes by the anabaptists to chief elected and has himself after (the) capture of-the city (of) Miinster in that-place's cathedral as^ king and prophet crowned. He disa- vowed his mother, and after his betrothed him for- saken (has),^ gives he to-himself a^ a banquet^ the death. The opera will {to-) you much please. Also, the Opera- House (it-) self will {to-) you please. It was under Frederick the Great built, and the Pantheon of Athens was'^^ as^^ model taken. It is a magnificent building. =— At what time begins the play?^^ s Wirt, a (male) innkeeper, a host. Wirtin, a (female) innkeeper. hostess.— 6 Strictly : from.— 7 Strictly : io-the. 8 Supply hat, /tao, understood. — 9 Strictly: guest-repast. 1° Strictly : is. — n Strictly : to-the. — 12 Strictly : representation. 128 HOTEL UND PENSION. — Urn i)alh ad^t.i 2)a c§> jet^t gerabe fed^g ift, fo f^ahzn wit norf) 3^^^ 9^^119/ ^ii^^tt fleinen ©^a^iergaiig 511 tnad;eu. SSenn ©ie alfo md)t gu mube finb, fo iDoUen ^t)ir md) bem ©etibarmen 3}Zar!t ge^en unb ba§ ©c^auf^iet^au^ unb bag ©d;iKerben!inal befef)en — ®a§ ift it)ir!Iid) ein fc^dner ^lat^, nid^t \v>ai)x? §ier ift bag ^eufrnal unfereg grofeen ^id)terg griebrirf) ©d)i(Ier. Slber ©driller mar md)t nur ber grofete beutfd)e ®id)ter nac^ ©oct^e, er ix)ar auc^ ein ebler unb gnter 9)Jenfd;.^ (Sg tDar fiir ^eutfd)Ianb n)ie flir bie Qan^c SBelt ein grower ^erluft^ ba^ er fo friil; ftarb. — SBann ift er h^nn geftorben? — @r ftarb im 3a(;re 1805, im 3llter 'oon fecf)g unb Dier^^ig 3al;ren, nad)bem er eben bie ^erle feiner bramatifd)en ^id;tungen, SSil^elnt Xdl, Dollenbet (;atte. ©ie miffen, ba^ fein erfteg ©tild, tx)eld)eg eine un6efd)rei6(id)e ^egeifterung, befonberg unter ber ^ugenb ®eutfd)(anbg ^ert)orrief, bie S^iauber maren. — '^a. ^onnten (3ie ntir mo(;( angeben, it)elc^e Qbee ben Sf^aubern ^u ©runbe liegt? — ^ie 9?duber entl;a(ten bie ©efdjic^te ^arl Tloov^, gran^ Tloov ija^f^^ fcinen (dteren ^ruber ^arl unb faJ3t^^ ben ^lan, biefen ^u berberben unb fic^ guin §errn beg §aufeg ^u madden. ®egl;alb betiic^t^^ er feinen 33ater unb feinen ^ruber. £arl g(aubt,^i 'Da^ fein ^ater ii)n t)erf(ud)t i)aU, unb gel;t, an ber 3}^enfc^(;eit tjerpeifelnb, unter bie 9iduber, nad^ benen ha^ ©rama benannt ift. 1 strictly : at half eight. — 2 Anglice : short. 8 Gendarmen, a kind of mounted police. — ■* Strictly: place. 6 Mensch.— « The Germans may use either the po-fect : When did he die? Or, the simple past tense {imperfect) : Wlien died hef HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 129 — At half-past seveii.^ As it now exactly six is, so have we yet time enough a littW^ walk to make. If you indeed not too tired are, so will we to the Gendarmes^ market-place go, and the theater and the Schiller-monument see — That is indeed a fine square,* isn't it? Here is the monument of our great poet, Frederick Schiller. But Schiller was not only the greatest German poet after Goethe, he was also a noble {and) good man.^ It was for Germany, as for the whole world, a great loss that he so soon died. — When has he then died?^ — He died in-the year 1805 m-the age of six-and- forty years, after he the gem ^ of-his dramatic poetical works, "William Tell," completed had. You know that his first piece, which an immediate enthusiasm especially among^ the youth of-Germany called-forth, "The Robbers" was. — Yes. Could you to-me kindly indicate what idea to "the Robbers" as^ plan 'is?io — " The Robbers " contain the history of Karl Moor. Franz Moor hates ^^ his elder brother Karl, and con- ceives^^ the plan the-latter^^ to kill and himself io-the lord of-the family ^^ to make. Therefore belies ^^ he Karl believes 11 that his father him forsaken has,ii and goes, of (the) mankind despairing, among (the) robbers, after whom the drama is named. 1 strictly : pearl. — 8 Strictly : under. — ^ Strictly : to. 1^ Strictly : lies. — ^i Notice tlie use of tlie present indicative instead of a past tense. This is frequent in German in narrating. 12 Strictly : this-one. — 13 Strictly : house. 130 HOTEL UND PENSION. S!vtveipvnbeni* ^^'^^i^/^^^^Zf^^'^CfS.^^*^^ t^ /^^^t^i^J^-9^ /^(^jy '^#^y4-r'^ CA^C'*'^^^^^^^^ -x^i'*'-^ ^^ ^"^f^^^^t^i^-^ --?a -^^^^^^A^-'tyT.^*'^ ^tl'-l^it^'Z.^^^ .^^t^^^-t^^^^i^- . 0^t^'^^^yt^-C^e/'ii'^^fra;otten to black {infinitive) my boots {object of the infinitive). Er hat vergessen {past participle) meine Stiefel zu tvichseti {infinitive). HOTEL AIS'D BOARDIAG-HOUSE. 147 FORMS IN GERMAN. nor the progressive form (/ am ivriting). They can only- questions, they cannot say, Do you write f nor, Are you Sie? I do not write, or I am not writing, the Germans say only, I of, Do you not write? or, Are you not writing f they can only has an object (Ex. : I have not the booh; I do not forget it), the {nowhere), or any other, always comes after the object. Ex. : I do not forget it = Ich vergesse es nicJit. goes with the infinitive or participle to the end of the sentence. Ich habe das Buch seit einer Woche nicht gesehen. Ich werde es nie vergessen. 11. Ha^-b'n ze g6-sh6ir. Gna'-di:ge fra-d6. Ma-re' . . . nicht ge-p<56tst'. Yo-han' t s7ite'-f 1 . . . . vik'-s'n. Fer-ge'-s'n bt^rs'-t'n. . a-d6s'-tsoo- Did you ringr?^ Did madam ring?^ Yes. Mary has not cleaned my shoes. And I had given my boots to John to black (them).^ And he has forg. to black them and to br. my son's clothes.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Notice how the Germans, having no sucli auxiliary as did, change did into have. Thus : IHd you ring f becomes. Have you rung ? 2 Have worthy lady rung ? Form of expression used by servants. 3 Could say, meines Bruders Stiefel, instead of die Stiefel meines Bruders. But the Germans do not usually employ that form of tlie possessive, except in poetry. 4 And I liad to {the) Jolm the boots of my brother to black given. 5 And he lias forage 114, note *. t The accusative (or direct object) answers to the question whom? or, what? Ex.: He sent him. Question: Whom did he seiid f Answer: Him. Him is accusative or direct object. The dative {or in- HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 149 Es e'-nen doch ge-zakht. Ga'-b'n ze mer de za^-kh'n . . . . z6-glich' Tin' ■ma.'-kh'n. Bwrs'-t'n ze . . . . a-dos zo slinel' ve ze noor. Pd6'-ts'n. Yet I had told them to do it> But give them to me.'^ I am going to have them to do it at once.^ John, black these boots and brush these clothes as quick as you can. Mary, clean these shoes. IN GERMAN. ONE PRONOUN-OBJECT. (me), mir (to me), dich {thee), dir {to the), ihn {hiw), ihm {to to you), Sie {you, or they), Ihnen {to you), ihnen {to them)] ject). *Ex. : German, always : He gave to-rne the things. Er hat mir die Sachen gegeben. German, always : Has my brother to-you the things given ? Hat mein Bruder Ihnen die Sachen ge- geben ? PRONOUN-OBJECTS. the accusative^ generally precedes the dative, f Ex. : German : Ich habe es {nee.) Ihnen {((at.) gesagt. German : Er hat ihn {cicc.) mir {dat.) nicht gesandt. | NOTES. direct object) answers to the question to whom? or, to what? Ex. : He sent to me. Question : To whom did he send ? Ans, : To me. To me is (tnir) the dative. See page 115, note f. 1 I had it to-you yet told. — 2 But (I) pray, give {ye) to-nie the things. — 3 They shall tliem at once clean make. — X However, with mir and dir, the accusative may either precede or follow. Ex.: Er hat es mir gesagt; or, Er hat mir es (or, mtr*s) gesagt. 150 HOTEL UND PENSION. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Die Familie.* Die Eltern (el'-t'rn), Der Vater (fa'-t'r), Die Mutter (mob'-t'r), Der Schwieger vater (stive'-g'r— ), Die Schwiegermutter, Der Mann,^ Die Frau,2 Der Gross vater (gros' — ), Die Grossmutter, Der Onkel (on'-k'l), Die Xante (tan'-te), Der, die Pate (pa'-te), Die Kinder (kin'-d'r), Der Sohn (zon), Die Tochter (tokh'-Vr), Der Knabe (kna'-be), Das Madchen (mat'-cTi'n), Der Enkel (en'-k'l), Die Enkelin. Der Schwiegersohn, Die Schwiegertochter, Der Neffe (ne'-fe), Die Nichte (nich'-te), Der Vetter (fe'-t'r), Die Cousine (koo-ze'-ne), Parents. The father. The mother. The father-in-law. The mother-in-law. The husband. The wife. The grandfather. The grandmother. The uncle. The aunt. The godfather, godmother The children. The son. The daughter. The boy. The girl. The grandson. The granddaughter. The son-in-law. The daughter-in-law. The nephew. The niece. The (male) cousin. The {feynalc) cousin. 1 Or, more rarely, der Ehemann (a'-e-nian'). Also. Oatte (ga'- tg). — 2 Or, more rarely, die Ehefraii. Also, Gattin (ga'-tiii). For tlie expressions Ihr Herr Gemahl, Ihre Fran Gemalilin, see ]). 155, * Fa-me'-li-g. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 151 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart, VOKABELN. Die Tag-eszeit,* Es ist zwolf Uhr (tsvulf), It is twelve o'clock. Es ist ein Uhr,^ It is one o'clock. Fiinf Minuteii nach eins,^ Five minutes past one. Zehn Minuten nach zvvei (Lsan),^ Ten minutes past two. Ein viertel auf drei (fir'-t'l), Quarter past two. In zelm Minuten halb fiini/ Twenty minutes past four. In fiinf Minuten halb sechs,s| Twenty-five minutes past five. Halb sieben (lialp ze'-b'n),f Half-past six. Fiinf Minuten nach halb sieben,^ Twenty-five minutes to seven. Zehn Minuten nach halb achtJI Twenty minutes to eight. Drei viertel auf neun (no-in), Quarter to nine. Zehn Minuten vor zehn,^ Ten minutes to ten. Fiinf Minuten vor elf (elf),* Five minutes to eleven. Gegen Mitternacht,| Nearly midnight. Eine Uhr (oor), A watch, clock. Ihre Uhr geht nach,^'* Your watch is slow. Ihre Uhr geht vor,^® Your watch is fast. Sie ^^ geht richtig {rich'-tich), It goes right. I Or, es ist eins (Ins). — 2 Or, iiber eins. Lit. : over one. 3 Or, iiber zwei (tsvi). — •* Lit. : in ten minutes half-five. Also, zwanzigt Minuten nach vier.f — ^ Lit.: in five minutes half (of ) six. Also: fiinf Minuten vor halb sechs. 6 Or, iiber halb sieben.— '' Or, uber halb acht. 8 Or, in zehn 31inuten zehn.— ^ Or, in fiinf 3Iinuten elf. ^^ From nachgehen (nafc/i/-ga'-'n), vorgehen, separable verbs, II Lit. : she, b;'cause die Ulir is feminine. * Ta'-ges-tsif, tim(^ of day. — f Lit. : half ^)f) seven. - + Tsvan'- tsich ..... f er zeks afelit gX'-g'n mi'-Vr-ndkht', 152 HOTEL UND PENSION. To he learned by heart and recited as a real conversation. (For Self-Study, see Directions before Part I,) CONVERSATIONS. 1,— VON DER ZEIT. Welche Zeit ist es^ auf^ Hirer Uhr? — Es ist drei viertel auf zwei. Aber ich glaube, meine Uhr geht nach.^ — Wie viel geht sie nach? — Ich glaube, dass sie zehn Minuten nachgeht. Aber haben Sie Ilire Uhr nicht mehr?* — Doch,^ ich habe sie noch.^ Ich habe sie nur gestern abend aufzuziehen^ vergessen. 2. — FORTSETZUNG. Entschuldigen Sie; konnten Sie mir vielleicht sagen, wie viel Uhr es ist? — Es ist zehn Minuten iiber halb- zehn auf meiner Uhr. — Geht sie richtig? — Sie geht nicht sehr richtig, aber jetzt geht sie auf die Minute.^ Ich habe sie im Vorbeigehen^ nach der Rathausulir ^^ gestellt." Geht Ihre Uhr nicht? — Nein, die Feder Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Or, Wie spiit ist es? Lit. : liow late is it? — 2 By (lit. : on). 8 Or, Dass meine Uhr nachgeht. Notice that the 'separahle' verb nrtc/igeht, which, in a principal clause, separates into geht nach {see preceding sentence), remains unseparated in a dependent clause (clause beginning witli dass, als, etc.). 4 No more, no longer. — ^ Doch is used instead of ja, as an affir- mative answer to a negative pr()j)osition. — ^ Still. 7 From aufziehen, to wind up. Lit. : to draw up. 8 It goes right. Tiit. : it goes on the minute. 9 Im for-bi'-ga'-'n, in passing. Lit.: in past going. 10 Rat'-ha-oos -oor'. City Hall clock. — " Regulated. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 153 ist zerbrochen.^ Ich muss sie zu einem Uhrmacher^ bringen, um^ sie repariereii^ zu^ lassen. — Dann gehen Sie zu meinem Uhrmacher, Theodor Wolff, Unter den Linden No. 63 Aber es ist spiit, Ich muss Sie verlassen.^ Leben Sie wohl.^ 3.—SILBERZEUG* Wo haben Sie diese Bestecke" gekauft? — Welche meinen Sie ? Die silbernen ? — Ja, diese da. — Ich habe sie nicht gekauft. Man hat sie mir geschenkt.^ Es ist ein Weihnachtsgeschenk,^ das ^^ mir meine Pate gemacht hat. Gefallen sie Ihnen? — Ich finde sie wirkHch sehr hiibsch.^^ Von welcher Firma^^ sind sie denn? — Sie sind in dem Silberwarengeschaft von Gebriider Friedlander ^^ gekauft worden. — Das kenne ich nicht. Wo ist das? — Es ist auf dem Schloss- platz.^* — Richtig; jetzt erinnere ich mich.^^ Da will ich auch hin;^'^ ich muss ein Geschenk fiir meine kleine Nichte kaufen. — Gut, lassen Sie uns morgen zusammen hingehen. — Morgen, um wie viel Uhr? — Um zwolf Uhr.i7 Pronunciation and Translations. 1 FS'-d'r, spring; tsgr-bro'-fc/i-'n, broken.— 2 Watchmaker. 3 Um zu, in order to. — ^ Re-pa-re'-ren, to mend, s Fer-la'-s'n, (to) leave. — ^ \At.: live {ye) well; i. e., farewell. 7 Be-s/i-te'-ke, silver {i. e., knives, spoons, and forks). Lit.: these 'cases.' — 8 Geschenkt from schenken, shgii'-k'n, to present, to give as a present. — 9 VF-nafc/its-ge-sheiak', Christmas present, i" Das, used here instead of welches, which. — n Hicpsh, pretty. 12 House, or "make." — 13 Gebriider, brothers. Used only as here. 14 Castle place. — i^ Now I remember. Lit. : now remind I myself . 16 Supply the verb gehen. Lit. : there will I also hence (go). I' Or, zu Mittag. — Zil'-b'r-tso-ic/i', silverware. Lit.: nWwQv-stuff. 154 HOTEL UNI) PENSION. To he translated and written Into German, hid also to he recited orally in the class-room. (For Self-Study, see Directions be/ore Part I. ) EXERCISES. l.—AT THE TABLE* The soup is served. — Will you take soup ? — If you please,^ madam. — John, take this off',^ and bring us the leg of lamb,^ with the beans ^ and cauliflower.^ — John, you have forgotten to put on^ the salt-cellar and the pepper-box. — Shall I offer you a slice ^ of this leg of lamb ? — Yes, please. It looks very appe- tizing.^ — Mr. Klaus, would you have the kindness to carve ^ this leg of lamb? — Certainly, madam. — In the meanwhile, I'll help your wifef to the spinacli.^^ — Not any for me, thank you.^^ — Do you like lean ? ^^ Yes, give me some of the lean,^^ if you please Aids to Translation. 1 Wenn ich bitten darf. Lit.: if T beg may. 2 Nehmen Sie dies fort.— 3 Die Lammkeule. * Die Bohnen. — ^ Der Blumenltohl; has no plural. 6 Lit. : you have forgotten tlie salt-cellar, etc., to put on (hinzu- stellen). Could also say, simply: You have the salt-cellar and the })epper-box forgotten. — ' Dare T to you offer? 8 Appetitlich, a-pg-tet'-lic/i.. - ^ Vorzuschneiden, for'-tsdo- shni'-d'n, from vorschneideii, a ' xepdralde'' verl). Also, zu tran- chieren (traii-she'-r'n). — ^ Mittlerweile will ich Hirer Fran Spinat vorlegen. Lit. : luranwhiK' will 1 to-yowv wife . . . before-lay. ii Nicht fUr mich, not for iiu'. — i- Maj;eres Fleisch; or, simply, mager, — ^^ Etwas mageres. — * Bei Tisch. — f See note §, opp. p. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 155 Do you know that Mrs. Vogel's brother-in- law has already left ^ the city ? — Yes. Albert's god- father called at his house yesterday.^ He had left the city day before yesterday with his wife and children.^ — Where did they go?* — They have gone to Rome for^ (a) few^ days. After that,t they are going (to) stay^ two weeks in Florence with^ their grandfather. Note. — Study the compound tenses of Werden, p. 503. 2. — ABOUT A WATCH. Look ! ^ My uncle bought me a watch yesterday.^ — How beautiful 1^0 Where did he buy it?ii— At Tiffany's. — At Tiffany's here, in Berlin? — Yes, he has a branch % here. I '11 take you to the store to- morrow morning ?^^ — All right. At what time? . . . . Aids to Translation. 1 That Mrs.-V.'s brotlier-in-ljuv the city already left (verlassen) has '^ Was yesterday at his liouse (an seinem Haus). 8 He had the city day-before-yesterday (vorgestern) with his {femi- nine^ dative) wife and his {neuter, dative) children left. His. The article or possessive adjective is repeated in German before consecutive nouns, if of different genders or numbers. — ■* Auf , with the accusative. 5 Einige. - ^ T^it. : will they stay. — ^ Bei (with dative case). 8 Sieh, ze. — ^ Lit. : my uncle has to-me yesterday a watch bought. ii» Wie schon. — " Lit. : Where has he it (lit. : her) bought? 12 I will you to-morrow morning (morgen friih) after to-the store take.— * Wo sind (lit.: are) sie hingegangen? t Danach. — % Zweiggeschaf t (tsvie/i/-ge-sheft'). — ^ Your wife = Ilire Fran or (more politely) Ihre Fran Gemahlin (lit. : your lad;/ conaorf^. Likewise, Yoitr husband = lhr Mann, or (n\ore politely) Ihr Herr Gemalil. The latter forms are (piite frequent. 156 HOTEL VND PENSION. To be read by means of the translation on opposite page, in preparation for reading aloud and translating in class. — ^^riebri^ ber @rofee ^flegte jebe^mal, tt>enn er etnen neuen ©olbaten^ in einent fdner ©arberegimenter ^ erblidte, benfelben an^ureben^ unb folgenbe brei grageu an i^n 5U rid)ten : — 2Bie alt bift bu?* — 3Bie (ange bienft bii fc^on? — ^efommft bii ^i'mftUd;^ beinen (Sotb^ unb bein ^rot? — C^inft mar ein junger gran^ofe ^ in eine§ ber @arberegi= menter eingetreten.' ^er ^au^tmann benfelben ijatU xi)n ini \)ovan§> barauf aufnter!fant gemad;t/ ha^ ber £dnig i()n nac^ften^^ fragen !onne,t i»ib ba er fein ^eutfd; Derftanb, i(;m anent^fof)(en/^ bie 2lnti:)orten " auf biefe brei gragen fic^ in beutfd)er (5:prad)e ein^u^rcigen.^^ ^alb barauf fanb eine 9iet>ue^^ ber ^ruj^!pen ftatt, unb al§> ber Slonig ben neuen ©olbaten erblidte, trat ^* er an x^n ^eran/* uin bie geU)of)n(icJ)en ^^ gragen gu t^un. S^if^tt^S P^Q* ber £dnig aber bie^mal mit ber p)z[tm ?^rage an. 1 Zol'-da'-t'n. — 2 Gar'-de-ra-gi-men'-t'r. 8 An'-tsdo-ra-d'n; anreden is a 'separable' compound verb. For the position of zu, see page 234, note 1. * Notice how the king, speaking with his soldiers, uses du. 6 PiiSkt'-lic/t.— 6 Zolt. 7 Fran-tso'-zS In'-gg-trS'-t'ii, from eintreten (in'-trX -t'n). 8 A-dof'-merk'-sam. Strictly : attentive made. — ^ Nac/t'-stSns. 10 An'-Sm-pfo'-len.— n Ant'-vor'-t'n. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 157 For Self-Study, the German text should he read by means of the literal translation until thoroughly mastered, then read aloud in German. READING. — N THE THREE QUESTIONS. — Frederick the Great used every-time, when he a new soldier in one of-his regiments-of-the guard dis- covered, the-same to-address and (the) following three questions to him to put: — How old art thou ? — How long servest thou already? — Receivest thou punctually thy pay and {thy) bread? — Once was a young Frenchman in one of-tlie regi- ments-of-the guard entered. The captain of-the same liad him in-tlie advance thereupon notified, that the king him very-soon question could, and as he no Ger- man understood, ^o-him advised the answers to these three questions (upon) himself in German to-impress. Soon thereupon found a review of-the troops place, and as the king the new soldier spied, walked he to him up, in-order the usual questions to make. As-it-happened,^^ began the king, however}' this time with ..... 12 In'-tsoo-pra'-g'n, from einpragen. — i3 Rg-vii'. 1^ Trat' he-ran', imperfect of herantreten, 'separable^ verb. When ' sepaftic3/' ^ erimberte ber ^onig, „entU)eber (;a)t bu ben ^erftanb^ i^erloren^ ober id)/' — „2iae beibe, ©m. m-ijeftdt!"^ antmortete ber ©olbat, meldjer biefe 3Sorte beic £dnig§ fiir bie britte grage l;ie(t.8 — ''^un ha§> ift it)ir!ac^ ba§ erftc 9}^a(/' fagte ber ^onig, „bafe id) in ©egemuart^ ineiner gefainten^^ @arbe fiir l>er= riidt^i erfldrt U)erbe. ^^erfte(;ft 'i)n mid) benn gar nid)t?" — ®er (Solbat, beffen^''^ ^^orrat^^ an ^eutfd; jet^t er^ fd^opft^* iyar, fd)tDieg^^ ftiU. 2l[§ ber ^onig aber feine gragen erneuerte, antoortete er i^tn auf fran^ofifd), t>a\] er gar fein ®eutfd) l>erftel;e.^^ griebrid) iad)U^'' (;cr-^{id)^^ iiber beu brodigen^^ ^^orfall, !(o^fte bem jungen^ gremb= ling frcimblid) auf bie ©d)u(ter'^^ unb em^fal)! i[;m, fetnen bienft ^iuiftlid; ^u \)errid)ten/2 aber and) ja bie beutfd)c (3prad;e 5U lernen. 1 Tsvan'-tsic/t. — 2 Er-s/ita-ooiit'. 3 Fer-zets'-te, iin])erfect of versetzen. — 4 Var-haf'-tic/t. 5 Fer-s/itant'. — ^ Past jiarticiple of verlieren. 7 O-i'-'re mii-ye-stat'. Observe that, in writing, Euere, when connected with Majestiit, becomes abbreviated into Ew. 8 From halteii, see pa-ie 517.— ^ Ga'-g'ii-vart'. 1" Ge-zam'-t'ii. — n Fer-riikt'. 1--2 Der, who, (lessen, of wlioni, whose.— 13 For'-rat'. 14 Er-shupft'.— i5 Shvec/r, imperfect of schweigen, an irregular verb. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 159 — "How long serves! thou already?" said he to-him. — " One and twenty years ! " answered the young Frenchraan. — The king astonished, asked further: "How old art thou, then?" — "Three months!^ answered the questioned-one. — " Then, indeed," replied the king, " either hast thou the understanding lost, or I." — " {All) both, your majesty ! " answered the soldier, who these words of the king for the third question took.24 — " Now, that is really the first time," said the king, "that I, in presence of my assembled guard, (for) crazy declared was. Understandest thou me then at-all not? " — The soldier, whose stock of German now ex- hausted was, was-silent entirely.'^ As the king hoiuever his questions renewed, answered he ^o-him in French, that he quite no German understood. Frederick laughed heartily over the ludicrous affair,^^ patted the young stranger with-friendliness on the shoulder and recommended^^ him,^ his service punctually to per- form, but also indeed the German tongue to learn. 16 Verstehe is in the subjunctive present. For the use of the sub- junctive mood, see pages 340, 341. J' Lafc/i'-te, imperfect of lachen.— is Herts'-lic/i. I'J D*r6'-li-g'n. — 20 Ydon'-'n.— 21 Shool'-t'r. 2- Fer-rTc/i'-t'n, inseparable compound verb. -^ Strictly: a qnarter-yenr. — 24 Strictly: held. 25 Strictly: quietly, calmhj. — 26 Or, incident. 2" Empfahl, imperfect of empfehlen. Empfehlen, is an insepa- rnhle verb. That is to say. its prefix emp, is never separated from tlio rest of the word. — 28 Strictly ; «o-him. 160 HOTEL UND PENSION. Let the learner read these over, copy them off, and then select three out looking at the hook, some hours afterward. For model of German Sptrefppn^ett|♦ 1. 3rc^tung§i?oII.* 2. 3c^ t)erb(ei6e ac^tung§t>o((, 3^r er^ebeuer Wiener. 3. 3d^ ^abe bte ©^re ^u ^eic^nenf a(§^ 3^r ergebenfter Wiener. 4. gd^ bitte 6ie, bie^erfic^erung unferer Dor^ugUc^en god)ad)tung §u gene^migen.J 5. @eneC;migen ^n 2lugbrudf|| meiner :)or5uglid;en §od)ad;timg.^ 1 To sign as. See page 100. * Or, empf angen Sie. — » Strictly : high respect. * A*li'-t6oSs-f6r.— t Tsic/>'-n$a, HOTEL AND BOAKDING-HOUSE. 161 or four to memorize. These he should write in German script, with- letters, see pages 48 and 49. CORRESPONDENCE. THE ENDING OF LETTERS. 2. -BUSINESS LETTERS. 1. I am very respectfully yours. 2. I am, sir, Your obedient servant. 3. I have the honor to be,^ sir, Your devoted servant. 4. I pray you to accept the assurance of our perfect consideration. 5. Accept, gentlemen, the assurance of our perfect devotedness. 6. Please, sir, accept the expression of my distin- guished consideration. I Fer-zic/i'-'rdbn' oon'-z'-rer for-tsii'-gli-c/i-'n lidkh'-akh'-tobii tsoo ge-na'-mi-g'n. § ()Oii'-z*rer fol'-ko'-m'-nen er-ga'-b'n-hit.— || A-oos'-drdok' 162 HOTEL UND PENSION. Learn the following seritences. SOME IDIOMATIC PHRASES. Don't mention it I Das ist schade (siia'-de). It is a pity. Das schadet nichts. ) Bitte sehr (bi-te zar'). ) Ich nehme mir die Freiheit. I take the liberty.^ Das ist schon (shun). That 's right. Darf ich Sie um ein Glas May I ask you for a glass Wasser bitten ? of water ? Wie heissen Sie (lii'-s'n ze)? What is your name? Ich heisse Smith. My name is Smith. Wo gehen Sie hin ? Where are you going ? ^ Ich gehe nach der Konigs- I am going to King Street. strasse. Ist es sehr weit (vif) ? Is it very far (off) ? Nein, es ist hier dicht dabei. No, it is close to us.^ Haben Sie heute abend et- Have you any engagement was {or, Jamil . : was) vor ? for to-night ? Ich wiirde gern mit Ihnen I shall be happy to take a einen Spaziergang ma- walk with you. chen. Ich mochte gern mit Ihnen I wish lo speak to you. sprechen. Das eilt gar nicht (nt). There is no great hurry. Was giebt's (or, was ist los)? What is the matter?^ Was bedeutet das?^ What does that mean? 1 Lit. : I take to-me the liberty. — 2 j if • iifjicrc r/n you hither? 3 Lit. : here close thereby. — < Pron. : vas gept's. — 5 Be-do-i'-tet. ParI^ II. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. HOTEL UKD PE:N^sio:sr. SECTION III. 1. RENTING UNFURNISHED ROOMS. 2. TO ASK ONE'S WAY. 3. THE GERMAN GENITIVE. 4. THE NUMBERS. 5. MEETING A FRIEND. 6. DEPARTURE FROM THE HOTEL. 7. A STRANGER IN POTSDAM. 8. HOW TO DIRECT A LETTER. les 164 HOTEL UND PENSION. GERMAN. 1. Wir sind im Entresol. Das ist viel besser. Ich mochte nicht so hoch wohnen. Was wollen Sie machen? Ich hatte von Wien aus^ geschrieben,* man mochte mir Zimmer in der Bel-Etage^ bereit halten.^ Nun? Nun, und wie ich angekommen^ bin, hat man^ mich auf den dritten Stock gebracht. Note. — Study the Passive Voice, 2. Ich wiirde sofort in ein andres Hotel gelien. Das wiirde ich^ auch thun. NOTES. 1 Von Wien aus. Aus is pleonastic and could be left out. 2 Die Bel-Etage; or, die erste Etage. — » Or, dass man mir Zimmer bereit lialten moclite. Or, simply, Ich hatte aus geschrieben, mir Zimmer bereit zu lialten. -* Angekommen, past jiarticiple of ankommen, separable verb. Separable verbs in tbe past participle, insert ge between the prefix and the verb. — 5 Observe tlie construction. See page 84. * Past participle of schreiben, a 'strong' verb. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 165 ni. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1, Ver zint im an^-tr'-s6F. Zo liokh vo'-nen. Fon ven' a-obs ge-slire'- ben .... bel'-aL^a'-ztie be-rit' hal'-t'n. Noon. Ve ich an'-ge-ko'-men bin .... ge-bra7i;?it'. We are on the entresol. That 's much better. I wouldn't go up as high as that.i What could you do?^ I had written them from Vienna tc keep me rooms on the first floor.* Well? Well, when I got here they put me on the third story.* page 510. 2. Ich vvir^-d6 zo-fort^ in in g,n^-dr6s ho-t6F ga^-'n. I 'd change my hotel right away.^ So would L« LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 T wouldn't so high live. 2 What will you do? 8 I liad from Vienna (out) written, one might to-me rooms in the first floor ready keep. 4 Now, and as I arrived have (lit. : am) has one me on the thir(^ story brought. 5 I would at once in another hotel go. 6 That would I also do. 166 HOTEL AND PENSION. Aber ich will eine Privatwohnung nehmen. Eine moblierte Wohimng? Ich weiss/ was Sie wollen. Nein. Eine unmoblierte ^ Wohnung. Wie so? Weil ich fiir immer in Berlin bleiben will. Das ist freilich ganz etwas anderes. In diesem Fall miissen wir eine Wohnung such en. Ich gehe grade zu einem Borsenmakler in der Behrenstrasse. Wollen Sie mit mir kommen? Wir konnen uns unterwegs umsehen. Das passt mir grade. Note. — Study the Strong Declension, 3. Wissen Sie, wo die Behrenstrasse ist? Nicht genau. Wir miissen uns erkundigen. Ah ! Da ist ein Schutzmann. Entschuldigen Sie. Wie kommen wir nach der Behrenstrasse ? ^ NOTES. 1 From wissen, to hww. Ich weiss, du weisst, er weiss; wir wissen, ihr w^isst, sie w^issen. 2 In most words, compounded with the negative prefix un, the accent is on the prefix. 3 Or, Welches ist der nachste (nearest) Weg nach der Behren- strasse ? HOTEL AND BOAIIDJNG-HOUSE. 16V Pri-va.t/-vo'-nd6n. Mu-bler'-te. OOn'-mu-bler'-te. Fri'-lich. In de'-zem faV. Gra'-de bor imr in ba§ ©djlo^ f)ineinge(;en SBiffen ©ie, \va^ ha^ bort am ©nbe ber ^erraffe ift? 1 strictly • Tarn therewith agreed. — 2 gt. : now must we out-step, 3 St. : steps. — 4 St. : over the steps. — ^ yt. : up stairs, above. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 191 For Self-Study, should be read by means of the translation, theti without it, and when thoroughly uiiderstood, read aloud in German. READING. A STRANGER IN POTSDAM. — Here we are in Potsdam, the* Versailles of-Germany. — Yes, but first must we a guide take. — You wish a guide through Potsdam, gentle- men? — Yes, how much do you ask ? Six marks ? Very well, I am willing.^ — Now where go we first (hence)? — We will first to the park and the palace (of) Sans Souci drive — Oh, what a magnificent fountain! — Yes. We are now in the park of Sans Souci, and this broad, beautiful avenue takes us straight to-the palace Now must we leave our carriage, and this magnificent staircase up-go. — Is that the palace at-the-top-of the steps? Yes. How low it is ! It has {indeed) only one story ! — That is true ; but is the colonnade not beautiful ? — Yes But I am quite out-of breath. We will up-here a little (while) rest, before we in the castle in-go Know you, what that there at-the end of-the terrace is? * Potsdam aftor in is in the dative. Hence, dem, which is in apposition to Potsdam, is put in the dative, to agree with it. 192 HOTEL UND PENSION. — ^ort lie§ gncbnc(> ber (^rof^c fciuc SieMingg^jferbe imb §iuibe^ begraben. 33efaimtltd; brii(fte* a in feiiicm 2^eftamente hm 2Bimfd) aii^,* an berfelbeu ©telle beerbigt 511 luerben. ^a§ ift allerbingg lad)erlid). Slber ein 3JJenfdl), bcr feine Xl^iere fo lieb ^atte,^ luiiBte t ^in gutc§ ^eq l;aben. — ®a§ benfe tc^ mid) 8ollen tx)ir mm in ba§ Bdjio^ gc^en? gd^ l;abe gel;brt, "oa^ g^iebric^ ber ©ro^e faft intnier^ l;ier lebte. — (Sr t)erbrad)te l;ier eincn gro^en ^cil feiner 3^^^/ ii'^^ man l)at feine gimmer unDercinbert gelaffen.* 6el;en ©ie ba bie Ul)r? griebrid; ber ©ro^e ^flegte fie felOft anfjn^ ^ie(;en, nnb im Slugenblid feine^ 2:^obe^ foil fie fte^en geblieben fein^ ^2Ba» i)at biefe 9Binbmiil)le gerabe Dor xm§> ju bebenten?^ — ^a^5 ift bie beriil)mte ^Binbmi'i^le, ioelc^e griebrid; ber ©roge jn fanfen iDunfd;te. ©r ioollte fie bann nieberrei^en lajfcn, toeil fie il;m bie 2lu^fid;t an jener (Beite be§ ©cbloffe^ iDcgna^mJ imb "oa^) ©erdnfd; ber Tliiijk iijn bei ber Slrbeit ftorte. ®er 3Jliiller toeigerte^ fid) fie ^n berfmifen. ^a brol;te ber £dnig, er miirbe fie ahhxcd^m laffen, ol;ne il)n ioeiter^ jn fragen. ^er nnerfd)rodene SJliiller antli^ortete : „3a, \mnn nur ha§> Jlmmnergerid)t in Berlin ni6t ioare." ^ie freimiitige ©^rad)e be§ Mnikt§> gefiel bent 5ldnig. „ 9hm gnt/' fagte er, „ gel)t nnr, wiv tootten fd;on fel)en, toie \mv miteinanber fertig iuerben!" nnb Dom Slbbred^en ber 9}Ml)le toar nie toieber bie D^iebe Slber toir miiffen nnn eilen, benn fonft fonnen toir nid;t md)v alle^ fe^en. 1 strictly : Frederick the Great his pet-horses, etc. 2 Strictly •. so dear had, i. e., held. — 3 Strictly : almost always. * Anglice: his rooms have been left as tliey were. The Germans prefer to use the active voice witli man, instead of the passive, when- ever possil)le. — * From ausdriicken, to r.ry>?v'.s.'^, n separable verb. t Imperfect of niiissen. — | From wegnehmen. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 193 — There lie Frederick the Great's^ pet horses and dogs buried. As-is-kiiown expressed he in his will the desire (out), in the-same place buried to be. That is doubtless ridiculous. But a man, who his beasts so loved,^ must a good heart have (had). — That believe I also Shall we now in the palace go? I have heard that Frederick the Great almost exclusively^ here lived. — He spent here a great part of-his time, and they have his rooms unchanged left.^ See you there the clock? Frederick the Great used it himself to-wind, and m-the moment of-his death the clock is said to have stopped still ^ — What is that windmill right before us, anyway f ^ — That is the famous windmill He wanted it then demolished to have, because it to-him the view on that side of-the castle obstructed, and the noise of-the mill him (when) at (the) work disturbed. The miller refused'' it to sell. Then threatened the king (that) he would it tear-down let without him any- more^ to-ask. The fearless miller answered: "Yes, if only the court-of-justice in Berlin not were ! " The frank speech of-the miller pleased (^o)-the king. " Very good," said he, " go ahead,^ we will indeed see, how we together get along !"^^ and of-the tearing-down of-the mill was never again any talk^^ But we must now make-haste or else will we not be able everything to see.^2 5 strictly: shall it stopped-still have (strictly: be). — For use of sein with bleiben, etc., see page 6 Strictly : what has that mill to portend? 7 Strictly : denied himself; from sich weigern. — 8 Strictly : farther. ^ Strictly : go onli/. — w How we oiie-with-the other ready hecome. 11 Strictly : the talk. — i2 Strictly : for else can we not more all see. 194 HOTEL VND PENSION. ^ricfabrcffctt* 1. ^errni ^r.^ ma^ SSet^ Berlin, 3B., 2Binterfelbftra§e, 24. 2. §errn^ ^ireftor^ griebrid; SBagner, ©re^ben, dl, gorftftragc, 25. 3. ^errn 9?ubo(f Sowing, Jlaufmaun,^ £ubt»igftra6e. 4. grdulein ©opHe @ro§met)er, 9fJeit) ?)orf, ^ier inib funf^igfte ©trafee, Dft, 3^o. 3, RSereinigte ©taaten, 2(mertfa. 1 Lit. : to-Mr. ; the dative, as seen here, being used in addressing a letter. 2 Observe that the Germans, in addressing a letter as well as in speaking, add the word Herr to titles. 8 Mercliant. 4 Mun'-ch'n, Munich. Part IL HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE, HOTEL UIsTD PE]SrSIOK. •o^» SECTION IV. 1. IN THE RESTAURANT. 2. THE GERMAN DATIVE. 3. A MATTER OF MONEY. 4. THE BILL OF FARE. 5. AT THE TABLE. 6. IN A FURNITURE STORE. 7. TO START FROM THE HOTEL. 8. IN FRANKFORT-ON-THE-MAIN. 9. A LETTER TO THE HOTEL KAISERHOF. 195 196 HOTEL UND PENSION. IV. GERMAN. Wir haben drei Ziinmer, welclie auf die Linden gelien. Siehe da! Herr Schulz! Ach ja, wir hatten verabredet/ uns um elf Uhr hier zu * trefFen.^ Guten Morgen, meine Herrert! Wie geht es Ihnen? Sehr gut. Und Ihnen? Ich befinde mich ausgezeichnet. Das sieht man Ihnen an.^ • Nun, wo wollen wir frfihstucken? Bei Borchart, natiirlich. Unter den Linden? Ja. Passt Ihnen das? Ich bin noch nicht da gewesen. Isst* man da gut? NOTES. 1 Verabreden, to agree, is also used as a reflexive verb {sich ver- abreden. '^ Treffen, to hit, to meet ; sich treffen, to meet each other. * From ansehen (separable verb), to look at, to perceive. Ansehen governs the dative. Thus: To see (or preceive}= 'Einem ansehen. Note tlie expression : Ein angesehener Mann, a man of hicjh standing. 4 Distinguisli (in writing) er isst, he eats jfroin essen (e'-s'n), to eat], from er ist, he is. In pronuneiation they do not dider. * For the use of zu before the infinitive, see page 200, note *. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 197 IV. PRONUNCIATION. 1. Vir iia^-b'ii dri tsF-m'r v6F-r/te a-dbf de Liii^- d'li g^a^-'nr Ze'-e da' ..... shoolts. Kkh ya' fer-ap'-ra'-det . . ". . . tre'-f n. Ve gat' es e'-nen? A-obs '-ge-tsic7i' -net. zit. Frli'-sTitw'-k'n. Bor'-cTiart na-tur -\loh. Past'. 1st'. TRANSLATION. We have tliree rooms fac- ing on the Linden. There is Mr. Schulz'.i Why, yes. I had an appoint- ment with him here at eleven.2 Good morning, gentlemen. How do you do (this morn- ing)? Very well. And yourself? I am very well, indeed.^ You look like it.* Well! Where shall we (go and) breakfast? At Borchart's, shall we not?^ Unter den Linden ? Yes. Will that suit you ? « I have never gone there. Is it a good place ? '' LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Look {there)! Mr. Schulz ! Siehe (the 2d pers. sing, of the im- perative) is the familiar form, and is used liere becanse tlie expression siehe da is really a part of the e.xclanuitory plmise, Tliere is Mr. Sd'uh ! Look! used independently, would be Selien Siel or Sehen Sie da! unless addressing someone with wlioni we were very funuhar. '^ Oh, yes. We had agreed (ourselves) at eleven here to-nieet. 3 I find myself excellently. — ^ That sees one to-you on. 5 Of course (strictly : naturally). — ^ Suits to you that. 7 I have (strictly : am) not yet there been. Eats one there well? 198 HOTEL UND PENSION. Welche Frage! Wiirde ich sonst hingehen?^ 1 Note. — Study the Weak Declension, 3. Kellner! Bitte, die Speisekarte! Bringeii Sie uns drei Beefsteak mit Champignons Wie wiinschen die Herren sie zubereitet?^ Englisch^ bitte. Was fiir Gemiise wiinschen die Herren? Was halten Sie da von? Lassen Sie uns BratkartofFeln und Blumenkohl nehmen ! Und welche Sorte Wein? Drei Flaschen Riidesheimer.^ 3. WS,hrend des Essens* mochte ich mit Ihneii eine kleine Geschaftsangeleg^eii- heit bespreclien. Das ware? NOTES. 1 Observe that in separ. comp. verbs the prefix always has the accent. 2 The Germans generally eat their beefsteak well done. They call rare beefsteak, English beefsteak. 8 After nouns of measure, weight, and number, the Germans do not put the following noun in the genitive. Thus: Ein Pfund Butter, a pound of butter. See page 179. 4 P'or prepositions governing the genitive, see page 178. HOTEL AND BOAKDING-HOUSE. 199 Zonst h-in'-ga'-'n. What (a) question! Would I go there otherwise ? * pages 472 and 473. 2. K^F-ii'r! Br-t6, de s7fpi^-ze-kar'-te. Bel'-stak mit slian-pe- fion . Tsoo'-be-ri'-tet. Ge-mti'-ze. Vas hal'-t'n ze' — . Brat'-kar-to'-f'ln 66nt bloo'-men-kol'. Z6r'-te vin'. Rii'-des-lii'-in'r. Waiter, the bill of fare, if you please!^ Bring us three beefsteaks, with mushrooms. How would the gentlemen like to have them ? ^ Rare.-* What vegetables would you like? What do you say, (my dear fellow) ?'i (Well!) Let us take (some) fried potatoes and cauli- flower. And what kind (of) wine ? Three bottles (of) Riidesheimer. 3. Vii^-r6nt d6s 6^-s'iis m\ich^-t^ ich iiiit e^-ii6n i^-n6 kli^-n6 g6-sh6fts^- au -ge-la-g"'ii-hit b6- While we are eating-, iny dear fellow, I woiiUl like to speak to you about a matter of business.^ What is it ? ^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Would I otherwise there-go ? 2 Please the bill of fare (lit. : eating-card). 3 How wish the gentlemen them prepared? 4 English. See note 2, opposite page. 6 What think you (lit. : hold you) of-it? s During the dinner might I with you a slight business matter bespeak? — ? That might-be ? 200 HOTEL UND TExXSiON. Ich habe einen Wechsel. Auf wen ist er ausgestellt? Er ist auf die Zentralbank ausgestellt. Nun? Die Bank hat heute morgen falliert.^ Dann lassen Sie Ihren Wechsel sogleich pro- testieren. Ich habe keine Zeit dazu.^ Ich will noch heute abend nach Verona abreisen. Ich koinme in eine schone Verlegenheit. 4. Und ich weiss mir niclit zu * helfen,^ Ich will Ihnen aus der Verlegenheit helfen. Inwiefern ? Ich kann Ihnen fiinf hundert Mark borgen. Wie! dass wollten Sie thun? Gewiss, hier sind drej, hundert Mark in Schei- nen,^ hundert in Zwanzigmarkstiicken und ein Wechsel von hundert Mark auf das beste Bankhaus in Berlin. Da nehmen Sie mir einen Stein vom Herzen. NOTES. 1 The perfect tense is often employed (Ex. : I have failed^ etc.) in German, where the preterit (Ex. : I failed, etc.) is used in English. 2 Dazu, to that, to it, See page 161, note 1. 8 Helfen, literal : to help, governs the dative in German, although in English it is a transitive verb. See page 206, note 1. * Zu is used before an infinitive after other verbs. Observe, how- ever, that it is not used after the modal auxiliaries (konnen, wollen, miissen, mogen, sollen, and durfen), nor after the verbs horen, fiihleii, lernen, lehreii, heissen, helfen, machen, and lassen. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 201 Vek'-s'l. I have a letter of credit. A-66s'-ge-s7itelt'. On whom is it ? ^ Tsen-tral'-bank'. On the Zentralhank. What is that? Fa-lert'. The bank failed this morning. Z6-g]ich' pr5-tes-te'- r'n. Have your letter of credit pro- tested without delay.2 Da-tsoo'. I have no time. I want to start for Verona this Fer-la'-g'n-mt. very morning.^ I am in a pretty fix ! 4. OOiit IcJi vis mer nlcht tsdb li6F-f' n. Bor'-g'n. Shi'-nen tsvan'-tsicTi- mark'-sTitw'-k'n bank'- ba-e&s'. I'-nen shtln.' fom her'-ts'n. And I do not know how to get out of it.^ I '11 help you out.f How?* I can lend you 500 marks. What ! You would do that? Why not?^ See, here are three hundred marks in bills,'' hun- dred in crowns,^ and a draft for another hundred on the best banker in Berlin. You get me out of a bad scrape.® LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 On whom is lie (der Wechsel) drawn (lit. : exposed, or put off). 2 Then let (you) your letter of credit directly protest {i. e., to be pro- tested). — 8 I ^^\\\ still to-day evening to Verona leave. * I come in a beautiful embarrassment. 5 And I know ^o-myself not to help. — ^ Surely, certainly. 7 Or, Papiergeld (pa-per'-gSlf), paper money. 8 Also, in Kronen. 8 There take you to-nie a stone from the heart. — * In-how-far. t I will to-you out of-the difficulty help. 202 HOTEL UND PENSION. Ich weiss nicht, wie icli Ihnen danken soll.^ Keine Ursache. An meiner Stelle wiirden Sie dasselbe thun. 5. THE DATIVE CASE The dative case corresponds to the use of the English expressed or understood, as in I sent you a letter. You, here = I gave a book to the boy = I wrote to you = MASCULINE AND NEUTER FORM OF THE 1. — Masculine and Neuter nouns which form their take e in the dative. Thus : NoM. : Der Mann, the man. Das Weib, the woman. Gen. ; Dem Manne, to the man. Dem Wei be, to the ivoman. 2. — Masculine and Neuter nouns, which form their Hke the nominative in the dative singular. Thus : NoM. : Der Vater, the father. Gen. : Des Vaters, of the father. 3. — Masculine nouns, which form their genitive sing- dative. Thus : Nominative. Genitive. Der Fiirst, the prince. Des Fiirstcw, of the prince. Der Knabe, the boy. Des Knaben, of the boy. 4. — Feminine nouns have no ending in the dative none in the genitive. Ex. : -- Nominative. Genitive. Die Frau, the lady. Der Frau, of the lady. Die Tochter, the daughter. Der Tochter, of the daughter. NOTES. 1 The infinitive after how, tvltat and where may be translated into German by an infinitive witli sollen, miissen or konnen. Ex. : I do not know wliere to go= Ich weiss nicht, wohin ich gehen soil (I know not where-to I go shall). HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 203 Ich vis' nicTit ve Ich e' nen. Ki'-ne ooT'-zQi'-hhe. An mi'-ner s7ite'-le. 1 do not know ,how to thank yoii.i Don't mention it.^ In my place you would do the same thing. (See page 84, I.) IN GERMAN. noun, pronoun, or adjective, with to. (Of course to may be to-you.) Ex. : Ich gab dem Knaben ein Buch. Ich schrieb Ihnen. DATIVE WITH SINGULAR NOUNS.* genitive, in the singular, by adding es to the nominative, Des Manncs, of the man. Des Weibcs, of the ivomen. Dat. : genitive singular by adding s to the nominative, are exactly Dat. : Dem Vater, to the father. ular by adding en (or n), retain this ending also in the Dative. Dem Fiirsten-, to the prince. Dem Knaben, to the boy. singular. We have already seen (page 74) that they have Dative. Der Frau, to the lady. Der Tochter, to the daughter.* LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 How I to you thank shall. — ^ No reason ; no cause. * In the dative plural all nouns end in n, en or ern, according to the declension. 204 HOTEL UND PENSION. 6. Aber Sie trinken (ja)* gar nichts.^ Dieser Riidesheimer liegt schon zelin Jahre auf Flaschen. Sie miisseii wissen, dass dies liier einer der besten Keller in Berlin ist. Ich danke, Sie schenken mir zu oft ein. Dieser Wein schadet Ihnen nichts. Danke. Ich trinke wirklich nicht mehr. Sie essen ja* aber auch nicht. Ich muss gestehen, diese Wechselangelegenheit hat mir den Appetit benommen.^ Aber warum denn ? Sie verlieren (ja) nichts dabei. Das weiss ich wohl. Aber wo soil ich nun Gelder hernehmen ? Schreiben Sie auf der Stelle an Ihre Bankiers in New York. Sie werden Ihnen sofort einen Wechsel auf irgend ein andres Haus schicken. Kellner, die Rechnung, bitte. Hier, meine Herren. Bitte zahlen Sie an der Kasse. Gut. Dies ist fiir Sie, Kellner. NOTES. 1 Gar nichts, nothing at nil. JAt. : entirely, nothing. 2 From benehmen, bS-na'-nti'ii, to take nwnif, an inseparable verb. Those verbs wliich have as prefixes be, ent (einp), er, ge, ver, wider and zer are Inseparable in all the tenses. Moreover, tliey do not take the sign ge in tlie i)ast participle. Tlius : Abgelien, to drjxvrt (separable yerh). Past part.- abgegangeu (<"-'eiJ\ Vei'ljeren, /o lose (inseparable \erh).^ Past pait. : verloreii, /o.sMjk' xd * Ja {indeed) simply adds emphasis, and may be omitic*' HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 205 6. A^-b'r ze triu^-k'n ya gar^ nic/its. Bes'-t'n ke'-l'r. Slien'-k'n tsoo 6ft'. Sha'-det. Virk'-licTi. E'-s'n. Ge-s7ita'-'n a-pe-tet' be-no'-men. Fer-le'-ren dbhh nicTits'. Har'-na'-men. A-oof d'r s?ite'-le ban-ki-as'. Zo-fort'. RecTi'-ndbii. Tsa'-In ze an d'r ka'- But you do not drink anything-. This Rudesheimer has been bottled ten years. ^ You know they have one of the finest cellars in Berlin here. Thank you. You are giving me too much. 2 This wine will not hurt you.^ Thank you, I will not drink any more.* But you don't eat anything* either. I admit this letter of credit busi- ness takes my appetite away.^ The idea ! Why, you do not lose anything by it.' I know. But where shall I find funds now?' Write at once * to your bankers in New York. They'll send you a draft on some other house at once.* Waiter! the bill, if you please. Here (it is), gentlemen. Please pay at the counter.^*^ All right. ^^ Here is something for you, waiter.^2 LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Lies {already) ten years on bottles. — 2 You pour to-nie too often in. 8 Harms {to-) you nothing. — ^ I drink really not more. 5 I must admit this letter-of-credit-affair lias <^'W-^^^^^=*^^^^!^^^***'-^^^<:^ :;<4i^j3,»Si^^^<^><^^<^^^><^^^ii*' -t^W^^^t^^^ 7^<^t/e^eJ(^l^^^^s'^<^^'^'^^<^^f^i^^ ■'.'^^>i^/ii'fV*^i-^ OL^'i^'^^^e^i^^ ..<^^^^ «»^^tW^^^-<>J^'<^t-^^^^>^^^W*i<^^-^<' 1 Deren, their (lit, : of those). See p. 490. Also, ihrer. — « See p. 164. HOTEL AND BOARDING-HOUSE. 221 -^ft-'/^^^^t'*-^^ '^^/t^^t-st-*-^^ "^^^H^iH^f^ Qyc^n^cz^pt/^z- o-*^ Uy&tC^^. DIRECTIONS. Read and translate the above letter, after which copy it off, then learn it by heart, and some hour or two afterward write it again in German script from memory. For samples of letters, etc., see Written Alphabet, pages 48 and 49. TRANSLATION. Mr. N., Proprietor of the H. K. — I leave here on the 15th inst., with Mrs. D., my two children, and their ^ maid, expecting to arrive in Berlin about the 25th. I (write to) ask you to re- serve for us, for the date mentioned, three rooms in the second or third story, and facing the Zietenplatz, if possible. I shall telegraph you from London ^ the day and hour of our arrival in Berlin. Please send a carriage to meet us at the Hamburger depot. I remain, very respectfully yours, — Literal Translation. — The fifth June. I will on the 15th of this, with my wife, my two children, and of them ^ (the) maid from here leave, and think I pray you therefore to-us from-the 25th on where possible, toward the Zietenplatz outward, to-reserve to-please Please let ye us with a carriage from the Hamburger depot fetch. Respectfully, J. D. Pronunciation. — Be-zit'-s'r ge-ar'-t'r her' am fiinf-tsan-t'ii de'-zes oont da -r'n bo'-ne fon tier ap'-ri'-z'n 6on'-ge-f§.r' am fiinf-oont-tsvan'-tsicTi-st'ii dons fom funf-oont-tsvan'-tsic/i-st'n tse'-t'n- plats' ta-le-gra-fe'-r'n ap'-li5'-l'n. A.kh'-to6ns- fol'. Part III. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT ••o^« SECTION I. 1. — « — — ABOUT THE WEATHER. 2. SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS. 3. THE DAYS, MONTHS, etc. 4. THE EXCHANGE. 5. ON RISING. 6. AT A MONEY BROKER'S. 7. A WALK THROUGH DRESDEN (I). 8. FORM OF DRAFT. 223 m. DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Ich moclite^ lieute g^erii ausgeheii; aber wenii sich das Wetter bis ^ Mittag^ iiicht aufklart, werden wir zu Haiise^ bleiben miissen. PRONUNCIATION. Ich much^'t^ h6-i^-t6 gr^rii a-dbs^'-gra'-'n ; a^'-b'r v6n zich das v6^-t'r bis mV-tiikh nicht a-()<)f-kldrt', var^- d'n ver tsoo li^-db^-z6 bli^-b'n inii^-s'n. 1 Imperfect subjunctive of mogen, to he willing, to desire, etc. 2 Bis {till, until) is a preposition and governs the accusative. Bis, however, is often used adverbially with other prepositions, in the sense of to, as far as. Thus : Bis nach Rom = ns far as Rome ; Bis zur Qrenze (gr^n'-ts^) = to the frontier ; Bis auf die H&ut^^ to the skin. 224 III. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. I should like to go out to-day; but if the weather does not clear up before twelve, we shall have to stay at home.* LITERAL TRANSLATION. I might to-day willingly out-go, but if itself the weather till noon not up-clears, shall we at-home (to) stay be-obliged. 8 Or, zu Haus. Words of one syllable may drop the dative ending (e), or retain it, at the option of the speaker. * Zu Hause bleiben, to stay at home; but, nach Hause gehen, to go home. T/ii answers to the qnestioii ivliere, not whither. Never say zu Hause gehen, although many Germans incorrectly do so. 226 226 THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. I. GERMAN. 1. Ich mochte gem mit Ihnen ausgehen. Aber das Wetter ist so schlecht. Und die Strassen sind so nass. Und ich gehe nie aus, wenn es regnet. Sie konnten ja Ihre Gummischuhe anziehen.^ Ich habe mir noch keine Gummischuhe gekauft. Und gestern abend, als ich aus dem Theater kam, habe ich aucb noch meinen Regenschirm verloren. Ich mochte es'^ nicht wagen, so auszugehen.* Ihr Vetterf konnte Ihnen seine Gummischuhe leihen. Ach ja, Alfred, du wiirdest mir einen grossen Gefallen thuen. Aber ich fiirchte, sie werden dir zu klein sein. NOTES. 1 Anziehen and ausziehen are the words generally used to express to put on, to take off. \\\\i note tlie followinj:^ exceptions : To put on one's hat = Den Hut atifsetiseu (a-oof -ze'-ts*n) ; To take off ones hat = Den Hut absetzen (ap'-zg'-ts'n)r^ To put on a collar = Den Kragen tiin- binden; To take off a collar = T>en Kragen abbinden, — To put on Jeivcfs = Den Schmuek (lit. : adornment) anlegen ; To take off jewels = Den Schmuek ablegen. •-'• Es is frecjuently used to refer to an infinitive following it. Thus: Ich bereue es nicht, das gethan zu haben, I d(^ not repent to have done that. Lit.: I repent it not that done io-have. DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. 227 I. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. Ich much^'t^ g"6rii mit e^-n6n a-obs^-ga'-'n. De sTitra'-s'n zint zo nas'. Ne a-oos ven es rach'-net. Gob'-me-slioo'-e an'-tse'-'n. A-d6s dam te-a'-t'r . . . kam' ra'-g'n-sliirm' Va'-g'n zo'. Fe'-t'r li'-'n. Al'-fret' . . . t66'-'n. Ich iuTch'-te. ge-fa'-l'n I would very much like to go out with you.i But the weather is so bad. The streets are so wet. And I never go out when it rains. You could put on your rubbers. I haven't bought any rubbers yet. And last night I lost my um- brella on my way from the theater.^ I am afraid to go out this way.* But your cousin could lend you his rubbers. Yes, Alfred. You'll greatly oblige me.* But I am afraid they will, etc.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 T might (i. e., would) willingly with you go. — Notice the dative Ihnen after mit. ■■^ And yesterday evening, when I out the theater came, have I moreover my umbrella lost. 3 I might (i. e., would) it not dare, so out-to-go. ^ You would to-me a great favor do. * But I fear, they will to you {i. e., for you) too small be. * From ausgehen, a separable verb. t Ihr Vetter^your (male) cousin. Hire Cousine (Koo-ze'-nS), your (female) cousin. Sec page 150. 228 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Wie kannst du so etwas behaupten? Du machst dich iiber mich lustig. Or, Du hast mich zum besten. 3. Nun! Willst du sie mir^ leihen? Was willst du, — meine Gummischuhe und meinen^ Regenschirm ? Ja, natiirlich. Wann gehst du aus?^ Ich gehe gleich aus. Nun, so will ich sie dir^ gleich holen lassen. Johann, gehen Sie auf mein Zimmer! Meine neuen Gummischuhe sind unter dem Bett, und mein Regenschirm steht im Kleiderschrank. Bringen Sie beides herunter! 3. Sie haben ihm aber* den Schliissel niclit gegeben. Nein. NOTES. 1 For the position of the personal pronoun objects, see p. 148, 2 When two or more nouns follow each other, the possessive adjec- tives are repeated before each, if they are of different gender or number : My rubbers and my umbrella. 8 Or, if not speaking ftimiliarly : Wann gehen Sie aus? * Aber, doch, nur, wohl, etc., are often used in German, where no corresponding word is used in English. They simply add strength to the expression. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 229 Zo' et'-vas be-lia-cJop'-t'n. Doo makhst loos'- tich. Doo liast mich tsoom bes -t'n. 2. Noon! Vilst doo ze mer li^-'n. Ya, Yia-tixT'-lich. Van gast doo a-dos? Yo-lian'. (DOn'-t'r dam bet' kli -d'r-shrank'. How can you speak that way?^ You are mocking me.^ Or, You are making fun of me.* Bi'-des. Well ! Will you lend them to me ? What do you mean,* — my rubbers and^ umbrella? Why, of course. When are you going out ? I am going out right away. Well, then, I'll« have them brought to you at once."^ John, go up to my room.^ You will find my rubbers under the bed, and my umbrella in the closet.* Bring them down.^*> 3. Ze ha^-b'n em a^-b'r dan shlii^-s'l uicht g6- ga^-b'n. You didn't give him your key. No. I did n't give it to him.* LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 How can you so something {i. e., sncli a thing) affirm (be- haupten)?— ^ You make (yourself) over (i. e., at) me merry. 3 You have me to-the best. — ^ What will you?— 5 And my. 6 Now so will I. — "^ I will them to-you at-once fetch let. 8 Go upon my room. — ^ My new rubbers are under tlie bed, and my umbrella stands in the closet. — i" Bring (ye) both down. * Simply, No. German answers are made by the use of ja or nein only, much oftener than is the case in English. 230 DAS WETTER UNI) DIE RTADT. Dann wird* er nicht in Ihr Zimmer koiinen.^ Hat er nicht einen Hauptschliissel ? Das ist wahr. A propos,2 haben Sie Herrn Frank dieser Tage* gesehen ? Nein. Ich weiss nicht, was aus ihm , geworden ist. Warum besuchen Sie ihn nicht? Er miisste^ erst zu mir kommen. Ich bin so beschaftigt, dass ich nicht weiss, wo mir der Kopf steht.* Aber wenn man Sie besuchen will, trifFt man Sie nie zu Hause. Mich ! Sie scherzen. Ich komme ja kaum vor die Thiir. Note. — Study the Mixed Declension, NOTES. 1 Konnen, as seen here, is sometimes used instead of gehen konnen. ^ From the French, d. propos. Purely German phrases for Bi/ the way are: (1) Was ich noch sagen wollte, lit.: What T besides tell wanted. (2) Da f allt mir ein, lit. : There occurs to-me f str. : falls to-me in). 8 Er miisste, he should {be obliged), imperfect subjunctive of miis- sen. 4 Idiomatic expression. Other phrases with Kopf, are : Aufseineni Kopfe bestehen, to be obstinate ; Das will luir uiclit in den Kopf, / canH get it into my head; Jemandem den Kopf waschen, to (jive a good scolding ; Den Kopf verlieren, to lose one's senses. * See page 20, note 1. THE WEATHER Dan virt ar nicht. Ha-oopt'-slilu'-s'l. Das ist var'. A-pro-po' frank. AND THE CITY. 231 Ar mws'-te arst tsoo mer'. Zo' be-slief -ticTit vo mer dar kopf sTz-tat. Trift man. Ze sher-ts'n lor de tiir^ ka-d6m He will not be able to open the door.^ Has n't he his skeleton key ? That 's true. By the way, have you seen Mr. Frank lately.^ I? No. I don't know what has become of him.^ Why don't you go and see him ? 4 He ought to come and see me.^ I am so busy, I don't know® what to do.' But you are never in when people call on you.^ I ! You are joking. I scarcely ever go out.® page 474. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Then will he not in your room {to go) be-able. 2 These days; or, more strictly : o/-these days. Time, in an indefi- nite way, is expressed by the genitive. Seepage 3 What (out) of him become is. Geworden, past part, of werden. 4 Why visit you him not? ^Besuchen, an ' i/jseparable ' verb, page 234. 5 He ought (lit. : must) first to me (to) come. 6 I am so very busy, that I know not where to-me the stands. 7 Where to-me tlie head stands. 8 But when one you visit will, meets one you never at home. '■^ I come yes (i. e., indeed) scarcely before the door. fee' head 232 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. 5. Wann^wollen Sie ihii besuchen? Ich weiss nicht. Hat er noch die alte Wohnung ? Ja, aber ich weiss nicht, ob er heute friih zu Hause sein wird. Nun, ich kann ja einmal * vorbeigehen. Gut! Gehen Sie vorbei. Sagen Sie einmal,* hat Ihre Frau Gemahlin die Muster bekommen? 6. IVeiii, man hat sie ihr^ noch nicht zuge- schickt.^ Das begreife ich nicht. Ich hatte es den Leuten doch so dringHch gemacht. Gewohnlich schicken sie die Sachen sehr piinkt- Hch zu. Da kommt Johann ; der bringt die Sachen gewiss. Nein, er hat sie nicht. 7. Johann, warnm haben Sie uns die Saclien nidlit lieruntergebraclit ? * Ich habe sie iiberall gesucht. NOTES. 1 When, in interrogative sentences, = wann. Elsewhere, when = weun (or sometimes: als). Ex.: (1) Wann Avollen Sie ihn be- suchen? (2) Ich will ihn besuchen, ivenn ich weiss, dass er zu Hause ist. — For tlie use of als, see page 443, note f. 2 When there are two pronoun-objects in the same clause, the accu- sative precedes the dative. See page 148. 8 From zuschicken, 'separable' verb. * From herunterbrinsreB- 'senarable' verb. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. ;33 5. Van vo^-rn ze en b6- De al'-te vo'-ndoii. 6p zin virt. In-mal' * f or-bi'-ga'-'n. For-bi'. Md6s'-t'r be-ko'-m'n. 6. Man hat ze er nokh uichV tsoo^-g6-shikt'. Das be-gri'-fe. Zo driii'-licTi. Ge-v/•. — Notice the idiomatic expressions: Es fragt sicli, it is the (juestion (lit.: it asks itself); Ich frage nichts danach, / dont care for it (lit.: / ask nothiiu/ afUr-thai). THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 239 In no-i'-'r oon'-t'n in der s/itat'. LT-b'r-al' ge-z6okht'. Te-a'-t'r. A-o6s a'-l'r fer-la'-g'n-tiit. Fi'-lip .... las dbns ga'-'n. But this is a new (one) which ^ I bought down town a week ago. I looked for it everywhere this morning. And as I couldn't find it, I bought one last night on my way from the theater. Well, if that is your umbrella you are all right.^ Yes, indeed.8 Well, Philip, I am ready. Let us go. page 514. to, V6n ya-maiit nakh mer fra^-g-'n z6F-t6, aF- fr6t , zo za^-ge das ich dbiii fiinf Bli'-be nicht len'-'r. For'-ges'-t'rn ko'-men. Fer-ka-66'-fn. ve'-d'r- Alfred, if any one should (come and) ask for nie, say that I shall be back at five o'clock. Very well, but do not cunie later.'* No. I '11 be back exactly on time. The gentleman who called to see you day before yesterdn y ^ was going to return to-day.* What does he want with me ? I think he wants to sell you his house.'' LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Which (strictly : the) I ago eight days down in the town bought have. — Notice that which can never be omitted in German. 2 If that your umbrella is, then are you indeed out of every embar- rassment. — 8 That am I really. — * But stay not longer, or {not familiar) : Bleiben Sie nicht, etc. — ^ "Who day before y. here was. c Will to-dav again come. — "^ He will to-thee his house sell. 240 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Er wird es fiir den Preis, den ich zahlen wiirde, nicht verkaufen. ja, wenn du alles baar bezahlst. Er braucht^ Geld. Nun, wir wollen 'mal * sehen. Gut. Auf Wiedersehen ! Sei aber piinktlich hier ! Aber jetzt miissen wir fort. Der Zug geht^ um zehn Uhr ab, und es ist gerade halb zehn. Um wie viel Uhr geht^ der Zug ab? Ich sagte, dass er um zehn Uhr abgeht.^ Sie haben recht. Sie miissen gleich fort. NOTES. 1 From brauchen, to need, to want, to /ac^. — "Note the following expressions : Er braucht nicht zu befiirchten, dass . . . . , He need not fear that . . . . , etc. Sie brauchen nur zu sprechen, You have hut to speak. Sometimes brauchen is used instead of gebrauchen, to use. Thus : Das ist nicht zu brauchen. That is of no iise (lit.: that is not to want). 2 Indicative present. Hence, the prefix ab is found at the end of the clause. « Indicative present. But the prefix is not separated from the verb, because the verb is here in a dependent clause. Were dass omitted, however, and the clause no longer a dependent one, the order would be: Ich sagte, er geht um zehn Uhr ab. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 241 Tsa'-rn. Bar be-tsalst' hra-obkht gelt'. Mai. A-oof ve'-d'r-za'-'n pwnkt'-licTi. Yetst rau'-s'n ver fort'. Dar tsookh gat (56in tsan oor ap'. Zakh'-te ap'-gat'. Ze tia'-b'n TechV . fort. glicTi He would never sell it for what I would pay.* Yes, if you paid cash.^ He needs funds. Well, we '11 see.8 Very well, — good-by.* Be here without fail.^ But now we must go.* The train goes at ten o'clock,' and it is already half-past nine. At what time does the train start? 8 I said the train starts at ten o'clock.® You are right. You must be off at once.io LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 For the price which I pay would. 2 If you all cash paid. 8 We will {once) see. 4 Upon again-seeing. 5 Be but punctually here. 6 Must we forth. Or: Miissen wir fortgehen. 7 Goes at ten o'clock off. 8 At what hour goes the train off. 9 I said that the train at ten o'clock away-goes. 10 You liave right. You must immediately forth. * In familiar conversation, the Germans often abbreviate einmal into mal. Sag 'mal, or, Sagen Sie 'mal=>Sfay. 242 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. I. — Die Tage. Soiintag (zonMafe^), Montag (mon'-taikh'), Dienstag (dens'- taT^Ti'), Mittvvoch (miV-vokh'), Donnerstag (do'-n'rs-ta^Ti'), Freitag (tri'-tOikh'), Sonnabend (z6n'-a'-b'nt), Sainstag (zams'-taT^^'), Naclisten Montag" ^ (ndcfe^-st'n), Vorigen Montag^ (fo'-ri-gen), Am^ Montag, Des Montags,* Vorg-estern (f or^'-gfes -t'rn), Morgen (mor'-g'n), Ubermorgen (u'-b'r-mor'-g'n), Nachste Woche, Vorige Woche, Eine Woche, or acht Tage, Zvvei Wochen, or vierzehn Tage, Vor vierzehn Tagen, Sunday. Monday. Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday, Friday. Saturday. Next Monday. Last Monday. On Monday On Mondays.^ Day before yesterday. To-morrow. Day after to-morrow. Next week. Last week. One week. Two weeks. Two weeks ago. 1 Accusative of time. — 2 Or, letzten Montag ; or, vergangenen Montag. — 8 Instead of an dem Montag (lit.: on the Monday). The names of tlie clays of the week usually take the definite article. 4 Or simply, Montags; without the article. {Genitive of time. See page ITS). — ^ Meaning, on evtry Monday. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 243 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. II.— Die Monate. Januar (ya^-ndb-ar), January. Februar (fa'-brdo-ar), February. Miirz (merts), March. April (a-prir), April. Mai (mi), May. Juni (ypo'-ne)^ June. Juli (yoo'-le), July. August (a-oo-goost'), August. September (zep-tem'-b'r), September. Oktober (6k-to'-b'r), October. November (no-veni'-b'r), November. Dezember (da-tsem'-b'r), December. Im 1 Januar, In January. Die Festtage (f6st^-ta'-gr6), The holidays. Weihnachteu ^ (vi'-na7^?i-t'n), Christmas. Neujahr (no-i'-yar'). New Year. Fastnacht (fasV-nakht'), Shrove-Tuesday. Karfreitag (kar'-fri'-taT^Tj), Good-Friday. Ostern 2 (os'-t'rn), Easter. Pfingsten2(pfin'-st'n), Whitsunday. 1 Instead of, in efetn Januar (lit. : in the January). Observe that, in German, tlie names of the months are generally used with the defi- nite article. — '■^ Weihnachten, Ostern, and Pfingsten are plurals. But in using these nouns the word Fest, festival, holiday, is under- stood; they therefore take the verb in tlie singular: Ostern ist ge- kommen, Easter has arrived. — Tliese words are not used with the article: Zu Welhnachten, vor Ostern, nach Pfingsten. 244 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. The foUomng vocabulary to be learned by hea/rt. III.— Das Datum.* Den wievielten haben wir ? * Heute ist der zehnte, Lassen Sie sehen, Das ist richtig, Was haben wir heute fiir einen Tag? Heute ist Donnerstag, Sie irren sich, Es ist erst 2 Mittwoch, Bitte um Verzeihung. Sehen Sie auf den Kalender,* Sie haben recht, Gestern war Dienstag, Morgen ist Donnerstag, Gestern war der neunte, Morgen ist der elfte, Das ist recht, Ich kann keine Daten behalten,! Mein Gedachtnis fiir Daten ist immer sehr schlecht gewesen, What day of the month have we? It 's to-day the tenth. Let me see. That 's right. What day of the week have we? To-day is Thursday. You are mistaken. It is only Wednesday. Beg pardon. Look at the cal- endar. You are right. Yesterday was Tuesday. To-morrow will be Thursday. Yesterday was the 9tb. To-morrow will be the 11th. That 's right. I never can remember dates. My memory for dates has al- ways been very poor. 1 Or, der wievielte ist heute. 2 When only is used with notions of time, it is rendered by erst, not by nur. Used as an adjective, it is to be translated by einzig: His only son, sein einziger Sohn. — 8 Ka-lSn'-d'r. * Dais da'-toom. Lit. ; the date. Plural : die Dateu. t Lit. : I can no dates retain. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 245 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. IV.— Die Borse.* Aiif der Borse, On 'Change.f Ein Makler (mak'-l'r), A (stock) broker. Ein Wechsler (veks'-l'r), A money broker. Die Hausse ^ (lio'-se), The rise. Die Baisse ^ (ba'-se), The fall. Aktien « (ak'-tsi-en), /., Stocks. Gold (golt), n., Gold. In Gold, In gold. Silber (zil'-b'r), n., Silver. Deutsches Geld, German money. In Silber, In silver. Das Klein-geld * (klin'-gelt'). Small change. Eine Bank-note (baflk'-no'-te), A bank-note. Ein Schuldschein (shoolt'-slim'), m., A bond, a note. Ein Wechsel (vek -s'l), m.,^ A draft. Ein Kreditbrief (kre-dit'-bref ), m., A letter of credit. Zahlbar auf Sicht (tsal'-bar a-66f zichV), Payable on sight. Leihen (Li'-'n), To borrow. J Leihen, To lend. 1 Or, das Steigen (s/iti'-g'n) der Kurse (kdor'-ze), the rising of the course. *^ Or, das Fallen (fa'-l*n) der Kurse, the falling of the course. 8 From die Aktie (ak'-tsi-e).- * Or, Scheidemiinze, shl'^le-mien'-tse. ^ Or, eine Tratte (tra'-tg). * De Bur'-ze, the Exchange. — f Or, on "the street." t Also, borgen. 246 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To he learned by heart and recited as a conversation, ivhether for Self-Study or preparation for the class-room. (See Directions before Part I,) GESPRACHE.t l. — DAS AUFSTEHEN* Herr Klein, stehen Sie auf ! Sie wollten um sieben Uhr geweckt sein. — Was, es ist schon sieben Uhr ? — Ja, es ist fiinf Minuten iiber sieben. — Gut, ich werde gleich aufstehen. — Wollen Sie nicht Ihren Schlaf- rock ^ anziehen ? — Nein, geben Sie mir meine Bein- kleider.2 — Hier sind sie. — Ich kann meine PantofFeln^ nicht finden. Ich weiss nicht, wo ich sie hingestellt habe. — Da sind sie, neben dem Waschtisch.^ — Johann, giessen^ Sie mir warmes Wasser ins Waschbecken,^ ich will mich waschen. — Nachher will ich niich rasieren.' — Wollen Sie mir mein Rasiermesser ^ und den Rasierpinsel ^ reichen?^^ — Gut. Nun bringen Sie mir noch ein Handtuch.^^ — Danke. Bitte, giessen Sie etwas kaltes Wasser ins Waschbecken. — Hier. — Wo ist der Kamm ? ^ — Ich habe ihn seit western to^ Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Shlaf'-rok', morning-gown.— 2 Biu'-kli'-d'r, pantaloons. 8 Pan-to'-f'ln, slippers. — ^ Vash'-tisli , wash-stand. 6 Pour out. — ^ Basin. — ^ Ra-ze'-r'n, to shave. 8 Ra-zer'-mg'-s'r, razor. — ^ Slitivinu-brnsli. — w Pass. 11 Towel. — 12 Cotnb. — - A-oof'-s/fta-'n, to rise. THE WEATHER AND THE CTrY. 247 abend nicht gesehen. — Da ist er. Er war h inter die Kommode^ gef alien. il, - FORTSETZUNG. Welche Schuhe wollen Sie anziehen ? — Ich weiss nicht. — Ich glaube, Sie wiirden gut thun, Ihre Schuhe mit Doppelsohlen ^ anzuziehen, denn es ist schlechtes Wetter. — Nein. Geben Sie mir nieine Scliniirstiefel.^ — Aber, mein Herr, die Sohlen sind ja ganz zerrissen.* — Dann lassen Sie noch heute neue Sohlen auflegen.^ — Gut, ich werde es besorgen. — Aber sagen Sie dem Schuhmacher, er miisste die Stiefel bis iibermorgen friih sicher wiederbringen. 3.-BEI EINEM WECHSLER. Konnten Sie mir wohl fiir diese Hundert-Dollar- Note deutsches Geld geben? — Entschuldigen Sie, mein Herr, wir nehmen keine Banknoten. Sie finden ein Geschaft,^ das Banknoten nimmt, in der Briiderstrasse^ No. 272. — Das ist schrecklich ^ weit. — Allerdings.^ Sie batten besser Gold mitgebracht, oder noch besser einen Kreditbrief. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Ko-mo'-de, a chest of drawers. — 2 D6'-p'l-zo -Pn, double soles. 3 Shniir'-s/i-te'-f'l, lacing boots. — ^ Tser-ri'-s'n, from zerreis- sen, inseparable compound verb. To tear, wear imi. 5 A-dof'-la -g'ji, to put on. — 6 Ge-slieft', lousiness. 7 Bru'-d'r-s/jtia-se.— 8 Slnek'-lic/f, terribly. 9 A'-Pi-diiis , iihlied.— f Ge-s/ipra'-e/tc. 248 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To he translated and written into German ; but also to be recited orally in the class-room. (For Self-Study, see Directions before Part I,) EXERCISES. 1.- ABOUT SAMPLES. Did Mr. Macy send you those samples of silk?^ — No, he has not sent them to me yet.^ — I told him to do so day before yesterday.^ — Please call on him to-day,* and ask him why he has not sent them yet?^ Tell him I must have them before to-night.^ 2. — SAME SUBJECT. Why didn't you send those samples of silk to Mr. Lovell?^ — (Why), I sent them to him yesterday. — He has not received them. — That's impossible. When did you see him? — I saw him this very morning. — Well, wait a minute. I am going to have them sent to him at once.^ Aids to Translation. 1 Has to-yoii Mr. Macy the samples of silk (Seidenmuster, z.V- d'n-nioos'-t'r) sent. 2 He has tliem not yet sent. 8 I have it to-liini however (doch) day before yesterday ordered (aufgetragen, a-dof'-ge-tra'-g'n). * Please pass to-day thereby (gehen Sie vorbei). fi Why he them ncjl yet sent has? ® That I them before to-night have must. ' Why have you these samples of silk to Mr. Lovell not sent? 8 I will them to-him at-once send let. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 249 3. — INFORMA TION* (Beg) pardon/ sir ; would you please tell me where the Gerson is? — I am very sorry, but I do not know exactly.^ Ask that policeman. He will be able to tell you.^ What day of the month have we? — It's to-day, the 10th. — Isn't Mr. Miiller's note payable to-day?* — Let me see. August 21st, 1889. That's right. — Now, what day of the week have we? — It's to-day, Tuesday. 4. - A r A MONEY-BROKER'S. Would you have the kindness to give me German money for these twenty-dollar pieces? — How would you like to have them ? ^ In gold, or bank bills ? — In gold, if you please. Why, you give me only two hundred and forty marks! — That's right. — But two hundred and forty marks are not worth ^ sixty dollars.^ — No, sir. But there is the bulletin.^ You will see the rate on it.^ Aids to Translation. 1 Verzeiliung. 2 I know it (es) not exactly. 3 Er ^vird es Ihnen sagen konnen. •* 1st Herrii 3Iullers Note heute nicht fallig? s Wie mochten Sie es haben? 6 Are not sixty dollars worth (wert, vSrt). "^ Kurszettel, koors'-tse'-t'l. 8 You will see the rate (Kurs, masc.) upon it (darauf) * Auskunft (a-oos'-koonff). 250 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To he read by means of the literal translation opposite, then withoui it, in preparation for reading aloud and translating — (gnb(id) aii§ bem $otel ! Set^t tt)ollen tt)ir 'tia^ beutfc^e glorenj* nd(;er befefjen! — 3Ste anber^ fief)t je|t atte^ au§/ alg geftern abenb, ii)ie iDir anfamen. — 9lid)t tt)aE)r? Slber ift ba§ ni(f)t eine fonberBare beiit|d;e ©tabt? — 2Bie fo? — 3^ meine, e§ fie^t e^cr tt)ie eine ameri!amfrf)e al§ Une eine beutfd)e ©tabt au§. ©e^en (Sie bocB biefe Saben ! * ©elite man nidjt glauben, man fei in SfJetx) 3)orf? — ©ie \:fCihzn red)t; unb, tt)ie ©ie tt)iffen, ift tt)ir!lid) eine gro^e ameri!anifd)e £olonie * bier. — ®a§ \:)on diapl)ad,t bie be= ri'i^mte §o(beinfd)c 3}Zabonna,J (Eorreggiog 33u§enbe Tlaa^ha- UnaX unb (Earlo ©olcegt ^Jleiftemer!, bie fjeilige (EdciUe. 3Bir tt)ol[en bie @emdlbegatlerie iibermorgen befuc^en, bann trerben 6ie ©etegen^eit ^ahm, biefe ^unfttcerfe ^u beicun; bern. — 3Sag fiir eine fd)dne ^ird^e er^ebt fic^' "oa ^u unfrer — ®ag ift bie fat[;o(ifc^e ^offircfje. 3n berfelben finbet aik Sonnnmb g^efttagej grofee 3Jieffe ftatt/ bei ber ©ie eine augge^eid)nete Mrdjenmufif ^oren !i3nnen. — Unb jeneg f(f)5ne ©ebdube ^ur Sinfen mit ben Statuent •i)on ©c^iHer unb ©oet^ej ift t)ernmtUc^ ein 2^(;eater. — Qa, unb p)ax eing ber fd)onften ber SSeft. 2)ie anberen ©tatuen, bie ©ie fe^en, ftellen Bop^ofk^, ©uri^ibeg unb ^Jloliere bar. 1 strictly : only patience. — 2 Strictly : moreover. — 8 Strictly : to-you. 4 Strictly : fijid themselves. — 5 Strictly : what is that? « Strictly: themselves various museums find. — ^ Strictly: raises itself . 8 Strictly : findit .... place. — * Kdonst'-v8r'-k'n, i ShiTi6bk'-za'-/r/i'ii. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 253 — Not so fast I ^ Therefor have we no time. We vvant {ourselves) to-day only the most-important points from the-outside to-look-at. However ,2 will you ^ the Green Vault certainly very v/ell please. The wealth in works-of-art and jewelry which it contains is enor- mous. Only in one room are foimd^ jt^wels in-ihe value of fifteen million dollars. In another is a pearl to see so large as a hen's egg — What^ is that for a large building there over? — That is the Zwinger, in which various museums are found,^ — among others the famous picture-gallery. As you know, contains the-same (the) most-precious art-treasures, namely the Sistine Madonna of Raphael, the celebrated Holbein's Madonna, Correggio's recum- bent Magdalen, and Carlo Dolce's masterpiece (tJte) Saint-Cecilia. We will the picture-gallery day-after- to-morrow visit, then will you (an) opportunity have these art-works to admire. — What {for a) beautiful church rises ^ there to our right? — That is the Catholic court-church. In-the-same takes^all Sundays-and feast-days high mass place, at which you (a) most-excellent chant-music hear can. — And that fine building to-the left, w4tli the statues of Schiller and Goethe, is undoubtedly a theater. — Yes, and indeed one of-the most-beautiful of- the world. The other statues which you see represent Sophocles, Euripides, and Moliere (there). t Tsviii'-'r .... moo-za'-en .... ge-mal'-dg-ga'-le-re' .... hSr'- lic/i-st'ii koonst'-shet'-se .... ziks-te'-nT-she ma-do'-na foil ra'- fa-eF. . . . hol'-biii -she .... ko-re'-dzhi-os .... dol'-tshas ..... hi'-li-ge tsa-tse'-li-e .... zon'-oont fest'^ta'-ge .... slita'-to6'-en .... gu'-te. ^ 254 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. t^ftU^ — SIGHT DRAFT. DIBECTIONS. — Follow directions already given on page 221. t^iZ^Z^Z^, '■ir-ZY^Pi^. TRANSLATION. — At (lit.: hy) sight, please pay against this sole (bill of) exchange, the sum of 1500 marks, and charge* my account (therewith). Value received. * 1 Pron.: zicM'-vek -s'l. - 2 Pron. ; zo-la'-vek -s'l; b^.las'-t'n (lit. : to-debit) ; vSrt, etc. (lit. : worth from Mr. Ji. received). Part^ III. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. DAS WETTER UKD DIE STADT, •o^o* SECTION II. 1. ABOUT THE WEATHER. 2. PREPOS. WITH DATIVE AND ACCUSAT. 3. VOCABULARY : THE WEATHER, etc. A. A VISIT. 5. GOING SKATING. 6. MEETING AN ACQUAINTANCE. 7. A WALK THROUGH DRESDEN (II). 8. A LETTER OF THANKS. 255 256 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. n. GERMAN. 1. Aber wenn sich das Wetter bis Mittag nicht auf klart, werde ich es iiicht thuen konnen. Was machen Sie da? Ich laute dem Diener.^ Ich will mir meine Stiefel wichsen lassen, bevor^ ich ausgehe. Ich rate Ihnen, heute niorgen nicht auszugehen. Sehen Sie doch. Es wird ganz dunkel. Wie langweilig! Alle Tage schlechtes Wetter!^ 2, Wir haben* schlechtes Wetter, so lange wir hier sind.* Die erste Woche hat es geregnet. Die zweite Woche hat es fast alle Tage geschneit. NOTES. 1 Der Diener, the {male) servant; die Dienerin, the {female) serv- ant. See page 9, note 3. 2 Bevor = fte/ore, when used as a conjunction. When used as a preposition {i.e., before a noun), hefore = \or» 8 Instead of: Wie langweilig ist es, Alle Tage ist schlechtes Wetter. — ^ In German the present is used (instead of the past tense) to express whatever action is still going on at tlie time we speak. Thus, the sentence above means, that we have had {and still have] bad weather. THE VVEATHEli AND THE CITY. 257 n. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. A^-b'r veil zAch das ve^- t'r bis iwY'tiikh iiic/tt a-obf -klait , var^-de Ich es iiicM too^-'n ku^-n6n. Vas ma'-A:7i'n ze da'. Ich 16-i'-te .... de'-ner .... s7ite'-f l"vik'-s'n .... be-for'. Ra'-te. Gants ddoii'-k'l. Ve lan'-vi'-licTi . . . siilecTi'- tes. 2. Ver ha^-b'ii sbl6c7t^-t6s ve^-t'r z6 laii^-6 ver her^ ziiit. Ge-rac/i'-net. Fast a'le ta'-ge ge-stmit'. But if the weather does not clear up before noon, I shall not be able to do so. What are you doing? I am. ringing for the servant.^ I want to have my boots blacked ^ before I go out. I advise you not to go out this morning.^ See. The weather is clouding up.'* What an annoyance ! ^ Every day (we have) bad weather. We have had bad weather since we've been here. The first week it rained.'' The second it snowed nearly every day. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 I ring to-the servant, 2 I will to-me my boots black let. 3 I advise to-you. See page 206, paragraph 1. * It becomes quite dark. 5 How tedious {or, irksome). 6 We have bad weather so long we here are. page.) 7 The first week has it rained. (See note 4, opposite 258 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. In der dritten Woche haben wir nur am Montag und Dienstag schones Wetter gehabt. Am Mittwoch hat es geregnet. Und heute regnet es noch.^ Sie irren sich,^ es regnet nicht. Das ist wahr, ich babe mich gb'icklicherweise geirrt. Aber es ist so dunkel, dass ich glaubte, es regnete. 3. Wie ist das Wetter draussen, Herr X.? Noch regnet es nicht. Aber es wird nicht lange dauern. Es wird immer dunkler. Sehen Sie, wie der Himmel sich bezieht.^ Wahrhaftig; man kann bald nichts mehr sehen. Es wird im AugenbHck regnen. Das Wetter wird gleich losbrechen. Ich wusste es ja, dass es regnen wiirde. NOTES. 1 Notice the inversion, because heute ])egins the sentence. See p. 84. 2 Or, simply, Sie irren. lrren = to err, to stray, to wander, to be mis- taken; but in the last meaning the reflexive form of the verb {sich irren) is mostly used. 8 Or, wie der Himmel sich bewollit (bS-vullctO, lit.: clouds itself. Or, wie die Wollcen heraufkonimen, Ikhc (he chmds arc couiing-up. Tsed in a metapliorical sense, sich bezielien = <'> refer. Ex. : Ich beziehe mieli auf Herrn X., I refer to Mr. X. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 259 Siiii'-nes ve'-t'r. Ze i'-ren zicTi. GltZk'-li-c7i'r-vi'-ze. The third we had sunny days on Monday and Tuesday only.^ On Wednesday it rained. And to-day it is raining yet. You are mistaken. It is not.'^ That's so. I was mistaken, fortunately. But it is so dark, I thought it must be raining. 3. Ve ist das v6^-t'r dra-db^-s'n nokh raci^^-ii6t 6s iiicht. NicTtt lan'-e da-oo'-'rn. Ve d'r lii'-m'l zich be- tset'. Var-haf'-ticTi. Im a-oo'-g'n-blik'. Ij5s'-bre'-c7i'n. V66s'-te. How is the weather out- side, Mr. X.? It is not raining yet. But it will rain before long.^ The weather is clouding up."* See how cloudy the sky is getting.5 Yes. It's so dark you can't see anything.® It will rain in a moment. The storm will be down upon us."^ I knew it would rain any way. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 In the third week have we only on Monday and Tuesday beautiful weather had. 2 It rains not. The Germans cannot say simply it is, it does, he does, etc., referring to a preceding verb. They must say : it is raining (lit. : it rains) ; it does rain (lit. : it rains) , he does go (lit. : it goes), etc. 8 But it will not long last. — ^ U becomes always darker, s How the sky itself covers. — 6 One can nearly (lit. : soon) nothing more see. — J" The weather will directly forth-break. 260 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Gestern scliien ^ die Sonne wahrend des Regens, und das ist immer ein sicheres Zeichen, dass es am nachsten Tag regnen wird. So sagt man. Note. — Study the Strong Verbs, Class II., Ich rate Ihiieii, bei diesem schlechten Wetter nicht auszugelieii. Aber wenn Sie ausguhen, ziehen Sie sich recht warm an. — Or: Sehen Sie sich wohl vor.^ Wie schade; mein Regenmantel ist ganz abge- tragen. Ich kann nicht mehr damit gehen. Nehmen Sie doch den meinigen.^ Aber warum lassen Sie denn Ihren Wagen nicht kommen ? Weil ein Hinterrad zerbrochen* ist. Johann soil es heute noch reparieren lassen. Dann benutzen f Sie den meinigen.^ NOTES. 1 Schien, imperfect of scheinen, to sliine. '^ Vorsehen, reflexive verb, to take care. There are many reflexive verbs in German, which are not reflexive in Englisli. Some of those most in nse are: sich belinden; sich erinnern (5r-i'-n'rn), to recol- lect; sich fiirchten, to he afraid; sich irren; sich schamen (sh^'- m'n, to he ashamed; sich betrageii, to hehave ; sich entschliessen (Snt-shle'-s'n), to make up one's mind; sich freueii, to rejoice, to he (jlad ; sich setzen, to sit down; sich weigern (vi'-g'rn), to refuse; sich erholen, to recover. 3 Accusative of der meinige. Also : den fneinen, accusative of der tneine. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 261 Shen . tsi'-ch'n. zo -ne m Zo za.kht' man. The sun was shining yesterday while it was raining,^ and that 's a sure sign of rain for the next day.^ That 's what they say.* page 515. 4. Ich ra^-t6 e^-n6n bi de^- zem sMech^'Vn v6^-t'r jiicht a-obs^-tsob-g'a -'ii. Vol ioT\ Slia'-de .... ra'-g'n-man'- t'l ap'-ge-tra'-g'n. E'-ren va'-g'n. Das liin'-ter-rat' tser-bro'- Ra-pa-re'-ren. Be-ndo'-ts'n. I advise you not to go out in such bad weather. But if you do go out, wrap yourself up well."* — Or: Take care of yourself.^ It 's too bad.* My rubber cloak is entirely worn out. I can't wear it any more."^ Take mine. Any way, why don't you order your carriage ? ^ One of the hind wheels is broken.* John is to have it repaired to- day.io Well, take mine then." LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Yesterday shone the sun during the rain. •2 A sure sign that it on the next day rain will. — » So says one. •1 Di-ess ye yourself very warmly. Anzielien, to dress. 5 Provide (ye) for yourself well. Vorsehen, to provide for. 6 How pity.— 7 I can no more therewith (with-it) go. 8 But why let you {then) your carriage not come? 9 Because one hind-wheel broken is. 10 .Tolin sliall it to-day still repair let. 11 Tlien use (ye) the mine. ^ From zerbreclien, an inseparable verb. t Or, beniitzen. 262 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. 5. Hiinmel! Das war ein Schlag! Seheii Sie, wie es blitzt! Natiirlich werde ich jetzt nicht ausgehen. Das glanbe ich gern. Es giesst ja wie mit Kannen.^ 6. Wer steigt da driiben an dem Hause aus? Ich glaube wahrhaftig, es ist Ihr Schwager. Allerdings, das ist sein Wagen. Der Kutscher hat sich im Plans geirrt. Kein Wunder, bei solchem^ Wetter! Sehen Sie! Da kommt er iiber die Strasse. Ich mochte wissen, was ihn bei einem solchen^ Wetter hierher fiihrt. Guten Morgen, Schwagerin, wie geht es Ihnen? Danke, ausgezeichnet, aber ich bin um Sie^ be- sorgt. Sie sind ja bis* auf die Haut nass. NOTES. 1 Idiomatic expression. Also (in some parts of Germany \ : Es giesst mit Mulden (moor-d'ii). Lit. : it pours {as) with (i. e., out of) trm/s (or troughs). 2 Solch, such is also used with tlie indefinite article, the latter either preceding it, as: bei einem solcheu "Wetter; or following it, as in lOnglish : bei solch einem Wetter. Notice that in the latter case, solch is undeclinable. 3 The preposition um governs the accusative. Hence, here, um SiCf not um Ilinen. See page 114. * Bis is often used thus with prepositions, to express limit. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 263 5. HK-m'l! Das^ var in Es blitst'. Na-tlir'-licTi. Es gest ka'-nen. 6. Var shticht drii^-b'n an dam lia-ob^-ze a-dbs^? Var-liaf'-tic7i. A'-lT-dins'. Kc5bt'-sii'r. Voon'-d'r zoV-ch'm. Her'-har' Shv^'-ge-rin. A-oos'-ge-tsic7i'-nSt . ze'be-zorcTit'. A-oof de lia-oot' nas. Goodness! What a clap of thunder ! ^ How it is lightning ! Really, I am not going out now.^ I should think so. It is pour- ing down.^ Who is that getting- out of a carriage at the door of the house opposite ? * I really think it is your brother-in-law. Why, it is his turn-out. The coachman mistook the house.** Well in such a storm ! But there he is coming on this side.® I wonder why he comes here in such weather.' Good morning, sister-in-law. How are you? I am very well indeed. But I fear for your health.^ You are wet to the skin. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. ^ Heaven ! That was a stroke ! 2 Of course (lit. : naturally) shall 1 now not out-go. 3 That helieve I willingly. It pours indeed as with {i. e., out of) jups. 4 Who gets (lit. : climbs) there on the other side at (the door of) tlie house out (of a carriage). 5 The coachman has himself in-the house mistaken. 6 There comes lie over tlie street. 7 I viight know wliat liim by such a weather hither leads. ^ I am about you anxious. 264 DAS WEITER UND DIE STADT. Sie werden sich sicher erkalten.^ Sehen Sie, Sie miissen schon niesen. Ja. Aber es regnet auch^ mit Mulden.^ Ich bin nur liber die Strasse gegangen und bin durch und durch nass geworden. Note. — Study the Personal Pronouns, 7. Glauben Sie, dass es den ganzen Tag* regnen wird? Ich glaube wenigstens, dass es vor Mittag nicht aufhoren wird. Kommen Sie an den Ofen^ und trocknen^ Sie sich. Ziehen Sie Ihre Schuhe aus. Meine Pantoffehi sind Ihnen zu klein, aber mein Bruder kann Ihnen seine geben. Ziehen Sie sie unterdes an, wahrend^ Ihre Schuhe trocknen.^ Aber ich store Sie. Sie storen uns durchaus nicht. NOTES. 1 Sich erkalten, to take cold. For verbs which are reflexive in German, but not in English, see page 260, note 2. 2 Auch {also) simply gives emphasis to tlie sentence here. 8 See page 262, note 1. — •* Den ganzen Tag. Notice the use of the accusative, to express length of time. See page 116. 5 For the accusative with the preposition an, see page 268. 6 Trocknen is used ritlier as a transitive verb with the sense of 'to make dry,' or ns an iiitraiisitive with the sense of 'to grotv dry.'' ^ Wahrend, as a preposition (t. e., used before a noun) = during. As a conjunction, wahrend = while. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 265 Er-kel'-t'n. Ne -z'n. Mobl'-d'ii. Nas'. You are sure to take cold.^ See ! You are sneezing already.^ That 's so. But it is just pour- ing down rain.^ And I got all wet simply com- ing across the sidewalk.* page 483. 7. Gla-db''-b'n ze das 6s dan gan^-ts'ii tsikh rach^- 11611 virt? Va'-nic7i-st'ns a-oof- O'-f n trok'-nen. Pan-to'-fln. dbn'-t'r-des v^'-rent. Sht^'-re. DooTch'-a-oos'. Do you think it will rain tlie whole day?t I think it will rain all the morning any way.* Come (near) to the fire and dry yourself. Take off your shoes. % My slippers are too small for you, but my brother will lend you his.^ Put them on * while yours are drying. But I disturb you. You do not disturb us at all.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 You will siirely take cold. 2 You must already sneeze. Or, simply: Sie niesen schon. 8 I am {Anglice : have) only over the street gone and am {Anglice. liave) through and through wet become. 4 I believe at-least that it before noon not cease will. 6 Are to-you too small, but my brotlier can, etc. 6 Put (you) them (meanwhile) on (lit. : draw-on), 7 You disturb us throughout not {i. e., by no means). * It rains also (as) with troughs. t Believe you that it rain will? — | Draw ye your shoes out. 'iQ^ DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. 8. Al)er wariiiii sind Sie bei einem so scliauderhaften Regeii gekommen? Es regnete nicht, als ich fortfuhr. Wo wollen Sie von hier aus * hin ? Ich wollte Ihre Freundin, Fraulein Kaufmann, besuchen. Und ich wollte Sie bitten, mitzukommen. Und dann konnen wir dort den Abend zusam- men verbringen. Ich mochte gern mit Ihnen gehen, aber bei diesem Wetter ist es unmoglich.^ Nein, das geht^ wirklich nicht. Aber seien Sie so gut Fraulein Kaufmann's Buch mitzunehmen. Ich habe es schon durchge- lesen. Note. — Study the declension of Proper Nouns, NOTES. 1 Unmoglich, according to the rules of accentuation (see page xx), should take the primary accent on the prefix iin, as given on the opposite page, but the pronunciation don'-muc/i'-lic/t is really more common. 2 Notice the idiomatic use of gehen. Other idiomatic phrases are: Wie geht es? JIoiv do you do? Wie geht es mit Ihnen? How are you getting on? Es geht inir sehlecht, I am Hi, etc. * As already seen, aus is often used as an expletive (i. ^., merely to add strength to the expression), THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 267 8. A^-b'r va-rooiii^ ziiit ze bi i^-iiem zo sha-db^-d'r- haf -t'li ra^-g-'ii ^g6^-k6'- m6n ? Fort'-foor'. Ton lier' a-dos tiiii'. Fro-i'-lin. Tsoo-za'-men fer-brifi'-'n. OOn'-ra-eLch'-lich. Mit'-tsdb-na'-men. But why did you come in such a terrible shower as this ? i It was not raining when I started.^ Where are you going when you leave us?^ I was going* to call on your friend, Miss Kaufmann. And I was coming after you to have you go with me.* And then we '11 spend the even- ing together.^ I should very much like to go with you. But in such weather it isn't possible.^ No, it is not possible."^ But be good enough to take Miss Kaufmann's book with (you). I have already read it through. page 475. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 But why have (lit. : are) you by a so terrible rain come? 2 It rained not when I away-drove. — Observe that tlie Germans have no progressive form and hence cannot say, It is mining, It was raining ; but can only say, It rains, It rained. See page 3 Wbere will you from liere out to? (See note*,' opposite page.) 4 And T would you beg with-to-come. 5 And then can we there tbe evening together spend. 6 But by this weatber is it impossible. 7 No, tbat goes really not. — * I wanted. 268 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. RECAPITULATION OF THE GOVERNMENT OF CASES BY PREPOSITIONS. We have already seen : 1. That the prepositions governing the accusative case are : durchf through, by. ohne, without, hut, for. fiir, for. uin, about, round, at. gegen, towards, against. wider, against.^ 2. That the prepositions governing the genitive case most frequently used, are : stattf or anstattf instead. trotz, in spite of. wegen, on account of. wdhrend, during. 3. That the prepositions ji^overning the dative case most frequently used, are: aus, Old of, from. mit, with. von, from, of bei, near, tuith, by, at. na^h, after. zu, to, at. BUT NINE PREPOSITIONS GOVERN SOMETIMES THE DATIVE AND SOMETIMES THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. They are: an, on, in. in, in, into. unter, under. auf, on, upon. neben, near. vor, before. hinter, behind. ilber, over. zivischen, between. Notice that these are all prepositions of place, although they are also used to express other relations, as of time, etc. They govern the dative when no motion is implied. They Also, bis, until, iui.l souder, without (not frequent). THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 269 govern the accusative when motion from one place to another is impHed. Or, to put it differently, they govern the dative, when they answer the question ivhere {wo) ; * and the accusative, when they answer the question wJutJicr (wohin)."^ Examples : Note that in the following- sentences, the ones marked 1. answer to the question whoi^e, while those marked 2. answer to the question -whither. Ex. : 1. We were behind the mountain = Wir waren hinter detn Berg. 2. We went behind the mountain = Wir gingen hinter den Berg. 1. Fish live in water = Die Fische leben in dem Was- ser. 2. The child fell in, etc.= Das Kind fiel in das Wasser. 1. The garden is near the house = Der Garten ist neben de>n Haus. 2. I brought it near {to) the house = Ich brachte es neben das Haus. 1. My shoes are under the bed= Meine Schuhe sind unter detn Bett. 2. Put my shoes under the bed = Setze meine Schuhe unter das Bett. 1. A tree stands before the castle ='Em Baum steht vor dem Schloss.f 2. The peasant went before, etc. = Der Bauer ging vor das Schloss.f 1. The picture hangs betw. the w. = Das Bild hangt zwischen den Fenstern. 2. Hang the pictures betw. the w. = Hange das Bild zwischen die Fenster. * In putting the question where or whither, be careful not to con- found their real meaning. For instance, when speaking of going, do not say ^vhere, as usually done in colloquial phrases in English, but whither. t Notice that in order to have the accusative, there must be motion toward the p]Hce spoken of. Thus: The peasants dance before the castle would 1)0. Die Bauern tanzen vor dem Schloss (not das), be- cause, ultliough they are moving, the motion is not toward the castle. 270 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart VOKABELN. Das Wetter. Es ist schones Wetter, ** " schlechtes Wetter, " " herrliches^ " " " schauderhaftes Wetter, " " trubes^ " Or, simply : Es ist schon, " schlecht, '' prachtvoll,' " feucht,* trocken, " warm, kalt, " schwiil,^ '* hell, dunkel, " windig,* " ein eiskalter Wind,' " neblig,^ " schinutzig,® " staubig,io " stiirmisch,^^ " eine driickende Hitze,*'* " kuhl, It is nice weather. *' " bad " " splendid weather. *' " atrocious " " " gloomy " The weather is fine. " bad. " " " splendid. " " " damp, dry. " " " warm, cold " - muggy. It is daylight, dark. It is windy. The wind is icy cold. It is foggy. " " muddy. « " dusty. " " stormy. " " sultry. " " cool. 1 Her'-li-e/igs. — *^ Tru'-bes. 3 Prafc/it'-fol'. — 4 f6-Tc/it. 6 Shvul. — 6 Vln'-dTc/i. 7 Is'-kal -t'r Vint.— « Na'-l>lhl». •• S/fiiioo'-t T«/i. — i'> SI#ta-oo'-bic/i, u S/ttter'-mish.— '■: Di-ii'-k'n-de hV.ts^ THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 271 The following vocabulary to be learned by heart. VOCABULARY. The Weather. Es regnet, Es schneit, Es hagelt,* Es graupelt,* Es friert, Es taut,8 Es bat geregnet, Es regnete, Es hat geschneit, Es schneite, Es fangt an zu frieren, Das Wetter bessert ^ sich, Es wild bald regnen, Es wird schlechtes Wetter, Welches Wetter ! » Wie schones Wetter! Welch ^ schauderhaftes Wetter ! Welche Hitze ! ^o It rains. It is snowing. " " hailing. " " sleeting. " " freezing. " " thawing. It rained. It was raiiiing. It snowed. It was snowing. It is going to freeze.* The weather is improving.® It 's going to rain.® The weather is getting bad.' What weather I * " fine weather! " frightful weather 1 How hot it is ! i® 1 Ha'-g'lt. — 2 Gra-oo'-p'lt. — s Ta-oot. ^ Lit. : it begins to freeze. — 5 Lit. : the weather betters itself. 6 Lit. : it will soon rain. — ' Lit.: it becomes bad weather. 8 Or, Welch eiii Wetter. — Observe that before eiii, or any adjec- tive, especially when used in an exclamatory way, welch has no ending. The same rule applies to solch (such a), and manch (many a). 9 Could also say : Was fiir ein Wetter! Lit.: ivhat for a weather ! ^0 Lit. : what heat ! — -^ Lit. : the wejither betters itself. 272 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To he learned by heart, and then repeated aloud as a real con- versation, whether for self-study or preparation for the class- room, [See also Directions before Part I,) GESPRACHE. l. — VOM WETTER. Wie warm ist es heute ! — Nicht wahr ? Es ist den ganzen Sommer nicht so warm gewesen. — Gehen Sie nicht so schnell.^ Ich bin wassernass.^ — Ja, das bringt in Schweiss.^ Was haben Sie denn? — Dieser Wagen hat mich bespritzt.* Mein neues Kleid ist ganz voll Schmutz.^ — Was fiir ein Wetter ! Heute friih schien * die Sonne, und jetzt giesst es mit Kannen. — Lassen Sie uns untertreten ^ Kutscher, sind Sie besetzt?^ — Nein, Madam.^ — Ich nehme Sie nach der Zeit.^ Sehen Sie auf Ihre Uhr. — Warum nehmen Sie ihn nicht fiir die Fahrt?^^ — Weil ich Sie erst zu Frau von Korf fiihren will ..... Kutscher, Wilhelmstrasse, Nummer 235. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Do not walk so fast. — 2 Va'-s'r-uas' (lit. : water-wet), wet through. — 8 It makes one })erspiro. Lit.: Yes, that brings in per- spiration.— 4 From bespritzen (bg-s/i-pri'-ts'n), to spatter. — 6 Voll Schmutz (fol shmootsO, full (of; mud. The adjective voll really governs the genitive case : voll des Lobes, voll des Schmutzes. However, the noun after voll remains frtHiuciitly indeclinable. « C)t)n'-t»r-tra'-t'n, get under shelter. — ^ Be-zStst', engaged. 8 Ma-dam'.— ^ By the hour. Lit. : according to-the time. w Fart, by the drive. Lit. : for the trip. — * Imperfect of scheinen. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 273 Note. — Study the Aux. Miissen and Mdgen, p. 505. 3. — VERGEBLICHER BESUCH* 1st Frail von Korf zu Hause? — Nein, Madam, sie ist nicht zu Hause. — Wie schade ! — Aber die gna- dige Frau wird bald zuriick kommen. Wollen Sie nicht gefalligst eintreten ^ und Platz nehmen. — Nein, wir konnen nicht warten. Bitte geben Sie ihr diese Karten und sagen Sie ihr, dass wir es sehr bedau- ern^ sie nicht angetroffen^ zu haben. 4=. — N0CH EIN BESUCH. 1st Frau von Korf zu sprechen?* — Ja, Madam. Bitte bemiihen Sie sich^ in den Salon. Ah, guten Morgen, meine Liebe.^ Wie freue ich mich Sie zu sehen. — Ich store Sie doch nicht. — Nein, durchaus nicht, bitte nehmen Sie Platz. Was fiir ein herrliches Wetter, nicht wahr? — Ja wirklich. Aber die Tage nehmen schon ab.'^ Es wird schon ganz dunkel. Johann, machen Sie Licht,^ man kann nichts mehr sehen. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 In'-trS'-t'n, to step in. — 2 BS-da-oo'-'rn, to regret. 3 Angetroffen (an'-ge-tro -f n), past i)art. of antreifen, to meet, to find. — 4 At home. Lit. : to speak {i. e., to be spoken witli). 5 Please step into the parlor. Lit. : please trouble yourself in the parlor. See page 170. 6 My dear. — Liebe is really an adjective. But adjectives used as substantives are written with a capital, and if preceded by the definite article, follow the Weak Declension. 7 Abnehmen, to diminish. Anglice: The days are getting shorter. 8 Anglice: Light up. — * Fer-g3b'-li-c/i.'r be-zoofc/t', useless visit. 274 DAS WETTER VND DIE STADT. To be translated and written into German, but also to be treated orally in the class-room. {For Self-Study, see Directions, be/ore I*art I,) EXERCISES. 1.- ABOUT THE WEATHER. How is the weather to-day? — It is splendid. Get up; we'll (go and) take a walk.^ — I cannot. I must go down town and buy a trunk. — What for?^ — I want to take the 3:45 train to-morrow afternoon. To what store would you advise me to go? — Go to Lissauer's. They sell very cheap. 2. -SKATING, ETC. The weather is improving. — Yes, but it is freezing still. Let us (go and) skate on the Rousseau Island.^ — I am willing. But I haven't any skates. — You can hire* a pair over there. — All right,^ let us go. Aids to Translation. 1 Stehen Sie auf ; wir wollen einen Spaziergang machen. 2 Wofur ohtn ^twa§> erfrifd^en, el;e wit nad) ber S^euftabt ge^en. —■md) ber ^euftabt? — 3a. ®enn tt)a§ ©ie 6i§ je^t bon ^reSben gefe^en (jaben, ()ei§t bie Slltftabt. 2Bir iDotlen bann iiber bie ^riidfe nad) ber S^euftabt gel;en, mo e^ ^ inbe§ au^er bem :|)rdd)tigen Sa^anifc^en ^alai§, wdd}c§> 5luguft ber ©tarfef erbaueti (ie§, toenig (Be^enStDerte^ giebt.^ — Sluguft ber (5tar!e ? 2Bar er rt)ir!(ic^ fo ftar!, ba§ er einen foldjeu ^einamen t)erbiente?2 — ©eiDtfe. (5r fott^ einmal einen ©olbaten in boiler 9?iiftung mil einer Qan'o frei^ au^ge^alten ^aben, unb ein anbere^ 9Ka( (;at er ein eiferne^ ^^re^^engelcinber ioie einen ^inbfaben ^ufatnmengebogen. Slber ba finb tDir auf ber ^rid;lfd)en Xerraffe. fiaffen 8ie xn\§> (;ier einige @rfri= fc^ungen ^u un^ ne^men, unb id; wiH 3f)nen UHal;renb be» erjciljlen, \vk 5luguft ber ©tarfe einmal einen Mann fanb, ber il)m an 6tar!e gleid)fam. 1 Es gieht = thei-e is, there are. For the difference between Es giebt, and Es ist {there is), Es sind {there are), see page 409, note 2. 2 From verdienen, to deserve, to earn. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 277 For Self-Study, should he read by means of the translation, then without it, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. READING. A WALK THROUGH DRESDEN. — 2. — And where leads that magnificent, wide flight- of-steps to our right, next to-the river? — It leads to the Briihl terrace, the favorite-resort of- the Dresden-people. We will go-up and ourselves up- thereJI somewhat refresh, before we to the ' new town ' go. — To the ' new town ? ' — Yes. For what you until now of Dresden seen have, is-called the 'old town.' We will then over the bridge to the new town go, where there, however, except the beautiful Japanese Palace which August the Strong built had, J little worthy-to-see is.^ — August the Strong? Was he really so strong that he such a nick -name got?^ — Certainly. He is said'^ once a soldier in full armor with open hand out-held to-have. And another time did he an iron baluster as a thread together bend. But there are we on the Briihl terrace. Let us here some refreshments to ourselves take, and I will to-you during that relate how August the Strong once a man found, who to-him in strength equal-came. 8 Strictly: He s/mZ? one-time, etc.— ^ Frei = free, open. * Briil'-sh'n te-ra'-se.— t A-do'-goost d'r s/itar'-ke. X Lit.: build let. Liiess, imperfect of lassen.— J| Strictly: up-stairs. 278 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. — 5t(^ Slii^uft ber ©tarfe ciitft fpa^iercii ritt/ i^dor* fein ^ferb ein ^ufcifen. ©r trat^ ba(;er in bent ndd)fteu ®orf bei einem §iif|cl)inieb ein.^ 3(t§ berfelbe^ ein ^ufeifcu ()er= i>or(;olte, iiin baio ^ferb 511 befdjlageu, U)otlte ber Jlurfiirft ^^uuor unterfud^en, ob e§ aud;^ ftar! genug fei. @r fa^te ba^ofelbe^ niit beiben ^ciiiben imb brad; e^3 burdi^ tme eine 9Jtobrriibc. „ ^ic$ (^ifen taugt md)t^/' fagte cr ;^u bent §nffd;nueb, mcldier fogteid; niel)rere anbere l^erDorbolte ; aber ber Slnrfi'irft ^erbrad) cine^5 wad} bent anbern. ^er (Sd)niieb mad)te cine beben!(id)e 9}Jiene7 nnb feine ©efellen^ faf;en einanber Denuunbert an.^ ©nblid; tijat^^ ber ilnrfiirft, a[§> ob er ein^i gefnnben batte, tt)eld;e§ ftarf gemig metre. ®a^ ^ferb u>nrbe bamit^^ bcfc^lagen, nnb aU ber ©d;ntieb mit feiner 3(rbeit fertig^^ mar, gab ibnx ber 5!nrfiirft einen barten 2^(;a(er.^^ ®er ©djmieb naf)nt benfelben ^mifcben bie ginger nnb botg i(;n frnnnn. „ liefer X(;aler tangt nid)t§, ^err ilnrfiirft/' rebete^^ er hm gremben an/^ ben er injruifd^en erfannt ^atte. ®er ^urfiirft reicbte ibnt nocb me^rere Xi)akx, aber ber (3(f)mieb ^erbrad) einen nacb bent anbern. „DJnn/' fagte ber ^n^fiirft enblid;, „(;ier ift ein Sonieb'or, ber mirb mo^P^ gnt fein." ^ierniit mar ber !Sd)mieb ^ufrieben, unb ber Jlurfiirft frente fid), je= manben gefnnben jn t;aben, ber i(;m an ©tdrfe gemad)fen^' mar. — 2)ie @efd)id)te ift Wixtiid) red)t (;ubfd). — ©^ frent mid;, bafe fie 3f)nen gefddt. 2(ber nnn moHen mir anfbrec^en. Sledner, ma§ finb mir fd;nlbig? ,1 Imperfect of reiten, to ride.— 2 Imperfect of eintreten, to enter. 3 Strictly: the same. — 4 Strictly: if it also strong enough may-he. s Strictly ; the same. — ^ Strictly : broke it through. ^ Miene = look, appearance. — ^ Geselle = comjianion, journey- an. — 'j From ansehen, to look at. — •=• Imperf. of verlieren. l^ That, imperfect of thun. Anglice : The Elector 'made out.' THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 279 — As August the Strong once went-out riding,^ lost his horse a shoe. He entered therefore in the next vil- lage in-the shop-of a blacksmith into. As the latter^ a horse-shoe held-out in-order the horse to shoe, wished the Elector first to ascertain whether it was perhaps^ strong enough. He seized it^ with both hands, and broke it in-two ^ like a carrot. " This iron is-worth nothing," said he to the blacksmith, who immediately several others brought-out; but the Elector broke one after the other. The smith made a dubious face,^ and his journeymen^ looked-at each-other astonished {on)? Finally, did ^^ the Elector^ as if he had^^ one found which strong-enough was. The horse was therewith ^^ shod, and when the smith, with his work ready was,^'^ gave to-him the Elector a hard thaler.^* The smith took the-same between his fingers and bent it crooked. " This thaler is-worth nothing. Sir Elector," spoke he the stranger to}^ whom he in-the-meantime recognized had. The Elector handed him yet another thaler, but the smith broke one after the other. " Now," said the Elector at-last, "here is a Louis d'or, that will per- haps^^ good be." Therewith was the smith satisfied, and the Elector rejoiced (himself), some-one found to- have, who to-him in strength a-match^'' was. — The story is indeed very pretty. — It rejoices me that she (to) you pleases. But now will we ' break up.' Waiter! What do we owe? lA Past part, of iinden. 12 Angllce : with it. See page 168, note 1. — 13 Anplice: finished. " A thaler = three marks. — is From anreden, to speak to, to ad- dress.— 16 Strictly: which will well good be.— ^' Strictly: equal, f Iraperf. ofgeben. — X Imperf. ofuehnien. — Imperf. of biegen. 280 DAS WETTER UND DIE JSTADT. * ^anfiaQun^^f>titf ^ — LETTER of thanks. DIRECTIONS. — Read and translate this letter, after which copj it ott', — then learn it by heart, and some hour or two afterward, write it out again from memory. For model of letters, etc., s^^ pages 48 and 49. TRANSLATION. — I use the first opportunity to write you and to thank you heartily for the presents which you have sent us. My parents send their (strictly : the) best compliments,^ and I beg you to believe me,* very respectfully yours,* — 1 Strictly : salutations. — * Lit. : I myself (selbst) recommend me (mich) to-you with especial respect. Part hi. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT, SECTION III. 1. ABOUT THE WEATHER. 2. VOCABULARY : THE CITY. 3. VOCABULARY: USEFUL IDIOMS. 4. TO ASK ONE'S WAY. 5. IN A CAB AND OUT. 6. ABOUT GERMAN : IN BERLIN. 7. WHICH IS THE RIGHT CASE? 8. ACCEPTANCE AND ORDER. 281 282 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. III. GERMAN. 1. Wir werden zu Hause bleiben inussen.* Der Himmel ist bedeckt. Wir miissen zu Hause bleiben. Was hat dein Vater gesagt? Er sagte, wir miissten ^ zu Hause bleiben. Warum denn? Weil es gleich regnen wird. Der Himmel ist so triibe. 2. Wer macht solchen Larm? Ich bin es nicht.^ Julie ist es, nicht wahr? Was sagst du? Ich sage, es ist Julie.^ NOTES. 1 Miissten, imperf. subjunct. of miissen. When dass is left out at the beginning of a dependent clause, tlie verb of the dependent clause i& often put in the subjunctive, and is nevt r put at the end. See p. 136, n. 1. 2 When the predicate after it is, is a noun, the construction in German is the same as in English. Thus: It is Julia = Es ist Julie. Bui when the predicate after it is, is a personal pronoun, tlie Germans reverse the English construction. Thus: R is /=ich bin es (lit. : I am it); It i? he = er ist es ; It is we = vk^ir sind es ; It is you = Sie siud es, etc?. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 283 III. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. Ver var^-d'n tsoo lia-db^-ze bli^-beu mii^- Be-dekt'. Ge-zakht'. Zakh'-te mus'-t'n. Glich rach'-nen. virt trii'-be. 2. Var makht z6V'Ch*n Ich' bin es nicht'. Yoo'-li-e nichV var. We shall have to stay at honie.i The sky is overcast. We must stay at home. What did yonr father say? He said, we must stay at home. Why so? 2 Because we are going to have rain. The weather is so cloudy.^ Who is making" so much noise ? ^ It is JuUa, isn't it?^ What do you say ? I say it is JuUa.** LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 We shall at home stay must. — 2 Why, then? 3 Because it directly rain will. The sky is so dark. * Who makes such (a) noise? 5 Julia is it, not true? 6 Also, Ich sage, dass es Julie ist. *■ Notice that ivjinitives (as, bleiben) connected with a modal auxil- iary (as konmen, mogen, wollen, niiissen etc.) do not take zu. Thus, here : bleiben {not zu bleiben) miissen. 284 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Sage ihr, sie solP ruhig sein. Sie ist argerlich, well sie zu Hause bleiben muss. Ich kaiin nichts dafiir.^ Das Wetter ist zu schlecht, um auszugehen. Ins Unvermeidliche muss man sich fiigen. Sie muss bis morgen warten. Sie wird nichts dabei^ verlieren. Ich werde den gaiizen Tag zu Hause bleiben niiissen. Warum denn? Um die Arbeiter zu iiberwachen, die heute kom- men. A propos.* Wir miissen auch die Decke im Ess- zimmer^ machen lassen, solange die Arbeiter hier sind. Ware es nicht besser, die Wande in der Kiiclie auch streichen zu lassen? Dafiir ist es zu spat. NOTES. 1 Observe the indicative mood, although the conjunction dass is not used. This is because tlie sentence, being one of command, demands a tense of a more positive nature than tlie subjunctive. 2 Never say ich kann es nicht helfen. German-Americans some- times use this expression, which, however, is incorrect. 8 See page 168, note 1. — ■* See ]>age 230, note 2. 5 Or, Speisezimmer, s^pi'-zg-tsi'-in'r. — The dining-room of a hotel or other large houses, however, is called Speisesaal. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 285 Roo'-ich. Er'-ger-licTi. Da-fiir'. OOn'-fer-mit'-li-cTie fii'-g'n. Da-bi' fer-le'-r'n. Tell her she must be silent.* She is angry because she has to stay at home. I can't help it'-* The weather is too (wretchedly) bad to go out. What can't be cured must be endured.^ Let her wait till to-morrow. She won't lose anything by it. 3. IcJi var^-de dan g'an^- tsen tsikh tsoo ha-db^-z6. Ar'-bi-t'r u'-b'r-va'- kh'n. De de'-ke im es'-tsi'-m'r zo'-lan'-e. Ven'-de kw'-cTie sTitri'-cTi'n. Tsoo shp§it'. I'll have to stay at home all day.* Why will you have to stay in ? To keep watch over the work- men who are coming.^ By the way ; we must have the ceiling in the dining-room done while the workmen are here. Had we not better have the kitchen walls whitewashed too?« It is too late. LITERAL TRANSLATION. 1 She shall quiet be.— 2 I can nothing for it. 3 To-the inevitable must one submit (sich fiigen. Strictly: him- self join).— Ins = in das; lit.: m the. 4 I shall the whole day at home (to) stay be obliged (lit. : must), 5 In order the workingmen over-watch (to superintend) who to-day come. 6 Were it not better the walls in the kitchen paint to let. * When to means in order to, it is rendered by um. 286 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. 4. Das hatteii Sie western sagen soil en ^ walireiitl tile Anstreicher hier waren. Das macht nichts aus.^ Wir miissen auch den Keller reinigen und weissen lassen. tjbrigens hatte ich an Ihrer Stelle das ganze Haus in Ordnung bringen lassen. Sie scherzen wohl. Sie wissen ja, dass ich nicht die Mittel habe, eine solche Ausgabe zu machen.^ Wie viel wiirde es denn kosten? Nicht weniger als zweitausend Thaler. Ja, das ist zu viel. Damit miissen wir noch warten. Kote. — Study the Agreement of Adjectives, 5. Siehe, da ist unser Freund Miiller. Sie lassen sich wirklich gar nicht mehr sehen. Was ist das fiir ein Wetter! NOTES. 1 Lit. : That makes nothing out. Anglice : It does not matter. The verb, machen, to make, appears naturally in a great many idiomatic cxprrs.sions. Notice the following German phrases, among others, in wliicli machen has an entirely idiomatic meaning: Was macht der Vater, how is i/our father f Ich mache mir nichts daraus, / don't care for it ; Die Saclie macht sicli, matters are going on ver;i ivrll ; Ein Kxamen (e-ksa'-m'n) machen, to jxiss an e.r(nninatio)i; Sich auf den Weg maclien, to set out; Das macht sicli nicht gut, that does not look well. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 287 4. Das lie^-t'ii ze g-es^-t'rii ztr-g-'ii so^-leii vA^-rent (hstinctioTi in pronunciation between modern (mo- dern'), ino'lcni, and modern (mo'-d'rn), ratteii. ■-•■■ The s|u'akc!s ;ire sunpos d to be very familiar. If not so, tiie sentence would be : JVenn Sie tvolien, dass ich Sie, etc. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 291 8. V6u doo vilst^ das \ch (Well ho-i^-te ii^-b'nt ins te-a^-t'r^fii^-re. O'-ne zor'-ge da' zin. Nu'-tic7i. A-oof'-ze'-ts'n. At'-las-tioot'. Dan. Mo-dern'. Gar' nicTit liupsh.'. If you want me to take yon to the theater this evening-, you must be here at seven o'clock.^ Don't be afraid.^ I shall be here on time. That's right.8 What bonnet are you going to put on. I am going to put on my white satin bonnet.'* You must not put on that one.^ Why not? I don't Uke it at all.» But it 's quite in the fashion.' That may be; but I do not think it is nice at all.^ page 516. 9. A pro-po^ v6^-l*n ver YiicJit in^-la'-d'n ? Gar' nicTit net'. By the way, must we not invite Mrs. de X. ? ^ No. (We must not.) Why (must) (we) not? I think she is not at all a nice person. i<^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 If you wish that I you to-day evening in the theater take (lit. : lead). — For the order: so musst du, see page 84, II. 2 Be without care. — ^ Tliat is {hut also) necessary. 4 My wliite satin hat. — ^ That (one) should I not take. 6 It (lit. : he, because Atlashut is of masculine gender) pleases to- me not. — "^ It is yet, however, quite modern. 8 But I find it (lit. : h'nn) not at all pretty. 9 Will wo not. — 1" That she entirely not genteel is. 292 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Aber sollen wir nicht Herrn Blum eiiiladen? Er ist doch ein sehr angenehmer Mann, nicht- wahr? Man sagt es. Ich werde ihn einladen. Aber Johann muss den Wagen bestellen. Anna muss mir auch Papier, Tinte und Federn^ bringen. Wozu? Ich muss an meine Naherin schreiben, dass sie zum Anprobieren kommt. lO. Was willst du thun? Ich muss dem Madchen klingeln. Willst du so gut sein und mir die Glocke reichen ? Hier ist sie. Da ist Anna. Gnadige Frau wiinschen? Ich brauche Tinte. Die im Tintenfass ist ganz eingetrocknet. Dann miissen Sie welche^ holen. NOTES. 1 We could say here : etwas Papier, Tinte und einige Pedern, as some before a singular noun is rendered by etwas, and before a plural noun, by einige (lit.: a few). But frequently the Germans do not translate some at all, and use the noun without any article, as here. 2 Some, referring to a preceding substantive, is usually translated in German by ivelcher, welche, welches : Will you have some water f = Yes, (live me some. Wollen Sie Wasser (or, etwas Wasser) haben? = Ja, geben Sie mir trelches. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 293 Zo'-l'n. An'-ge-na'-m'i^. Be-s7ite'-rn. A'-na pa-per', tin'-te . '. . . fa'-d'rn. Vo-tsoo^ Nei'-e-rin an'-pro- be'-r'n. lO. Vas vilst doo toon^? Klin'-'ln. G16'-ke. Her ist' ze. De' tin'-t'n-fas' in'-ge-trok'-net. But should we not invite Mr. Blum ? He is a very nice man,i is he not? That 's what they say.^ I must invite him. But John must order the car- riage. Jane will also have to bring me some ink, paper, and pens. What for? I must write ^ to my dress- maker to come and try on (my dress).* What are you grolngr to do ? I must ring the servant.* Will you have the kindness to hand me the bell ? ^ (Certainly.) Here it is. (Ah !) Here is Jeanette. Madam has called for me ? • Yes. I must have some ink. That in the inkstand is all dry. (Well) then, you must go and get some. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Pleasant. Also : Ein sehr netter Mann. — 2 One says it. 3 The German word schreiben, to write, requires the preposition an (lit. : at) with the accusative; but the Germans could also use the dative with schreiben, without the preposition. Thus, they could say as well : Ich muss meiner Naherin schreiben. — < To-the servant. 5 Will you so good be and to-me the bell hand?— The Germans could also leave out und and use the infinitive, as the English do: Willst du so gut sein, mir die Glocke zu reichen? 6 Gracious woman wish? — * To-the ' trying-on^ may come. 294 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. Bringen Sie auch Federn und Briefpapier mit. Aber was soil ich zu Mittag maclieii? Hat der Schlachter^ das Fleisch geschickt? Ja, Madam. Gut. Braten Sie das Fleisch und noch ein Huhn dazu! Note. — Study the Possessive Pronouns, 11. Jetzt muss ich meine Geschafte be- sorgen. Johann, ist der Wagen da? Ja, er ist vor der Thur. Mein Freund, du vergiszt, ich brauche Geld.^ Ich muss meine Weihnachts-Einkaufe machen. Wie viel brauchst du? Ich brauche ungefahr hundert und fiinfzig Thaler, Das ist zu viel. Du musst mit hundert aus- kommen.^ Die Geschafte* gehen jetzt zu schlecht. NOTES. i Or, der Metzger (mets'-g'r). Also, der Fleischer. 2 Or, dass ich Geld brauche. 8 Or, zuf rieden sein, to he satisfied. * Business, in the sense of a business = das (or ein) Geschaft. In the sense of business in general, we say die Geschafte {plural). THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 295 Bref'-pa-per'. Sm.ech'-VT, Bring (me) also some pens and note paper. But, what must I make for dinner ? Has the butcher sent the meat? Yes, ma'am. Very well. Roast it, and put a chicken on to broil. ^ page 487. 11. Y6tst mobs ichmV-ne gr6-sh6f -te b6-z6r^-g'n. Fer-gist' ich hra-db' -khe gelt'. Vi'-na7^7its'-in' -ko-i'-f e. OOn'-ge-far'. A-oos'-ko'-men. Tsoo shlecht'. Now, I must be off to business.^ John, did you order the car- riage ? Yes, sir ; it is at the door. My dear, you forgot. I need money. I must make my purchases for Christmas.* How much do you need ? I need about a hundred and fifty dollars. That's too much. You will have to be satisfied with a hundred to-day.* Business is bad just now.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 And besides a chicken there-to. 2 I must take care of my business. ^ My Christmas purchases. * You must with a liundred out-come. 5 The affairs (strictly : business) go now too badly. 296 DAS VVETIER UND DIE STADT. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. I. — Die Stadt. Der Biirgermeister^ (bwr'-g'r-mis'-t'r), Das Rathaus (rat'-lia-dos'), Das Museum (moo-za'-dbm), Die Bibliothek 2 (be-bli-6-tak'). Die Kirche (kir'-cTie), Der Dom (dom), Eine Sackgasse (zak'-ga'-se), Ein Laden, m., Der Blumenmarkt, Am Ende der Strasse, Das Trottoir^ (tro-to-ar'), Die Fahrstrasse ; Der (Fahr-) Damm, Das Pilaster (pflas'-t'r), Der Asphalt (as-falt'),* Die Rinne (ri'-ne), Der Kanal (ka-nal'), Nehmen Sie die erste Strasse rechts, Wenden Sie sich nach links,* Gehen Sie am Ufer entlang,^ The mayor. The city-hall. The museum. The library. The church. The cathedral. A blind alley. A shop. The flower-market. At the end of the street. The sidewalk. The roadway. The pavement. The asphaltum. The gutter. The sewer. Take the first turning to the right. Turn to the left. Keep along the wharf. 1 In large cities the mayor is called Oberbiirgermeister. 2 The German word Biichersamnilung (bii'-c/i'r-zain'-loon) {fern.), lit. : books-collection, or Biiclierei (fern.), is only rarely used. * The German Biirgersteig (bier'-g'r-s/itie/i') {masc), lit. : citizen- path, is not frequently used. — * Or, as'-falt. 6 Or, simply, wenden Sie sich links. — ^ OO'-f'r ent-laii'. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 297 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. II. — Wie litdsst, u. s. w. Wie heisst church auf deutsch ? 1 Es heisst Kirche (Kir'-cTie), Wie wird das geschrieben ? ^ Es wird geschrieben Wie wird das ausgesprochen ? ^ W^ie sagt man dafur auf spanisch ? * Man sagt * Wiegefalhg?* Wie meinten Sie ? Ich habe Sie nicht verstanden, Sprechen Sie nicht so schnell, Wie nennt man das auf deutsch ? ^ Man nennt das How do you say church in German ? We say Kirche. How do you spell it ? They spell it How do you pronounce it? What does it mean in Span- ish? It means Beg pardon ? What did you say ? * I did n't understand you. Don't speak so fast. How do you call it in Ger- man? That is called t 1 Observe the idiomatic use of the preposition auf. Lit. : how do you call church upon German? How calls one that upon German? We could also say, im Deutschen (lit. : in-tlie German). — Adjectives of nationality are written with a small letter, unless accompanied by the article. Hence : auf deutsch ; but : ini (for in dem) l>eutschen. 2 Past participle of schreiben. The word buchstabieren (boofcli'- s/tta-be'-r'n), to spell, is not used as often as schreiben. 3 A-obs'-ge-s^pro'-fc/i'n, past participle of aussprechen. 4 Or, im Spanischen. Lit. : liovv says one therefor in-the Spanish 5 Lit. : how (is it) agreeable? i. e., Ijow does it please to you? * Lit. : how meant you? — ••• Man z'dkht. — f One calls that. 298 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To be learned by heart and repeated aloud as a real conversation, whether for self-study or preparation for the class-room. GESPRACHE. l.—AUF DER STRASSE. Entschuldigen Sie, mein Herr, ich habe mich ver- irrt.^ Konnten Sie mir nicht sagen, wo die Schiller- strasse ist? — Nehmen. Sie die dritte Strasse rechts, dann die zweite links, bis Sie auf eiiien grossen Platz, den Albert-Platz,^ konimen. Gehen Sie schriig^ iiber den Platz in die Bautznerstrasse.* Diese gehen Sie grade aus bis in die Schillerstrasse. — Ich fiirchte,^ das werde ich nicht finden. — Wenn Sie das fiirchten, so nehmen Sie eine Droschke. 2.-JiV DER DROSCHKE. Kutscher, sind Sie nicht bestellt? — Nein, mein Herr. — Gut, dann nehme ich Sie auf Zeit. Sehen Sie auf Ihre Uhr. — Es ist zwanzig Minuten iiber drei Da ist der Tarif.^ — Lassen Sie sehen. ^^ Preise fiir Droschkenfahrten ^ auf Zeit : Bis zu 20 Minuten Zeitdauer^ Jfi Pfennige ; von 20 his SO Minxden. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 I have lost my way. Lit.: T have vxysdf strayed. 2 Al'-b'rt-plats'.— 8 ShrSc/*.— 4 Ba-oots'-n'r. 5 I fear. « Ta-ref. — ^ Dr6sh'-k»n-f ar'-t'n ; Lit.: cab-drivers. 8 Tsit'-da-do'-'r, duration of time. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 299 60 PJ. ; von 30 bis J^ Minuten, 60 Pf. ; von 45 Minuten bis zu einer Stunde, 1 Mark W PfJ^ — Wohin wiinschen Sie zuerst ? — Fahren Sie nach der Schillerstrasse, No. 248. 3.-ANKUNFT AM BESTIMMUNGSORT,* ETC.f Da sind wir schon. — Fahren Sie naher^ an das Trottoir. Ich fiirchte, ich trete^ in den Rinnstein.^ — Kann ich meinen Regenschirm und meinen tjber- zieher * im Wagen lassen ? — Jawohl, mein Herr. — Nun nach Hotel Bellevue. Fahren Sie schnell! 4:.— DAS DEUTSCHE. Sie sprechen deutsch, nicht wahr? — Ich spreche es ein wenig. — Ich bin iiberzeugt,^ Sie sprechen es sehr gut. — Ich versichere Sie, nein.^ Ich will es diesen Winter noch besser lernen. — Finden Sie es schwer? — Ich finde, dass der Gebrauch'^ des Artikels und der Priipositionen sehr schwer ist. Es gehort sehr viel Ubung dazu.^ A propos, Sie miissen mir sagen, wie handkerchief auf deutsch heisst. — Taschentuch.^ — Wie gefallig? — Taschentuch heisst es. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Na'-»r, comparative of nahe (na'-he), near. '■^ Treten (trS-fn), to step. Lit. : I fear I step. — ^ Gutter-stone. 4 U'-b'r-tse'-'r, overcoat.— ^ U'-b'r-tso-ic/it', convinced, sure. 6 I assure you I don't. — ^ Ge-bra-o6fc/«/, use. * It requires mueli practice. Lit. : It (i. e., There) belongs very much practice thereto. — « Ta'-sh'n-toofe/i'. * Be-s/tti'-niobias-ort', place of destination. — f Und so weiter. 300 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To be translated and written out into German, hut also to he treated orally in the class-room. (For Self -Study, see Directions,) EXERCISES. I. — ABOUT THE TIME* What time is it by^ your watch? — I cannot tell you. I have not my watch with^ me. Does not yours go?^ — No, it's stopped.* — Did you forget to wind it?^ — No. I wound it last night.^ I think the spring is broken.^ I must take it to a watch- maker. 2. — TO ASK ONE'S WAYA Beg pardon. Which is the way to the Royal Library ? ^ — It is very far from here. You must take a 'bus or a cab. — How long will it take me to get there, with the 'bus?^ — You would need an hour at least.^^ — That's too long.^^ I see a cab station at the end of the street.^ I '11 take a cab. Aids to Translation. 1 Auf (dative).— 2 Bei. 8 Goes yours (Ihre, or die Ihrige, see page 488) not? ^ Sie ist stehen geblieben (from stehen bleiben, to stop). " Sie aufzuzielien. — ^ I have it (feminine) yesterday evening wound-up (aufgezogen).— '^ Oesprungen. 8 Wie komine ich nacli der Koniglichen Bibliothek. '■> Wie viel Zeit werde ich mit dem Omnibus brauchen, um dorthin zu kommen. — 10 You would at least (wenigstens) an hour need. — ^^ Zu lange. — 12 Am. * Von der Zeit. — f Sich nach dem Weg erkundigen. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 301 Note. — Study the modal auxiliaries Sollen afid Diirfen, page 506. 3. — IN BERLIN. Well, what are your plans for to-day ? ^ — I am going to-day to Kreuz Mountain.^ — Why, is there ^ a mountain in Berlin ? — Certainly. Are you not aware* how proud ^ the citizen of Berlin is of^ his Kreuz Mountain? It is a very modest hill" only, it is true ; but from there one has a very beautiful view^ of^ Berlin. From Kreuz Mountain rises ^^ the National * Monument, which Frederic William III. caused to be erected ^^ in commemoration of the War of Independence^'^ of 1813-15. — Well, can I count ^^ upon you for to-morrow, then? I am going to-mor- row to t the Zoological Garden with several American friends, and would like very much to have you accompany us.^* — I will, with pleasure.^^ Note. — Study the Formation of Adjectives, page 480. Aids to Translation. 1 Was haben Sie heute vor (from vorhaben, to intend, to have in view).— 2 I will to-day to Kreuz Mountain (nach dem Kreiiz- berg, kro-its'-berc/i.' (lit.: Cross Mountain), go.— ^ Giebt es deun. 4 Know you not.— 5 Stolz, s/itolts. — 6 Auf, with the accusative. 7 Eine sehr bescheidene Anhohe (an'-hu -e). — ^ Blick (masc). 9 Auf.— 1'^ Auf dem Kreuzberg erliebt sich. 11 Errichteu liess. — i'^ Zur Erinnerung an die Befreiungs- kriege.— i^ Reclinen. — i^ Dass Sie uns begleiteten (imperfect ^iubjunctive of begleiten). Lit.: that you us may-meet. 15 That will I willingly. — * National (na-tsi-6-nar). — f In. 302 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. To he read by means of the literal translation opposite, then with- out it, in preparation for reading aloud and translating in class. «efeftttrf. — ®er reid)e .taufmann 9)lu(ler, tt^elc^er eine fcf)ii:)ad)e @efunb()eit fjatte, tvax ent)d)Ioffen, bie ©eebaber^ aiif (B\)ii auf^ufudjeti. @r fdjiffte^ fid) ba^in ein, ^atte abcr ba§ UngtM, ba er fid) ^u melt iiber bie (Sd)iff§n)anb ^ tjorboi]/ iiber ^orb ^u fatten. 3ft er in ber (See ober in bie 6ee gefatlen ? — „3n bie ©ee/' ii:)erben ©ie a(§ grammatifcf) gebi(= beter :^efer antmorten. — D(; nein! Qn ber (See, benn e§ ift ^atit) (ba tief)* ©erettet, begab^ er fic^ nad) Hamburg. ®a§ $otel auf bem ^ungfernftieg, ba§ man i^m em^fo(;(en^ fjatte/ \mv jebod) iiberfiillt, unb er mufete fic^ mit eincni befd^eibenen gimmerdjen im bierten ©tode begniigen. ^cfto ^errlidjer ttjar bie 2In^fic^t. (Sr trat an^ genfter; ha ergriff^ i(;n ein ©c^toinbel, unb er ftiir^te ^inuttter. 3ft er auf ber ©trafee ober auf bie ©tra^e gefatten? — „2luf bie ©trafee/' meinen ©ie.f — @efel;tt! 2(uf ber ©trage, benn e§ n)ar ber ^t^eite gall. 1 strictly : sea-baths, — 2 From sich einschiffen, to embark. * Strictly: ship-t^a^^. — •* From vorbiegen. 5 From sich begeben. — 6 From empfehlen. 7 Anglice : whicli liad been recommended to him. * From ergreifen. THE WEATHER AND THE CITY. 303 For Self-Study , should he used by means of the literal translation, then without it, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. READING. WHICH IS THE RIGHT CASE? — The rich merchant Miiller, who a weak health had, was decided (the) sea-bathing^ at Sylt to seek. He embarked {himself) there-to, but had the misfortune, as he himself too far over the ship's-side bent-forward, overboard to fall. Is he in ^o-the (der) (sea), or in the (die) sea fallen ? — " In the (die) sea," will you as (a) grammatically educated reader answer. — Oh, no ! In ^o-the sea, for it is da tief (lit. : there deep) * Saved, betook he himself to Hamburg. The hotel on (the) Maiden-lane, which one to-him recom- mended had,^ was however overfull, and he had-to himself with a modest little-room i?i-the fourth story content. So-much the more magnificent was the view. He stepped to-the window ; there seized him a dizziness, and he was-hurled (to the pavement) below. Is he on ^o-the (street), or upon the street fallen? — "Upon the {die) street," you think. — Wrong! On ^o-the [der) street, for it was the second fall (see note %). * A play on the word Dativ (pronounced : da'-tef) and the two words da tief, t Lit. : You mean. Meinen = to mean, to suppose, to think, etc. X Fall, in German, means either fall or case. Hence, der zweite Fall = the second fall; or, the second case {i. e., the genitive). 304 DAS WETTER UND DIE STADT. "^^^f-^^ ^-C^^t^^^e^^^/^ ^^t^-((^f*<^i^j^^'yo you not remember that I paid you 250 marks two months ago ? Just look in your ledger. You are right. I remember it very Avell.® It 's a mistake my book-keeper must have made in trans- ferring (the accounts). I am exceedingly sorry, and hope you will excuse me.* Please overlook it.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 It makes. — Es, as in English, is used in German as the indefinite and impersonal subject of a verb, as: Es macht 180 Mark; Es regnet; Es ist mein Bruder (It is my brother); Es freut inicli sehr; etc., etc. 2 That is not possible. — ^ x believe that you {i. e., yourself) err. * I can err me {i. e., myself). 6 I remind me {i. e., myself) of that very well. ^ I ask you thousand times for pardon. ^ Take ye it not ill. *" Denn makes the question more polite. 314 EINKAUFE. Durchaus nicht. Hier siiid 150 Mark. WoUen Sie so freundlich sein, mir eiue Quittung zu geben? Gewiss. Darf ich bitten? Und nun mochte ich mir einen neuen Rock machen lassen. Bis wann soil der Rock fertig sein? Ich brauche ihn * nachsten Freitag. Ich gehe am Freitag in Gesellschaft. Aber ich rechne sicher darauf, dass der Rock passt. Sie konnen sich darauf verlassen.^ Hat der letzte nicht gut gepasst? O ja, mit Ausnahme der Armel. Was fehlte^ denn den Armeln? Sie waren ein wenig zu kurz. Gut. Dann werde ich sie diesmal ein wenig langer machen. Und wann kann ich zum Anprobieren^ kommen? Bitte kommen Sie Mittwoch abend NOTES. 1 Verlassen = fc^mucfen^ uub iijn jum fd)dnften unb intereffanteften ©trom ber 2Be(t mac^en. — 3Sa^ ftir ein grower Drt* (iegt ta ^u unfrer 9f?e(f)ten? — 5)a§ tft ^onn, etne ©tabt bon iiber 30,000 (£in= it)o[)nern, bie nainentUd;^ burc^ tf)re Umt)erfitat berii^mt^ ift, iiK(d)e ^u ben beftcu unb 6efnd)teften 2)eutfd)Ianb§ i^,d)'6vt. ^^rinj 3l(6ert, ber ©ema^l ber ^onigin t)on (^ng= ianb, (;at (;ier ftubiert. ^ie ©tabt befi^t^ and; eine fd)5ne Statue 33eet^ot)en§, ber ^u "^onn geboren 'max. — 2l(;! ge^t fcingt^ bie Sanbfd)aft an fc^oner gu iDerben. — 3^/ wii^ ^i^ tt)erben gleic^ ba§ ©iebengebirge^ fe(;en. ^itte nebmen ©ie inein @(a^3.^^ (Seben ©ie bie 33erge?^^ — ©e(;r gut. 2luf bent einen fe(;e id; aud; eine ntalerifc^e S^iuine. — ® a§ ift ber ®rad)enf e(g/^ p)av ^^ ber niebrigfte/* aber bei ^t)eiten;^^ befud)tefte ^^ Don 't)m fieben Bergen. 6d)on e^e if;n £orb ^tjron befungen f)atte a(§ " The castled crag of Drachenfels/' VDar fein ©i^fel^^ einer ber befud^teften ^unfte am 9il;ein, 'i)a er eine unbefc^reibUd; ^^ fd)dne 2(u§= fid;t bietet. §ier folP^ and) ©iegfrieb, ber ^c(b^ ber 9^ibeUingen,2i ben ^radjen befam^ft ^ unb erfc^lagen ^ (;aben. 1 Ruins. Lit. : castle-ruins. — 2 Shore. — ^ Adorn. — * Place. 5 Especially. — « Celebrated. — ^ Possesses. — 8 From anfangen. 9 Seven mountains. The neuter singular das Gebirge is used, because these mountains form a single group. 1*^ Field-glass.— n Der Berg, mountain. Plural: Berge. 12 Drachenfels, name of one of the seven mountains. Lit.: Dragon- rock. — 13 Indeed. — i'* Ne'-drie/i-ste, lowest. — ^^ By f^., 16 Most visited. — i^ Summit. — i^ Indescribably. 19 Lit.: Here f^hall also Siegfried. Anglice : Here Siegfried is said, etc. ^0 Hero.— 21 Die Nibelungen. "The Dwarfs," a famous German legend.— 22 Fought.- 23 Slain. 326 DIE EINKAUFE. — SSeld; prad;tl^oI(c§ ^i(b ! ^ ^ie ^erge unb gelfen^ init limn ina(enfd;en 9^uiiien, bie jaBUofen^ ©dnffe auf bciu 6trom, bie Ueblid;en* Drte an ben Uferii, bie griinen 3nfe(n/ ha^^ ift ein entjiidenbe^ ^ panorama/ — ^a, e§ ift iDirfUd; nad) meiner 2(nfid;t ber fc()onfte ^eil be§ 9^(;eine§. — Unb mie (;ei6t bie reijenbe^ 3nfel ^ier ^u unfere Sinfen? — ^a§ ift 9]onnenmert.^ ^a§ ftattlidje ©ebdubc auf ber Snfel ift ein grauenftofter.^^ §ier ijat ber Sage md)^^ §i(begunb iwn ^rad)enfelg, bie ©eliebte^^ 9^o(anb§, beg ^alabing Raxl§> be^ ©rofeen, ber ini 2:t;al t»on 3tonce»= t)alle§ fiel/^ ben ©c^leier^* genommen, ai§> fie ben ^elben= tob 1° beg ©eliebten erfatjren.^^ 2l6er ^olanb fe^rt i)cun : i' „Unb begrabt^^ bag ^lofter fd)on ^ilbegunb, ©0 fe^ id; mid) ^ier auf ben ©tein Unb fd)aue ^eitlebeng/^ junt 3::obe njunb,^ ^inab^i auf ha§> ^lofter am 9^^ein." (5ef)en ©ie ^ier ^ur 9?ed)ten bie ^uine 'oon Sftolanbged,^^ ber )oon 9^o(anb erbaiiten 33urg!23 ^on bem fogenannten Dblanbgbogen^ genie^t^ man eine it>unbert?ol(e 2lugfid;l auf hm dti^^in. 1 Picture. — ^ Felsen {masculine), rocks, 8 Tsal'-lo'-z'n, numberless, innumerable. — * Lovely. 5 Iii'-z'ln, islands. — 6 Charming. — ^ View. — ^ Charming. 8 No'-nen-vart'. — w Convent. Lit.: women's cloister. 11 Lit. : here to-the saying (i. e., story) according. Anglice: Here as the story goes. — '* Sweetheart.' — 13 Imperfect of fallen. 14 Shli'-'r, veil. — is Heroic-death. 16 Learned. — iT' Heimkehren, to return home. 18 And does the cloister bury beautiful Hildegund ! — Should be die schOne. But poetical license allows the use of the undeclined form schon. — 19 Lit.: look during life. Anglice: My life long, 20 Sore, wounded.— 21 Down. 22 Lit. : Roland's Ci)nier. — 23 Cnstle, or fort. 24 Roland's arch. — '^^ Geniessen, to enjoy. THE PURCHASES. 327 DIRECTIONS. — Translate and copy off these notes, then learn them by heart, and some time afterward write them from memory. For models of German letters, consult pages 48 and 49, if necessary. 1 Invitation to dinner. — Mr. and Mrs. A. have (lit. : give themselves the honor) the honor to invite Mr. and Mrs. D, to dinner for next Tuesday, 7th inst. (lit. : the 7th of this) (at) one o'clock in the after- noon. — 2 j^it. : of-afternoon. — ^ Einladen, to invite. — ■* Acceptance. 5 Send their very best thanks (lit. : thank most obligingly). 6 And will ])e happy to accept it (lit. : and will to-the saine continuance give). — * Or: Mittagsessen. Part IV. THE PURCHASES. Ei:N^KAUrE. •o^o*« SECTION II. 1. MAILING LETTERS, etc. 2. IN A DRY- GOODS STORE. 3. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 4. VOCABULARY: THE BODY. 5. VISIT OF THE TAILOR. 6. AT THE HABERDASHER'S. 7. ON THE RHINE (II). 8. INVITATION TO A PARTY. 88» 330 ElNKiVUFK II. GERMAN. 1. Wenii Sie heute eiiiige Einkaufe fiir mich besorgeii konnten,^ — (So)^ wiirden Sie mich sehr verbinden. Das thut mir sehr leid, aber ich habe wirklich keine Zeit. Wollte ich fiir Sie ausgehen,* so ^ konnte ^ ich die Briefe nicht schreiben, die heute noch abgehen miissen. Sind die so wichtig? Ja ; einige hatte ich schon vor einer Wochef schrei- ben sollen.J Zum Beispiel, wenn ich meinem Oiikel heute nicht schreibe, (so)^ wird er mir nicht zur rechten Zeit Geld schicken konnen. um das Haus in der Marktstrasse zu kaufen. NOTES. 1 For the use of the subjunctive, see page 340, Section II. 2 When a principal clause ./o^^ows a dependent clause it may indiffer- ently be introduced or not by so if the dependent clause expresses a condi- tion. Thus we can say either: Wenn Sie heute einige Einkaufe fiir mich besorgen kdnnten, so wiirden Sie, etc. ; or: Wenn Sie heute einige Einkaufe fur mich besorgen konnten, wiirden Sie, etc. — Do not forget, however, that so cannot be used if the j)riiu>i- pal clause begins the sentence. Thus, we would say : Sie wiirden mich sehr verbinden, wenn Sie, etc.; never: So, wiirden Sie mich sehr verbinden, otc. —For inversion (w^iirden Sie), see page 84, III. — t Vor einer Woche, a week ago. Strictly : Before of -a week. \ See page 287, note I. THE FURCHASES. 331 II. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. V6n ze ho-F-t^ i^-ni-gr^ in^-ko-i -fe I'iii* mich be- z6r^-g^ kun^-t'n,— Zo. Lit' A-d6s'-ga'-'n . . '.^. . stiri'-b'n. Vich'-ilGh. Markt'-s7itra'-se. . bre'-fe If you could make some purchases for me to- day,i — You would oblige me very much. I am very sorry, but I have really no time. If I went out for you ^' I would not be able to write several letters which must go to-day. Are they so important? Why, yes. Some (of them) should have been written a week ago.^ For instance, if I do not write to-day to my uncle he will not be able to send me money in time to buy that house in Market St.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 If you to-day of some purchases for me take care could. 2 A-few had I already before of a week to-write ought. See p. 287, n. 1. 3 Will he to-me the money not to-the right time to-send be able. * Instead of, Wenn ich fiir Sie ausgehen wollte. In any clause expressing a condition, the conjunction wenn may be omitted. In that case the sentence assumes the interrogative form, that is to say, the verb comes at the very beginning of the clause. Thus : If I ivere to go out for you may be rendered either by : Wenn ich fiir Sie aus- gehen wollte, or, with wenn omitted by : Wollte ich fiir Sie ausgehen (lit. : would I for you go out). N. B. — Wlietlier Avenn i.- omitted or not, it is at the option of the speaker to use or not to use so with a principal clause following. See note 2, page 330. 332 EINKAUFE. Das ist etwas anderes. Aber warum telegraphie- ren Sie ihm nicht? Was fallt Ihnen ein?^ Er bekommt da, wo er wohnt, einen Brief schneller als eine Depesche.^ Dann muss er in einem sehr kleinen Ort wohnen. Allerdings Nun, was giebt's?* 2. Der Brieftrager hat soeben diese beideii Briefe fur Sie gebracht. Geben Sie her! Hier sind sie. So. Nun bringen Sie diese Briefe auf die Post! Soil ich sie freimachen?^ Das versteht sich. Und einen * miissen Sie ein- schreiben lassen. Wohl den^ nach New York. Eben^ den. Hier haben Sie eine Mark fiir das Porto. Note — Study the Demonstrative Pronouns, NOTES. *^ From Einfallen, to occur. Also : Wo denken Sie hin ? 2 Or, ein Telegram m (ta-lS-gram'), iieut. 8 Or, frankieren (f raii-ke'-r'ii). 4 When ein, eine, ein is used without a nomi it has a strong accent 6 Demonstrative pronoun. — 6 Any demonstrative pronoun may b< einpliasi/ed by putting eben before it. — * Abbrev. for was giebt es This abbrev. of es into »9 (or strictly, s) is quite frequent. THE PUKCHASES. 333 Ta-le-gra-fe'-r'n. Felt in!. slie. Vas gepts'. . da-pe'- 2. Dar bref -tr4 -g'r hat zio-a^-b'n de^-z6 bi^-d'n bre^-fe fiir ze g^'hrakht^, Har'. Her zint' ze. A-6of de post'. Fri'-ma'-T^Ti'n. Fer-s?itat' in'-shri'- b'n. Dan'. A'-b'n dan' p6r'-to. That is different.! I think you had better send him a tele- gram. ^ What are you thinking about ? A letter will reach him quicker than a telegram, where he lives.^ It must be a very slow place.* So it is Well, what is the matter? The letter-carrier has just now broiig-ht these two letters for you. Give them to-me. Here, madam. Well. Now mail these letters.^ Shall I put stamps on ? ® Of course. You must have one (of them) registered. The one for N. Y., I suppose."^ Exactly. 8 Here is a mark for postage. page 499. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 That is something else. ^ But why telegraph yon to-him not? 3 What to you occurs (fallt . . . ein)? He receives there, where he lives, a letter quicker, etc. — ■* Then must he in a very small place live, s Now take (strictly : bring) ye these letters to the Post-office. 6 Shall I them free make? ' Well {or rather, surely) the for N. Y. — 8 Even the (i. e., that one). 334 EINKAUFE. 3. Da Sie lieute niclit ausgehen, so muss icli nieiue Einkaiife selbst besorg^en. Johann, der Wagen soil vorfahren Georg, nach den Linden Halten Sie an, Georg, ich will hier aussteigen. Fahren Sie an das Trottoir heran ! Ich fiirchte in den Rinnstein zu treten. Was steht zu Ihreu Diensten? Bitte zeigen Sie mir einige Seidenstofie. Hier, wenn's gefallig ist. Was kostet diese Seide? 15 Mark der Meter. Das ist mir zu teuer. Auserdem ist mir die Farbe zu dunkel. Ich mochte gern etwas helleren Stolf' haben. 5. Aber hier ist ein Stiick, das Ihuen g^e- wiss gefallen wird. Nein, das^ geMlt mir auch niclit. Ich will lieute lieber^ keine Seide kaufen. NOTES. 1 Das used as a demonstrative pronoun (instead of dieses) is strongly accented.— 2 Irregular comparative of the adverb gern. Lit. / ivUl to-day rather no silk buy. THE PURCHASES. 335 3. Da ze li6-i^-te iiicJit a-obs^-j?ii -'n zo iiioi)s \eh luV'ue in^'-ko-i'-fe. Por'-fa'-r'n. Ga-6rc7i'. A-dbs'-s7iti'-g'n. Tro-to-aiy. Rin'-sTitin'. 4. Vas shtaV tsoo e^-r'n den^-st'n. Tsi'-g'n zi'-d'n- shto'-ie. Ma'-t'r. A-ob'-s'r-dam ts^ doon'-k'l. He'-le-r'n. far'-be 5. A^-b'r her^ ist in shtitJc'^ das e^-n^n g6-vis^ g-6- fa^-l'n virt. Das' SL-obkh' nicht. As you do not go out to- tlay, I have to do my shopping- myself. John, order the carriage^ George! To the Linden. Stop, George. I want to go into that store. Get nearer to the sidewalk. I am afraid to step into the gutter. What can I do for you? Please, let me see some silk stuffs.2 This way, if you please. How much is this silk ? * That is fifteen marks a yard. That is too dear for me. Be- sides, it is too dark. I would like something of a lighter color.* Here is something" you will like, madam.^ No, I don't like that either.* I will rather not buy any silk to-day. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 The carriage shall go-forth. — 2 Pray, show me some silk stuffs. 3 What costs this silk?— ^ Some lighter stuff. — 5 But here is a piece that to-you surely please will. — ^ No, that pleases me also not. 336 EINKAUFE. Wollen Sie mir gefiilligst sagen, wo die Abteilung fiir Leinenzeug ist? Gewiss; rechts, am Ende des Saales Was kosten diese Taschentiicher ? 20 Mark das^ Dutzend. Gut. Geben Sie mir 2 Dutzend! Wunschen Sie vielleieht sonst noch etwas? Ja, ich brauche noch Stecknadeln und einen Kamm. Hier sind Stecknadeln, und auf jenem Tisch finden Sie Kiimme. Gut. Ich nehme 2 Piickchen Stecknadehi, einen weiten und einen engen Kamm.* Was macht das 2Hisammen ? Die Taschentiicher kosten 40 Mark, 2 Packchen Nadehi 1 Mark, der weite Kamm 2 Mark 50, und der Staubkamm 1 Mark 25, macht zu- sammen 44 Mark 75. Note. — Study how to translate "it, him, her," 6. Adele, hast du das Taschentuch ge- saiimt ? Ja, hier ist es.^ NOTES. 1 Observe that in German the definite article (der, etc.) is used instead of the indefinite (ein, etc.) with expressions of measure or quantity. — ^ It = es, here, because Taschentuch is neuter. THE PURCHASES. 337 Ap'-ti'-ld6fi fur li'-nen tso-ich'. Ta'-sli'n-tu'-cTi'r. Zonst' nokh et'-vas. S7itek'-na'-d'ln. Tsvi pek'-cTi'n. Tsoo-za'-ni*n. Will you please tell me where the department for linen goods is? On the right side, at the rear of the store ^ How much are these handker- chiefs ? Twenty marks a dozen. Very well. Give me two dozen. Do you want anything else ? Yes, I want some pins and a comb. Here are pins, and on that table you will find combs. Very well. I will take two packages of pins, a large comb, and a fine one. How much is that altogether?^ The handkerchiefs are 40 marks ; 2 packages of pins, 1 mark; the large comb, 2^ marks ; and the fine comb. 1\ marks; altogether, 44 marks 75 (pfennig). etc., pages 484 and 485. 6. A-da^-16 ta^-sh'n- tobkh' g-^-zo-imt^. Adele, have you hemined the pocket-h'd-k'ch'f ? Yes, here it is. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Certainly ; right at the end of the hall. 2 What makes that together? * Or, Staubkamm, s/ita-oop'-kam'. Lit. dust-comb. 338 EINKAUFE. Das ist ganz hiibsch, nur der Saum ist ein biss* chen^ breit; doch das schadet nichts. Wo hast du das Leinenzeug zu den Taschen- tiichern gekauft? Bei Gerson. Was soil ich jetzt nahen ? Glaubst du, dass du den Armel deines blauen Kleides ausbessern konntest? Du weisst,* dass er zerrissen ist.^ Ich werde es versuchen. Bringe mir meinen Fingerhut; er ist auf den Boden gefallen. Hier ist.er. Ich kann die Nahnadel nicht einfadeln. Gieb sie 'mal her I So. Ich danke schon. Ich werde diesen Saum aber lieber auf der Nah- maschine nahen. Was stickst du da, Marie? Ich sticke ein Paar PantofFel als Geburtstags- geschenk fiir Rudolf. Lassf mich das Muster sehen ; es ist sehr hiibsch. NOTES. 1 Ein bisschen, familiar expression = ein 'wenig. Strictly : a little bit. '^ Observe tlie use of the indicative mood although in indirect quota- tion. Verbs of kmnving, proving, being convinced, etc., are, as seen here, more apt to have an inilicative than a subjunctive after them. THE PURCHASES. 339 Za-d6in . ... bis'-cTj'n brit' jtia^det. Yetst' na'-'n. Er'-m'l a-oos'-be'-s'rn tser-ri'-s'n. ^ VeT-zoo'-kh'n. Fin'-'r-tLOOt' bo'-d'n. HSr'. STitikst. S7iti'-ke par pan-to'-f 1 Roo'-dolf Md6s'-t'r. That is very well done/ only the hem is a little too wide ; that does not make any dif- ference though. 2 Where did you buy the linen for the handkerchiefs ? At Gerson's. What shall I sew now? Do you think you could mend the sleeve of your blue dress ; you know it is torn."*^ I will try. Bring me the thimble. It has fallen on the floor. There it is. I cannot thread the needle. Give it to me. There it is.* Thank you, very much. I will rather sew this seam with * the sewing-machine. What are you embroidering, Mary? I am making a pair of slippers for a birthday present to Rudolph.^ Let me see the pattern, f It is very pretty. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 That is quite pretty. — 2 However that harms nothing. 3 Give it once hither. So.— * On. 5 As birthday present for Rudolpli. * If not familiar: Glauben Sie dass Sie konnten. Sie wissen, etc. — f If not familiar: Lassen Sie. 340 EINKAUFE. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. I. -IN A MAIN CLAUSE. 1. The present subjunctive is often used to express a wish or a request. Thus : 1. Long live the king ! = Lang lebe der Konig. Let 7iot mankind tempt the gods = DeY Mensch versuche die Gotter nicht. Let every man do his duty = Jedei' Mann thue seine PHicht.* This use is naturally limited to the third person (singular or plural). For the first person plural, however, the subjunctive is sometimes used instead of the imperative. Thus : J Lassen Sie uns gehen (^imperative), or X Gehen wir ! (subjunctive). 2. The imperfect subjunctive followed by doch is also occasionally used to express a wish. Thus: Iivish the Spring would come ! = Kaine doch der Friihling! (Lit. : Might-come only the Spring /) f n.-IN A DEPENDENT CLAUSE. 1. IN INDIRECT STATEMENTS OR QUESTIONS. The Subjunctive is frequently used in indirect statements {as: I said that he did 7iH know it) and indirect questions {as: I asked ivhat o^clock it tvas), especially after verbs ex})ressiiig doubt, fear, hope, purpose, desire, advice, entreaty, etc. — The subordinate clause in these cases is usually in- troduced by dass, damit, damit nicht (lest), wenn, ob, etc. 1. / said he did not know = Ich sagte, dass er es nicht wisse, 2. / asked what o^ clock it was = Ich fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei (lit. : it be). *• This may also be rendered by using soil. Thus: Jeder Mann soil seine Pflicht thun. t Notice the po.sition of the subject {after the verb) in these opta- tive forms. THE PURCHASES. 341 3. I advise you not to go = lc\\ rathe, dass Sie nicht gehen (lit. : that you not go). 4. Leave the picture here, so he may see it = Lassen Sie das Bild hier, damit er es sehe {may-see). 5. Speak to him, lest he (i. e., for fear he may) forget «7 = Sprechen Sie mit ihm, damit er es nicht vergesse.f Note 1.— Notice, however, that in Enghsh when the verb of the first clause is in ajmst tense (as in the first and second sentences) the verb in the second clause is also put in a past tense. (Thus : He said he did not know. — / asked what o'clock it teas). In German, however, the present or imperfect of the subjunctive may be used indifferently and without any reference to the tense of the verb in the first clause. Thus^ we could say inditferently : r Er sagte, dass er es nicht wisse (lit. : may know), or : ' \ Er sagte, dass er es nicht wusste (lit. : ynight-know). '-\ Ich fragte, wie viel Uhr es sei (lit. : may-he), or: Ich fragte, wie viel Uhr es ware (lit. : might-he). Note 2. — But in case the present subjunctive o^ the particular verb happens to be the same in form- as the present indicative, the imperfect subjunctive only must then be used. Thus : They said they had no children = Sie sagten, dass sie keine Kinder hatten.* Never haben, because haben is the form for both the indicative and subjunctive present. 2. AFTER WENN. The subjunctive must be used after wenn (if), provided the speaker wishes to express that the condition introduced by if is contrary to the actual fact. Thus : Wenn ich Geid hattCf wiirde ich es den Armen geben = If I * As already known (see page 136), the conjunction dass is fre- quently omitted, in which case the construction of the subordinate clause is the same as that of a principal clause. But this does not affect the use of the subjunctive, which is employed in either case, if indi- cated. Thus we can say indifferently {but with the subjunctive in either case) : Sie sagten, dass sie keine Kinder hatten, or: Sie sagten, sie hatten keine Kinder, f Lit. : m order that he it forget not. 342 EINKAUFE. had money {but, in fact, I have none), I 'd give it to the poor. Note 1. — The conjunction wenn may be omitted. In that case tlie interrogative order is used, the verb coming at the very beginning of the clause. Thus we can say indifferently : Wenn er krank ware, wiirde er nicht hier sein. Or: Ware er krank, (so)* wiirde er niclit hier sein. Note 2. — When if really means whether (as : / don^t know if he could come), it should not be translated by tvenn, but by o6; and the indicative or subjunctive may be used indifferently, as the speaker chooses. Ex : He asked me if {i. e., 'whether) I tvas satisfied = Er fragte mich, ob ich zufrieden -ware. I do not know if, {%. e., tvhether) he is there — Ich weiss nicht, ob er da ist. 3. AFTER VERBS OF COMMAND. After befehlen (Jto order, to command) and sagen [used in the way of command), one of the auxiliaries sollen (or mogen) must be used, and they are placed in the subjunctive. Thus : He ordered rue to write the letter at once ■=■ Er befahl mir, dass ich den Brief sogleich schreiben sollfe. I told him to come home at onGe= Ich sagte ihm, dass er sofort nach Hause kommen sollfe. N. B. — After the weaker verbs of command, as sagen, etc., mogen is often used instead of sollen. Thus we could say as well : Ich sagte ihm, dass er sofort nach Hause kommen mochte. 4. INSTEAD OF THE CONDITIONAL. The subjunctive is frequently used instead of the conditional. Thus : It woidd be a pity = Es ware schade ! (subjunctive). Or : Es wiirde schade sein (conditional). It would have been a pity=F>s ware schade gewesen {past .subjunctive). Or : Es wiirde schade gewesen sein (past conditional). * So is often used to begin a subordinate clause where no corre- sponding word is used in Englisb. In reality it may be either used or omitted in German, as the speaker may choose. THE PUllCHASES. 343 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Der inensehliclie Korper.* Der Kopf (kopf), Die Stirn (sTitirn), Das Gesicht (ge-zic^t'), Die Backe (ba'-ke) ; Die Backen,^ Das Auge (a-oo'-ge) ; Die Augeii, Das Ohr (or) ; Die Ohren, Die Nase (na'-ze), Der Mund (moont), Die Lippe (li'pe) ; Die Lippen, Das Kinn (kin), Der Zahn (tsan) ; Die Zahne, Der Bart (bart), Der Hals (hals), Der Riickeii (rw -k'n), Die Brust (broost), Die Hand (bant) ; Die Hande, Der Finger (fifi'-'r) ; Die Finger. Das Knie (kne) ; Die Kniee (kne' Das Bein (bin) ; Die Beine, Der Fuss (foos) ; Die Fiisse, Einen Zahn aiisziehen,* Halsschmerzen * haben, The head. The forehead. The face. The cheek ; the cheeks. The eye ; the eyes. The ear ; the ears. The nose. The mouth. The lip ; the lips. The chin. The tooth ; the teeth. The beard. The neck. The back. The breast, the chest. The hand; the hands. The finger ; the fingers, ■e),2 The knee ; the knees. The leg ; the legs. The foot ; the feet. To extract a tooth. To have a sore throat 1 Also, die Wange (van'-e); phir. : die Wangen. 2 Sometimes sliorteiuMl to Knie (kne). 3 A-oos'-tse -'n. — ^ Hals'-shnier -ts'n. * DSr niensh'-li-c/te kur'p'r. The human body. 344 EINKAUFE. To he learned by heart and then repeated aloud as a real conversa lion, whether for self-study or preparation in the class-room. (See also Directions before Part I,) GESPRACHE. l. — BESUCH DES SCHNEIDERS. Guten Morgen, mein Herr. Ich bringe Ihnen den Anzug zum Anprobieren. — Ich wollte eben ausgehen ; konnten Sie nicht den Nachmittag wiederkommen. — Das ist mir leider^ nicht moglich. Ich bin zu beschaftigt. — Nun gut; aber schnell, wenn ich bitten darf Wie sitzt der Anzug ? — Der Rock sitzt ausgezeichnet. Nur im Riicken wirft er einige Falten;^ warten Sie, ich will sie aufheften.^ — Aber es kommt mir vor,* als seien die Schosse^ zu lang. Sie gehen ja bis iiber die Kniee.— ^eien Sie ohne Sorge.^ Das werde ich schon in Ordnung bringen. 2.-BEIM HAARSCHNEIDER.* Ich mochte mir gern die Haare^ schneiden^ lassen, aber ziemlich^ kurz, bitte. — Wie das letzte Mai? — Nein, nicht ganz so kurz. — So. Wollen Sie sich nicht auch rasieren^^ lassen? — Ja, aber beeilen^^ Sie sich. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Li'-d'r, unfortunately. That is for uie {slrictli/, to me) unfortu- nately not possible. I am sorry, I can 't do it. — 2 Die Falte, fal'-tS, fold, crease. Falten werfen, lit. : to throw folds. 8 A-oof -hef '-t'n, to pin up. — ■*Itseeuisto mo. — 5 gchoss,???., fl;ij^. 6 Do not trouble yourself, lit. : he without anxirfii. — 7 From das Haar (liar), hair. — « To out. — » TsemMIch, })r('tt\-. — i" Ra-ze'-r'n, to shave. — 11 BS-i'-l'n, sich beeilen, roHexive verb, to make haste. * Har'-shni'-d'r, hair-dresser. Also : Frizeur (£re-s jelit ^obtenj/ einer ber fd)bnfteu ©tcibte be^ 9H;ein§. ^onnen ©ie e^3 fcf)en? — ©an^ gut, unb iua^ ift bag fiir eiiie im))ofante gefte^ auf beni anbern lifer? — ^ai?> ift bie beriil)mte geftimg @l)renbreitftein,^ bie ncbft' ben gegcniiberliegenben^ Serfen t>oii .^^obleuj eine bcr bebeuteubften ^ geftungen ^^ (5iiro))ag bilbet.^i ©ie tuiirbe nur ^UKinmt eiugenomnien/^ aber beibemaP^ fonnte bie ^efa^ungi* nur bnrd) hunger ^nr Ubergabe^^ gejmmgen^^ ii^erben. — ®a§ ift iuirflid) !ein SSnnber, mnn man biefe ge- iDaltigen^' ©teinmaffen ^^ betrac^tet.^^ 1 Lit. ; gets tired almost. Aiigllce : gets quite tired. 2 Abundance. — ^ Sich nahern (lit. : to near ones self), to approach. 4 Ko'-blents. — 5 Stronghold.— 6 A-r'n-brit'-s/ttln. 7 Together-with. — 8 Neighboring. Lit.: opposite-lying. 9 Most important, — i<> Fortresses. — " Constitutes. 12 Captured.— 13 Both times.— i* Garrison. 15 Surrender.— is Forced.— i^ Powerful. 18 Mass of stone. — la Beholds. 348 EINKAUFE. — SSenn ©ie tmeber einmal an ben 9^f)e{n fommen, fotlten om ^oot au§ gleid) fe(;en fonnen. ©e(;en ©ie! ^a ift e§, auf bem redjtcn lifer. ©^ ift reid) an fc^onen ©cmcilben nnb mtt)a\t vt)ertt)oIIe 8amni= (ungen Don ^fJiiftungcu/ SBaffen^ nnb fonftigen 2(Itertnmern.^ Slber vueit (;errUd;er aU atte biefe ^oftbarfeiten ^ ift bie rt)nnberi)o(le 3lu§fidBt, metc^e man l)on bem ©rf)fo^ geniefet. — ^er ghife ^uirb tuirfUd) immer fd)oner. ®iefe fteilen"^ gelfemifer erinnern^ (eb(;aft^ an ben §nbfon. Slber ma-c fi'ir ein mertmiirbig geformter^ ^^erg uijtbt fid;^ ba jn nnferer £infen? Unb atte ^(ide^^ finb auf ^m Jyelfen gcrid)tet.^^ — 1)a^ ift bie bietbefnngene ^^ Sorelei.^^ (Sie fennen bod)^* bie alte ©age? 2luf biefem gelfen faf,!"^ bie ^ee^^ Snrlei nnb lodte mit i(;rem ©efang ^' bie ©cbiffer ^^ an fid) unb ^og^^ fie in bie 2Bellen,^^ iDilbrenb ibre gat^r^enge^^ an ben 5l(i^>V^en22 ftranbeten.^^ ^oren ©ie, bie ©efellfcbaft^^ ftimmt^^ bie ^einefdje^ :^orelei2' an:^ ,,'^d) mi^ md;t, tua^ 1 Armors. — 2 Weapons. — ^ Various antiquities. ^ Precious things. — ^ Craggy, steep. — ^ Remina. — 7 Vividly. 8 Formed. — ^ Sich erheben, to rise.— i<> Looks.— n Directed. 12 Much sung.— 13 L,o'-re-li.' — ^* Surely, of course. 16 Imperfect of sitzen, /o .9*7. 1* Fairy. — '" Songs. — '8 Boatmen, sailors. 19 Tmpei-fcct of Ziehen, to pvll, to drag. 20 Waves.— 21 Crafts, boats.— 22 Craggy rocks. 28 Were stranded— 2-1 Company. 26 FroT\i anstinimen, to start to sing, to 'strike up.* 26 Of Heine — •^' Title of a song. * S/ttol'-ts'ii-fels , a cnstle. THE PURCHASES. 349 foil e^ bebeuten/ ba§ id) fo traurig^ bin." ^ie beutfcbcn ©tubenten, bie ^ier Dorbeifa(;rcn/ finb nid)t fo romantifd;. Dft rufen fie: „3Scr ift ber ^iirgermeifter * 'oon Dber= mefel? " ^ unb, „ (Sfcl^ ballt " ba§ @d)o^ ber 33eri3e mieber."' — 3^/ ^^i^ ©tubenten ^ ift nic^t§ ^eilig/^ fie treiben ^^ mit allem ifjren (Sdjerj.^^ SSie angene(;m ift e§ bagegen/^ mit einem fo liebenvtoiirbigeii ^^ unb fo funbigen ^^ @efellfd;after ^^ iDie ©ie auf bcm 9^(;ein 511 reifen, ber auf aEe^ ©e(;en^= it)erte aufmerffam mad^t}'^ — (Sie fdier^en. '^^h^x ^eutfd^e fennt bie fc^onen ^unfte bes 9^(;ein^. Slber nun fommen ioir balb nac^ beni fd)ijnen ^ingcn.^^ S^^^*^^ ^^^"6 ^^ S^jnen hen befannten 3}Jaufeturni ^^ ^eigen. ®a ift er fdion. (5e(;en ©ie jenen ^urm^ auf ber fteinen '^n^d Dor un§. ^en ^urm foil ^ifcbof §atto v>on Tlain}, ^^ erbaut l;aben, urn Don \)m Doriiberfal;renben ^ vSd)iffcrn 3^^^^ }>^^ erl;eben.^ (Sinft brad) nun eiue $unger§= not^ au^, unb ^ifd)of §atto/ber reidje ^^orrate^ an J^orn Ijatte, tooUte ben airmen nid)t^ geben. (Sr trieb fie Diel= mel)r^ in eiue ©c^eune imb liefe biefe an3i'inben.^ 211^ nun bie Ungliidlid)en jammerlic^^ fd)rieen, foil er gerufen ^abeu:^ Qoxt i^r, n)ie bie 3Jiau§lein ^feifen?^^ @eitbem 1 Lit. : what it shall mean. Anglice : what it means. 2 Sad.— « Travel by, pass by. — * Mayor. 5 O'-b'r-va-z'l, a town near by. — 6 A'-z'l. 7 From wiederhallen, to resound.— 8 W-chb, 9 Dative plural. — ^^ Sacred. — 11 Practice. 12 Jesting.— 13 However.— i^ Amiable. 15 Learned, well-posted. — I6 Companion. 17 il/aA;es (o?je, understood) a^fenfiVe. Anglice: calls one' s attention. 18 Bifi'-'n, a well-known and pretty town. 19 Mouse {or rat) tower. — 20 Tower. 21 Bishop Hatto of Mayence. 22 Passing by.— 23 Toll.— 24 To raise.— 25 Famine. 26 Store, stock.— 27 Moreover.— 28 Set on fire.— 20 Pitifully. ^ Lit.: Shall he. Anglice: he is said to.— 3i Whistle, squeak. 350 EINKAUFE. ocrfo(t]tcii^ ifm bie 9}laii)e iinb fdmuimmcn^ if)m biird) ba§ aSafjcr wad) unb fletterteii^ ben ^iirin (;inauf, in ben fid; ber ^ifd)of gefliidjtet,* nnb frafeen^ if)n auf.^ — SBeld) fc^redlid;e @eid)i(f)te ! — ©ie tt)irb nur baburc^ einigerma^en ^ f)infatlig/ ba§ Der Xurm erft 200 '^a\)x^ nad) be§ ^ifd)of^ Xobe erbaut rt)orben ift. Slber ba (;aben Wix ^ingen 'oov im§, "Fair Bingen on the Rhine," it)ie ^t^ron fingt. — ©0 (;ei6t eg mit 9ied)t, ben!c id). SJ^anc^e Sanb- fdjaft/ bie mir (;eute gefe(;en ^aben, luar woijl grogartiger, aber biefer ^lid auf bingen erfd)eint mir ungemein^ lieblid) unb anmutig^^ unb madjt einen tiefen ©inbrud^^ auf mid). — (^:g ift imrflid) fd)i)n. 3^^^*^^ ^^ ^i^^^ t;aben nun ben fd)onften 2:^eil be§ S^ibeing gefet)en. 3mifd;en^^ bingen unb Tlaxn^ iuirb bie ©egenb n)ieber f(ad) ^^ unb unintereffant — 2l(;! 8inb Wix enblid; in SJJainj? — $50, ba ift ber Sanbung^pla^ ^^ gerabe i^or un§. — 3d) mu^ geftef)en, id) bin tniibe getuorben unb it)erbe bie erfte 9^ad)t in ^Jlain^ fid)er gut fcbtafen. — 3n it)eld)em (Baftt)au§ tDerben ©ie abfteigen?^^ ^3d) gel;e gar nid)t in ein @aft^au§. 3^) tuerbe bei meineni ^reunb, §errn 9iitter, mo^nen. — Sf^itter! ^a§ ift ja mein ^ruber. 3Be(c^ mer!rt)iirbi= ge§ 3^if^^tt^^^^"ti^^ft^ii • ■^^ 3^) ^i^^ UTorgen uteinen 3>rubet befud)en unb iDerbe ©ie ^offent(id) fef)en. 3iia^Uer Mond, the moon. — =• Shinook'-za -fc/ten, jewels. 366 EINKAUFE. To he translated and written iyito German, hut also to he recited orally in the class-room. {For Self-Study, see Direc- tions, before Part I.) EXERCISES. l.-BEI DEM OPTIKER* What do you wish, gentlemen? — Let me see^ a good opera-glass.^ — Here is one^ of the best quality. — I cannot see anything with it.* What is the price of it? — Twenty-five marks. — Isn't that very dear? — Not for an opera-glass of that grade.^ — Is that your lowest price ? — Yes, sir, it 's the very lowest. — Now, my friend would like to see a pair of spectacles. — Is the gentleman long or short-sighted?^ — I am short-sighted. — Please read this. — I cannot. — Can you read that ? — Yes, I can read this. — Well, then, here is a (pair of spectacles) that will suit you.' Aids to Translation, 1 Zeigen Sie mir. Lit. ; show me. 2 Opernglas, o'-p'rn-glas', neuter. 3 Kines (or eins) not ein. When used without a noun, the indefinite article is declined like the definite article. Thus : einer, eine, eines. Seep, 364, n. 2. — * I can nothing with it see. 5 Von dieser Giite. Lit. - of this fjoodness. 6 Weitsichtig (vit'-zic/t'-tic/i), oder kurzsichtig. 7 One {feminine) \vliich to-you suit (passen) will * At the optician's. THE PURCHASES. 367 2.-IM KLEIDERGESCHAFT. What can I do for you, madam? — I would like to have a suit for my little boy. — Please pass this way,* madam. Here is a very fine suit. — It is too light ;^ it would show the dirt too easily.^ — Here is something . darker. — I do not like blue,t show me something in gray. — Here is a dark gray. — It is too dark, I want something lighter ..... Is this fast color ?^ — Yes, madam, we warrant it.* — How much is this suit ? — Fifty marks We have only one price. Note. — Study the Cases when the Definite Article is not used, page 462. \ 3. — BEI DEM HAARSCHNEIDER. How do you wish to have your hair dressed^ this morning? — I want to have it curled.^ (Do) not (put on) too much pomade ^ You did not brush my hair.^ — I beg pardon, look in this mirror. — I was wrong.^ Aids to Translation. 1 Hell, liel.— 2 It (see page 814) would too easily (zu leicht) soil (schmutzen, shmoo'-ts'n). — 3 1st die Farbe eclit (Sc/it). Lit. : genuine. — ■* Wir stehen dafiir. Lit.: stand for it. fi How will you this morning your hair (n.) to-make let? 8 I want it curled (gelockt, ge-lokt'). N- B. — A curl = eine Locke. Curls = liOcken. — "^ Pomade,/., po-ma'-de. 8 You have my hair not brushed (gebiirstet). — ^ I had wrong. * Bitte, hier. — f 1 have blue not willingly. X Ein dunkles Grau« 368 EINKAUFE. To be read by means of the notes in preparation for translating and reading aloud in class. For Self-Study, to be translated, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. SSSiem— !♦* — 9^un, tt)o fottefi it)ir (;eute ^inge^en? — 3d) benfe, \mv ge(;en ^uerft nati) ber 9?mgftra§e.^ 3Bie ©ie iDiffeii, halUn^ manege Scute bie Mngftrafee fi'ir^ bie fd)dnfte ©trafee in ©uro^a; obglcic^^ ic^ biefe 2lnfid;t md)t teile, fo mu^ ic^ bod^ gefte(;eu/ "oa^ fie eine :prad)tt)olIe ©tra^e ift. — SSarum ^ei§t^ fie benn eigentlid)^ Sf^ingftrafee ? — 5Rim an§> bent einfadjen ©runbe, n)eil fie faft einen tjollftvlnbigen '^ 3?ing bilbet. — @^ ift eine feltfame^ 3bee, eine runbe ©trafee anju; (egcn.^ — ^urc^au^ ni^t. Sie tDurbe einfad;^^ an 8teIIe^^ ber gcftung^iuerfe ^^ gebaut, U)eld)e bie ©tabt friil;er umgaben.^^ 3etU trcnnt^^ bie ©tra^e bie Slltftabt \)on ber Df^euftabt, ^ueld)e beilaufig^^ ungefd^r idjn mat fo gro^ wic erftere ift. Siber ha finb n)ir in^tvifc^en ^^ auf bem Mng angelangt. 1 Riii'-sfetra -sS.— 2 Halten fiir, to consider.— » Although. 4 Ge-s/ita'-'n, to admit. — ^ Heissen, to be called, c Any way. Strictly: properly.— ^ FSr-s/iten-dic/i,, complete. 8 Strange. — ^ Anlegen (separable verb), to construct. T.it. : to lay, to put against. — i" Simply. — n In the site of. 12 Fes'-tdons-var'-ke, fortifications- from Festungswerk, neut. 13 Imperfect of umgeben (oom-gS'-b'n), to surround. !•< Treimen (tre'-nen), to separate. — '5 Bi'-l6-T'-fTe/#., by tlie way. JG Tn-tsvi'-sh'n, m tlie meantime. — ••• Ven, Vienna. THE PURCHASES. 369 — SStrflid^ gro^arttg! 2Bte breit bte (Strafee tft, unb ti:)elc^ ^errltd;e ©ebdube ^u beibcn fur ein fd)dne§ ©ebaube 511 unferer 9^ed)ten? — ®ag ift bie Unii^erfitat.^ (Sie U)tffen, bte mebt5tmfd;e ^ ©d)u[e^ ber SSiener Umt)erfttat ift berii^mt. ®ie fd)dnc .^ird;e t)or ber Uniijerfitat ift bie ^otit)!ird)e.* ®er t)er= ftorbene^ ^uifer 3JiapmiIian^ bon aJieiifo^ liefe fie jur (Srinneriing an bie gliidlid)e S^ettiuig^ be§ ^aifcr^3 l^on Dftreid; erric^ten, beffen Sebert burd; ein ^ttmtat^ Oebrot;!^^ Ujorben tvat, — 3Belc^ geitJattiger ^au er(;e6t fid) (;ier gerabe i?or un§ ? — ^a§ ift bie ^aiferlic^e ^iing." (3ie ent(;alt einige fe^en^rt)erte SJiufeen. ^or attem mdd;te id) 3^nen gem bie ^aiferlid)e (5d)a^!ainmer ^^ S^ig^n, tt)enn tt)ir bie 33urg bcfud;en. ®ort ift imter anbern ^oftbarfeitcn ^^ ber Xxa- mant aufbett)a(;rt/* m^^n ^arl ber ^ii(;ne t)on 33urgunb ^^ in ber (Sd)(ac^t bei ©ranfon Dertor, unb tt)eld;er 133 J!arat^^ tuiegt. 2ln anberer ©telle ift ein ©maragb ^u fe(;en, ber nid;t n)eniger a(^ 2980 ^arat fc^n:)er ift. ®ie trone^^ ^avl§> be§ ©rofeen ift mid) bafelbft aufben^a^rt. — Unb \va§> ift ba§ fiir eine ^ird;e 5U unferer fiinfen? — ®ag ift bie 2luguftiner!ird)e/^ eine ber fd)dnften ^irc^en 2Bien§, ba^ nid)t tDeniger at§ (;unbert ^ird^en unb 1 OO-ne-ver'-zi-t^t', /., university. — 2 Ma-di-tse'-ni-she, medi- cinal. 8 The facnJtti of medicine. Strictly: the medicinal school. ^ V6-tef'-kir'-e/ie, votive church. — ° Verstorben, deceased, late. 6 3Iak-si-me-li-an'.— ^ Mek'-si-ko.— ^ Jlcscue. 9 A-ten-tat', attempt. — 1° From bedrohen, to menace, threaten witli.— 11 Ki'-z'r-li-c/fe h6orch\ 1- Shats'-ka'-m'r, /., treasure-room.— 13 Jewels. i"* AiifbeAvaliren, to keep, to save, to preserve. 15 Bobr-gobnt'. - lo Ka-rat% carats.— i^ Crown. 18 A-oo-goos-te'-u'r-kir'-c/te, C'liurcli of the Augustinians. 370 EINKAUFE. ©^nagogen^ 0)lt, o^ne bie ^(dfter ^u redjneu. ^ie 3j[u= gufttnerfird)e ent(;a(t iibrtgen^ and) bae 3}ceifteriDcrf Sano- t)a§, ba§ ©rabmal^ ber (Sr^l;eqogin ^ (i:()riftine.* ©^ ift ein§ ber ^errlid)ften ^i(bit)er!e, 'i)a^ je gefdjaffen tt)orbeu ift. ®a fallt mir eiti/' id; mufe ©ie morgcn and; in bie Jla^iijinerfird^e^ fiil;ren. ©ie ift ebenfo berii(;int ai§> ^(oftei mie a(§ ©rabftdtte' be§ ungllidlid)en ^erjogc^ t^oii 3teid)s= ftabt, be§ ein^igen 'Bofyn§> be§ grogeii Sla^oleon. ^a§ (Btab ber gro^en S^aiferiu 3J^aria Xi}u^\ia ift ebenfatl» bafelbft. — 2lber it)erben it)ir nii^t mid; ben ^om befud;en? — ^a§ Derfte^t fid;, ^er 8tep(;an§bom ift ein^3 ber am^ ge^eic^neteften goti^c^en^ ^amuerfe @uropa§. 2Bir biirfen nidjt i:)erfdumen,^ i^n 511 befud)en ^a^u ift bie 2Iu§fid;t Don ber ©^i^e^^ be§ 3:^nrme^^ luirftid; grofearttg, Tlan tann bon 'Da bie berti(;mten (Sd)lad)tfelber ^^ Don 3Sagranx, :2obau unb ©feUngen fe(;en, fo^uie bie ^^orftdbte^^ 2Bien§ mit ber ^onan.^^ — 3ft itt ber £aiferli(f)en ^nrg nid;t and) eine @emd(be= fmnmlung ? — ^a§ nid)t. ®ie ©emdibegalerie befinbet fic^ im fogenanntcn ^ebebere/* einem gerdumigen^^ ©ebdnbe in ber 9leuftabt. ^iefe ©emdibegalerie gi(t^^ fiir eine ber bebeutenbften Slnnftfammlungen (Suro^a^. 3lber fe(;en ©ie biefen ftattlid^en '^an i)or un§? 2)a§ ift ba^ nene D^ern= 1 Die Synagoge (zin -a-go'-ge), synagogue. 2 Grap'-mal', tomb. — 3 Erts'-her'-tso-gin, Archduchess. 4 Kris-te'-ne. — ^ Btj the way. Strictly : there occurs to me. 6 Ka-poo-tse'-n'r-kir'-clie, Church of the Capuchins. 7 Grap'-s/i-te'-te, burying-place.— 8 Go'-tish. 9 We rmist not fail. — i« Die Spitze, top. — n Battle-fields. 12 Die Vorstadt (for'-sJttat), suburb. — 13 D5'-iia-oo. " Bel-ve-dar'. — i5 Spacious. — 16 From gelten, tolje considered. THE PURCHASES. 371 f}au^, ®a§ alte ift t>or mel)reren Sa^ren abgebrannt.^ Bk U)iffen, bie SBieuer finb 6eruf)jnt fur i(;re t)ortreff(tc^e ^ Sluffubrimg ^ t>on D^ern. — Srber l;ore id) ba nicfit SJliifi!? — 3a iDol;(, fie fd;a[lt^ l>om ^^solf^garteu ^ beriiber, ivo ba^ befannte ©traii6'ld)e Drd)efter fpielt. ©ollcn tt)ir cttua ()iiuiberi3e(;eu uub bay S^on5ert an(;oren? — ^^oinit bin ic^ ganj eiiu^erftanbeii. 3d) mod)te bie (5trau§'fcl)c ^apctle^ )d)x gern l;breu unb aud) ©traufe felbft gerne fel;en — ^©0, tDit Woilm i)kv ^la^ nef)men. 25ir finb gerabe ^iir ^aiife'' t3e!ommen. 2(ber ba§ mad)t nid)t^3. 3<^ ^^^ fel;r miibe unb Sie \v>oi)i and), unb fo fonnen \v>\v eine gcit lang au§ruf)en. A propos, auf n)e(d)em 2Bege finb (Sie eigentUd;^ nacb SSien gefommen? — 3^) ^^11" ^^oii SreSben unb bin iiber Tlmd^m gefaf)ren. — ma ber (gifenbaf)n? — ^a§> (;atten ©ie nic^t tf)un follen.^ (Sie fatten in Sin^ au^fteigen unb 'oon ba init bem ^am^fboot bie ®onau l;inunter fafiren fotten. ®ie lifer ber ®onau finb faft ebenfo fd)i3n mie bie be§ 9^(;ein». ©ie n:)erben ba§ felbft beurteilen^^ fonnen, benn wiv woiUn i'lberntorgen nad) ^ah- lenberg fabren. ^ag ift ein fel;r intereffanter 2lu§f(ug.^^ ©ine ^abn, \vdd)t ber 9f?igibal)n ai)nlid) ift/^ fiU;rt auf bie §d()e be§ Merges, unb bon ba geniefet man eine :prad)tDotte 2(u§fid)t auf bie ®onau unb 'ti^n Wiener 2Ba(b.^^ .... Slber (;oren (Sie? ^a beginnt bie 3)Zufif rt)ieber. 1 From abbrennen, to burn up. — 2 Excellent. — 3 Performance. * To sound. — 5 Peox)le's garden. — ^ Band. 7 Pa-db'-ze, intermission. — 8 Any way. — ^ See page 287, note 1 w Judge. — 11 Excursion. — 12 Resembles. Lit. : is like. IS The celebrated Vienna forest. 372 EINKAUFE. DIRECTIONS. — Translate and copy off the following notes, then learn them by heart, and some time afterwards write them again from memory. Consult pages 48 and 49. !♦ — mbfagcbricf.i 2» — ^(bfaQcbttef* J^^^^^^^.^^^^^'i/^h^H^l^^^^CA ^^6-«*^^:a«:/5*^«^<^<^;?^;;^!^ f^/h*^ ■^^■^-f-t/^^ VfH^C-^-^^ C^^'P^-*l^^i!>f'^'^-^^nn ©traufe, ber beriU;mte 3Sa(^er!onitv" tt)eld)en ©ie mo^l^ meinen, ber ift tot; e^ ift fein 6ol)ii, ber aber nid)t minber^ beriU;mt ift a(g ber ^ater. greilid) fodte man ben jungen ©trmife e^er® "iizw ^olfafbnig^ nennen, benn er ^ai a(§ 5lomponift^ befonber^ in ber ^^olfa ^^^or= treffUc^e^ geleiftet. — fiftreid) fc^eint n)ir!(id) ba§ !(affifd;e £anb ber ^awy- mnfif ^u fein. ©inb benn nid)t and) banner nnb @nni3l Dftreid)er^^ gert)efen? — @eu)i6, nnb banner ift nod) ba^n" ein SBiener ^inb ebenfo tt)ie (Strang. ©§ ift and) md)t ^n t)ertDnnbern/2 baft bie STan^mnfi! 6ei nn§ blii^t.^^ ©ie tviffen bod), ba^ fein 1 Hinreissend (hin''-ri'-s'nt), charming. liit. : ' carry ing-away; transporting. — 2 S/ipel', play ; i. e., performance. 8 Der Tanz (tants), dance. — ^ Vier'-di-g'ii, to appreciate. 6 Val'-ts'r-ku'-nicJi, pol'-ka — , king of waltz, polka. 6 I suppose. — 7 Less. Also : weniger. — « Rather. 9 Kom'-po-nist', (composer. — i" Austrians. — n Moreover. 12 Astonishing. Strictly : It is not to wonder at (i. e., to be wondered at). 18 Bluht, from blUhen (blu'-'n), to flourish. THE PURCHASES. 391 3Solf fo gern tanjt^ \mc wix Oftreid^er. 3l6er md)t blo^ bie Xan^inufi! ift in Dftrciif) ^u §au§, jebe ©attung^ ber 3}tii[if vuirb l;ier aufs eifrigfte^ ge^flegt.^ ©inb bod) all bie groBen bcutfdicu 9)leifter^ ber 2^on!unft^ entmeber in DftreicB geborcn^ ober boc^ in 25ien au§gebi(bet^ tuorben. ^a ift erfteit§ §ai)bn, ber ^^ater ber neuern SuftriimentaU nuifi!,^ einer ber Ueben^iviirbigften ^^ ^imftler, bie je " gelebt l)abm. — Da^ miiB er in ber Xf)at gemefen fein. SSie froC;- fiimig^^ unb (;eiter^^ ift feine ^iifif! (Seine arfam!eit§riidfid)tcn2^ feine 1 Tanzen, to dance. — 2 Kind, sort.— 3 Most ardently. * From pflegen, to cultivate. Lit. : to nurse.— ^ Master. 6 Ton'-kooiist', music. — ^ Ge-bo'-r'n, born, ^ From ausbilden, to give a tinishing education. s In-s/itroo-men-tar. — ^^ Most amiable. — 11 Ever. 1'^ Cheerful.— is Serene, calm.— i^ Zim'-fo-iie'-'n. ^5 Inexhaustible.— I6 Source. I'' Der Genuss (ge-noos'), pleasure. — is Fare\vell-SyTnphonj\ 19 Leaves of. Lit. : (^rou's dumb. — '■^'' Der Anlass, motive, occasion. 21 Passionate. — 22 Fer-a'-rer, worshiper; i.e., friend. 23 Leader of the band. — 24 Friendly alliance. 26 S/ipar'-zam-kits-rick -sic/t-t'n, motives of economy. 392 EINKAUFE. ^a^elle gu entlaffen.^ §al;bn \mv tief betriibt^ iiber biefen @ntfd)lu6^ feine§ §errn. 2lber er madjk gute Mene ^um bofen ©^iel.* ®r fdjrieb eine neiie @l;mv^(;onie fiir ba§ (e^te ^onjert, bie 2lbfd)ieb§ft)mp()onie. (^ine glcin^enbe @c= fel(fd)aft mar t^erfammelt.^ ^ie ^lii\it bcr neuen (5l;m= :p(;ome begann liiftig^ unb ()eiter. SIber attina(;Ucf) tDurbe fie iinmer iueid)er^ nnh trauriger.^ (SnbUd) !Iang c§ \vk fdjmer^tic^ee ^^ebfdiQen.^ (Sin 3nftriimciit wad) beiu an- bern berftummte, cm 9)iufifer narf) bcm anbern blic^^^ mdj '^eenbigung feiner ^artie feinc Sampc mi§^^ unb t)cr= fc^tt)anb ; ^^ jute^t nod; cine ©eigenfabcn^/^ and) bcr ©ciger t)erfd;tDinbet, bcr Siebling^Si^ioUnift bc^ giirftcn. „3Ba§ fod bag alleg bebcuten?" ricf bcr giirft crftaunt.^s ^^^.^o |f^ unfcr 2lbfcf)icb/' antmortctc §at)bn. „ dliin id) iuill mcincn (5ntfd)(u§ micbcr crmagcn/'^* fat3te Iad;cnb bcr giirft, unb er be^ielt^^ bie ila^cllc and) fcrner^^ bet fid;. — D, bag ift intcrcffant. dlun \)crftct;e id) bie Tln\it nod) cinmal fo gut. 2lber bie Wniit bcginnt l^on ncueni. .... 211;, bie ^ann^dufcr=Dut)crturc ! ^^ . . . . — 2Selci)cr Jlontraftli^ ©traufe unb 3Sagncr! 2Bag ^alten ©ie eigcntUd^ Don 2Bagner? 1 To dismiss. — 2 Grieved. — 8 Decision. * Proverb. He made the best of a bad thing. Lit. : he made a good face to a bad game. * A briUiant company had assembled. * Merry.— "< Weich, soft. 8 Traurig (tra-db'-ric/i), sad. s Sorrowful wailing, va'-kla'-g'n, i 1" From aiisblasen, to blow out, 1^ Verschwinclen, to disappear. 12 Gi'-g'n-ka-dents', violin cadenza. 18 Astonished. — i4 To reconsider. 16 From behalten, to keep. 16 For the future. Strictly : further. ^ Tan'-ho-i-z'r-oo-v'r-tu'-re.— is Kon'-trast'. THE PURCHASES. 393 — 9^im, ba^ id) fein 2Sagner=@ntt)ufiaft ^ bin, ba§ Ijahm ©ie \v>oi)i fd;on cjeinerft. 3c^ glaube nic^t, ba§ SSagner^ „£imftti)erf bcr Suhinft"^ ^ie D^ernfrage lolV aber ba§ mitB id; gcfteben, ha^ feine ©d^o^fungen t>on einem ge= nialeii ©trebcn* erflillt finb, ba§ SKagnet ein bebeutenber 9)Jaim gcmefcn fein imife. — D(;nc 3^^c^f '-'^ ^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^- S^ber, bcr i^n ^erfi)nlic^ fenncn gcternt, \:)at biefen ©iitbrucf^ befomnien. Qd; felbft (;abc cincr mir unt>erge6Iid)en ©^ene" beigert)o(;nt, mo Wagner and) cine ben it)al;r^aft grofecn Tlann i;>erratenbe^ ^cfd;eibenf)eit ^ 5nr Sc^an trug.^^ ©^ mar auf einem ^anfett" in ^aireutl; wad) ber erften luffii^rung ber 9^ibelnngeni2 im ^al)x 1876. STbbei^ Sifet fc^te einen golbnen ^ranj/* 'Dm Stalien gefanbt i)atU, auf ba§ §aupt be^ ®id)ter§ unb ^ontponiften. liefer aber na^m ben .^ran^;^ nnb fe|te i^n feiner @emab(in anf§ §au^t mit ^m SSorten : „ 2Ba§ ic^ @nte§ gefcbrieben, ba§ banfe ^^ id) i(;r; fie (;abe^^ ben ton^/' — SDa§ emig SBeiblic^eP^ 3n ber ^^at, nirgenb^^^ (;aben bie grauen einen grdfeern (Sinflufe^^ aii^geiibt^ al^ in ber ^unft. J fen-too-zT-ast'. — ^ Art- work of the future. 3 Losen (lu^^z'n), to solve.— ■* Striving. 5 Without doubt.— 6 Tn'-drook', impression. ■^ A scene that T will never forget. 8 Betraying, showing. — ^ Modesty. 10 Displayed. Lit. : carried to the exhibition. 11 At a banquet. — 12 Ne'-be-lo62-'n. 13 A-ba'. — 14 Wreath, crown. 15 Owe.— 16 Subjunctive. See page 340, Section I., par. 1, !''■ Womanly, woman-like. 18 NTr'-g'uts, nowhere. — i9 Influence. ^ Ausiiben, to exercise. * 394 EINKAUFE. fiottef^jottdeni* -^'^'f^ '^^*^^ -^^-t^t-^^^^^C^^^J^^p^^^ ^^.^f^ J^^^^^^ocJe^ ty^T-z^^Xy . DIRECTIONS. Follow directions already given on page 372. TRANSLATION. We have been already two weeks in Berlin, yet this is the first opportunity I have had to write you.^ You have lived so long in this splendid city, that I need not to write you about the beautiful sights^ we have enjoyed. The magnificent Tier- garten, the Brandenburg Gate, the new Museum, the Opera- house, the king's palace, etc. We have seen and admired everything. To-morrow, we will (go) to Charlottenburg and there visit the Mausoleum. On Wednesday we shall go on to Paris with the lightning express. Write us to Paris. Yours very affectionately,* — 1 Strictly : but first to-day come I thereto (komme ich dazu) to- you to write. 2 Strictly : the beauties. " Strictly : with heartfelt greeting remain I, your — Part Y. PLEASURES AND HEALTH v^EHGNUGE]sr u:nd gesu:n^dheit. .©♦o. SECTION I 1. EIN BESUCH. 2. BLUM EN: TIERE. 3. IN PARIS. 4. IM GARTEN. 5. EINIGE SPRICHWORTER. 6. AUF DEM BALL. 7. GESPRACHE UBER LITTERATUR. 8. EIN BRIEF VON BOSTON. V. VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT.* Seit zwei Wochen habe ich nichts von Fraulein Kaiifmann geselieii. Ich nioclite wirklich wissen, ob sie krank ist?^ Glauben Sie docli das nicht; ich liabe sie soeben getroffeii, wie sie zweispannig im Grossen Garten spazieren fuhr.^ PRONUNCIATION. Zit tsvi YO^'kh'n ha^-b6 ic7i nichts f6ii fro-i^-lin ka-obf-nian g-e-za^-'n. Ich muc^^-te virk^-lic/t vF- s'li op ze kraiik^ ist. Gla-db^-b'n ze d6kh d^s^ nicht; Ich lia^-be ze zo- a^-b'ii ge-tro^-f n ve ze tsvi^-s/*p6'-iiic/i im gro^- s'li grar^-t'n s^p^-tse^-r'n foor. 1 See page 342. — ^ Fuhr, imperfect of fahren, to go, to drive. 3 Zweispannig is here an adjective used adverbially. Lit. : two horse-with. 'Turn-out' has to be supplied. 398 V. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. I have not seen anything of Miss Kanf- mann for the last two weeks. I wonder if slie is ill? Don't you believe it ; for I have just met her in the Great Garden driving a two-horse turn-out. LITERAL TRANSLATION. Since two weeks have I nothing from Miss Kaufmann seen. I would-like indeed to-know if she ill is. Believe ye however that not; I have her just- now met as she a two-horse {turn-out) ^ in-the Great Garden to-promenade drove,^ * To go out driving = Spazieren fahren. Lit.: to {promenade) drive. See ])age 60. * Fer-gnU'-g'n dont ge-zoont'-hit. 400 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. I. GERMAN. 1. Seit zwei Wocheii liabe ich nichts von Fraiileiii Kaufinaun geselieii. Waiiii ^ habeii Sie Fraulein Kaufmaiin zum letzten Mai gesehen? Ich kanii Ihnen nicht genau sagen, wann^ ich sie zuletzt gesehen habe. Ich glaube aber, dass es wenigstens * zwei Wocheii her 2 ist. Glauben Sie, dass sie krank ist? Keine Idee. Ich habe sie gestern abend gesehen, als ich aus dem Theater kam. Sie sah gar nicht aus, als ob sie krank ware.^ Sind Sie dessen sicher?t Ich weiss es ganz bestimmt. tJbrigens sehe ich sie fast jeden Tag. | NOTES. 1 Observe that the English conjunction when, in direct or indirect questions, is rendered by "wann and not by weiin. N. B. — Wann is also used (wninterrogatively) in the sense of whenever: Sie koniien koininen, tvann Sie wollen {whenever you like). ^ Her (lit. : lather, here, this way), calls the attention more pointedly to the time since which a thing has 7iot taken place. Ex. : Wie lange ist es her ? = How long ago is it ? Lang, lang ist's her i — Long, long ago! Her can he omitted. 3 Or, als ware sie krank. See page 342. PLEASUKES AND liEALTH. 401 PRONUNCIATION. I. TRANSLATION. 1. Zit tsvi \6''-kh*i\ ha^- b6 ich uichtii fon. NicTit ge-na-do' tsoo- letst'. "" Va'-nic7t-st'ns li§.r'. I-da' te-a'-t'r. De'-s'n zi'-ch'r, XJ'-bri-g'ns. It is two weeks since I saw Miss Kaufniann last.^ When did you see Miss Kauf- mann last ? ^ I can 't tell you when I saw her last. But I think that it is at least two weeks ago. Do you think she is ill ? No, I don't.* I saw her yester- day on my way from the theater.* She did n't look as if she were ill. Are you very sure of it ? I am positive about it.^ Besides, I see her almost every day. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Since two weeks liave I nothing of Miss Kaufniann seen. 2 Also. Seit wann haben Sie Fraulein Kaufmann nicht ge- seheu ? — ^ ISo idea. ^ 1 have her yesterday evening seen wlien I out to-tlie theater came. 5 I know it qnite positively. ••' Or, niindestens. t Or, gewiss. X Tag, iiiasculine noim, strong declension, third class (genitive singu- lar in 8 or es; plural in c). 402 VERGNUGEN VND GESUNDHEIT. Note. — Study the use of the auxiliaries 2, Johanii, ist jeniaiicl da gewesen?* Nein, giiadige Fran, es ist niemand gekommen. Es hat gekliiigelt.^ Herr Kronenberg wiinscht Sie zu sprecben. Guten Tag, Herr Kronenberg. Bitte legen Sie ab und machen Sie es sich bequem. Danke schon. Ich fiihle mich sehr behaglich^ in diesem Sessel.* Und wie ist es Ihnen ergangen,* seit ich Sie zuletzt gesehen habe. Ich war vier Wochen f auf dem Lande und bin i miner wohl gewesen. Und was macht Ihre Familie? Danke, es geht alien gut. Darf ich mich erkun- digen, wie es Ihnen geht? Hoffentlich befinden Sie sich ebenfalls wohl. Gottlob,^ ja. Haben Sie Nachrichten^ von Ihrem Sohn? NOTES. 1 Or, Hat jemand nach mir gefragt? — 2 Or, Es hat gescliellt. 3 Bequem is never used directly of persons. We can say : Machen Sie sich es bequem (lit. : viake it to-yon comfortnhh). But never say, Ich fiihle mich bequem; or. ich bin bequem. Used tlius, bequem means idle. Hence, I am comfortnhfc =^ Ich fiihle mich sehr behaglich. Lit.: I feel myself very comfortable. ^ From ergehen, niseparable verb. — ^ Lit. : God-praise. Also, Gott sei Dank (got zT daiik'); lit. : God he tliauk.-. 8 Die Nachricht, feminine noun, weak declension {plural in en). PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 403 Haben and Sein, page 519. 2. Yo-lian^ ist da^ ge-va^-z*!!, Ne'-mant. Ge-klin'-'lt. Kro'-nen-barcTi. La'-g'n ze ap' . kvam'. ya^-mant be- "Be-iiakh'-lich Er-gan'-'n. Vol'. Fa-me'-li-e. Er-k(56n'-di-g'n. A'-b'n-fals'. Got'-lop' ya' Tich'-Vn. ze'-s'l. nakh' John, has any one been here ? No, ma'am. Nobody came. Some one has ruiig.^ Mr. Kronenberg would like to see you. Good morning, Mr. Kronen- berg. Take off your overcoat and make yourself comfort- able. Thanks. I feel very comfort- able in this arm-chair. And how have you been since I saw you last ? I was in the country for four wrecks, and have been well all the time. And how is your family? Thank you, everybody is well. May I inquire about your health ? You are also well, I hope.' Oh, yes, indeed. Have you any news from your son? LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 It has rung. Could also be es hat jemand geklingelt, but the impersonal use of klingeln (also, schellen) is more frequent. 2 Make ye it to-yourself comfortable. 2 Hopin|:j;ly. ••• Der Sessel, arm-chair. Noun of the strong declension, first class {ijeiMrc swg^dar in s, no ending in plural). Also, der Lehnstuhl (lan'-s/ftool ). t Woclien, accusative i)lural. Woche, feminine noun, weak de- clension (j>^»r«n?i cm). Seepage 404 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. Er teilte uns gestern mit/ dass er von Wien abgereist sei. Wir erwarten ihn jeden Tag. Note. — Study the uses of the Infinitive, pp. 524-5. 3. Wie? Sie woUeii schon gehen? Es thut mir sehr leid, aber ich muss fort. Meine Frau erwartet mich. Wir wollen eine Vorlesung* von Professor Momm- sen besuchen. Ich muss vor 6 Uhr zu Hausef sein. Dann will ich Sie nicht zuriickhalten. Wann^ werden Sie uns wieder das Vergniigen bereiten ? Ich werde Sie bald wieder besuchen, ich ver- spreche es Ihnen. Hal ten Sie aber^ auch* WortlJ Bitte bemiihen Sie sich nicht. Erlauben Sie mir, Sie bis an die Thiire zu begleiten. NOTES. 1 From mitteilen, separable verb. 2 Remember that in questions, the English when is to be rendered by wann. Elsewhere it is rendered by wenn, or als (except when meaning whenever, wlien it is also rendered by wann). 8 Notice that aber is not always first. Lit. : keep ye but also word. * Auch in the above phrase answers the English .mreb/, without /nil. Likewise in the phrase: Werden Sie es auch thun? Will you be sure to do itf Lit. : will you it also (i. e., surely) do? PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 405 Er-var'-t'n takh'. ya'-d'n He wrote me yesterday that he left Vienna.^ We are expecting him from day to day .2 paragraphs I, 2, and 3. 3. Ve? Ze v6M'n shoii Ich mdbs fort'. Er-var'-tet. For'-la'-z6t)n pro-fe'- s6r. Tsoo-rwk'-tLal'-t'n. Be-ri'-t'n. Fer-s7ipre'-c7ie. Vort'. Er-la-d6'-b'n t'n. '^ be-gli' What ! You are groing- to leave already?^ I am very sorry to leave you, but I must.* My wife is expecting me (then). We are going to a lecture by Professor Mommsen.^ I must be home, etc. Then I will not keep you. When will you do us the pleasure (to come and see us) again? I shall call again soon, I promise you. Be sure and do so. Don't disturb yourself, pray. I will see you to the door.^ LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 That he from Vienna departed be. For the subjunctive, see p. 340. 2 We expect him every day.— ^ How? You will already go? '* But I must away {i. e., go). 5 We will a lecture of Professor Mommsen visit. 6 Allow me to accompany you (until) to the door. ■^ Feminine noun, weak declension {plural m en). t Neuter noun, strong declension, fifth class. Plural : Hauser. X Neuter noun, strong declension, fifth class. Plural : Wdrt«r. 406 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. Empfehleii Sie mich Ihrem Herrii ^ Gemahl, bitte. Danke. Griissen Sie Ihre liebe Frau bestens ! Leben Sie wohl, gnadige Frau! Adieu, Herr Kronenberg! Auf baldiges Wieder- sehen ! Note — Study the Interrogative and Indefinite Jetzt miissen wir uns fiir deii Abend vorbereiten. Die Gaste werden bald kommen. Erwarten Sie heute abend eine grosse Gesell- schaft? Nein, denn mehrere von unseren Freunden sind bereits aufs Land gegangen. Ich kann es niemandem ^ verdenken, der die heisse Stadt verlassen kann. Das Wetter ist fiir die Jahreszeit ungewohnlich warm und schwiil. Da fallt mir ein, haben Sie schon Ebers' neuesten Roman gelesen? Nein, ich wollte ihn lesen und fragte beim Bucb- handler darnach, aber er war nicht mehr zu haben.^ Das Buch verkauft sich so schnell, dass der Vorrat ausgegangen war. NOTES. 1 Weak declension [plural hi n or en). 2 Or, niemanden; or, niemand. See p. 404, 3 Not more to have. Tlie infinitive following to he, is used in the active form in German instead of the passive. See page 525, par. 4, PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 407 Em-pfa'-rn. Vol'. Bal'-di-ges ve'-d'r-za'-'n. My regards to your husband. Thank you. My kind regards to your wife. I wish you good-day. Good-by, Mr. K. We hope to see you again before long.^ Pronouns, pages 492-4. 4. Yetst mii^-s'ii ver dons fiir d'li a^-b'nt for^-be- ri-t'ii. A-6bfs lant'. Fer-den'-k'n. OOn'-ge-van'-licTi- shviil. A'-b'rs no-i'-'st'n ro-man'. For'-rat' Now we must prepare for the evening. People will soon begin to come. Do you expect a great deal of company to-night? Not a great deal, because some of our friends have already gone to the country. I don't blame them , if they ^ can get away from the hot city. The weather is unusually warm for the season. By the way,^ have you read Ebers' latest novel? No, I wanted to read it, and called for it at the bookstore, but it was not to be had. The book sells so fast, were quite out of it.* they LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Upon speedy again-seeing. '^ / can grudge it to no one who, etc. 3 Tliere occurs to-nie in. Einfallen, separable verb, = to occur. -* The book sells itself so fast that the stock out-gone was, idiomatic. 408 VERG^'UGEN UND GESUJNDHEIT. IDNPERSONAL VERBS. Impersonal verbs are those which refer to an action without the iiise of a personal subject. These verbs are always in the tliird person singular, and in German the impersonal pronouns generally take es as their subject. I. Most hnpersonal verbs are conjugated with haben : SPECIMEN OF CONJUGATION. . INDICATIVE. Present. — Imperfect. — Perfect. — Pluperfect. — First Fut. — Second Fut. — First Condi. — Second Condi.- Es regnet, Es regnete, Es hat geregnet, Es hatte geregnet, Es wird regnen, Es wird geregnet haben, Es wiirde regnen, ■Es wiirde geregnet haben. It rains. It rained. It has rained. It had rained. It will rain. It will have rained. It would rain. It would have rained. Present. — Imperfect. — Perfect. — Pluperfect.- FiRST Fut. — Second Fut.- SUBJUNOTIVE. Es regne, Es regnete, Es habe geregnet, Es hatte geregnet, Es werde regnen It may rain. It might rain. It may have rained. It had rained. It will rain. Es werde geregnet haben. It will have rained. II. — Most verbs may be used impersorially . Thus Iclingeln, to ring; es klingelt, the bell rings (lit.: it rings)., folgen, to follow ; es folgt, it follows. The following, however, are absolutely impersonal verbs Es donnert, It is lightning. Es frier t. It is freezing. Es blitzt, It is thundering. Es regnet, It rains. Es hagelt. It is hailing. Es schneit, It snows. THE PURCHASES. 409 m. — Many vet'bs which are personal in Enghsh are im- personal in German. Thus : Es bangt mir,i I am afraid (lit. : it frightens me). Es fehlt mir, I want (lit.: it fails me). Es gelingt mir,^ I succeed (lit. : it succeeds to-me). Es diirstet mich, I am thirsty (lit. : it thirsts to-me). Es fragt sich, It is a question (lit. : it asks itself), Es freut mich,^ I a7n glad (lit. : it rejoices me). Es friert mich,* I am cold (lit. : it freezes me) . Es hungert mich,^ I am hungry (lit, : it hungers me). Es jammert mich, I am sorry (lit, : it grieves me). Es rent mich, I repent (lit, : it repents me). Es wundert mich,* I ivonder (lit. : it wonders me). ji V. Intransitive verbs (like gehen, to go), which other- wiftft are never used in the passive voice, may become passive if U8ed impersonally. Thus : Es wird sehr schnell gegangen = We are going very fast (lit. : it is very quickly gone). Bei uns wird viel gesungen= With us (i. e., in our club, society, etc.) we sing a great deal (lit. : is a-great-deal sung). Note 1. — The impersonal subject es may be omitted except with verbs indicating the phenomena of nature (as, es regnet). Thus: I am a/raid = Es ist mir bange; or, simply, Mir ist bange. Note 2. — There is, there are, are rendered either by es giebt (for both numbers), or, es ist, es sind. They are rendered by es giebt when tlie meaning is of a general nature. Ex.: There are many bad books = Es giebt viele schlechte Biiclier. They are rendered by es ist, or es sind, when the meaning is of a personal or particular nature. Ex. : T/icre are many books on this table = Es sind viele Biiclier auf diesem Tisch. Note 3. — In order to lay a special stress on tlie subject of a sen- tence, the Germans often begin a sentence with es preceding the verl), while the real subject is made to follow it. Thus : Some soldiers cnme = Es kamen Soldate/n.'' No other road goes to Kussnacht = 'Es fiihrt kein andrer Weg nach Kiissnacht [lit. : it (i. e., there) leads, etc.]. 1 Or, Es ist mir bange. — 2 Perfect: T succeeded, Es ist mir ge- luugen; or. Es hat (or ist) mir gegliickt. — ^ Oj- leh freue mich. — 4 Or, Ich f riere. — ^ Or, Ich hungre. ® Or, Ich wundere mich. — "^ Lit. : It (i. e., there) came soldiers 410 VERGNUGEN UN!) GESUNDHEIT. The following vocnhuhry to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. I.— Blumen.* Die Rose (ro'-ze), Die Kamelie (ka-ma'-li-e), Die Tulpe (tool'-pe), Das Veilchen (fil'-cTi'ii), Die Lilie (le'-li-e), Der Flieder (fle'-d'r), Das Gras (gras), Das Blatt (blat), Das Laub (la-d6p), Das Vergissmeinnicht (fer-gis'-min-nic7it') Das Geisblatt.(gis'-blat'), II. — Tiere.1 Der Hund, Die Katze (kat'-se), Das Pferd (pfart), Der Ochse, die Kuh (6k'-se, koo), Das Schaf (shaf), Die Ziege (tse'-ge), Der Vogel (fo'-g'l), Der Flugel (flu'-g'l), Die Feder (fa'-d'r), Die Hiiliner (h.u'-n'r), Das Huhn, die Henne (hoon, he'-ne), Der Hahn (h.an), Die Fiichsjagd (fdoks'-yaTcTif), Auf die Jagd gehen, The rose. The camelia. The tulip. The violet. The lily. The lilacs. The grass. The leaf. The foliage. The forget-me-not The honey-suckle. The dog. The cat. The horse. The ox, the cow. The sheep. The goat. The bird. The wing. The feather. The chicken. The hen. The cock. Fox-hunting, To go hunting. * Die Blume (bloo'-m5), flower. — f Das Tier (ter), animal. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 411 To he learned by heart arid then repeated aloud as a real conversa- tion, whether for self-study or preparation in the class-room. {See also Directions before Part J.) GESPRACHE. I.- IN PARIS. Ah, guten Tag! Sie sind es? Ich wusste nicht, dass Sie in Paris waren. Sind Sie schon lange hier ? ^ — Nein, ich bin soeben erst angekommen, aber wie lange sind Sie schon in Paris? — Erst seit zwei Mo- naten. — Und was halten Sie von der Ausstellung?^ Glauben Sie, dass dieselbe von Erfolg^ sein wird? — Das ist ganz ausser Zweifel.^ Sie werden sich hier gewiss sehr gut unterhalten.^ A propos, was sagen Sie zu dem EifFelturm?^ — Ich habe ihn noch nicht gesehen, ich werde erst heute nachmittag die Aus- stellung besuchen. 2.-IM GARTEN. Ist die Mutter im Garten? — Ja, komme doch mit! — Sobald *" ich meinen Hut geholt habe. Hier bin ich. — Wie schon sind die Blumen jetzt! — Lass uns einen Strauss^ fiir Mama binden.^ — Schon, nimm Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Have you been here long? For the use of present tense instead of the perfect, see p. 256, n. 4.— 2 Exhibition.— 3 Von Erfolg (er-folc/i'), a success. Strictly: of s^uccess. — * Without doul)t. — ^ Amuse. 6 F-f l-toorm', ]•>; (Tel -tower. — ^ As soon as.— 8 S/ttra-oos, nose- gay: also, eiti Bouquet (boo-kef) neut. — ^ Make. Lit.: bind. 412 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. diese gelbe Rose fiir die Mitte/ und hier sind noch zwei weisse und drei rote Rosen. — Bitte pfliicke^ auch einige Nelken.^ — Aber nimm dich in acht,* du trittst^ auf das Blumenbeet.^ — Jetzt lass uns ins Haus gehen, es lautet^ zum Mittagessen. 3. — VON SPRICHWORTERN* Ich habe die Sprichworter so gern; sie sagen uns, wie ein Volk denkt und fiihlt. Haben die Deutschen nicht auch viele Sprichworter? — Ja, gewiss. Ubri- gens^ haben die Englander und Deutschen sehr viele Sprichworter gemein.^ Vergleichen ^^ Sie nur das deutsche ^^ Der Mensch denkt, Gott lenkt," ^^ mit dem englischen, '^Man proposes and God disposes ; " ^^ Ende '^ gut, alles gut," mit ^^All 's well that ends well" u. s. w. — Aber sind nicht die deutschen Sprich- worter poetischer ^^ als die englischen ? Meine Freun- din gebrauchte ^* neulich z. B. f ein deutsches Sprich- wort, das mir so gut gefallen hat : <^ Morgenstunde hat Gold im Munde." ^^ 1st das nicht ein hiibsches Bild ? Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Put this yellow rose in the middle. — ^ Pfliicken (pflie'-k'n), to pluck, to pick. — 8 Die Nelke (neP-ke), pink. — ^ Take care. 6 From treten, to step. — 6 Flower-bed. — ^ The bell rings. 8 Besides.— 9 'In common,' — w Compare. " From lenken, to direct. — 12 Das Ende, the end. ^ Po-a'-ti-sh'r, more poetical. — i^ Used. 16 This proverb answers the English : Early to bed, early to rise, etc. * About proverbs. Das Sprichwort (sli.pricli.'-v6rt'), the proverb t Abbreviation for zum Beispiel. 4 PLEA8UKES AND HEALTH. 413 SaTTie directions as heretofore to be followed. (For Self-Study, see Directions, before Bart J.) EXERCISE. AUF t>EM BALL. What a charming party ! ^ What a brilliant sight ! ^ — Is it not ? This is a fine ball I would like to make the acquaintance^ of that young lady. Will you be so kind as to introduce* her to me? — With pleasure. Miss Kaufmann, I have the honor to pre- sent to you, Mr. Korner. — I am very much pleased^ to make your acquaintance. I have heard so much of you. — You are very kind. Would you do me the favor to dance ^ this quadrille^ with me? — I am very sorry, sir, but I am already engaged^ for the quadrille. — May I have the pleasure,^ then, for the next waltz ? — Certainly. How gracefully ^^ that young lady dances! Who is she, I wonder? — That is Miss Kronenberg. — You ought to see her together with her sister. — They resemble ^^ each other like two peas.^^ Aids to Translation. 1 Welch reizende Gesellschaf t ! — '^ What for a brilliant (glan- zend) sight (Anblick, w,asculine). — ^ Bekanntscliaft. * Vorstellen. — 5 jt is to me very agreeable. — ^ Tanzen. ' Die Quadrille, ka-dril'-ye. — » Engagiert, an-ga-zhert'. 9 Vergniigen. — i" Anmutig. — ^ Gleiclien, to resemble. 12 Wie ein Ei dem andern. Lit. : As an egg to-ike other. 414 VERGNUGEN VND GESUiXDHKlT. 2b be read by means of the notes in prepiration for translating and reading aloud in class. For Self-Study, to be trayislated, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. «efefturf. 5Ctt^ t>et t)etttf(f>cn Sittetatun*— !♦ — 3l(), Sie fommeu au§ bem 2::^eater! 9Zun, \ok ijai 3i)ncn bie Dpcr gefallen? — Sic iuiffen, ba§ id) SSagner felbft immer gem f)ore, menu id) aixd) bie 3)kfif f einer 9lad)a^mer ^ nid)t (iebe. lufecrbcm freut e^ mid) fe(;r, bafe id; enblicf) ben gan^cii „9iint3 ber 9ZibeIimgen " ^ ge(;drt (labe. 5^lU;er I;abe id) Diel i^on bem grofeen beutfd)en @ebid;t, bem ^libehingenlicb, gelefen. ^ilbet bem: biefe^ ben Xejrt^ 511 ^Bagner^ 3iint3 ber ^libelumgei' ? — 0, !eine^3ti:)eg§. 2Bagner l^at ben 3:^ei1 ^u all* feinen Dpcru felbft gefd)rieben. ^a§ gro^e beiitfd)e ^ol!^e|)o§/ l^on tueld^em ©ie foDiet geI;ort I;aben, 'tia^ fogenannte 3Jibc= lungenlieb, umrbe gegen 1200 nac^ Sl)riftu§^ mifgefcbrieben. ®er ^icf)ter fiigte^ Sieber i)on ben alten ©ijttern nnb §e(ben/ \x>t{d)z 'i^a^ 3Sol! noc^ fang, 511 einem grofeartigen 1 Nafc/i'-a'-m»r, imitator. 2 Wagner's celebrated 'tetralogy,' of which, as is well known, the four parts are: Das Rheingold, Rhinegold ; Die Walkiire (val- kii'-re), the Valkyre ; Siegfried and Goetterdammerung (gu'-t'r- de'-me-rdoii), the Twilight of the Gods. — 3 Tekst, libretto. ^ Notice that all followed by the article, or a pronoun, may be used undeclincd. Tlius we may say either: zu alien seinen Opern ; or, simply, zu all seinen Opern. — s F61ks'-a'-p6s, national epic 6 About 1200 A. D. Lit. : after Christ.— ^ From zusammenfUgen (tsoo-za'-m'n-fii -g'n), to [)ut together, to combine. — 8 Heroes. *■ Li-tS-rii-toor', literature. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 415 ©ebicBt jufammen,* \vcld)c§> ben ^ob ©iecjfrieb^ unb bie 9iad)c^ ber ^riem(;Ub befjaubclt.^ ^ie ^elben be§ 9^{bc= liiiujcitliebey reben nnt) benfen iDie ^Jtittcr^ be^3 12. 3af)rf)iin= bertij, luogegen* SSagner^ ^elben tmrflid) nod; mi;t(;i]dK^ ©cftaltcn^ finb. 2lud) bie gonn^ feiner ®ramen ift bic^ ber cilteften beut)d;en ^oefie, ncintlid; bie 3((Iitteration.^ — ©iebt e§ benn eine beutfd)e "^^oefie, bie alter ift, a(§ ha§> 9Hbe(nngenlieb ? — Qa geiuiJB. ©d)on ^a^itu^^^ berid>tet 'oon Siebern, mldjc bie alten ^eutfd)en jum Sobe^^ ber (Stammt»ater ^^ be§ 'isolfe^3 nnb feiner ^elben bei feftlid)en @elei3en(;eiten/^ befonbery l^or einer ^djladjt, gefnngen baben. ^iefe Sieber gerieten^* bnrcb bie SsbltoDanberung ^^ in 3?ergeffent)eit.i* ^nrd) bie c^rofeen ^(;aten mad)tiger 5lbnige l)en>orgernfen/^ entftanb^^ U>abrenb ber ^^blfenranbening bie nene bentfdie ^elbenfagc.^^ ^on jenen ^iebern ber bentfd;en §e(benfage ift nn^ inbey nnr ein einjige^, ha§> ^ilbebranbSUeb/^ er= (;a(ten,2o tr)eld;e§ ^ur geit ^axl§> bee (^5ro6en im ^(ofter gu gulba anfge,^eid)net n^urbe.^^ — Unb miirbe e^ ©ie (;eute nicbt gu U^eit fii(;ren/^ a^enn 1 Ra'-fc/te, revenge.— 2 Treats.— 3 Knights.— * While. 5 Me'-ti-slie, godlike. Lit. : mythical. 6 Die Gestalt (ge-s/italt'), fignre. — '' Form, form. 8 Or, diejenige, that. — ^ A-li-tS-ra-tsi-6n', alliteration. Allitera- tion, in old German, as well as Anglo-Saxon poetry, took the place of rhyme. Tt consisted in having two important words begin with the same letter in the first line of a couplet, while the word on which the stress of the voice fell in the second line, also began with that same letter.— i° Ta'-tsi-tdbs, Tacitus. — i^ Tn the i>raise — i-^ Ancestors. 13 On festival occasions. — i^ In Vergessenheit geraten (or, koininen), to fall into oblivion, to be forgotten. 15 Migration of the nations. — i^ Called forth. — i?" Imperfect of entstehen, to arise. — is Heroic legend. — i° Hil'-de-brants'-let'. 20 Preserved. — 21 From aufzeichnen, to write (strictly: to draw), to put down. — 22 Would it not take you too long? Lit, : would it not lead you too far f — * See wote 7, on opposite page. 416 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. ©ie mir hm 3n^a(t btefe§ ctlteften 3^i^i^»iff^^^ beutfd^er ^oefie mitteiten mottten? — ^urd)au^ md)t. ©§ ift un§ \a nur ein fragment ^ beg £iebe§ er(;a(ten. §i(bebranb ift breifeig 3a()re (ang t)on feirtem §eimat(anb^ abmefenb* geiuefen. (Sr I;at feine @e= maMin unb ein Mnb t)on brei 3a(;ren ^uriitfgelaffen.^ ^ei feiner dtudtdjx ftef)t^ i^m ein dtiiUx an ber S^ifee^ eine§ ,^eere§ gegeniiber^ unb tDeI;rt^ i^tn ben (Sintritt^ in fein :^anb. (£in ilam^f foil ftattfinben. ^ei^or berfelbe Seginnt, fragt §ilbebranb wad) bent 9kmen feine^ ©egner^.^^ liefer facjt, er fei ^abubranb, ber 8ol)n §ilbebranb§, glaubt aber bem §ilbebranb nidit, t^elc^er erfldrt, ^afi er fein ^ater fei. (Blaubii:)itrbige^^ Scanner l)aben il;m ben ^ob feine§ ^ater§ gemelbet/2 unb er mirft^^ feinem ©egner bal;er Siige^* unb geigbeit ^^ \)ov}^ 3n $ilbebranb§ Seek fam^ft ritterlicl)e ^^ @^re unb bciterlid^e greube. ^oni ©djtnerj iibermannt/^ ruft^^ er au§:^^ „2Bel)e nun, imltenber^^ @ott, SSel^gefrfjid^o na^tl^i 3d) tvallete^ f^ci^i^tg ber ©ommer unb 3Binter,* Man fd)arte^ mid; immer in bie 9?eil)en ber Sdjiiten,^^ ^ic^t fanb ic^ bie ©tatte,* bie ^u ^obe mic^ ftredte.^ 1 Das Zeugnis, testimony. — 2 Fra-gment', neuter, fragment. Also, Bruchstiick, neuter. — » Native country. — •* Absent. 6 Left behind. — 6 Steht ihm gegeniiber. Lit. : stands to him against. Also, sta7ids before him. — ' At the head. — 8 Refuses. » Entrance, — w Adversary. — " Worthy of belief. 12 Announced. — 18 Etwas vorwerfen, to reproach with. i< Lie. — 15 Cowardice. — I6 Knightly. — i^ Overpowered. 18 Ausrufen, to exclaim. The following verses are, of course, a translation in modern German from the original poem. 19 Present participle of walten, to govern, to rule. — 20 Disaster. 21 Nahen = sich nahern, to approach. — 22 Lived. Lit. : wandered. 28 Placed, — 24 Shooters, i. e , those who fought foremost, 2* Brought (lit. : stroke) me to death. * Note the alliteration {here, the return of w, s, and sch). PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 417 ^oc^ mm foil fiifeeg ^tnb mit bem (Sd)ii:)erte ^ mic^ f)auen,2 ^en 9)brbfta(;(^ mir f^nben, ober id) ifjm ^um 3}Jorber toerbeii/'* 33eim begitm be§ S^^i'^^^^f^^ bric&t^ ba§ fragment ab.^ — D mie fd)abe tft ba§; gerabe \vo bie ^anblung am intereffanteften 5U tDcrben Derf|)rid)t. 2lber ©ie fagten t>or= f)in, bag ba§ §ilbebranb§Ueb ^ur geit ^arl§ be§ ©rogen, alfo mn 800 t»erfa6t^ tt)iirbc, ba§ 9fJibe(imgen(ieb bagcgcn erft urn 1200. ^abm bie ba^mifc^enliegenbcn 3a6r(;unbcrte feine ^oetifd)en ^qeugniffe^ ber ©eutfdben auf^mt^eifen ? ^ — ^n biefer 3^^iW^"3^it tt)urbe allerbing^ and) gebicBtet. 3lber ber eigentlicbe R5o(f§gefang ^^ \mv ^xio)d)cn}^ ®a§ (S()riftentiim ^2 marf)te feinen ©influfe immer me(;r igeltcnb^^ imb iKtbrcingte ^* bie alten ^cibnifdbeu ^^ Sieber. ^ie @eift= licku^^ bid)teten in jcner 3^^*, abcr meift in ber ^pvad)c ber 5lird)e, ber tatcinifd;en ^" (Sprack. 3ii^^<^i^^'^^ gebraud)^ ten fie p)ax bie (S^rad)e be§ ^^olfc§, aber ibre SBerfe in bcutfd;er (Bpvadjc finb au^fd^UcfeUd) ^"^ religiofer 91atiir^^ nn'o ijahm einen ijoijm SBert^o ^^^ ^|^ @efd;id)te ber beutfd)en ©^radje, aber menig ^oetifd)en 3Sert. 3nbe§ id) mu§ l;ier abbrcdjen. ^d) i:}aht nod) f)ente Slbenb eine gufammenfunft 21 mit meinem grennbe, ^errn Sietrid). 2Benn e^ 3(;nen red)t ift, tt)olIen tt)ir unfere UnterC;aItung morgen ahen^ fortfefeen. 1 Sword. — 2 Hit. — » Murderous steel. * /. e., sein Morder werden. — ^ Duel. — ^ Breaks off. 7 Composed, written. — 8 Products. — ^ To exhibit. — ^ National song. 11 Past participle of erloschen, extinguished, gone. 12 Christian religion. — i^ Made its influence more and more felt (geltend, literally, = ' of worth,' authoritative). 14 Imperfect of verdrangen, to push, to remove. — is Heathenish. 1'* Cliergymen. — 1^ Latin. 18 Exclusively.— i^ Genitive: of a religious nature. 20 Value.— 21 Engagement. 418 YERGNUGEN UNJJ GE.SUNDHEIT. The folhwirig letter to be learned by heart, and written from memory in German script some hour or two afterwards. This can be done in two sections, if too long. Boston, "tizn 1. Suit 1889. 3J?eine (iebe Souife! 3^ren Ikh^n 33rief bom 22. t)ongen SJZonat^ I;abe id) geftern erl;a(ten. 2®ir (;aben un§ allc \zi)x gefreut, baraug ^u crtef)en, bag e^ 3(;ucn in ^^ari^ fo c^ut gef alien ^at. Slber tDarnm finb (5ie nur fo furjc 3^'^^ ^^ geblieben? 3n S^iom ^iiten ©ie fid)^ l>or Dbft unb uniHn*baulidKn ©^eifen^ ebenfo ti:)ie bor (^i^^maffer, biefem i^iebUngegetrcinf^ ber Slmerifaner. 3d; braud;e 3I)nen nicbt ^n empfcblcn, nad)tlid)c 2lu§f(iigc^ nad; 5lrt ber ©aifi; 5[)ti(Ier jn l^ennci; ben/ aber id; mod;te 3f)nen ratcn fid) nid)t ^n erini'iben, ni(f)t ^u lange in ben fallen unb feud)ten^ Slird)en ^u t^er^ VDeilen" unb am Slbenb nid;t in \it\\ ©tragcn ber unfterb= Iid)en^ ©tabt f^a^ieren ^u geben. 2Senn ©ie a(P biefe 33orficl)t!oma§regeln ^^ antDenben/^ bann ift e§ in 9iom nid^t gefat)rlid;er al§ in Lofton, bielleid;! nid;t fo gefdbrlid). SSir finb gottlob alle gan^ gefunb unb benfen ndd;fte "iB^iK auf^ Sanb ^u gel)en. Sitte fd^reiben ©ie un§ nacl) 9leit)^ort. 3cl) berbleibe in5tt)ifd;en 3l)t:e treue greunbin, Katharine Fuller. 1 Abstain {yourself). — 2 Indigestible foods. 3 Favorite drink. Dative case, in apposition to Kiswasser, wliioh is in tlic (]ativ(> case. — ■* Niglitly excnrsions. — ^ 7,, avoid. 6 Feucht (fo-icht), humid. — ^ 'Po stay. — » Immortal. 5 Instead of alle. Observe that all, followed by the article or a pronoun, may be used nndeclined. 10 Precautionary measures. — n To employ. Anglice : take. Part V. PLEASURES AND HEALTH VERG^UGE:Nr UND GESUNDHEIT, •o^o* SECTION II. 1. KRANKHEIT. 2. BESUCH DES ARZTES. 3. VOKABELN : KRANKHEITEN. 4. VOKABELN : DAS BEFINDEN. 5. BESUCH BEIM ARZT. 6. OCHS ODER BAR. 7. GESPRACHE UBES LITTEBATUR. 419 420 VERGNUGEN VND GESUNDHEIT. II. GERMAN. 1. Ich mochte wissen, ob er krank ist.* Von wem sprechen Sie? Ich spreche von meinem kleinen Sohn.* Was fehlt ihm denn? Er klagt zuweilen iiber heftige Kopfschmerzen.f Er wird in der SchuleJ zu sehr angestrengt.^ Ja, er hat dieses Jahr sehr viel zu arbeiten. Vorige Woche sah er so blass aus. Ich fiirchte, dass er krank wird. Ich denke, ich werde den Arzt^ kommen lassen. Ich glaube nicht, dass er in der Stadt ist.* Ich war vorgestern bei ihm, aber er war soeben abgereist. NOTES. i Or, sei. See p. 342. — 2 Past participle of anstreiigen, to strain. 8 Strong declension, 5th class (modify vowel and add e, or cr, in plural). Also, familiar: Der Doktor (dok'-tor). ^ Or, ich glaube, er ist nicht in der Stadt. Notice that when dass is oniittoil, nicht can no longer be in the principal, but must be in the dependent clause. Never say : Ich glaube nicht^ er ist . . . . , but always, Ich glaube, er ist nicht * Strong declension, 5th class {vwdlfy vowel and add e, or er,in plural).-- t Der Schmerz, mixed declension. PLEASUKES AND HEALTH. 421 II, PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. 1. Ich mucJi^-te vF-s'n op ar krank^ ist. Zon'. KlQ-kht hef'-ti-ge koDf'-sliiiQer'-ts'n. Shoo'-le tsoo zar' an'-ge- fi^trefit'. Bias. Artst. Zo-a'-b'n ap'-ge-rist' I wonder if he is iU. Whom are you speaking about ?i About my little boy. What is the matter with him ? Sometimes he complains so much of headaches.^ They give him too much to do at school.^ Yes, he studies very much this year.'* Last week he looked so pale. I fear he will get ill.^ I think I '11 send for the doctor. I don't think he is in the city, g I went there day before yester- day,® but he had just gone away. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Of whom speak you ? 2 He complains sometimes of (lit. : over) violent headaches. 8 He is in the scliool too much overworked {strictly : strained). ^ Yes, he has this year very much to work. 5 That he ill becomes. 6 I was day-before-yesterday by him, i. e., at his house. t Weak declension. ^ Strong declension, 6th class {modify vowel and add e or er in plural). 422 VERGNUGEN UNI) GESUNDHEIT. Er ist aaf einige Tage * aufs Land gegangen. Das ist sehr unrecht von ihm, da so viele Krank- heiteii f herrschen. Aber horen Sie einmal. Es ist jemand an der Thiir. J Julie, offne schnell ! Ich glaube, dass es Paul ist. Ja, er ist es. 2. Was fehlt dir denn, mein Kiiid?§ Warum weinst du? Julius neckt^ mich immer in der Schule. Sei ruhig; das Weinen^ hilft (zu) nichts. Woriiber denkst du nach?^ Ich liberlege^ mir etwas. Nun, was ist es denn? In der letzten Schulwoche werde ich ihm einen Streich ^ spielen. Wer zuletzt lacht, lacht am besten.^ Das ist nicht recht von dir. NOTES. 1 From necken, to tease. 2 Infinitives used substantively are written with a capital. 3 From nachdenken, to think ahovt, to meditate. * Distinguish iiberlegen (u'-b'r-la'-g'n), with the accent on iiher,, to lay over, from iiberlegen (ii'-b'r-la'-g'n), with the accent on legen, to reflect, to meditate. — 5 Der Streich, tlie i^froke ; also, the trick. Notico the exju-ession : ein dummer Streich, a great piece of folly (lit.: a stupid trick). Der Streich, strong declension, 3d class. fi For the superlative adverbially used, see page 520. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 423 A-d6fs lant'. OOn'-vecht' . . hi-t'n lier'-sh.'n. Kraiik' IsV. 2. V^s falt^ der d6n min kiiit^ ? Vinst'. Y6o'-li-d6s nekt'. Koo'-ich. Nakh'. XJ'-b'r-la'-ge. Sliool'-v^o' -khe shtrich' sTipe'-l'n. T-iSikht. Nicht' TechV. He has gone to the country i'or ^ 11 few days. It is very mean of him, when there is so much sickness. ^ But what is that ? There is some one at the door. JuHa, (go and) open the door, quick. I think it is Paul. Yes. It is he. What is the matter, my child ? What are you crying for ? JuUus is always making fun of me at school.® Quiet yourself down. What is the use of crying like that?* What are you thinking about? I 'm thinking about something.* (Well) now what is it?^ I am going to plan him a good trick,' the last week of school. He who laughs last laughs best. That is not right. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Upon. — 2 As so many diseases reign. ^ Julius teases nie always in the school. * The crying helps notliing (or, to nothing). * I meditate to-me sometliing. ^ What is it, f!i(')i ? Denii way be left out. — ' A stroke. * Der Tag, str(»n<2; declension, 3d class [adds e in plural). t Die Krankheit, weak declension [plural in en). X Die Thiir, weak declension {plural in eti\ ^ Das Kind, strong declension, 4th class [addt' er in plural). 424 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. Note. — study the uses of the Infinitive, 3. Ich fiirchte, du bist krank. Ich habe dir immer gesagt, dass du zu viel arbeitest. Du siehst so schlecht aus. f Ich muss den Arzt kommen lassen. Julie, hole den Arzt! Und du, mein Kind, lege dich sofort ins Bett! Ich werde dich ordentlich zudecken. 4. Nun, wie fiihlst du dich jetzt?^ Ich fiihle mich sehr schwach. Hast du Schmerzen? Ja, im ganzen Korper ; alle Glieder ^ thun mir weh. Zuweilen habe ich Schwindel ^ im Kopf. Ah, da kommt der Doktor. Nun, was giebt es denn? Wann bist du krank geworden? NOTES. 1 Most German-Americans erroneously say: wie fiihlst du? in- stead of, wie fiihlst du dich ? To be avoided. 2 Das Glied (glet), limb. Glied means also a member (of some society, etc.). In tlie latter sense, liowever, the Germans usually pre fer the word Mitglied (mit'-glet'). 3 Schwindel, dizziness. Strong declension, 1st class. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. page 525, papags. 4 to 7. 425 3. Ich furch^'t^ doo bist kraiik^. ShlecTit . Ho'-le. La'-ge zo-fort' ins bet'. 6r'-d'nt-lic7i tsoo'-dek'-'n. 4. Noon ve fiilst^ doo dlch y6tst? Zar' stivaA:7i . Gle'-d'r va'. Shvin'-dl. Komt'. I am afraid you are ill.* I told you you were studying too much. You look so bad. I must send for the doctor. Julia, go for the doctor.^ And you, my child, go to bed at once.^ I '11 cover you up.* Well! How do you feel now? I feel very poorly.* Do you feel pains ? * I feel pains all over my body.® Sometimes my head swims. Ah ! Here is the doctor. Well, what is the matter? When did you get sick ? LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Fetch the physician. — * p^t yourself at once Into-the bed, 8 I shall you properly up-cover. — •* I feel myself very weak (schwach). — ^ Have you pains? Also, feel tjou pains ? 6 Yes, in the whole body, all the limbs make to-me pain. * Or, when not speaking familiarly: Sic sind krank. t Not familiar; Sie sehen so schleclit aus. 426 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. Vorgestern abend habe ich Kopfschmerzen ge- habt. Gestern abend wurde mir libel ?^ Heute friili konnte ich kaum atmen. Vor einer Stunde musste ich aus der Schule nach Hause gehen. Zeige mir deine Zunge! Sie ist etwas belegt. Hast du* Appetit?2 Nein. Ich habe schon liber vier Wochen keinen Appetit. Erlaub' einmal ; ich will dir f den ^ Puis fiihlen. Er geht ziemlich langsam. Hast du * warme Fiisse ? * Nein, Herr Doktor. Meine Fiisse und Hande sind kalt. Warum springst du| denn auf?^ Ich bekam einen Stich in die rechte Seite.' NOTES. 1 Es wird mir iibel, impersonal expression. For the omission of es in the above phrase, see page 2 The German word Esslust is rarely used. 8 For the use of the detiiiite article instead of the possessive adjec- tive, see page 356, note 2.— ^ Der Fuss, Die Hand, hotii strons^; de- clensions, Hh class (modi/;/ (lie vowel and add e, "/" ei», in the plural). ^ Was ist denn los? Vcnj familiar. — 6 From aufspringen, to jump tip, a strong verl). - 7 (!(Mild also be, in der rechten Seite. ^ If not fanuhar: Habeu Si«? PLEASURED AiND HEALTH. 427 At'-m'n. Tsd6n'-e. Be-lac7it'. Er-la-dop' In. Lan'-zam. Fu'-se. polls' fii Night before last headache. I had a Last night I felt sick at my stomach.^ This morning I could hardly breathe. An hour ago I was obliged to leave school and come home. Show me your tongue. It 's pretty well coated. Have you (any) appetite ? No, (doctor). It's more than a month that I had a good appetite.^ Excuse me. lam going to feel your pulse.* It is not very rapid. Are your feet warm ? * No, doctor. My hands and feet are cold. 5. Vas liast^ doo d6n? STiprifist ..... a-oof. T'-nen shtich'. What is the matter? What makes you jump like that? 5 It was a stitch® in my right side. LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Yesterday evening (it) became to-me ill. 2 I liave already over four weeks no appetite. 3 I will to-yon the pulse feel. 4 Also: Sind deine Fiisse warm? 5 Why juinp-you then up f 6 I received a stitcli. Der Stich, niasc. noun, strong declens., 3d class, t Not familiar: icli will Ihnen den Puis fdhlen. J If not familiar: WashabenSie? X If not familiar : Warum Springen Sie? 428 VERGNiJGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. Atme* einmal tief auf!^ 0, das thut mir weh. Jetzt sprich f einmal laut ! Noch lauter! Note. — Study the list of Separable Verbs, 6. Was mussen wir thun? Lassen Sie dieses Rezept in einer guten Apotheke machen I Er muss dreimal taglich zwei Pillen nehnien.^ Morgen werde ich wiederkommen. Glauben Sie, dass er bald wieder gesund^ wird, Herr Doktor? Das hoffe ich ganz bestimmt. Das freut mich sehr. Sorgen Sie nur dafiir, dass er seine Medizin regel- massig nimmt. NOTES. ^ From aufatmeii, to breathe, a weak verb. 2 ¥Ane Pille, a pill, weak declension. 3 Gesund, licallh'' • h'?o, healthful. * Not familiar: Atmen Sie. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 429 At'-me in-mal tef a-d6f'. Va. Now breathe heavily.* Oh ! it hurts me. Now speak aloud. Louder. page 523. 6. Vas mw^-s'ii ver toon^? Ra-tsept' ^-p6-ta'-ke. T§iCh'-lich pi'-l'n. Ge-zc56nt'. Ma-di-tsen' m§i'-sich. ra'-g'l- What will we have to do ? Have this prescription filled out at a good druggist's.* He will have to take two pills three times a day.* To-morrow I shall return to see him. Do you think he will soon re- cover, doctor? I am sure he will. I am very glad. Only take care and have him take his medicine regularly.* LITERAL TRANSLATIONS. 1 Deeply. — 2 In a good drug-store (die Apotheke). 8 Daily, taglich ; also, den Tag, the day. * Care you only fur that (lit. : therefore), that he his medicine, etc. t Not familiar : Sprechen Sie. 430 VERGNIJGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. THE PREPOSITIONS. The following is a full list of German prepositions : PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. biSf unto, till ; ohne, ivithout ; durch, through; sonder, without; filr, for ; um, about ; gegen for, gen), against ; wider, against. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE anstatt (or, statt), instead of; ungeachtet, halher,^for the sake of; ^ ohngeac kraft, ill virtue of ; unfei^n, , ,, ,,,, , . n T. T-^^( notwithstanding; halher,^for the sake of; ^ ohngeachtet, ' '^ ,.. , ._, . not far from ; langs, along; unweit, ) ^ -^ lautf according to ; vertnoge, by dint of; ^nittelSf by means of ; wdhrend, during ; trotZf^ i)i spite of; wegen, on account of; um willen,* on account of; zufolge,^ in consequence of^ PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASB- aus, out ; samt, ) , , . , 1^1 along with; bet, by; nebst, ) ^ ' mit, with; nachst, next to; obf if; binnerif within; von, from ; ausser, outside ; zUfto; entgeg en,* against ; nach, after; gegenuber,* opposite; seitf since; gemiiss,^ in accordance with; gleichf like ; zuwider, contrary to. 1 Halber (or halben), follows its noun. 2 Also, the compounds of halb, suaserhalb, outside; innerhalb, within; oberhalb, afiove; and unterhalb, 6g/(ni>. * Frequently governs the dative also. * Example : On account of him =Um seinei* willen. * Also, the compounds of seit, diesseit (or diesseits), on this side of; and jenseit (or jenseits), on that side of. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 431 I>REPOSITIONS GOVERNING SOMETIMES THE ACCUSA- TIVE AND SOMETIMES THE DATIVE. atif at, on; uber, above, across; auff upon ; unter, under, among ; hlnter, behind; vor, before; in, 1)1, into ; zwischen, between. neben, beside; CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ARTICLE. The frequent contraction of prepositions with the dative singular masculine and neuter {dem), the accusative singular masculine and neuter {den, das), and the dative plural (den), has already been noticed. Thus, an, in, etc., contract with the singular into am (for an dem), ans (for an das), at the ; im (for in dem), ins (for in das), in the; and hinter, unter-, etc., with the dative plural into hintern, untern, etc. Ex. : My head swims = Ich habe Schwindel im Kopf. He must go lo bed = Er muss ifis Bett. She is sitting at the window = Sie sitzt am Fenster. / like him very much = lE,r ist mir ans Herz gewachsen. We live behind the mountains = Hintern Bergen wohnen wir. HOW TO TRANSLATE WHEN. 1. When is rendered by wann : First, when it is interrogative. Ex. : When will you come f — Wann werden Sie kommen {never wenn) ? Second, in the sense of whatever. Ex. : I shall come when you say= Ich komme wann Sie wollen. 2. When = wenn, if it can be replaced by if. Ex. : When you come, I shall tell you = Wenn Sie kommen, will ich es Ihnen sagen. 3. When = als, whenever it refers to a .single past occasion. Ex.: When he came in, he saw the table = Als er eintrat, sah er den Tisch. 432 verg:nugen und gesundheit. The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Krankheiten. Leidend sein * (li'-d'nt), Die Unpiisslichkeit,^ Die Epidemie (e-pi-da-me'), Die Ohnmacht^ (pn'-maikht'), Der Schwindel (sh.vin'-d'l), Die Nase blutet mir (bloo'-tet), Die Erkaltung (er-kel'-tdon), Der Husten (hoos'-t'n), Eiii Schnupfen (sh.nd6p'-f n), m., Die Heiserkeit (h.i'-z'r-kit),* Das Fieber (fe'-b'r), Das Nervenfieber (nar'-fn — ), Das Scharlachfieber (sliar'-laA:7i— Die Impfung (iin'-pfd6fi), Die Masern (ma'-z'rn), Die Gicht (gicTit), Die Schwindsucht,* Die Wunde (vd6n'-de), To suffer from ill health. The indisposition. The epidemic. The fainting fit, the swoon. The giddiness. I am bleeding at the nose. The cold. The cough. The cold in the head. The hoarseness. The fever. The nervous fever. •), The scarlet fever. The vaccination. The measles. The gout. The consumption. The wound. Wie sehen Sie aus ! Ich bin schrecklich erkaltet, Sie hat eine dicke Backe,* How you do look ! I have a terrible cold. Her cheek is swollen. 1 Lit.: to be suffering.— 2 OOn'-pgs'-lic/i-kit. — « Lit.: power- lessness {stvicUy: without power) . — * Notice the adjective heiser, /loarsc. •5 Shvint'-zo6fcli.t'.— « Lit. : sfie has a thick cheek. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 433 The following vocabulary to he learned by heart. VOKABELN. Das Befinden.* Wie geht's ? * Danke, es geht mir sehr gut; und was machen Sie ? ^ Ich bin gar nicht wohl. Wie befindet sich Ihr Herr Bruder? Es geht ihm gar nicht gut. Wie steht's mit Ihrer Gesundheit? ^ ZiemUch gut, ich danke. Es geht besser.^ Ich huste.* Ich bin erkaltet.^ Ich habe mich erkaltet. Ich habe mich stark erkaltet. Ich habe mich verbrannt.' Ich habe ein geschwollenes ' Gesicht. Sie wurde ohnmachtig.® Du wirst dich erkalten. Ich habe mir den Arm gebrochen. How d'ye do ? I am very well, thank you ; and yourself? I am not very well. How is your brother ? He is not at all well. How is your health ? Pretty good, thank you. Better. I have a cough. I have a cold. I have caught a cold. I have caught a severe cold. I burnt myself. My face is swollen. She fainted. You are going to take cold. I have broken my arm. 1 Very familiar, instead of Wie geht es Ihnen? or, "Wie befinden Sie sich?— 2 Or, Wie geht's mit Ihrer Gesundheit? 8 It goes better. — ■* Hoos'-te. — 5 Er-kel'-tet. * F€r-brant', i)ast participle of verbrennen (fer-bre'-nSn); im- perfect, verbrannte. See page 507. — '' Ge-shvol'-'nes. * On'-niec/i -ticli.. Lit. : she became weak ; i. e., fainting. * The state of health. 434 VERGNUGEN- UND GESUNDHEIT. The same directions as heretofore to be followed. GESPRACHE. l.-BESVCH BEIM ARZT* Ich komme, um^ Sie um Ihren Eat zu^ bitten.^ — Was fehlt Ihnen denn? — Ich huste seit zwei Mo- naten. Ich habe alle moglichen Arzneien^ genom- irien, aber ohne Erfolg.* — Wie hat es angefangen? — Ich hatte mich beim Baden ^ erkaltet. Darauf habe ich eine Woche lang^ Fieber gehabt. Die ganze letzte Woche hat mich gefrosteltJ Ein Arzt, den ich um Rat fragte, meinte, ich hatte das kalte Fieber.f — Er hat sich sicher geirrt. — Glauben Sie, dass ich die Schwindsucht ^ habe? — Wie lange husten Sie schon? — Erst seit zwei Monaten. — Gut. Ich sehe jetzt, was Ihnen fehlt. — Glauben Sie, dass ich ernstlich krank bin ? — Nein. Sie sind nur stark erkaltet. Ich ver- sichere Sie, dass die Sache nicht ge^hrlich® ist. Sie Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Um— zu, in order to. — 2 Einen um Rat bitten, or f ragen, to consult one. — 8 AH kinds of medicine. Lit.: all possible medicines. Die Arzenei (or, Arznei), ar-tsg-ni', or Medizin (ma-di-tsen^, medi- cine.— •* Without result. Anglice, without getting well. * Baden (ba'-d'n), to bathe. — « For a week. Lit. : o week long. 7 Es frostelt (frus'-t'lt) mich, impersonal phrase, I feel chilly. On the omission of es, see page 409. — ^ Also, die Auszehrung (a-dos'-tsa-rooS). — ^ Ge-fS^r'-licli, dangerous. — * Visit at a phy- sician's ; consultation. — f Chills and fever. Lit.: cold fever. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 435 miissen diese Pulver^ nehmen. — Wie viel soil ich taglich nehmen? — Nehmen Sie jeden Tag drei. 2. — VOM SPIELEN* Warum wollen Sie nicht mit mir Karten spielen?^ — Wozu^ soil ich mit Ihnen spielen, ich verliere ja doch immer.* — Gut. Dann lassen Sie uns Ball spie- len! — Nein, ich habe den ganzen Nachmittag Ball gespielt. Ubrigens habe ich auch keine Zeit. Wir bekommen heute Besuch zum Mittagessen, und ich muss mich jetzt anziehen. 3. — 0CHS ODER BAR A Warum sehen Sie so verstimmt^ aus? — Ich wusste nicht, dass ich verstimmt aussehe. Ich bin im Ge- genteil^ in sehr guter Stimmung.^ — Und doch hat man mir gesagt, dass Sie auf der Borse viel verloren haben. Sind Sie Ochs^ oder Bdr^ gewesen? — Ich war weder^ das eine, noch^ das andere, lieber Herr. Ich war ein Esel. Pronunciation and Translations. 1 Pdol'-f'r, ?i., powder.— 2 Karten (die Karte, kar'-tg), spie- len, to play cards.— ^ See page 493.— ^ Or, Ich gewinne (ge-vi'- ng, w'm) ja doch nie (or niemals, ne'-mals, never). s Ver-s/».timt% in had humor. Lit.: niistuned, out of tune; also, ubellaimig (u'-b'l-la-oo'-nic/i.). — ^ On the contrary. "Die Stininiung, disposition, humor. Lit.: tune; also, die Laune (la-do'-ne). — 8 in Amerilta werden die jenigen, -welche auf Hausse spekulieren, Ochsen genannt; die jenigen, welche auf Baisse spekulieren, Baren. 9 Neither, nor. — * On playing. — f Bull or bear. 436 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. The same directions as heretofore to be followed. EXERCISES. . — VERSCHIEDENES. * What is the matter with you? You look so pale. I fear you are ill. — No, nothing is the matter with me. — But you will get ill, unless you take better care of yourself.^ I think I will go and buy some theater tickets for to-night. — I don't think ^ the office^ is open. — No matter, I must try to get some.* Well, I got^ tickets. — I am very glad (you did). What did you pay for them.^ — Two marks apiece. — Are they good (ones)? — (The) seventh row^ on the right. 2.—EINLADUNG UND ABFAHRT. I have invited your cousin to (come and) dine with us day after to-morrow. Do you think he will come? — I know he will come if he can. But he has a great deal^ to do Aids to Translation. 1 Wenn Sie slch nicht mehr schonen. Lit. : if you do not spare yourself more. — ^ See page 420, note 4, 8 Die Kasse (ka'-se). — 4 Welche. — 6 I have received. • Dafiir. — 7 Reihe (ri'-g), /. — 8 Very much. * Lit. : Different. Anglice : Miscellanies, PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 437 Well, I must start,^ unless he comes within a few minutes 2 — But you cannot go without him. He is the only^ (one) who knows the road.* — No matter, I am going. — Are you sure you can manage the horses?^ — 1 am sure I can.^ — Very well, good luck^ (to you). Note. — Study the uses of the participles, page 527. 3.—EIN FREVND. I have just met our friend Wiener. — He is your friend, perhaps, but not mine. — Do you not think he is^ a good man? — (I know he is) not.^ He played me a mean ^^ trick the other day. — There must be some mistake.^^ I hope you will change ^^ your opinion.^^ — I know I will not, unless he acts differently.^* — Well, in order that you may become friends again, I '11 invite you both to dinner with me, and we '11 talk the thing over.^^ Aids to Translation. 1 Aufbrechen. 2 If lie not in a few (ein paar) minutes comes. 3 Einzige.— 4 Der Weg (vacit), strong declension, 3d class. 5 Verstelien Sie auch sicher mit Pferden umzugehen? 6 O gewiss.— 5" Nun gut, viel Gliick. 8 That he, etc. — ^ No. — lo Arg, arch. 11 Tliere mnst some misunderstanding (Missverstandnis, mis' fer-slitent'-nis) lie before (vorliegen, for'-le -g'n). 12 Andern.— i3 Die Ansicht; or, die 3Ieinung. 14 If he not otherwise (anders) acts (handelt\ no. 15 We will over the thing (Sache) talk (sprechen; or, reden). 438 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. To he read by means of the notes, in preparation for translating and reading aloud in German. For Self-Study, to he translated, and when thoroughly understood, read aloud in German. Sefefiiirf. 9^un laffen ©ie un^ unfere geftrige Unter^altung fort= fe^en! 3<^ ^^^ fjeute t)erfud)en, '^l)mn ein ^ilb "oon ber beutfc^en ^oefie ^ur 3^^^ ^^^ ^reu^^iige^ 5U geben. gd; fagte 3f)nen geftern, bag bie beutfd)e ^oefie in ber 3^^^ nafi} Ravi 't^^rti ©rogen unter bem ©influfe ber @eift(id)feit ftanb. ®a§ cinberte fid) aber im 12. 3af)r^iinbert. ®a blii^t ber beutfd)e ©efang 'von neuem.^ ^ie .^reuj^iige erregten^ eine grogartige ^egeiftenmg/ bie 3ugc^ nadj bem Drient belebten^ bie ^^antafie/ unb bie §o(;enftaufen * unb anbere giirften ^flegten bie ^oefie an ihxm ^ofcir^ unb unterftii^ten ^ bie ©anger; bie beutfd)en D^itter^^ batten auf i^ren Qno^cn bie ^oefie ber fran^ofifcben 3;^ronbabour^ mio ^ronbere^t fennen gelernt nnb iiberfe^ten beren SSerfe^^ in^ ^entfd)e, fur^^, bag ganje ^olt rt)nrbe tmeber t)on ber ^uft^2 ^nm ,, ©ingen unb ©agen" erfiillt: bie ©anger ^^ogen^^ t)on $of ^u §of unb fangen bie alten ^elbenlieber mieber, bie im ^erjen beg 33o(!eg fo (ange gefd)Iummcrt ^* 1 Kro-its'-tsii '-ge, Crusades. Lit.: cross-expeditinm. — 2 Anew. 8 From erregen, to stir up. — * Enthusia^^m. — 5 Expeditions. « Beleben, to animate.— ^ Imagination. — « Courts. Der Hof, die Hofe.— » Supported.— « Der Ritter, the knight. 11 For the use of deren, see page 489. Also : die Werke derselben. 12 Strictly: desire. Angllce : love. — 18 Imperfect of Ziehen. See page 614. — 1* Slumbered.— * The emperors of tlie Swabian house of Hohenstaufen, the most celebrated of whom was Frederick Barbarossa, t The Troubadours and Trouveres, the early poets of France. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 439 t)atkn, aber nod^ nic^t gan^ltrf) ^ tJcrt^effen traren, 'unb ge= bilbete^ ritter(id)e ©anger, tt>eld)e ©imt^ unb 33erftanbm^* ftir bie @eful)Ie be§ ^oiU§> t;atten, fd)ufen burc^ funft(erifd)e5 ^ 3u)'ammenfugen jener alten ^elbentieber bie beiben f)errlic^en ^BolUtpm,^ ha§> 9libeIungenHeb unb ha§> @ubrun = (ieb, tt)eld)e man mit 9^ed)t^ mit ben griedjifc^en @^o= ^den/ ber 3(iabe^ imb ber Dbl)ffee/^ t^erglic^en ^^ ^at. Slnbere ritterlid^e ^^ ®ic^ter bearbeiteten bie ©agenftoffe, Ujeldje fie bei i^ren fran^ofifd)en ^orbilbem^^ fanben, bie Sllejanberfage/* bie ©age t>on ^arl bent ©rogen nnb D^Jolanb, bie ©age t>on ^onig 5(rtu§ nnb feiner ^afe(= rnnbe/-^ bie ©ralfage/^ n. f. to., nnb fo entftanben bie grofeen 2Berfe ber ritterlid)en ®id)t!nnft be§ TlittdalUx^, ber ^ar^it)a( be§ SSolfram Don (Sfd)enbad), 'i^m mandje fiir ben grofeten bentfdjen ®id)ter aller 3^^ten I^alten, nnb ^riftan nnb Sfolbe )i)on ©ottfrieb l^on ©trafe^ bnrg.^^ ©ie miffen, ^a^ 25agner and; biefe beiben ^'pm jn 3JJnfi!bramen bearbeitet bat. — 3on ben 9)tinnefdngcrn ju cx^ai)Un, t)on benen id) fo t)ie( ge^i)rt fjabe. — 2)a^ tt)ill ic^ gem tf)un, aber id) mn§ mid) fur^ faffen, benn e§> ift fe^r f^cit gen:)orben. Tlinm ift ba§ a(te beut|d)e SSort fiir eble reine £iebe, unb 'i)a bie ritter(id)en Sanger in i^ren It;rid)en @ebid)ten meift bie Siebe be= fungen fjaben, fo nennt man biefe ritterlic^en ^id)ter SJJinne- fcinger. Bk fingen t)om J^ii^Ung mit feinem ^liitenbuft/ 'oon 'iim ^ad)tigallenliebern,2 aber t)or allem ^reifen fie bie (Sd)dn(;eit unb 3^^^}^^ ^^^ g^rauen. ^er bebeutenbfte unb Dielfeitigfte * biefer £t)ri!er^ be§ 3JJitte(a(ter§ tt)ar SSalt^er t)on ber ^ogeltoeibe au§ 2^i^roI. 3^m ging ®eutfd)(anb liber atte§ in ber 2Be(t. ©r mar and) ein grower greunb ber 9latur unb foll^ bie ^Sogel fe^r lieb ge^abt ^aben; in feinem 2:^eftament^ beftimmte® er, bafe bie 33i?gel auf feinem @rab taglic^ mit ^rot unb 2Baffer gefiittert ^ tt)erben fotlten, unb barauf be^ie^t^^ fid) ha§> t)iibfcf)e @ebid)t Songfellon:)^ : Walther von der Vogelweide. — D ja, id) fenne e§ fe^r gut. Slber erlauben beutfd)e TUttd- alter neben^^ ber e^ifd)en unb It)rifd)en ^oefie nid)t and) 2)ramen (;ert)Drgebrad)t ? ^^ — ^ramen im eigentlic^en ©inne nid)t; ein nationa(e§ beutfc^e^ ^rarna .ijat fid) erft floater entmidelt.^* ^ie beutfd)e ^oefie fd)Iummert nun nac^ ber berrlid)en ^litte im 3Jlittela(ter, um erft it)ie ^ornro§d)en ^^ nac^ 3a^rl)un' berten it)ieber ^u neuer (Bd}onl)t\t ju ertx)ac^en. 1 Fragrance of buds. — 2 Songs of the nightingale. — 8 Modesty. * Most many sighted. — ^ Le'-ri-k'r, lyrical poet. — 6 jg said to. 7 Tgs-ta-mgnt', testament, last will.— » Disposed.— » Fed. I*' Refers. — n Finally. — 12 Besides. — I8 From hervorbringen, to produce. — 1* Developed. — i^ The heroine of Grimm's well-known fairy-tale of ' May Blossom ' (lit. : little thornrose). — ' Little Thornrose ' was a king's daughter, who, through the acts of a bad fairy, falls into a deep sleep, from which she awakes only one hundred years later. Part^ Y. PLEASURES AND HEALTH VERG:NruGE^ u:n^d gesu:n^dheit< •o^« SECTION III. i. VON EINER FREUNDIN. 2. DIE AUFGABE. 3. NACH DER ABREISE EINES FREUNDES. 4. BEI DER ARBEIT. 5. WAS GIEBT'S NEUES? 6. BEI EINEM FREUNDE. 7. UNTERRICHT: ZERSTREUT, 8. GESPRACHE UBER LITTERATUR. 441 442 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. III. GERMAN. 1. Glauben Sie doch das nicht ; ich habe sie so ebeii im grosseii Garten spazieren fahreii sehen.* Ich ging mit einem meiner Freunde spazieren. f Wo sind Sie ihr begegnet?^ Gleich am Eingang des Gartens; sie wollte nach der Stadt zuruck,^ aber als J sie mich sah, kehrte sie wieder um. (See page 84, III.) Es ist kein Zweifel mehr.^ Sie will mit mir brechen. Ich wiinschte, dass sie mich besuchte, § und sie hatte es mir versprochen. Warum lachen Sie? Mir ist es gar nicht zum Lachen. Aber ich weiss, was ich thue. § Ich werde sie nach dem Grund eines solchen Betragens fragen. Sie wird immer gleichgiiltiger gegen mich. Nun leben Sie wohl. Ich muss Sie verlassen. Ich.mochte heute abend ins Tlieater gehen NOTES. 1 Or, Wo haben Sie sie getroffen? Notice that begegnen governs the dative case. — 2 Fahren is understood. 8 Notice that in German mehr has to be separated from kein, if the latter is used as an adjective (i. e., before a noun). So never say, as many German- Americans do, kein mehr Brot, but always kein Brot mehr, — * Or, gesehen. See p. 176. — f For zu, see p. 524, X See note f, opposite page. — ^ For non-use of infinitive, see p. 524, PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 443 III, PRONUNCIATION. 1. Gla-db^-b'n ze dokh * It (i. e., there) is no doubt more. 4 To-me is it not at all to-the laughing. ••• After tlie reason ask. — To ask for is usually rendered by fragen nacU, sometimes by fragen rem (or iiher, or tvegen), but never by fragen fiir. — f Wheii = alSf when it refers to a single past occasion. See page 232. — | See page 446, note 1. 444 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. 2. Icli kaiiii dieses Gediclit iiiclit leriien, es ist zu* scliwer. Ich will gern etwas anderes lernen. Gut. Dann nehmen Sie diesen kurzen Auszug! Glauben Sie, dass Sie ihn bis morgen lernen konnen ? Ich hoffe es.^ Haben Sie Ihre deutsche Arbeit schon abge- schrieben ? Nein. Ich will sie heute nachmittag abschreiben. Note. — Study the Prepositions, Warum sind Sie (denn) so traurig? Sehe ich traurig aus? Ein Freund von mir ist soeben nach Amerika abgereist. Ich wusste nicht, dass der Herr schon abgereist ist.2 Ich glaubte, Sie sollten^ mit ihrn reisen. Ich kann noch nicht abkommen. Aber ich werde auch bald reisen. Wie heisst dieser Herr? NOTES. 1 The English word so, when used to represent a preceding verb or clause, as in the above sentence, is rendered in German by es (lit. : it). Ex.: Do you think so I* = Glauben Sie esf I hope so = Ich hofte eSf etc. 2 Or, sei (or war, or ware). 8 / am to, I have to, are rendered in German by ich soil, or ich muss. l^LEASUREt^ AND HEALTH. 445 2. Ich kan et Sittetrttttt* — 3* . — 9^un, §err ^rofeffor, mie lauge bauerte benn ^orn= rd§d)en§ (3d)luniiner ? ©ie fagten neiilid)/ bie beiit)'d;e ^^oej'ie fei nadj ber fd)oiien 3^^^ ^^"^ TOnnefcinger in (angen ©c^Iaf gefallen. — @§ tDar a(lerbing§ ein (anger ©d)taf, \)zxm erft mit bem (grfd)einen beg „3}kifia§"2 i;)on ^(o^ftod i. % 1748 beginnt bie ^meite glan^enbe ^^eriobe ber bentfdjen Sittera= tur, bie 3^^^ ^^^ ^laffifer.^ (S^ ift inbe§ intereffant, bie Derfd)iebenen ^^erfud)e* ^u betrad)ten/ ioeldie bie bentfd)e ®id)tfunft mad)te, urn ai\^ bem tiefen ©djlnmmer ^u er^ txjac^en. '^\x^x\i toaren e^ bie ^iirger^ in ben anfb(n()en= ben^ Degenerated. 1^ The clergy had become- worldly, — 12 jjt. : so became the Mifine~ gesang {love-song) to Meistergesang {master-song). Anglice: So the Mlanegesang turned into the Meistergesang. Tbo Meistergesang was the art of song as practiced by the masters {of trades), that is to say, by the citizens, the lower orders. See n. G. — 18 Master tradesmen. — 1* Strove. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 455 nur nacf) einer |)cbantifc^ gefe^ma^igen ^ Jorm ber ®id)= timgen, ber S"')'^!^ ''^^'^^ imbebeutenb unb meift auf ha^ Se()rl;afte,^ ba^ 3}JoraUfd;e befc^rcinft.^ ©iefer 9Jieifterge= fang cr(;ebt fid) erft im 16. Sa^r^unbert in Qan§> ©ad)§, eineni ber frnc^tbarften * unb t)ie(feitigften beutfcben ®id)ter, 5U einer getuiffen ©rofee. ©r bidjtete nid)t nur ^af)llofe 3}2eifterfpriic^e/ fonbern audi t)ol!gtiimIid)e ^ (;umoriftifd;e (Sr^dl^lungen ' unb t)ie(e ^ramen, befonberg gaftnad)tf^iie!e, ja iDir fonnen i(;n aud; ben ®id)ter ber fird)(i(f)en ^ 9tefor= mation nennen unb :liut(;er an bie ©eite ftetlen. Qan^ wax'o yon feinen g^i^Q^^^'^fKi^ ^ ^)^^ t)ere(;rt, bie 3'?ad;U')elt ^^ aber ijattc i(;n (ange t)ergeffen unb tjerfannt.^^ ^Tft @dt(;e erfannte feinen SSert^^ mieber unb fdjrieb ^u feiner G:(;renrettung ^^ ha^ befannte @ebid)t, „§an§ (Bad)- fen^ ^* poetifd)e ©enbung/' ^^ in bem er Don il;m fagt : ^a broben in 't^m SBolfen fc^toebt^^ ©in ©id;fran5/' emg^^ jung^^ belaubt,^^ ^en fe^t bie ^ladjwdt i^m auf^ §au!pt. ©eitbem toirb Qan§> (Sad)fen§ ^erbienft^^ urn bie beutfcbe Sitteratur botlauf geioiirbigt,^ unb feine S^aterftabt ^fHirn^ berg, wMjc itber(;au^t eine ber §au^tftatten be§ 9JJeifter= gefang^ tuar, ijat xijm ein fd)oneg ®en!ma( gefe^t. — Unb i)at \i)m nid)t 9^id)arb SKagner in feinen „ 3}Jeifter= fcingern" ein nod; fd;bnere§ ^enfmal gefe^t? — ©ie i}ahm red)t, nieine greunbin, unb umfonie^r ^ a{§> gerabe bie „ 9Jleifterfanger " eine ber i)olf§tiimlid)ften unb A Legal. — 2 Didactic poetry. — ^ Confined. — * Prolific. 6 Didactic poems (lit. : sayings, sentences), of the master-singers (i. e., singing trades-people). — ^ Popular. — T' Narrations, stories. 8 Religious. — » Contemporaries. — i** Posterity. — n Mistaken. 12 Value.— 13 Vindication. — " For the formation of the genitive of proper names ending in s, see page 475. — i^ Mission. 16 Hovers. — i'' Oak -crown. ~ is Eternally. — i^ Young, new. 20 Leafed. — 21 Merit. — 22 Appreciated. — 23 The more so. 456 VERGNUGEN UND GESUNDHEIT. anfprec^enbfteu ^ Opun SBagnerS finb, bie §an§ ©ad)fen§ ^06 2 fiir atle 3^iten berfiinben^ voerbeiL Slber laffen (Sie mid) better ge^en unb nuume(;r be^ Manm^ gebenfen, ben id) fd)on in ^erbinbimg* mit §an^ ^x\va^ni^ i)ahc: ^ut^er f)at fid) burd) feine Sibeliiberfefeimg fo tt)ie burd; feine geiftlid)en Sieber^ ein imfterb(id)e§ ^ ^erbienft^ urn bie beutfd)e fiitteratur emorben.^ ©r gab bem beut|d)en ^olf eine ein^eit(id)e ©d)riftf^rad)c,^ bie fid) burc^ bie ^ibe( mit §iilfe ber neu erfunbenen 33ud)bruder!unft ^^ balb iiber a^aw^ ^eutfd)Ianb t)erbreitete." Tlit ber ^Reformation fd)ienen aEe ^ebingungen ^2 erfiillt, um tDieber eine grofee beutfd)e ^oefie entfte^en ^u taffen/^ al§> ber breifeigjdbrige ^rieg aufSbrad). ^ie gliigel be§ ©eifteS^^ (agen^^ bnrd) ba§ (Slenb^^ be§ ^riege^ faft gan^ barnieber.^^ 2Sic ba§ Sanb ein 'Manh ber gremben/^ fo rt)arb anc^ bie beutfd)e ©^rad)e burd) bie ©inmifc^ung ^^ t)ieler grembmorter, befonber^ franjbfifc^er, entftellt/^ unb felbft nad) gefd)(offenem grieben^ tuaren bie ^eutfd)en nod) lange nid)t im ftanbe,^^ fid) Don bem (Sin= fluff e be§ 3(u§(anbe§ ^2 ^^ befreien. ©0 n^ar benn bae ganje 17. 3af)r^unbert aud) fiir bie ^oefie eine febr traurige geit. 3n biefer 3^^^ na^men fid)^^ bie ©elebrten^^ ber ^id)tung an.^ ^§> entbrannte in^befonbere '^^ ein I;eftiger 5lam^f gmifc^en @ottfd)eb in Sei^^ig unb ^obmer in ber 1 Most attractive. — 2 Praise. — « To announce.— ■* Connection. 5 Mentioned. — 6 Religious songs, hymns. — ^ Immortal. 8 Sich ein Verdienst erwerben um, etc. To deserve well of. Lit. : to gain (for) one's self a desert. — ^ A uniformly written or book- language. — 10 Art of printing. — ^^ Sich verbreiten, to spread. 12 Conditions, promises. — i* To have originate. 1* The ' wings of genius.' 16 Da(r)niederliegen, to lie down. — 1* Misery, affliction. iJ" Prey of foreigners. — I8 Admixture. — i^ Disfigured. 20 Frieden schliessen, to make peace. — 21 Able. 22 Foreign country. - "^ Sich annehmen, to take care. 2* Learned men.— 25 Insbesondere (or, besonders), especially. PLEASURES AND HEALTH. 457 ©c^ttjeta. 3n biefem^ ^anbelte e§ fid)^ einmaP barurn, ob bie befferen fran^ofifc^en obcr bte befferen eng(ifcf)en ®id)ter nad)al;mengtt)erte * ^orbilber fiir bie ®eutfd)en feien, unb bann barum, ob bie ^oefie ©ad)e be§ 33erftanbe§^ ober beg ©efii^Ig fei. ®a erfd)ien ^Id^lid), tt)af)renb biefi^r ^amp\ nod) bauerte,^ ber ®rli)fer/ ber ®ornri)gd)en toieber gum Seben tix^U, griebrid; Gottlieb Rlop\tod, unb fii^rte^ mit feinem „9JJeffia§" bie p)dU ^oetif(i)e ©lan^^eit ber beutfdjen :^itteratur E)erauf,^ beren ^elben aufeer ^Io^= ftod Seffing, SSielanb, Berber, @dtl;e unb ©(f)iner finb. Unb ^ierinit, meine greunbin, (;a(te id; meine 2(uf:= gabe/ (5ie in aller ^ur^e mit bem (SnttDidelung^gang ber beutfcf)en Sitteratur befannt^^ 311 mac^en, fiir geldft.^ — 2(ber taffen ©ie mid) bod) nod) eine grage an ©ie ric^ten ! 3Sen ^alten ©ie benn fiir hm gro^eren ^ic^ter, (Sd)iaer ober ©ot^e? — @§ gab eine Q^xt, gndbige ^rau, tt)o biefe ?^rage ^an= fig" genug (eb^aft/^ \a ^i^g^^ t)i§!uticrt tt)urbe. @liid= Iid)ertt)eife ^* ^at barauf ©ot^e felbft bie befte Slntoort gegeben, inbem er au^rief : ^^ „ ®ie tf)orid)ten ^^ ^eutfc^en ! Xa ftreiten fie fid) nnn fjerum/' toer grower fei, ob ©critter ober ic^ ! ©ie foUten bod; fro^ fein, ta^ fie ^wd fo(d)e ^erle^^ ^aben, n)ie tt)ir." 1 Understood, Kampf.— 2_Es handelt sich {thoroughly idiomatic). Anglice: The question is.— ^ In'-mal', in the first place. — < Worthy of imitation. — ^ Intellect.— ^ Lasted, continued. N. B. — Distinguish from dauern, to last, the impersonal verb dauern : es dauert mich (also, ich bedaure), I regret. — ^ Deliverer, saviour. 8 From herauflRihren, to inaugurate, lit. : to lead up. 9 T hold my problem (Anglice : / consider my attempt) you in the shortest way (lit. : in all shortness) (for) solved. Eine Aufgabe losen (lu'-z'n), to solve a problem. — ^ Familiar. — n Frequently. 1'^ In a lively way. — is Ardently. 1^ Fortunately. — i^ Exclaimed. — I6 Foolish. 17 Sich herumstreiten, to dispute. — is Fellows. GRAMMAR. THE ARTICLE. The Germans have two articles, the definite and the ifir' definite article. I. — THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. The definite article corresponds to the English thr. The singular of the article, — The nominative singu- lar {or, first case) has distinct forms for the 7)iaseuline, fcniinwp, and neuter. The other cases [genitive (or case with of), dative (or case with to), and accusative (or 'direct-object' case)], have separate, but not always distinct endings. Thus : Singular of the article. NoM. — der, die, das =the. Gen. — des, der, des = of the. Dat. — dem, der, dem = to the. [ Ace. — den, die, das —the. iNCtice that the feminine article is exactly the same in the nominative and accusative. The same is true of the neuter* article. The plural of the article, — In the plural there is only one form for all the genders ; but there are distinct forms for the cases (except that nominative and accusative are alike). Thus: FOR ALL GENDERS. r 1 Plural of f NoM. — die =the. , , Gex. — der = of the. ' , I Dat. — den=to the. article. \ I Ace. — die =the. 469 460 GRAMMAR. N. B. — The following pronouns are declined like the defi nite article, except that their ve.uter, nominative and accusative end in es instead of as. Thus: das; but, dieses; SINGULAR. MASC. FEM. NEUT. dieser, diese, dieses =this. jener, jene, jenes =that. mancher, manche, manches =ma7iya. jeder, jede, jedes = every. welcher, welche, welches = which? PLURAL. ALL GENDERS. diese = these. jene manche =ma?i2/ «• no plural. welche = which? Specimen of Declension. SINGULAR. MASC. FEM. NEUT. NoM. — dieser, diese, dieses =this. Gen. — dieses, dieser, dieses = of this. Dat. — diesem, dieser, diesewi=to this. Ace. — diese»i, diese, dieses =this. Let the student decline jener, mancher, jeder, and welcher according to this model. For the use of the definite article, see opposite page. PLURAL. ALL GENDERS. diese = these. dieset* =of them. diesew, = to them. diese = these. II. — THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. The indefinite article (English : a, an) has, of course, no plural. It is declined as follows : MASO. FEM. NEUT. NOM. — ein, eine, ein = a (an). Gen. — eines, einer, eines = of a. DAT. — einei^t, einer, einetn = to a. Ace. — einen, eine, ein =a. N. B. — Notice that in the declension of the masculine, ein differs from the definite article only in the nominative (ein) having no ending. In the feminine, ein is declined exactly like the definite article. In the neuter (as in the masculine), ein differs from the definite article in having no ending in the nominative and accusative. GRAMMAR. 461 OTHER WORDS DECLINED I.IKE EIN. The numeral adjective kein and the following posses- sive pronouns : tneint my, sein, his, unser, our, Ihr^ your, deifif thy, ihr,^ her, euer^ your, ihr^ their, are decUned like ein. These words, however, have 2^ plural, which is declined like the plural of the definite article. Ex. : SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASC. FEM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS. NoM. — mein, meine, niein —my. meine =my. Gen. — meincs, nieiner, meines =ofmy. meiner =of my. Dat. — meiuetn, nieine^*, uieinetn = to m,y. mQinen^to my. Ace. — meinew-, nieine, mein =my. meine =7riy.* III. — USES OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. General Rule. — The definite article is more frequently used in German than in English. OASES WHEN THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS USED. 1. With propel' names : If the proper name is preceded by an adjective. Ex. : Poor William = Der arme Wilhelm. Rich England = Das reiche England. 2. With the genitive plural of cotmnon nouns, as it is sometimes the only way of distinguishing it from the nomi- native. Thus : 3Ien\s d7dy='Die Pflicht der Menschen {never: Die Pflicht Menschen, because Menschen is the form of the nominative as well as of the genitive ]}lund). 3. With abstract nouns (generally). Ex. : Beauty = Die Schonheit. 1 Notice that ihv = her or their. The context naturally always shows which is meant. 2 Ihr, written with a capital, is a more polite form (for your). *■ When used without a noun, eiw, mein, dein, etc., are declined exactly like tiie definite article, both in the singular and phiral. Thus: my = mein, nieine, mein^ etc. ; but, mi?ie = meiner, meine, meines, etc. 462 GRAMMAR. 4. With names of materials (as, wood, gold, water, etc.), if the word is used either in a general or definite sense. Ex. : Gener. — Gold is precious = Das Gold ist wertvoll. Defin. — The Gold was poor = Das Gold war schlecht. 5. With names of the seasons, months, or weeJcs, Ex. : Summer is beautifal here = Der Sommer ist hier schon. May is a charming month = Der Mai ist ein reizender Monat. Come on Thursday =Kon\men Sie am Donnerstag. 6. For use with parts of the body, see p. 356.^ Observe that the use of the article, even in some of the above cases (as for instance with abstract nouns), is often optional in German. OASES WHEN THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS NOT USED. 1. With names of jnaterials, if denoting a certain quan- tity. Ex. : Give him gold = Gehen Sie ihm Gold, Bring me water = Bringen Sie^mir Wasser, 2. In proverbs, Ex. : Early to bed, early etc. — Morgenstunde hat Gold im Munde. Lit. : Morning hour has gold in the mouth. 3. After the genitive of the relative pronoun. Ex. : The man whose carriage I saw =^Der Mann, dessen Wagen ich sah. 4. Before the cardinal points, when these are preceded by a preposition. Ex. : Fro)n the North to the South=Von Nord bis Siid. Exception. — With the prepos. in, the article is used. Ex. : In the West = Im Westen. 5. The definite article is also omitted before a noun, which governs a genitive when the genitive precedes the noun. Ex. : / come from the lap of dark rocks = Ich komme aus dunkler Felsen Schoss (but : aus detn Schoss dunkler Felsen). This, however, is not usual in prose, except with proper names. Thus: 3Ir. I\or)irr's Ji(if = ¥{errn Korners Hut (instead of Ber Hut des H. K. ; also used). N. B. — For spLvial uses of the definite article, the uses of the indejinitr article, and the position o/ both articles, see Appendix. GRAMMAR. 463 THE NOUN. I. — THE GENDER OF NOUNS. Nouns in German may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter, GENERAL RULES. 1. NAMES OF MALES AND FEMALES. Names of males are masculine, and names of females feminine. Thus : MASCULINE. FEMININE. Z>er Mann, the man. Die Frau, thewoman.^ Der Lowe,^ the lion. Die Lowing the lioness. Exceptions: Das Weib (vip), the ivoman, and the diminu- tive names of males or females formed by suffixing cJien or lein. Thus : Das Madchen (mat^-c/fc'n), the girl. Das Frau lein (fro-i^-lin), the young lady. Das Mannlein (m^n^-lin), the little man. 2 NAMES OF THINGS. Names of things may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter. This, for a number of them, depends on their signifi- cation; for the larger part, however, it depends on their ter- mination. HOW TO TELL THEIR GENDER. 1. Masculine. — The ivinds, points of the compass, seasons, months, and days. Ex. : Der Nordwind, the north wind ; der Friihling, the Spring. Im^ Dezember, December ; am^ Mittwoch, Wednesday. Also, usually : — The names of stones. Thus : Der Diamant (de-a-mant''), the diamond. Der Amethyst (a-m6-tist0. the amethyst. Der Smaragd (sina-ra7([;^t''), the emerald. 1 Pron.: Lii'-ve ; Lu'-vin. 2 Frau — ivoman, lady, wife. Weib {\ip) = ivommi. wife, female. 3 Im (for in ile^n, lit. : in the December) da-tsern'-b'r. 4 Am (for an ie Schweiz; die Tuvke'i (trn'-ki^- 4. Words which are not nouns, but which are used as such. Ex. : Das Essen = 2'he eating. Das A = The a. Das Griin = The green. Das B = The b. Par. i.-BY THEIR TERMINATION. 1. Masculine: — Nouns of one syllable ending in atich, bs, ee, elf en, g, II, nz^ pf, ps, sch, tz, Ex. : Der llauch {ra-obkh^}, the smoke. Der Kiebs (kreps), the lobster. Der Thee (ta). the tea. Der Nage^ (na^-g-'l), the nail Der Tag {tHkh), the day. Der Regew- ^ra^-gr'ii), the rain. Also, nouns ending in igr, icJi, ing, ling, Ex. : Der Konig (kiV-!iir/*). the king. Der Teppich (te/-pieh), the carpet. Der Hdring (h^^-riii), ihe herring. Der Jungling (y?iri^-liii , the young man. 2. Feminine: — 1. Nouns of one syllable ending in acht or ucJit, Ex. : Die Nacht (n^kht), night. Die Bucht (bd<>A;/it), the bay. GRAMMAR. 465 2. Nouns with one of the suffixes ei, heit, heit, schaft, uufff in, or the ending e {excepting those denoting males). Ex. : Die Backerei (be'-k6-riO, the bakery. Die Leidenschaft (li^-d'n-shg^ft), passion. Die Heldm (heF-din), the heroine. Die ^chljnheit (shiin^-hit), beauty. Die Aohiung (afcfe^-tdbn), respect. Die Perle (per^-16), the pearl. 3. Nouns ending in ion or tat, Ex. : Die Nation (na'-tsi^onO- I>ie Qualitat (kvsi-li-tdt''). 3. Neuter: — 1. Nouns with one of the suffixes chen, lein, sal, set, turn. Ex. : Das INIadchen (niat^-ci^'n), the girl. Das Schicksal (sliik^-sal), the fate. Das Mannlein (mfen^-lin), the little man. Das Riitsel (r4t^-s*l), the riddle. Das Sklaventuni (skla^-v'n-toom), slavery. Exceptions : Der Reichtum (rlch^-tobm), wealth, riches. Der Irituni (ir^-tooni), error. 8. Nouns with the prefix ge, Ex. : Das Gemalde (g6-mdF-d6), the painting. Exceptions: Der Geruch (g^-robkh^), smell; der Ge- schmack (g-fe-shmakO, taste; der Gedanke, thought; der Gewin, gain; die Geschichte (g6-sliic^^-t6), history; die Gestalt, the form ; die Gewalt, the violence. Note. — Gender of compound nouns: As a rule, the gender of compound nouns is the same as the gender of their last compo- lUMit iKiri. Ex. : Die Hochzeit {hokh'-tsit), the wedding ; from die Zeit, time. Exceptions : — 1. Names of towns. Ex. : Das Wittenberg ; from der Berg. 2. Many compounds of der Mut (moot), the spirit. Ex. : IHe Wehmut (va'-moot), sadness. Die Anmut (an'-moot), grace. 3. Various words, as : Die Antwort (ant'-vort), answer ; from das Wort, etc. 466 GRAMMAR. II. — DECLENSION OF NOUNS.* GENERAL RULES. 1. In the singular of all declensions, the accusative of the feminine and of neuter nouns are the same in J'orm as the nominative. Thus : NoM. : Die Frau. Ace. : Die Frau. NOxM. : Das Buch. Ace. : Das Buch. 2. In the pluralf the nominative, genitive, and accu- sative of any one declension are exactly the same inform. The dative (plural) of all nouns, to whatever declension they may belong, always ends in n. THE THREE DECLENSIONS. Nouns are declined after three declensions: The strong (or s) declension, the weak (or n) declension, and the mixed declension. To the strong (or s) declension belong tnost of the ^nasculine and neuter nouns. These form their geni- tive singular by adding s (or es) to the nominative. Ex. : NoM. : Der Vater. Gen. : Des Vaters. NoM. : Das Kind. Gen. : Des Kinder. To this same declension belong also a few feminine nouns. These, however, like all feminine nouns, do not take any ending whatever in the singular. They are classified with the strong declension, however, because {milike most feminine nouns, which end in n or en throughout the plural) they end in n (or en) only in the dative plural, as the nouns of the strong declension do. To the weak declension belong nearly all feminine nouns, and a few masculine. ••■ The declension of German nouns certainly offers considerable difficulties. The classification made in this book, however, will be found to make the comprehension and final mastery of this part of German grammar much easier than heretofore. Although, after all, the ear is the best and most accurate teacher in this particular, and learners will discover that insensibly they will require a faculty of using the right ending irrespective of theoretic knowledge. But a thorough study of the declensions can only hasten and perfect this result. GRAMMAR. 467 Kouns of this declension end in n (or en) tlu'oughout their plural (hence the navie of n declension).'^ To the mixed declension belong some thirty nouns, which take the endings of the strong declension in the singular; and those of the weak declension in the plural. THE STRONG DECLENSION. Characteristics. — As already seen, all nouns of the strong declension form their genitive singular by adding s (or es) to the nominative singular. Classes. — But the nouns of this declension are divided into five classes, according to the way in which their plural is formed. 1.- FIRST CLASS. Characteristics. — Nouns of the first class form their plural ivithout any additional termination. Specimens of Declension. MASCULINE NOUN. SINGULAR. PLUBAL. NoM. — Der Adler, the eagle. Die Adler, the ea^fks. Gen. — Des Adlers, of the eagle. Der Adler, of t?ie ea^ks, Dat. — Dem Adler, to the eagle. DenAdlerw,f io the eagles. Ace. — Den Adler, the eagle. Die Adler, the eagles. NEUTER NOUN. NoM. — Das Madchen, ook. Deii BU-herfif to the books. A. — Das Buch, t he hook. Die Bik-her, the books. To this class belong some monosyUahic masculines, about thirty monosyllabic fe))iinines, and many monosyllabic neuters. EXAMPLES. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Der Arzt (artst), the physician. Die Arzte (erts'-te). Der Fluss (floos), the river. Die Fliisse (flw'-se). Der Gast (gast), the guest. Die Gaste (ges'-te). Der Mann (man), the man. Die Manner (me'-n'r), Der Wald (valt). the woods. Die Walder (vel'-d'r). Die Frucht (frd67i;7it), the fruit. Die Friichte (irilch'-te). Die Gans (gans), the goose. Die Giinse (gen'-ze). 472 GRAMMAR. Die Kuh (koo), the cow. Die Kiihe (ku'-e). Die Nacht (nafeTit), the night. Die Niichte (nec7i'-te) Die Stadt (sTitat), the city. Die Stadte (s7tte'-te). Das Band (bant), the ribbon.'^ Die Bander (ben'-d'r). Das Dach (daT^Ti), the roof. Die Daclier (de'-c7i'r). Das Dorf (dorf), the village. Die Dorfer (dur'-f r). Das Land (lant), the country. Die Lander ** (len'-d'r). Das Wort (vort), the word. Die Worter » (vur'-t'r). Das Volk (folk), the people. Die Volker (ful'-k'r). THE WEAK DECLENSION. All nouns of the weak declension form their plural by adding en to the nominative singular. Thus : Singular : Die Absicht. Plural : Die Absichtew. Exceptions : Nouns ending in e, el or er, take only n. Thus : Singular : Die Blume. Plural : Die Blumew. Die Feder. " Die Federw. Nouns belonging to the Weak Declension. — Nearly all feminine nouns; sorne masculines ending in e; a few monosyllabic masculine nouns, and many foreign words accented on the last syllable. N. B. — All nouns of the weak declension are declined alike throughout the plural. But the masculine nouns end in n or en throughout the singular also (the nominative excepted). Specimen Declension of Feminine Nouns. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NoM. — Die Frau, the lady. Die Fniu en, the ladies. Gen. — Der Frau, of the lady. Der Frawen, o/tJir lrei grosse Brote. — f Ex.: Der grosse Mann, etc.; die grosse Hand, etc. ; das grosse Haus, etc. Plur. .- Die grosse?* ( Manner, Hiinde, or Hauser) , etc. 478 GRAMMAR. N. B. — When the adjective is preceded by one of the de- monstrative or indertnite pronouns, dieser, jenei% jeder, mancher, welcher, or by the interrogative welcher (see page 493), it takes the same endmgs as when preceded by the definite article itself. Specimen Declension with JHeser, MASCULINE. FEMININE. NoM. — Dieser grosse Mann.^ Diese schone Frau.® Gen. — Dieses grossew. Mannes.^ Dieser schoncw- Frau.* Dat. — Diesem grosser. Mann. Dieser schoneW' Frau. Ace. — Diesen grosser Mann. Diese schone Frau. NEUTER. NoM. — Dieses kleine Haus.* Gen. — Dieses kleinei* Hauses.® Dat. — Diesem kleineti Haus. Ace. — Dieses kleine Haus. PLURAL (all genders). Diese grosser Manner; diese schonew Frauen; diese kleincn Hauser; etc., en being the adjective ending in all cases and genders. 2. WHEN PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. When preceded by the indefinite article {ein, eine, ein), the adjective is declined exactly as when preceded by the definite article, with the exception of the nominative singular of the masculine and neuter (which take respectively er and es), and tJie accusative singular of the neuter (which takes es), ^eciinen Declension with ein, eine, ein, MASCULINE. FEMININE. NoM. — Ein grosser Mann. Eine schone Frau. Gen. — Fines grosseti- Mannes. Finer schonew Frau. Dat. — Einem grossew. Mann. Einer schonen Frau. Ace. — Einen grosser Mann. Eine schone Frau. 1 This large man. — 2 Of this large man. — 3 This beautiful lady. ^ Of tliis l)eautifiil hidy. — ^ This small house. 6 Oi this small house. GRAMMAR. 479 NEUTER. NoM. — Ein kleincs Haus. Gen. — Eines hleinen Hauses. Dat. — Einem kleine/i Haus. Ace. — Ein kleines Haus. Note i. — With ein there is, of course, no plural. Note 2. — Adjectives preceded by the possessive pronouns, tnein, deirif sein, unser, euer, ihr, and the indefinite kein, take tiie same ending as with ein. But the adjective is also declined in the plural with these, its endings being en for all cases. Thus : Keine grosse/i Manner, Meine scho-nen Blumen, Keiner grosser*. Manner, Meiner schouen Blumen, <^tc., en being always the ending. Note. — When a personal pronoun in the nominative is qualified oy an adjective, the adjective agrees with it. Thus : /, poor man = Ich arnier Mann. ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 1. if an adjective is used substantively, i. e., instead of (and therefore without) its noun, it takes the same endings then as if the noun were present. Th\is : Der Arme,^ instead S^ee that large round table. III. -THE FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives are formed from nouns, verbs, etc., by adding various suffixes, such as bar, en, n, em, haft, ig, isch, lich, sam, Ex. : dankftar —thankful (from Dank). kupferti = (made of) copper (from Kupfer). iugem\haft = virtuous (from Tugend, virtue). macbtigr ^powerful (from Macht, power). Adjectives are also formed by adding one of the prefixes ge, miss, ur, or erz to other words (as nouns, verbs, other adjectives, etc.). Ex. : Crcrecht =just (from recht, right). Uralt = very old (from alt, old). Finally, the prefix un is used to denote a contrary quality to that expressed by the primitive adjective. Ex. : Begreiflich = comprehensible, t/wbegreiflich = incomprehensible. N. B. — Notice that in adjectives compounded with tew-, the primary accent is on the prefix. Thus: B^-grifMicTi ; but, dbn^-b6-grif-lic^. IV. — COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. The comparison of adjectives in German is very similar to that of English adjectives. Thus, the comparative is formed by adding er ; the super- lative, by adding est (or st). Moreover, for both comparative and superlative, the vowels a, o and u, are frequently modified (into a, 6 and U)» GRAMMAR. 481 Specimens of Comparison. POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. jung, young. junger, younger. jiingsi, youngest. breit, broad. breiter, broader. breitcsf, broadest. schon, beautiful. schoner, more beaut, schons*, most beaut. Note. — The termination est for the superlative is used after the Unguals (cf, #, s#, ss, sell, or z). After all other sounds, st is used. Declension of Adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, Adjectives in the comparative or superlative degree arc declined like the positive (or simple) form of the adjective. Ex.: MASCULINE SINGULAR. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. NoM. — Der grossere^ Mann.^ Der grosste* Mann.* Gen. — Des grosserew- ^ Mannes. Des grosstew- Mannes. Dat. — Dem grosseren ^ Mann. Dem grosstew- Mann. Ace. — Den grossere/i- ^ Mann. Den grosstei* Mann. FEMININE SINGULAR. NoM. — Die schonere^ Frau. Die schonste Frau. Gen. — Der schoneren* Frau. Der schonsten Frau. Dat. — Der schonerew.* Frau. Der schonste/i Frau. Ace. — Die schonere* Frau. Die schonste Frau. NEUTER SINGULAR. NoM. — Das kleinere^ Haus. Das kleinste Haus. Gen. — Des kleineren* Hauses. Des kleinstew. Hauses. Dat. — Dem kleineren* Haus. Dem kleinstew- Haus. Ace. — Das kleinere^ Haus. Das kleinste Haus. PLURAL. Die grosserew- Manner, etc. Die grossten Manner, etc. Die schonercti Frauen, etc. Die schonstc/t Frauen, etc. Die kleineren. Hauser, etc. Die kleinste?* Hiiuser, etc. ; en being the ending of the plural adjective in all genders and cases. 1 With ein, it would be, ein grosserei*, in the nominative, and grossercM in all other cases. — ^ The larger man ; of the larger man, etc.— 3 The largest man, etc. — ^ The declension of the feminine adjective is exactly the same with eine, etc., as with die, etc. 5 With ein, it would be ein kleineres in the nom. and ace, and kleineren in the other cases. — '•■ Grosste instead of grosseste (rare). 482 GRAMMAR. Irregular Comparison. The following adjectives are irregular in their comparison*. POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. gut, good. besser, better. best, best. hoch, high. hoher, higher. hochst, highest. nah, near. naher, nearer. nachst, nearest. viel, much. mehr, more. meist, most. Note. — For the peculiar forms of superlative with am and aufs^ see adverbs, page 529. v. — NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. For the list and main peculiarities of numeral adjectives, see pages 180 to 183. ADDITIONAL. REMARKS. 1. The cardinal numerals, zwei and drei, have plural geni- tive forms (zweier, of two; dre'ier, of three), which are used whenever there is no other word (article or adjective) indicat- ing the case of the noun accompanying them. Ex. : On account of two offences =W egen zweier Vergehen. 2. The Germans do not use the word one or ones after an adjective. They cannot say, a pretty one, a good one ; but only : a pretty, a good; eine hiibsche, ein guter. 3. Nouns of weight or ineasure, following a number, are put in the singular {unless stress is laid on the idea of multitude). Ex.: 3000 feet high = 3000 Fuss hoch {not : Fiisse). 500 pounds = 500 Ffund (not : Ffunde). This does not hold good with feminine nouns, however. Ex. : Four bottles = Y'\er Flnschen,'^ 4. Ordinal numerals (der erste, der zweite, etc.) are de- clined like any other adjective accompanied by the article. Ex. : The first = der erste / of the first = des (fern. : der) ersten, etc. See page 477. 1 When a fraction is added, however, the noun is always in the singular, whether it is feminine or not. Ex.: Six weeks and a Jialf = Sechs und eine halbe Woehe {not : Woc-en). GRAMMAR. 483 THE PRONOUN. I. — PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FIRST PERSON. NoM. — ich, I. wir, us. Gen. — nieiner,^ of me. unser, of us, Dat. — mir, to me. uns, to us. Ace. — micb, me. uns, its. SECOND PERSON {familiar), NoM. — (III, thoii. ihr, f you. Gen. — deiner,* of thee. euer, of you. Dat. — dir, to thee. euch, to you. Ace. — dich, thee. euch, you. SECOND PERSON {formal). NoM. — Sie, X you. Gen. — Ihrer, of you. Dat. — Ihnen, to you. Ace. — Sie, you. THIRD PERSON. SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASC. FEM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS. N. — er, he. s,\e, she. es,it. sie, they. G. — seiner,* of him. ihrer, of her. seiner, of it. ihrer, of them. D. — ihm, to him. ihr, to her. ihm, to it. ihnen, to them. A. — ihn, him. sie, her. es, it. sie, they. *• Mein, dein, and sein are older forms of these genitives and are still occasiuiially used, especially in poetry. — As already explained in the body of the book, du, deiner, etc., are familiar forms used with relatives, children, and intimate friends. They are also used in prayers and in poetry. t Ihr, euer, etc., are the plural forms of du, etc., and their use is identical, except that they (usually) are employed only when speaking to more than one person, X Notice that this form of you is exactly the same as that of the third person plural, except that it is written with a capital letter. 484 GRAMMAR. PECULIAR USES OP THE PRONOUNS ER, SIE, ES. I. WHEN REFERRING TO MEN, WOMEN, OR CHILDREN, In referring to men, women, or children, er is used for he, and sie for she (even if the noun represented happens to be f/r(n)).matically neuter, as in the case of Kn'dblein, little hoy; Weibf woman; Mddchen, girl; Frdulein, young lady). Ex.: 1. Have you seen my father ? Ans. : / have seen him = Ich habe ihn gesehen. 2. Have you seen my sister? Ans.: I have feen ^e?'=Ich habe sie gesehen. 3. Have you seen the girl? Ans. : I have seen her=lQ\i habe sie gesehen (not es, although Mddchen is neuter). Exception. — The only exception to this is with the word Kind, child, to represent which es is used. Ex. : The child tnust come home, it is tired = Das Kind muss nach Hause kommen, es ist miide. 2. WHEN REFERRING TO ANIMALS OR INANIMATE THINGS. When referring to inanimate things, er (accusative : ihn) is used to represent nouns which are masculine ; sie (accusa- tive : sie), nouns which are feminine; and es (accusative : es\ nouns which are neuter. Ex. : The lion is not cruel; it is generous = Der Lowe ist nicht grausam ; er ist grossmiitig. All the same, men fear him = ^ Trotzdem, fiirchten ihn die Menschen. f The hat does not quite suit me ; it is a little too small = Der Hut passt mir nicht; er ist etwas zu klein. But I will take ^7= Aber ich will ihn doch nehmen. The dove was frightened ; it flew away = Die Taube war erschrocken ; sie flog fort. But I called it back = Aber ich rief sie zuriick. This pen is not good; it scratches = Diese Feder ist nicht gut ; sie kratzt. f The beast is wild ; it is dangerous = * 1 Das Tier ist wild ; es ist gefahrlich. GRAMMAR. 485 f J c?o not like this bread ; it is too hard = ' I Ich esse dieses Brot nicht gern ; es ist zu hart. 3. SPECIAL USES OF ES. 1. It is used impersonally as in English. Ex. : It is my father = Es ist mein Vater. It is hailing = Es hagelt, etc. 2. It is often used in the sense of there. Ex. : There is a hat on the table =Es liegt ein Hut auf dem Tisch. There are many people here — Es sind viele Leute hier. 3. It sometimes merely announces a coming subject. Thus : Es ist die Rede von dem letzten Kriege (lit. : it is {the) talk about the last war). Anglice : The conversatiori is about the last war. 4. It may stand for the English so, when this word repre- sents another word or sentence already used. Thus : He used to be rich = Er war friiher reich. He is not so now= Aber jetzt ist er es nicht mehr.^ 5. The English use of the word it, in such forms as it is I, it is we, was it you, etc., is reversed in German. Thus : It is 7= Ich bin es, ^ It is we = Wir sind esJ Is it If = Bin ich es ? * Is it you ? = Sind sie es ? ^ etc. 4. SPECIAL USE OF THE GENITIVES AND DATIVES OF ER, SIE, ES. The genitives of er, sie, es {seiner, ihrer, seiner), and their datives {ihm, ihr, ihm), are used either for persons or animals. I think of him = Ich denke seiner. I have written to him= Ich habe ihm geschrieben. They are not frequently used for inanimate things. But in- stead, the genitive and dative of der (or die, das), or, more frequently, of derselbe (or dieselhe, dasselhe) is used. Ex. : Here is a good ball. What is the price of it f = Hier ist ein guter Ball. Was ist dessen « Preis ? Or : Was ist der Preis desselben ? 1 Lit. : He was formerly rich, but now is he it not more. 2 Lit. : lam it. — s Lit. : Am lit f * Lit. : We are it. — 5 Lit. : 'Are you it ? • For the irregular forms dessen, deren, dessen, whose, of which ( plur. : deren ), instead of des, der, des; plur. : der, see page 491. 486 GRAMMAR. N. B. — But when the dative or the accusative are used with a preposition, a word conipoimdetl of that preposition and the adverb da is used instead. As : To i/ = clazu ; of them (neuter) = davon ; with z7 = damit ; for that = dalur, etc., etc. Ex. : You have the ball. At least you played with ^7 = Sie haben den Ball. Wenigstens haben Sie damit gespielt. REFLEXIVE USE OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1. The pronoun of the third person alone has a special re- flexive form : sich, Ex. : He hurt himself = Er hat slch verletzt. She is grieved at it = Sie griinit sich dariiber. They are washing [themselves) = Sie waschen sich, N. B. — Sich is also the reflexive form of Sie, you. Ex. : You have hurt yourself =: Sie haben sich verletzt. 2. With the other persons, the accusative or dative oi i\\QBuh]. pronoun is used as a reflexive form, if that pronoun is the sub- ject of the verb. Thus : I have hurt myself =z Ich habe tnich verletzt. I hay a house for tnyseXf — Ich kaufe ^nir ein Haus. Thou hast hurt thyself = Du hast dich verletzt. Thou huyest a house for thyself =i JDu kaufst dir ein Haus. We have hurt ourselves = Wir haben uns verletzt. We build a house for ourselves = Wir bauen uns ein Haus.* 3. But, if the pronoun is not the subject of the verb, or, in any case, when greater emphasis is desired, the word selbst (self) is simply added. Ex. : 1. I saw him himself = Ich habe ihn selbst gesehen. 2. I did it myself =: Ich habo cs selbst gethan. 3. She hei'selfBiiid so = Sie liat es selbst gesagt. 4. This same word, selbst (or selber) is added to nouns in the sense of himself, herself, itself, tliemselves. Ex. : The robbers themselves — Die Rauber selbst, f * The reflexive pronouns have sometimes a reciprocal meaning, i. e., the meaning Ot one another. Ex. : We struck each other =^\\"ir lial)t'n Tins gesclilagen. They i^aiv each otJirr — '^-'le salion sic-li. ■f Selbst sometimes = e?.'cn. liven the < hihh en ~ Selhst (ixeH^in^er, GRAMMAR. 487 II — THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS., The form and declension of the possessive j^ronounSf when really used as adjectives (that is, with a noun), liave ah-eady been given on page 461. When used really as pronouns (i. e., instead of a noun), they may be declined or undeclined. \. THEY ARE UNDECLINED when used as predicates* Ex. : This traueling-bag is tnine = Diese Reisetasche ist tnein (not meine). These cards are not ours = Diese Karten sind nicht unser, 2. THEY ARE DECLINED when used substantively (i. e., not qualifying a noun, but representing one). Ex. : Question : Is this not your traveling-hag f Answer : It is mine = Es ist meine. FORM OF DECLENSION WHEN USED SUBSTANTIVELY. SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASC. FEM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS. meiner, meine, meines. meine. meines, meiner, meines. meiner. memeni. meiner. meinem. meinew. meineii, meine, meines. meine. Decline the following Pronouns like Meiner: SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASO. FEM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS. deiner. deine. deines, deine = thine. seiner, seine,* seines, seine = his. ihrer, ihre,t ihres, ihre = hers. unserer,t unsere,t unseres. unsere = ours. euerer, % euere,* eueres, euere = yours. Ihrer, Ihre, Ihres, Ihre = yours. ihrer, ihre, ihres, ihre = theirs. '"■• Before Majestat, and some other titles, seine, seiner, euere, and euerer, are often abbreviated into Se., Sr., Ew. f Or, unser, unsere (don'-z'r, oon'-zre). — | Or, eurer, eure. 488 GRAMMAR. But these same possessive pronouns are frequently used with the article, instead of ivithout. In that case they are declined like all other adjectives preceded by the article. See page 477. Thus : MASO. N. — Der meine, G. — Des nieinen, D. — Deni meinen, A. — Den raemen. SINGULAR. FEM. die meine, PLURAL. ALL GE>-DKRS die meinen.^ NEUT. das meine der iwQiuen, des meinew, der meinew. der meinew., dem meinew., den meinen. die meine, das meine, die meinen. DECLINE LIKE DER {DIE OR DAS) MEINE: SINGULAR. MASC, FEM. and NEUT. Der (die or das) deine, Der (die or das) seine, Der (die or das) ihre, Der (die or das) unsere, Der (die or das) euere, Der (die or das) Ihre, Der (die or das) ihre. PLURAL. ALL GENDERS. die deinen, thine. die seinen, his. die ihren, hers. die unseren, ours. die eueren, yours. die Ihren, yours. die ihren, theirs. Note. — Still another form of these pronouns used with the article, and declined like der (die, das) inline is the following : SINGULAR. Der (die or das) meinige, Der (die or das) deinige, Der (die or das) seinige, Der (die or das) ihrige, Der (die or das) unsrige, Der (die or das) eurige, Der (die or das) Ihrige, Der (die or das) ihrige, PLURAL. die nieinigen, mine. die deinigen, thine. die seinigen, his. die ihrigen, hers. die unsrigen, ours. die eurigen, yours. die Ihrigen, yours. die ihrigen, theirs. Example. — Masculine : der meinige, des nieiniger*, dem nieinigen, den meinigen. Feminine: die meinige, der niein- igen, der meinigen, die meinige, etc., etc. Note. — The Germans cannot use such a plirase as a friend of mine a friend of yours, etc. ; but say instead, either: one of mi/ friends, einer meiner Freunde; or: a friend of me, ein Freuiid voii inir. GRAMMAR. 489 III. MASC. dieser, jener, derjenige, der, derselbe, solcher, DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. SINGULAR. FEM. NEUT. diese, dieses, this (or, this one). jene, jeiies, that (or, that one). diejenige, dasjenige, that (or, that one). die, das, that (or, that one). dieselbe, dasselbe, the same. solche, solches, such. PLUEAL FOR ALL GENDERS. dieselben, the same. solche, such. diese, these. diejenigeii, these. jene, those. die, those. 1. Dieser and jener are declined according to the following model, already given on page 460. SINGULAR. PLURAL. diese, these. diese/*, of these. dieseii, to these. diese, these. N. — dieser, G. — dieses, D. — dieseiw, A. — diesen. dieses, this."^ dieses, of this.^ diesewi, to this.^ dieses, this. Qiese, dieser, dieser, diese, 2. Derjenige, etc., is declined as follows : SINGULAR. N. — derjenige,^ diejenige,^ dasjenige.* G. — desjenigen,* derjenigen,"'' desjenigen.* D. — dewijenigew, derjenigen, deni]enigen, A. — dewjenigew-, diejenige, dasjenige. PLURAL. diejenige/i.t derjenigen.f dew-jenigew-. diejenigen.. 3. Der, die, das, which are reallv the same in form as the definite article, are declined exactly Uke it when they are used as adjectives (i. e., before a noim). Ex.: That man is brutal = Der Mann ist roh. Write to that man^Schreibe dein Mann. [Observe that when der, die, das are used as deiiionstr. adjec. (or pronoun) they have a stronger accent than when used as the article.] ISoTE. — When die, das, der, however, are used as demon- strative pronouns (i. e., instead of a noun), they have irregular 1 Or, this one. — 2 Qr, of this one. — * Or, to this one. * That one, of tliat one, etc. — f Those, of those, etc. 490 GRAMMAR. forms in the genitive of all cases and numbers, and in the dative plural SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. — der, die, das, that one. die, those, the ones. G. — desseUf deren, dessen, of that one. deren, of those. D. — deni, der, dem, to that one. denen, to thosp. A. — den, die, di^,^, that one. die, those. USES OF THE DEMONSTRATIVES. 1. DIESER AND JENER. This man = dieser^ Mann. That woman =jene Frau. 2. DER, DERJENIGE, AND DERSELBE. 1. Der, etc., is used for emphasis instead of jener, jene, jenes, er, sie, es. Ex. : That man is bad = Der Mann ist schlecht. Oar houses and those of our friends = Unsere Hauser und die unserer Freunde. He must he deaf= Der muss taub sein. She is here = Die ist hier. 2. Derjenige, etc., is occasionally used instead of der, etc. 3. Derselhe, etc., is used to avoid ambiguity or repetition. Ex.: He came with Mr. X. and his brother = Er kam mit Herrn X. und dem Bruder desselhen (lit. : the br. of the same.) Do you see her f = Sehen Sie dieselbe [not Sie sie) f 4. Solch, such, may be either preceded or followed by ein, eine, e^c. Ex. : Such a man = Ein solcher* Mann ; or, solch ein Mann. Such a ruoman = Eine solche Frau ; or, solch eine Frau. Notice that \f solch is followed by ein, it is invariable. Note!. — All the demonstrative pronouns maybe emphasized by placing e6cn (wen) before them. Ex.: The same = deTse\be. The very same= e6e II (lerselbe. Also, tn o?ie i/;orcZ ; ebenderselbe. NoTK 2. — Instead of using dieses and jenes with a preposition tlie rtcvniaiis often substitute the word hier (or da) with the prepo- sition fi)ll<»\vin^'. Tims: From this follows = Hier aua Mgt. With this f c(»irlvi1<= Hiermit ^ch\'\e»se ich. GRAMMAR. 491 IV. — RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Welcher, welche, welches ) , , . , , T^ J. J c 'i^ho, which, that. Der, die, das > ' ' Declension of welcher, tvelche, tvelches. SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASC. FE3I. NEUT. ALL GENDERS. K — welcher, welche. welches, welche, who, which. D. — (lessen. der en. dessen. deren, whose, of which. G. — welch eaw, welcher. welchew. , Welches, to whom, to " A. — welch e»i, welche, welches. welche, ivhom, which. Declension of der. die, das. N. — der, die, das. die, whom, which. G. — (lessen. deren, dessen. deren, whose, of ivhich. D. — dem, der, dem , denen, to whom, to which. A. — den. die. das, die, whoyn, which. Note 1. — The relative pronouns agree in gender and number with tlieir noun, and they never can be omitted. Ex. : English. — The flowers you brougld me (or, tvhich you brought me). German, always. — Die Blumen, tvelche (or die) Sie mir, etc. Note 2. — When the relative pronoun, referring to inanimate objects or a whole clause, is connected with a preposition, the adverb wo fol- lowed by the preposition is often used instead. Ex. : She did n't have the key with ivhich to open the door = Sie liatte don Schliissel nicht, tvotnit ( = ^nit ivelchem, or mit dem) die Thiir geoffnet wird. Likewise: i)v/ w7aV/t = wodurch. From which = wora.us.^ For which = wozu. Among ivhich = worunter.i Note 3. — The genitive, dessen, deren, dessen f plural, deren, always precede the noun which governs them. Ex. : The gentleman whose acquaintance I made = Der Herr, dessen Bekanntschaft, etc. The window, the payie of which is broken — Das Fenster, dessen Seheibe, etc. 1 Before a vowel, in these combinations, -wo takes an r. 492 GRAMMAR. Note4. — The accusative, welchen, tvelche, tvelches, plural, ivelche, is frequently used in the sense of some or any. Ex. : Question : Have you any baggage f = Habeii Sie Gepitck ? Answer: Yes, I have some (or: yes, I have) — i a., ich habe tvelches. Or : Here are newspapers. Do you wish any ? = Hier sind Zeitungen. Wiinsclien Sie tvelche ? Note 5. — A sentence beginning with a relative pronoun is always a dependent sentence, and the verb is therefore always at the end, Ex. : Die Blumen, welche (or die) Sie mir britigen. Die Blumen, tvelche (or die) Sie mir gebracht haben» NOTICE THE FOLLOWING COMBINATIONS: Derjenige, welcher (or, der) ; Or : der, welcher = /ie who.^ Diejenige, welche (or, die); Or: die, \\e]che = she who.^ Dasjenige, welches (or, was) ; Or: das, wsis = that which.^ Diejenige, welche (or, die) ; Or: die, we\che = those who.* Note. — He who, she who, are sometimes rendered by tver, instead of the above, and what by u^as, instead of das, was. Ex. : He who denies it, etc. = Wer es leugnet, etc. To these words (wer and was), im^ner and auch (or, auch ijnmer ; or, auch nur) are sometimes added for emphasis: Whoever did this, etc. = Wer auch (or, wer hnmer ; or, wer auch immer; or, wer auch nur) das gemacht hat, etc. v. — INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Wer'^= Who? Was?=Whatf Welcher, welche, welches = Which? or, whatf Was fur (ein)?- What sort off 1. — Declension of Wer» NoM. — Wer ? who ? Dat. — Went ? to whom? Gen. — Wessen ? ivhose ? Ace. — Wen ? whom ? 2. — Was is invariable. 1 Or, that which. — 2 Qr, that which. — 8 Qr, what. — ^ Or, those which. GRAMMAR. 493 3. — Declension of welcher. SINGULAR. PLURAL. MASC. FEM. JJEUT. A1.L GENDERS. N. — welcher? welche? welches? welche? which f G. — welches ? welcher ? welches ? welcher ? of which f D. — welchew* ? welcher ? welchew* ? welcheiw ? to which f A. — welches? welche? welches? welchew? ivhichf Note. — WofUr, woniit, etc. ;see page 491) can also be used inter- rogatively instead of fiir was, mit teas, etc. Ex. : How (German : with what) did I deserve it ? = Womit habe ich das verdient ? VI. — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. These are used either as adjectives (i. e., with a noun), or as pronouns (i. e., representing a noun). Ex. : Have you all the baggage ? = Haben Sie alles Gepack ? We have everything = Wir haben alles. THOSE USED BOTH AS ADJECTIVES OB PRONOUNS: All, all Etwas, some. Jeder, every. Genug, enough. Kein, no. Viel, much. Manch, many a. Wenig, little. Beide, both. Mehr, more. Irgend einer (e, es), any one. Der namliche, the same. 1. All, Jeder, kein, and manch, agree in gender, number, and case with their noun. C All the people = Alle Leute. Adjective use. -| Many a lr (Ex. : asked, gefragt). The indicative, subjunctive, conditional, and infini' live are subdivided into tenses (I.atin, tempus, time) to express the time of the action or state. Simple tenses are those which are simply made up of a stem and a termination. As, liab-en, hab-e, fvas-te, lieb- end, etc., etc. Hab, frag, lieb are stems ; en, e, te, end are terminations, and vary to indicate various persons and tenses. GRAMMAR. 497 Compound tenses are made up of one of the auxiliary (oi helper) verbs, coupled with the past participle or infinitive of any verb being conjugated. Thus with asked (and ask), we form compound tenses, as I have asked (ich hahe gefragt); I had asked {ich hatte gefragt); I will ask (ich werde frag en); 1 would ask {ich ivUrde fragen), etc., etc. The simple tenses of a German verb are the present and imperfect. These two tenses are found in the subjunctive as well as in the indicative mood."^ The compound tenses of a German verb are : (1) The perfect and the pluperfect, formed with one of the auxiliaries, haben or sein, and a past participle of the verb. Ex. : 7 have asked (ich habe gefragt), I had asked {ich hatte gefragt). (2) The future, the conditional, the second future and the second conditional, formed with the modal auxiliary werden (or its imperfect, wiirde), and the infinitive (present or past) of the verb. Ex. : Ich werde fragen, I shall ask; ich werde gefragt haben, I shall have asked. THE AUXILIARIES. The auxiliaries are divided into tense auociliaries and modal auociliaries , The auxiliaries of tense (haben, sein, and werden) are used, as we have already seen, to form the compound tenses of verbs. The auxiliaries of mode are : (1) konnen, to be able to, * to can ' ; (2) wollen, ' (to) will ' ; (3) milssen, to have to, ' (to) 'must'; (4) sollen, '(to) shall' ; (5) mogen, '{to) may'; (6) dUr- fen '{to) may.' THE CONJUGATIONS. The Gertnan verbs are divided into regular and irregu- lar verbs. The regular verbs are subdivided into two conjugations: the weak (or new) conjugation, and the strong (or old) conjugation. * Tlie infinitive also has a. present and a, past tense. 498 GRAMMAR. FIRST "TENSE" AUXILIARY. Haben,* to hai^e. I.— THE INDICATIVE. 1. Present. icli habe, / have. du hast, thoti hast. er hat, he has. wir haben, ice have. ihr habt,' you have. Sie haben, you have. sie haben, they have. 2. Imperfect. ich hatte,* / had. du hattest, thou hadst. er hatte, he had. wir hatten, we had. ihr hattet, you had. Sie hatten, you, had. sie hatten, they had. 3. Perfect. ich habe gehabt,* / have had.' du hast geliabt, thoii hast had. er hat gehabt, he has had. wir haben gehabt, lae have had. ihr habt gehabt, you have had. Sie haben gehabt, you have had. sie haben gehabt, they have had. 4. Pluperfect. ich hatte gehabt, / had had. du hattest gehabt, thou hadst had. er hatte gehabt, he had had. wir hatten gehabt, ive had had. ihr hattet gehabt, you had had. Sie hatten gehabt, you had had. sie hatten gehabt, they had had. 5. First Future. ich werde haben, / shall have. du wirst haben, thou wilt have. er wird haben, he will have. wir werden haben, we shall have. ihr werdet haben, you will have. Sie werden haben, you will have. sie werden haben, they tvill have. 6. Second Future. ich werde gehabt haben, T shall h. h. du wirst gehabt haben, thou tvilt h. h er wird gehabt haben, he will h. h. wir werden gehabt haben, we shall h. h. ihr werdet gehabt haben, you will h. h. Sie werden gehabt haben, you tvill h. h. sie werden gehabt haben, they will h. h. II. -THE CONDITIONAL. First Conditional. ich wurde* haben, / would t have. du wiirdest haben, thou tvouldst hart er wiirde haben, he would have. wir wUrden haben, we would have. ihr wurdet haben. you would have. Sie wiirden haben, you would have. "iie wiirden haben, they would have. Second Conditional. ich wiirde gehabt haben, Iio''d t have h. du wiirdest gehabt haben, thou ivhl. h. h. er wiirde gehabt liaben, he tv'd have h. wir wiirden gehabt haben, we w\l h. h. ihr wurdet gehabt haben, you u-'d h. h. Sie wUrden gehabt haben, you wUl h. h. sie wiirden gehabt haben, they tv^d h. h. For the use of this 2d per. pin., see p. 28. — 2 Or, simply, I had, etc. Pron. : ha'-b'n; ha'-tS; ge-hapt'; viir'-de. — f Or, should. GRAMMAR. 499 III. -THE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 1. Present. ich habe, I have. du ha6e««,* thou have. er \iabe, he have. wir haben, ice have. ilir habet, you have. Sie haben, you have. sie haben, they have. 2. Imperfect. ich hatte.t /Aad.* du hattest, thou hadst. er hatte, he had. wir hfitten, we had. ilir hfittet, you had. Sie batten, you had. sie h«tten, they had. 3. Perfect. ich habe gehabt, 1 have had.* du \\a,hest gehabt, thou have had. er ha&e gehabt, he have had. wir haben gehabt, we have had. ilir habet gehabt, yo'U have had.. Sie haben gehabt, you have had. sie haben gehabt, they have had. 4. Pluperfect. ich hatte gehabt, 1 had had. du hattest gehabt, thou hadst had. er hatte gehabt, he had had. wir batten gehabt, we had had. ihr hattet gehabt, you had had. Sie batten gehabt, you had had. sie hatten gehabt, they had had. 5. First Futiire. ich werde haben, / shall have.* du tverdest haben, thou ivilt have. er tverde haben, he will have. wir werden haben, we shall have. ihr werdet haben, you will have. Sie werden haben , yoti toill have. sie werden haben, they will have. 6. Second Future. ich werde gehabt liaben, I shall h. h.* du tverdest gehabt haben, thou wilt h. h- er tverde gehabt haben, he will h. h. wir werden gehabt haben, we shall h. h. ihr werdet gehabt haben, you will h. h. Sie werden gehabt haben, you toill h. h. sie werden gehabt haben, they will h. h. IV. — THE IMPERATIVE. habe, have (thou). er soil X haben, let him have.^ haben wir, {or, lasst uns haben), let us h. habet haben Sie t Sie SoUen haben, t let them have.^ have (ye). THE INFINITIVE. Present : haben, to have. Pres. Part. : habend, Jiai'ing. Past : gehabt haben, to have had. Past Participle : gehabt, had. 1 Lit. : he shall have. — 2 Lit. : They shall have. * As may be observed, the tenses of the subjunctive differ only in a few forms from those of the indicative mood. The differences are brought out prominently in the tenses of the subjunctive by means of full face italic letters. — For the use of the subjunctive, see page 340. t Pron.: he'-te; he'-test; etc. } Pron.: zol; ha'-b'nze; ze zo'-l'n ha'b'n. 500 GRAMMAR. SECOND "TENSE" AUXILIARY. Sein,* to 6c. I, -THE INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich bin, I am. (Ill bist, thou art. er ist, he is. vvir sind,* it'e are. ihr seid,* you are. Sie sind, you are. sie sind, they are. 4. Pluperfect. ich war gewesen,* / had been. dii warst gewesen, thou hadst been. er war jrewesen, he had been. wir waren gewesen, ive had been. ihr waret gewesen, you had been. Sie waren gewesen, you had been. sie waren gewesen, they had been. 2. Imperfect. icli war, / was. du warst, thou wast. er war, he teas. wir waren, we were. ilir waret, you loere. Sie waren, you xoere. sie waren, they were. 5. First Future. ich werde du wirst er wird wir werden ihr werdet Sie werden sie werden sein, / shall be. sein, thou wilt be. sein, he will be. sein, we shall be. sein, you will be. sein, you tvill be. sein, they will be. 3. Perfect. 6. Second Future. ich bin gewesen, • / have been.^ Ich werde du bist gewesen, thoti hast been. du wirst er ist gewesen, he has been. er wird wir sind gewesen, we have been. wir werden ihr seid gewesen, you hai^e been. ihr werdet Sie sind gewesen, you have been. Sie werden sie sind gewesen, they have been. sie werden gewesen sein, / shall h. b. gewesen sein, thou wilt h. b. gewesen sein, he will h. b. gewesen sein, ice shall h. b. gewesen sein, you will h. b. gewesen sein, you will h. ft. gewesen sein, they tvill h. b. II.— THE CONDITIONAL. First Conditional. Second ConditionaL ich wiirde sein, / should be. du wiirdest sein, thou wouldst be. er wiirde sein, he tvould be. wii wiirden sein, we should be. ihr wlirdet sein, yoti ti'ould be. Sie wiirden sein, you would be. sie wiirden sein, they would be. ich wiirde gewesen sein, / should h b. du wiirdest gewesen sein, thou ic^ldst h. b. er wiirde gewesen sein, he would h. b. wir wiirden gewesen sein, we should h. b. ihr wiirdet gewesen sein, you would h. b. Sie wiirden gewesen sein, you would h. b, sie wiirden gewesen sein, they ic'ld h. b. 1 Or, simply, I was. Pron, : zin, zint, zit, gS-vS'-z'n. GRAMMAR. 501 1. Present. ich «ct%t / be. du seiest, thou he. er set, he he. wir seien, we he. ihr seiet, you be. Sie seien, you be. sie seien, they be. in.— THE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 4. Pluperfect. ich waret gewesen, I had been. du wtirest gewesen, thou hadst been. er ware gewesen, he had been. wir woren gewesen, we had been. ihr Wrtret gewesen, you had been. Sie waren gewesen, you had been. Bie waren gewesen, they had been. 2. Imperfect. ich ware, t I were. du warest, thou wert. er w/ire, he were. wir waren, tve were. ihr waret, you ivere. Sie waren, you were. sie waren, they were. 3. Perfect. ich sei du seiest er sei wir seien ihr «e«e# Sie seien sie «eien gewesen, gewesen, gewesen, gewesen, gewesen, gewesen ; gewesen, / have heen. thou have been, he have heen. we have been, you have heen. you have been, they have heen. 5. First Future. ich werde sein, § / shall he. du werdest sein, thou wilt he. er uierde sein, he will he. wir werden sein, we shall he. ihr werdet sein, you toill be. Sie werden sein, you will be. sie werden sein, they will he. 6. Second Future. ich werde gewesen sein, / shall h. h. du werdest gewesen sein, thou wilt h. h. er werde gewesen sein, he will h. b. wir werden gewesen sein, ice shall h. b. ihr werdet gewesen sein, you tvill h. h. Sie werden gewesen sein, yoii tvill h, b. sie werden gewesen sein, they will h. b. sei, be (thou). er soil sein, let him 6«.§§ seien wir (or, lasst uns sein), let us be. IV. — THE IMPERATIVE. be (J/6').§§ seid seien Sie sie soUen sein, let them be. Present : sein, to be. v.— THE INFINITIVE. Past : gewesen sein, to have been. Pres. Participle : seiend, being.W Past Participle : gewesen, been. * For the use of the subjunctive, see pages 340-352. t Pron. : zi, zl'-'st, zi, zi'-'n, zi'-'t. X Pron.: va'-re, va'-r'st, va'-r'n, g Pron. : var'-de, vSr'-dest. §g Pron. -. zol zin , zi'-'n ver, zit, zi'-'n ze. II Pron.: zF-'nt. 502 GRAMMAR. THIRD "TENSE" AUXIIIARY. Werden, to become. I. -THE INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich werde, / become. du wirst,* thou becomest. er wird,* he becomes. wir werden, we become. iJir werdet,! you become. Sie werden,! you become. sie werden, they become. 4. Pluperfect. ich war geworden, / had become. du warst geworden, thou hadst become. er war geworden, he had become. wir waren geworden, ive had become. ihr waret geworden, you had become. Sie waren geworden, you had become. sie waren geworden, they had become. 2. Imperfect. ich ward,2 / became.^ du wardst,2 thou becamest. er ward, 2 he became. wir warden, ive became. ihr wurdet, you became. Sie wiirden, you became. sie warden, they became. 5. First Future. ich werde werden, du wirst werden, er wird werden , wir werden werden, ihr werdet werden, Sie werden werden, sie werden werden. / shall become, thou wilt become, he will become, we shall become, you will become, you ivill become, they will become. 3. Perfect. 6. Second Future. ich bin geworden, t I have become. du bist geworden, thou hast er ist geworden, he has wir sind geworden, we have ihr seid geworden, you have Sie sind geworden, you have sie sind geworden, they have ich werde geworden sein, I shall have b. du wirst geworden sein, thou icilt h. b. er wird geworden sein, he will have b. wir werden geworden sein, we shall have b ihr werdet ijeworden sein, you will have b. Sie werden geworden sein, you ivill have b. sie werden geworden sein, they ivill have b II. — THE CONDITIONAL. First Conditional. Second Conditional. ich wurde werden, / should become. da wiirdest werden, thou tvouldst er wUrde werden, he would wir wiirden werden, we should ilir wiirdet werden, you would Sie wiirden werden, you would sie wiirden werden, they would ich wiirde geworden sein, / should h. b. du wiirdest geworden sein, thou w'ld h h. er wiirde geworden sein, he would h. b. wir wiirden geworden sein, we should h. b. ihr wiirdet geworden sein, you tv'ld h. l>. Sie wiirden geworden sein, yoxi w'ld h. b. sie wiirden geworden sein, they w'ld h. b. 1 See page 28 note 1. — Or, ich wurde, du wurdest, er wurde. * Pron, : virst, virt.— f Proii. : vart.— X Pron. : gg-v6r'-d»u. GRAMMAR. 503 ni. — THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich werde, / become. du tverdest,^ thou become. er iverde,^ he become. wir werden, we become. ihi" werdet, you become. Sie werden, you become. sie werden, they become. 4. Pluperfect. ich tviire^ geworden, / had become. du wdrest geworden, thou had become. er xvdre geworden, he had become. wir wdren geworden, we had become. ihr wiiret geworden, you had become. Sie wdren geworden, you had become. sie wdren geworden, they had become. 2. Imperfect. ich wYtrde,"^ 1 became. du wi'trdest, thou became. er tviirde, he became. wir wi/rden, we became. ihr wiirdet, you became. Sie wi/rden, you became. sie wiirden, ihey became. 5. First Future. ich werde werden,^ / shall become. du iverdest werden, thou wilt become. er werde werden, he will become. wir werden werden, ice shall become. ihr werdet werden, you will become. Sie werden werden, you will become. sie werden werden, they had become. 3. Perfect. 6. Second Future. ich sei^ du seiest er set wir seien ihr seiet Sie seien sie seien geworden ,3 I have become. geworden, thou have *' geworden, he have *' geworden, we hare " geworden, you have *' geworden, you have " geworden, they have " ich werde^ geworden' sein, /sftaZi ^. . du werdest geworden sein, thou wilt h. b. er werde geworden sein, he ivill have b. wir werden geworden sein, we shall h. b. ihr werdet geworden sein, you will h. b. Sie werden geworden sein, you will h. b. sie werden geworden sein, they will h. b. IV. - IMPERATIVE. werdet j werde, become {thou). er soil werden, let him become.* werden wir {or, lasst uns werden), let sie soUen werden, let them become, us become. v.- THE INFINITIVE. Present: werden, to become. Past : geworden sein, to have become. The Participles. Present Participle : werdend, becoming. Past Participle : geworden, become 1 See page 499, note *. — « See pages 340-342. 3 Or, worden, wlien vised with the passive voice. See Note p. 510. * Pron. . vSr'-de; Sr zol var-d'n ; last dons var'-d'n. 504 GRAMMAR. THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. I. — KoAiien {can), to be able. INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich kann, I can, I am able. du kannst, thou canst. er kann, he can. wir konnen, we can. ihr konnt, you can. Sie konnen, you can. sie konnen, they can. THE OTHER INDICATIVE. 2. ich konnte, etc., / could, etc. 2. 3. ich habe gekonnt,* / hare been able. 3. 4. ich hatte gekonnt,* / had been able. 4. 5. ich werde konnen, / shall be able. 5. 6. ich werde gekonnt haben,t / sh. h. b. a. G. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich kiinne, I can, I am able. du konnest, thou can. er konne, he can. wir koinien, we can. ihr konnet, you can. Sie konnen, you can. sie konnen, they can. TENSES ARE: SUBJUNCTIVE. ich kwnnte, etc., I could, etc. ioh habe gekonnt,* / have been able. ich h'/tte gekonnt,* / had been able. icli werde koinien, / shall be able. ich werde gekonnt haben l.s. h. b. %. 1. ich wiirde konnen, /sAott/rf fte aftZe. 1. No imperative. 2. ich wlirde gekonnt haben, I sh. h. b. a. 1. konnen. 2. gekonnt. 11.— Wollen (will), to ivish, to like. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. 1. Present, ich will, / will. ich wolle, I will. du wollest, thou tvill. du willst, thou willst. er will, lie tvill. wir wollen, tve will. ihr wollt, you will. Sie wollen, you will. sie wollen, they will. THE OTHER INDICATIVE. 2. ich wollte, etc., I wanted, etc. 3. ich habe gewollt,t I {have) wanted. 4. ich hatte ge wollt, t / had wanted. 5. ich werde wollen, / shall want. 6. ich werde gewoUt % haben, 1 sh. h. w. 1. ich wiirde wollen, [should want to. 2. ich wUrde gewoUt haben, / sh'd. h. w. er wolle, he will. wir wollen, toe will. ihr woUet, you tvill. Sie wollen, yoti tvill. sie wollen, they tvill. TENSES ARE: SUBJUNCTIVE. 2. ich wollte, etc., / wanted, etc. 3. ich habe gewoUt, t / have wanted. 4. ich hf/tte gewollt, t / had wanted. 5. ich werde wollen, / shall want. 6. ich werde gewollt haben. 1. wolle, will (thou). 1. wollen. 2. gewollt. * Or, kdnnen. See p. 526, par. 6. X Pron.: gS-kont'; gS-v5lt'. t Or, wollen. See p. 627. GRAMMAK. 505 III. — Miissen (fnust)^ to have to, to be obliged. INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich muss, I must. (Ill imisst, thou must. er muss, he must. wir miissen, we must. ihr miisst, i/ou must. Sie miissen, you must. sie miissen, they must. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present, ich miisse, I must. du mussesi, thou must. er miisse, he must. wir miissen, we must. ihr miisset, you must. Sie miissen, you must. sie miissen, they must. THE OTHER TENSES ARE: INDICATIVE. 2. ich musste, etc., / had to, etc. 3. icli liabe gemusst,* / hai^e had to. 4. ich Iiatte gemusst,* / had had to. 5. ich werde miissen, / shall have to. 6. ich werde gemusst}; haben,» 1. ich wiirde miissen, I should have to. 2. icli wiirde gemusst haben.^ SUBJUNCTIVE. 2. ich miisste, etc., I shHd he obliged to. 3. ich habe gemusst,* / ivas obliged to. 4. ich hatte gemusst,* / wUd h. h. oH. to. 5. ich werde miissen, /'// have ic. 6. ich werde gemusst liaben.^ 1. No imperative. 1. miissen. 2. gemusst.t INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich mag, I may. du magst, thou mayst. er mag, he may. wir mogen, ive may. ihr mogt, you may. Sie mogen, you may. sie mogen, they may. IV. — Mogeii {may), to like. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich moge, I may. du tnogest, thou may. er moge, he may. wir mogen, we may. ihr moget, you may. Sie mogen, you may. sie mogen, they may. THE OTHER TENSES ARE: INDICATIVE. 2. ich mochte, etc., I might, etc. 3. ich habe gemocht,t / have liked. 4. ich hatte gemoclit,t / had liked. 5. ich werde mogen, / shall like. 6. ich werde gemocht § haben.^ 1. ich wiirde mogen, I should like. 2. ich wurde gemoclit haben.* SUBJUNCTIVE. 2. ich mochte, etc., / might, etc. 3. ich habe gemocht,t / have liked. 4. ich hatte gemocht,t / had liked. 5. ich werde mogen, / shall like. 6. ich werde gemocht t liaben.' 1. No imperative. 2. mogen. 2. gemocht.§ 1 I sliall have had to. — ^ I would have had to. 3 I shall have liked. — * I would have liked. * Or, miissen. See page 176. — f Or, mogen. See page 176, n. 1, I Pron. : gS-moosV. — ^ Pron. : ge-m5Arlit'. 506 GRAMMAR. V. — Sollen, (shall), to have to, to Jiave an obligation. INDICATIVE. 1. Present. :ch soil, / am to, I shall. du soUst, thou shalt. er soil, he shall. wir sollen, we shall. jhr soUt, you shall. Sie sollen, you shall. &ie sollen, they shall. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich solle, / shall, I am to. du sollest, thou shall. er solle, he shall. wir sollen, we shall. ihr sollet, you shall. Sie sollen, you shall. sie sollen, they shall. THE OTHER TENSES ARE: INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 2. ich sollte, etc., / should, etc. 2. 3. ich habe gesollt,* / had to. 3. 4. ich hatte gesollt,* / had had to. 4. 5. ich werde sollen, / shall have to. 5. 6. ich werde gesollt haben.i 6. 1. ich wiirde sollen, I should have to. 1. 2. ich wiirde gesollt haben.2 1. ich sollte, etc. , / should, etc. ich habe gesollt,* / have had to. ich hatte gesollt,* / had had to. ich werde sollen, I shall have to. ich werde gesollt haben.i No imperative. sollen. 2. gesollt. VI. — Diirfen (to dare), to he allowed. INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich darf, / am allowed. du darfst, thou art allowed. er darf, he is allowed. wir diirfen, tve are allowed. ihr diirft, you are allowed. Sie diirfen, you are allowed. sie diirfen, they are allowed. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich durfe, I am allowed. du durfest, thou art allowed. er d'urfe, he is alloived. wir diirfen, we are allowed. ihr diirfet, you are allowed. Sie diirfen, you are allowed. sie diii'fen, they are allowed. THE OTHER TENSES ARE 2. ich durfte, etc., / was allowed. 3. ich habe gedurf t,t / have been alVd. 4. ich hatte gedurft,t / had been alVd. 5. ich werde diirfen, / shall be aWd. 6. ich werde gedurft haben.^ 1. ich wiirde diirfen, I should be alVd. 2. ich wiirde gedurft haben.< 2. ich diirfte, etc., / was allowed, etc. 3. ich habe gedurft, t / have been all'd. 4. ich hatte gedurft, t / had been all'd. 5. ich werde diirfen, / shall be allowed 6. ich werde gedurft haben.s 1. No imperative. 1. diirfen. 2. gedurft. 1 I shall have had to. — ^ j should have had to. • I shall have been allowed. — * I should liave been allowed. Or, sollen. See page 176, note 1. — f Or, diirfen. See p. 176. GRAMMAR. 507 \ THE CONJUGATIONS. There are two conjugations in German : the weak (or new) conjugatiotif and the strong (or old) conjugation. VERBS OF THE WEAK CONJUGATION. The verbs of the weak conjugation form their im- perfect by adding te to the stem of the infinitive; and their past participle, by prefixing ge and suffixing t to this same stem. Thus : Infinitive : Frozen, to ask. Stem : frag. Imperfect : Ich fragte, I asked. Past Part. : ge fragf . PECULIAR VERBS OF THE WEAK CONJUGATION. 1. Inseparable verbs (verbs with one of the prefixes ge, er, etc., see p. 236.) omit ge in the past participle. Thus : ftclohnen, to reward ; past part. : ftelohnt ; not, begrelohnt. N. B. — These same verbs do not insert zu between the prefix and the simple verbs as do the separable verbs. Thus : Infini- tive with zu : zu belohnen ; not, be««*lohnen. 2. Verbs ending in ieren in the infinitive also omit ge in the past participle. Ex. : Stndieren, to study ; past part. : stU'- diert ; not, grestudiert. 3. Verbs whose stem ends in el or er, take n instead of en in the infinitive ending ; and in the present 1st pers. sing., drop the e before I or r, Ex.: Inf., schmeicheln, to flatter ; instead of schmeichelen. Pres., Ich schmeichle {not, schmeichele). 4. Six verbs, with their derivatives, follow the weak con- jugation; but, besides, change the stem vowel into a in the imperfect indicative (not subjunctive) and in the past participle. Thus: brennen, to bum. ich brannte, I burned, gebrannt, burned, kennen, to know. ich Dannie, I knew. gekannt, kneiv. ncnnen, to name, ich nannte, I named. genannt, named. rennen, to run. ich rannte, Iran. gerannt, ran. ^endien, to send. ich sandte, J sen^ gesandt, sen^ viCndiQii, to turn. loh \\a\\ditQ, I turned. gQy^andii, turned. N. B. — Senden and wenden may also be regular: sendete, gesendet. 508 GRAMMAR. THE WEAK CONJUGATION. MODEL: — Pragen, to ask. I. — THE INDICATIVE. 1. Present. ich frag e, / ask or am asking.* du frag 8t,i thou dost ask, etc. er 2 frag t, he asked or is asking. wir frag en, ice ask or are asking. ihr f rag 1 3 ^ott asA: or " " Sie frag en, " " or *' •* sie frag en, thep " or '• " 2. Imi>erfect. icU frag te, / asked or was asking. du frag test, thou didst ask, etc. er» frag te, he asked or was asking. wir frag ten, we asked or were " ihr frag tet, you " or " " Sie frag ten, " " or " " sie frag ten, they " or " *' 4. Pluperfect. ich hatte gefragt, I had asked. du hattest gefragt, thou hadst asked. er hatte gefragt, he had wir hatten gefragt, ice " ihr hattet gefragt, you " Sie hatten gelragt, you " sie hatten gefragt, they had 5. First Future. ich werde fragen, / shall ask. du wirst fragen, thou wilt ask. er wird fragen, he will wir werden fragen, we shall ihr werdet fragen, you will Sie werden fragen, '• •' sie werden fragen, they will 3. Perfect. ich habe gefragt, / have asked.^ du hast gefragt, thou hast " er* hat gefragt, he has '* wir haben gefragt, we have " ihr habt gefragt, you have " Sie haben gefragt, you " " sie haben gefragt, they have " 6. Second Future. ich werde gefragt haben, / shall h. asked. du wirst gefragt haben, thou will h. " er wird gefragt haben, he will " " wir werden gefragt liaben, we shall " " ihr werdet gefragt haben, you icill " " Sie werden gefragt haben, *' ♦' " " sie werden gefragt haben, they will " ♦' II. -THE CONDITIONAL. First Conditional. Second Conditional. ich wurde fragen, / would ask. X du wlirdest fragen, thou w'ldst ask. er3 wlirde fragen, Ae ?(70mW " wir wUrden fragen, we " " ihr wiirdet fragen, you " •' Sie wlirden frag-en, you " " sie wUrden fragen, they " " ich wiirde gefragt haben, / w'd or s'/i h. a. du wiirdest gefragt iiaben, th. w. er wiirde gefragt haben, he ' wir wlirden gefragt haben, we ' ihr wUrdet gefragt haben, you ' Sie wUrden gefragt haben, " ' sie wUrden gefragt liaben, they ' or s. h. as. 1 Or, du fragest. — ^ Or, sie {she) ; or, es {it) ; or, man {one, people). * Or, ihr f raget. * Or, I do ask. — f Or, simply, I asked. — J Or, I should ask. GRAMMAR. 509 Note. — It will be noticed that the tenses of the subjunctive are almost the same in form as those of the indicative. Wiiere differ- ences do exist, the}' have been brought out by the means of full-face italic letters, as : du frages*. For the use of the subjunctive, see p. 340. ni. — THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. icli frag e, / mat/ aslc. du frag est, thou mayest ask. er flag e, he may wir frag en, we may ihr frag et, you may Sie frag en, " " sie frag en, they may 4. Pluperfect. ich hiitte gefragt, / had asked. du hattest gefragt, ihou hadst asked^ er hfitte gefragt, he had " wir hatten gefragt, we " " ihr httttet gefragt, you " ♦* Sie hatten gefragt, " " <* sie hatten gefragt, they " ** 2. Imperfect. ii'h fragte, tasked. du frag test, thou didst ask. er frag te, he asked. wir frag ten, we " ihr frag tet, yov, " Sie frag ten, " " sie frag ten, they " 3. Perfect. 6. Future. ich werde f ragen, / shall ask. du tverdest f ragen, thou shall ask. er werde fragen, he shall wir werden fragen, we '* ihr werdet fragen, you " Sie werden fragen, " " sie werden fragen, they " 6. Second Future. ich liabe gefragt, I (may) have asked.* ich werde gefragt haben, Is. h. asked. du habes* gef i-agt, thou mayest h. er habe gefragt, he may have wir haben gefragt, ice " " ihr liabt't gefragt, you *' " Sie haben gefragt, " " " sie liaben gefragt, they " " du tverdest gefragt haben, th. ' er werde gefragt haben, we ' wir werden gefragt hahen, he ' ihr werdet gefragt liaben, y. ' Sie werden gefragt haben, '* ' sie werden gefragt haben, " ' IV. -THE IMPERATIVE. f rage, ask (thou). er soil fragen, let him ask. fragen wir (or, lasst uiis f ragen).t fraget; f ragt ; )_„..„.. or, fragen Sie |««*<2'^>- sie sollen fragen, let them ask. v.— THE INFINITIVE. Present : fragen, to ask. Past : gefragt haben, to have asked. Present Participle: frag end, as^ingr. Past Participle : ge fragt, asked. * Or, simply, I asked.— f Let us ask. Also: Wir woUen fragen^ 510 GRAMMAR. THE PASSIVE VOICE. MODEL : gefragt werden, to be asked. Note. — See full conjugation of tverden, page 502. — Notice, how- ever, that tvorden is used as a past participle instead oi^ getvorden. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. !• Present. ich werde gefragt, / am asked. ich werde gefragt, I {may) he asked. du wirst gefragt, thou art asked. du werdest gefragt, thou maijest be a. er wird gefragt, he is asked. er xverde gefragt, he may be asked. wir werden gefragt, we are asked. wir werden gefragt, ice mxiy be asked. ihr werdet gefragt, you are asked. ilir werdet gefragt, you may be asked. Sie werden gefragt, you are asked. Sie werden gefragt, you may be asked. sie werden gefragt, they are asked. sie werden gefragt, they may be asked. 2. Imperfect. 2. Imperfect. ich wurde gefragt, etc., / icas asked, etc. ich wlirde gefragt, etc., / might be a., etc. 3. Perfect. 3. Perfect. ich bin gefragt worden, / h. been asked, ich sei gefragt worden, I may h. b. asked. 4. Pluperfect 4. Pluperfect. ich war gefragt worden, / had b. asked, ich ware gefragt worden, I might h. h. a. 5. First Future. 5. First Future ich werde gefragt werden, / sh. be as'd. ich werde gefragt werden, I sh. be asked. 6. Second Future. 6. Second Future ich werde gefr. worden sein, Is. h. b. a. ich werde gefr. worden sein, I sh. h. b. a. 7. First Conditional. INFINITIVE. ich wiirde gefragt werden, / sh'd be a. Present: gefragt werden, to be asked. 8. Second Conditional. Past: gefragt worden sein, to have been ich wlirde gefr. worden sein, / s. h. b. a. asked. REMARKS. 1. Only transitive verbs have a personal passive voice. See i)age 496. INIany intransitive verbs have an impersonal passive voice. Thus ; Es tvird gesungen, ive (or, they) sing ; lit. : it is sung. Hence, in translating English passive forms into German, the pupil must consider whether the German verb is transitive or intransitive. For instance, I am followed cannot be rendered by the direct or personal passive voice in German, as folgen is an intransitive verb ; but either by the active voice with tnan (thus: man folgt mir), or the imper- sonal passive (thus: es tvird mir gefolgt). 2, Notice that sein can often be used in German with a past parti- ciple as well as tverden. But the use of sein expresses a state or con- dition, while werden expresses arfion. Thus : the room is clea7ied=D:\s Zimmer ist g(M-einigt; or, Das Zinmur ivird gereinigt. The house was destroyed =\>ei^ Haus war (or wurde) zerstort. GRAMMAR. 511 VERBS OF THE STRONG GOKJUGATiON. Strong verba (of which there are about ItO) are conjugated Uke the weak verbs, excepting that : (1) They form their imperfect not by adding te to the stem, as the iveak verbs, but simply by changing the stem vowel. Ex.: Infix. : schlagen, to strike. Imper. : ich schlwg, I struck. (2) They form their past participle by adding en (not t). Ex.: Infin. : schlagen, to strike. Past Part. : geschlagcn. N. B. — The greater number, however, also change the stem vowel in the past participle. Ex.: Infin. : singen, to sing. Past Part. : gestengen, sung. (3) Strong verbs having a, o, or au in the stem of the infinitive, change it into a, o, or du in the second and third person singular of the present. Ex. : J S schlagen, to strike. , ( ^lu schlagst; er schlagt. ' < laufen, to run. '\ du laufst ; er lauft. For the imperfect subjunctive, see Note, page 513. The strong verbs are best classified into 5 classes, in accord- ance with the stem vowel of the imperfect muX past part,: Strong verbs of the first class are those in which the stem vowel of both the imperfect and past 'participle is o. Strong verbs of the second class are those in which the stem vowel of both the imperfect and past participle is i (or ie). Strong verbs of the third class are those in which the stem vowel of the imperfect is a, and the stem vowel of the past participle is u or o. Strong verbs of the fourth class are those in which the stem vowel of the imperfect is a, i, or ie ; and the stem vowel of the past participle, the same as that of the infinitive. Strong verbs of the fifth class are those in which the stem vowel of the imperfect is u; and the stem vowel of the past participle, the same as that of the infinitive. Note. — Observe, that in all strong verbs, the stem vowel of the impeifect is different from that of the infinitive, while the stem vowel of the past participle is ditfereut from the infinitive only in the first three classes. 512 GKAMMAR. THE STRONG CONJUGATION. MODAL VERB : Schlagen, to strike. Note 1. — As already seen on preceding page, strong verbs of which the stem vowel of the infinitive is a, o, at*, modify it to a, o, du in the second and third person singular of tiie indicative present. I.— 1. Present. ich schlage, f strike. du schlfigst, tkou strikest. er schUrgt, he strikes. wir schlagen, we strike. ilir schlagt, you strike. Sie schlagen, you strike. ■sie schlagen, they strike. 2. Imperfect. ich schlitg, / struck. du schlwgst, thou didst strike. er schlwg, he struck. wir schlttgen, ice striick ihr schliegt, you struck Sie schlMgen, you struck. sie schlugen, they struck THE INDICATIVE. 4. Pluperfect. ich hatte geschlagen, / had struck. du hattest geschlagen, thou hadst struck. er hatte geschlagen, he had struck. wir hatten geschlagen, we had struck. ihr hattet geschlagen, you had struck. Sie hatten geschlagen, you had struck. sie hatten geschlagen, they had struck. 5. First Future. ich werde schlagen, / shall strike. du wirst schlagen, thou wilt strike. er wird schlagen, he will strike. wir werden schlagen, we will strike. ihr werdet schlagen, you will strike. Sie werden schlagen, you will strike. sie werden schlagen, they will strike. 3. Perfect. ich habe geschlagen, du hast geschlagen, er hat geschlagen, wir haben geschlagen, ihr habt geschlagen, Sie haben geschlagen, sie haben geschlagen, 6. Second Future. / have struck, ich werde geschlagen haben, I will h. sfk. thou hast ^* du wirst geschlagen haben, <. ich hieft, 1 hew. ich lief, / ran. ich stiess, 1 pushed. ich rief , / called, FIFTH CLASS. gegessen, ea^en.t gefressen, devoured. gegeben, given. gelesen, read. gemessen, measured. genesen, gotten well. geschehen, happened. gesehen, seen. getreten, treaded. vergessen, forgotten. gefangen, caught. gehangen, hanged. gekommen, come. geblasen, blown. gebraten, roasted. gef alien, /aiZe?i. gehalten, held. gelassen, let. geraten, advised. geschlafen, slept. gehauen, hewn. gelaufen, rtm. gestossen , pushed. gerufen, called.* Stem Vow^el of the Imperfect: u. Stem Vowel of the Past Participle, same as in the Infinitive. 1. backen, to bake. 2. fahren, to drive. 3. graben, to dig. 4. laden, to load. 5. mahlen, to grind. 6. schaffen , to create. 7. schlagen, to strike. 8. tragen, to jarry. 9. wachsen, to grow. 10. waschen, to wash. ich buk, / baked. ich fuhr, / drove. ich grub, / digged. ich lud, / loaded. ich mahtte, I ground. ich schuf , / created. ich schlug, / struck. ich trug, I carried. ich wuchs, / grew. ich wusch, / washed. gebacken, baked. gefahren, driven. gegraben, digged. geladen, laden. gemalilen, grinded. geschnffen, created. geschlagen, struck. getragen, carried. ge wachsen, grown. gewaschen, u-ashed. 1 See Note, opposite page.— 2 See page 511. — 3 Treten makes du tri**st,ertri**.— 4 The a of all these imperfects is long vii). •^- Bitten, to beg, and liegen, to lie, also make : ich bat, ich lag, / begged, I lay; gebeten, gelegen, begged, laid. — Do not confound with beten, to pray; and legen, to lay, which are weak. Thus: ich betete, ich legte ; gebetet, gelegt. — f Instead of geessen. 518 GRAMMAR. THE REFLEXIVE VERBS. MODEL VERB : Sich f reuen,* to rejoice. Pres. Part. : sich freuend, rejoicing. Past Part. : gefreut. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, ich freue mich, I rejoice.^ du freust dicJi, thou rejoicest.f er freut sieJi, he rejoices. f wir frenen tins, we rejoice.^ ihr freut eiicJi, you rejoice.^ Sie freuen sich, you rejoice.^ sie freuen sich, they rejoice.^ IMPERFECT. ich freute mich, I rejoiced. du freutest dich, thou didst rejoice. er freute sich, he rejoiced. wir freiiten uns, we rejoiced. ibr freutet euch, you rejoiced. Sie f reuten sich, you rejoiced. sie freuten sich, they rejoiced. Present, ich freue mich, I (may) rejoice. du freuest dich, thou (mayest) rejoice. er freue sich, he (may) rejoice. wir freuen uns, we (may) rejoice. ihr f reuet euch, you (may) rejoice. Sie freuen sich, you (may) rejoice. sie freuen sich, they (may) rejoice, IMPERFECT. ich freute mich, I might rejoice. du freutest dich, thou mightest rejoice, er freute sich, he might rejoice. wir freuten uns, we might rejoice. ihr freutet euch, you might rejoice. Sie freuten sich, you might rejoice. sie freuten sich, they might rejoice. THE COMPOUND TENSES ARE: 1. Perfect Indicative, ich habe mich gefreut, / have refd. du hast dich gefreut, thoic hast " er hat sicJi gefreut, he has " wir haben uns gefreut, we have " ihr habt euch gefreut, you have " Sie haben sich gefreut, you have " sie haben sic/t gefreut, they have*' 2. Pluperf. : ich hatte mich gefreut, etc., I had rejoiced, etc. 3. First Fut.: ich werde mich freuen, etc., / shall rejoice, etc. 4. Sec. Fut.: icli werde mich gefreut haben, etc., I sh. have rej'd, etc. 1. Perfect Subjunctive, ich habe mich gefreut, 1 have rej'd. du haftest dich gefreut, thou hast er ha,be sich gefreut, he has wir haben uns gefreut, ive have ihr habe* euch gefreut, you have Sie haben sich gefreut, you have sie haben sich gefreut, they have ich hatte mich gefreut, / have rejoiced. ich werde mich freuen, / shall rejoice. ich werde mich gefreut haben, / sh. have rejoiced, etc. 1. First Conditional : ich wiirde mich freuen, etc., / would rejoice, etc. 2. Second Conditional : ich wiirde mich gefreut haben, I would have rejoiced. Note 1. — There are very few strictly reflexive verbs in German, but all transitive verbs may be used reflexively. Thus : lieben, to love; sich lieben, to love one's self. - Pron : ZTc/i fro-i'-'n, ge-fro-It'. t Pron. : fro-i'-e, fro-i'-'st, fro^t', fro-r-'n. GRAMMAR. 519 Note 2. — A few reflexive verbs take their pronoun in the dative The most important are : sich ausbitten, to request. sich schmeicheln, to flatter one's self. sicli einbilden, to imagine. sich verschaffen, to procure. sich die Freiheit nehmen, to take sich vorstellen, to imagine. the liberty. sich wehe thun, to hurt one's self. These verbs are really conjugated like those which take theii reflexive pronoun in the accusative, the only difference in the form of the pronouns being in the 1st and 2d person singular {mir and dir, instead of mich and dich). Ex, : ich schmeichle ^nir, du schmeichelst dir ; but, er schmeichelt sich, etc. USES OF HABEN AND SEIN. All transitive verbs , all refleocive verbs, and most itw- personal verbs form their perfect and pluperfect with habefi, Ex. : Infinitive. Perfect; Pluperfect. 1. Fragen, to ask. ich habe gefragt. ich hatte gefragt. 2. Sich freuen, ich habe mich gefreut. ich hatte mich gef 3. Regnen, to rain, es hat geregnet. es hatte geregnet. Intransitive verbs which express a change of condition, or a change of place from one point to the other, form their perfect and pluperfect with sein, Ex.: Perfect: Ich bin gekommen, / have come; du bist gekommen, thou hast come, etc. Pluperfect: Ich war gekommen, I had come; etc. The most important are: abfallen, to decay. gehen, to go abreisen, to leave. geschehen, to happen. aiikomnien, to arrive. hinauf gehen, to go up. begegnen, to meet. hinuntergehen, to go down bleiben, to remain. kommen, to come. elnschlafen, to fall asleep. steigen, to mount. entfliehen, to^ee. sterben, ^o rfie. erscheinen, to appear. verschwinden, to disappear. fallen, to fall. zuriickkehi-en, to return. Some intransitive verbs of motion take either haben or sein in the perfect and pluperfect. Such are: eilen, to hurry, laufen, to run, reiten, to ride, etc. They take haben when the simple action is mentioned without reference to the point to or from which the action takes place. They take sein in the opposite case. Thus : He has ridden fo-dnj/ = EY hat heute gerit- ten. But : He has ridden to Berlins Er ist nach Berlin geritten. 520 GRAMMAR. THE IRREGULAR VERBS. The verbs which do not strictly follow the rules of conju. gation, of either the weak or the stem conjugation, are the following : 1. The auxiliaries f which have already been conjugate(J (pages 498 to 506). 2. Bringen, to bring ; denTcen, to think; wissen^ to know.'*' 3. GeheUf to go ; stehen, to stand ; thun, to do. I. -THE AUXILIARIES. The auxiliaries have already been conjugated (page 498). Note the following expressions : He ought to have done it = Er hatte es thun sollen (lit. : he had it to-do ought). He could have done z7 = Er hatte es thun konnen [lit. : he had it to-do been-able (strictly : be-ah\e. See page 176, note 1)]. ll.—BRINGEN, DENKEN. AND WISSEN.* INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. 1. Present. 1. ich bringe, etc., / bring, etc.* 1. ich bringe, etc., / bring, etc. 2. ich denke, etc., I think, etc.* 2. ich denke, etc., I think, etc. 3. ich weiss, etc., / know, etc.^ 3. ich wisse, etc., / know, etc. 2. Imperfect. 2. Imperfect. 1. ich brachte, etc., / brought, etc. 1. ich brachte, etc., / brought, etc. 2. ich dachte, etc., / thought, etc. 2. ich dachte, etc., / thought, etc. 3. ich wusste, etc., / knew, etc. 3. ich wiisste, etc., / knew, etc. The compound tenses are conjugated like those of any other verbs. Thus : INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect: Ich habe gebracht, ich habe gedacht, ich habe gewusst. 1 Ich bringe, du bringst, er bringt, wir bringen, etc. 2 Ich denke, du denkst, er denkt, wir denken, etc. 8 Ich weiss, du weisst, er weiss, wir wissen, ihr wisst, Sie wissen, etc. * When to know can be rendered at all by to he acquainted with, it is in German, kennen. I know this gentlema)i = Ich kenne {not : icli icciss diesen Herrn. — Elsewhere, to know = wissen. GRAMMAR. 521 Pluperfect : Ich hatte gebracht, ich hatte gedacht, ich hatte gewusst. — Pluperfect Subjunctive : Ich hatte gebracht, etc. First Future : Ich werde bringen, denken, or wissen. Second Future : Ich werde gebracht haben, ich werde ge- dacht haben, ich werde gewusst haben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. First Conditional: Ich wiirde bringen, ich wiirde denken, ich wiirde wissen. Second Conditional : Ich wiirde gebracht haben, ich wiirde gedacht haben, ich wiirde gewusst haben. lll.-GEHEN. STEHEN, AND THUN. INDICATIVE. 1. Present. 1. ich gehe, etc., I am going, etc. 2. ich stehe, etc., I am standing, etc. 3. ich thue, etc., I am doing, etc. 2. Imperfect. 1. ich ging, etc., I went, etc. 2. ich stand, etc., / stood, etc. 3. ich that, etc., / did, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1. Present. ich gehe, etc., I {may) go, etc. ich stelie, etc., I {may) stand, etc. ich thue, etc., I {may) do, etc. 2. Imperfect. ich ginge, etc., / {might) go, etc. ich stande, etc., I {might) stand, etc. ich thate, etc., I {might) do, etc. The past pa^'ticiple, of these three verbs are: gegangen, gestanden, gethan. The compound tenses are conjugated like those of all other verbs. Thus : Perfect Indicative : Pluperfect Indic. :— Pluperfect Subj. : — First Future : — Second Future : — First Conditional : - Second Conditional: ich bin gegangen, I have gone (see page 519). ich habe gestanden, / have stood. ich habe gethan, / have done. {ich war gegangen, I had gone (see page 519). ich hatte gestaiuien, / had stood. ich hatte gethan, / had done. I ich ware gegangen, / had gone (see page 519). 1 ich hatte gestanden, ich hatte gethan. ich werde gehen, stehen, or than, ich werde gegangen sein, I shall have gone. ich werde gestanden haben, / shall have stood. ich werde gethan haben, / shall have done. ich wiirde gehen, stehen, or thun. f ich wiirde gegangen sein, / would have gone. I ich wiirde gestanden haben, / woicld have stood. { ich wiirde gethan haben, / wouhl have done. 522 GRAMMAR. SEPARABLE VERBS. The prefix of separable verbs (see page 234) is separated from the stem in the present and innperfect indicative and in the subjunctive j in principal sentences^ and also in the imperative. Thus, ankoin7nen, to arrive: I arrive = iGh. koimne an; I arrived = ich Team an; I might arrive = ich. kmne an; Arrive in time = komme zur rechten Zeit an. Note. — Notice, however, that in dependent clauses this prefix cannot be separated from the stem. Thus : als er ankam, etc. *'Ge" and *^siu** are placed between the prefix and the stem. Thus, Past Part. : angrekommen. Infin. (with tsw) : an«ri*kommen. CONJUGATION OP A SEPARABLE VERB. MODEL: Ankomnien^ to arrive, SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. ich komme an,i I {may) arrive. INDICATIVE. Present, ich komme an,i / arrive. du kommst an, thou arrivest. er kommt an, he arrives. wii- konimen an, toe arrive. ilir konnut an, you arrive. Sie kommen an, you ar-rive. sie kommen an, they arrive. Imperfect, ich kam an, 2 etc., 1 arrived. Perfect, ich bin angekommen, I have arrived. Pluperfect, ich war angekommen, I had arrived. First Future, ich werde ankommen, / shall arrive. Second Future, ich werde angekommen sein, I sh. h. a. ich werde angekommen sein, I shall h. a. First Conditional. IMPERATIVE, ich wiirde ankommen, / ahould arrive, komme an, kommt an, etc. Second Conditional. Participles. ich wUrde angekommen sein, I sh. h. a. ankommend, angekommen. dii kommest an, thou (jnayest) arrive. er komme an, he {may) arrive. wir kommen an, ?re {may) arrive. ihr kommet an, you {may) arrive. Sie kommen an, you {may) arrive. sie kommen an, they {may) arrive. Imperfect, ich kame an,3 etc., I arrived. Perfect, ich sei angekommen, / have arrived. Pluperfect, ich ware angekommen, I had arrived. First Future, ich werde ankommen, I shall arrive. Second Future. 1 In dependent clauses, ich ankotnme, — 2 jn dependent clauses, ich ankam, — 3 In dependent el., ich ankdme* GRAMMAR. 523 1. Prefixes with which Separable Verbs are Formed. The following prefixes are those which occur most frequently with separable verbs : ab, an, aiif , aus, bei, dar, ein, fort, her, bin, mit, nach, vor, weg", zu, zuriick.* 2. Principal Parts of some Separable Compound Verbs. Prefix. Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Participle. ab, — abgehen, to leave; ich ging ab, / left; abgegangen, left. an,— anf angen, to begin ; ich &ng an, I began; angefangen, begin. auf, — aufhoren, to cease; ich horte auf , / ceased ; aufgehort, ceased. aus, — ausgehen, to go out; ich ging aus, I got out ; ausgegangen, got out. bei, — beistehen, to assist; ich stand bei, I assisted ; beigestanden, assisted. dar, — darstellen, to represent; ich stellte dar, / repre'd; dargestellt, represented. ein, — einladen, io invite; ich lud ein, / invited; eingeladen, invited. fort, — fortfahren, to continue; ich fuhr fort, / cont'd; fortgefahren, continued. her, — herkommen, to come ^ere; ich kam her, I came ^'e ; hergekommen, come k'e. hin, — hingehen, to go there ; ich ging hin, / went th. ; hingegangen, gone there. mit, — mitteilen,tocommunic'te;ich. teilte mit, IcomHed; mitgeteilt, communi' ted. nac/i— nachfolgen, to follow; ich folgte nach, IfoVd; nachgefolgt,/o/Zoi^erf. vor,— vorstellen, to introduce; ich stellte vor, rinfro'd; vorgestellt, introduced, tveff,— yfegnelimen,to take away; ich nahm weg, I took a. / weggenommen, taken a. zu, — zumachcn, to shut; ich machte zu, /sAm^; zugemacht, s/im^. zuruck, zurUckkommen, toreVn-, ich kam zuriick, Iret'd; zuriickgekommen, refd. For inseparable verbs (verbs with one of the prefixes be, emp, entf er, ge, ver, zer, and wider), see page 236. Notice that separable verbs have the main accent on the prefix, while inseparable verbs take it on the stem. Thus, Separable: aufstehen^ to get up; pron.: ^-C)bf-s7ita'-'n. Inseparable: bestehen, to endure; pron.: b6-sMa^-'n. Note. — Some verbs, compounded with the prefixes durch, iiber, iinter, um, and w^ieder, are separable, while others are inseparable. Thus : umkommen, to perish, separable ; but, umgeben, to surround, inseparable. But many others are both separable and inseparable according to meaning. When used in their ordinary sense, they are separable; when used figuratively, they are inseparable. Ex.: Separable. Inseparable. iibersetzen, to put over.f iibersetzen, to translate.f umgehen, to go out of one's way.f umgehen, to avoid.f wiederholen, to bring back again.if wiederholen, to repeat.-f * There are also many compound prefixes with which verbs may be compounded. Most of them are formed with hin and her, as hinab, herauf , etc. — f Pron.: ii'-b'r-zSt'-s'n, and ii -b'r-zet'-s'n; dom'-ga'-'n, and dom-ga'-'u; ve'-d'r-ho'-l'n, and ve'-d'r-ho'-l'n. 524 GRAMMAR. THE INFINITIVE. Par. I. -THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT ZV. The infinitive is generally preceded by zu. It is used wiih- out zu, however : (1) When it depends on one of the modal auxiliaries, kon- nen, wollen, milssen, Jtiogenf sollenf and dUrfen, Ex. : You can go — Sie kunnen gehen (no zu). (2) When it depends on either of the seven following verbs: fiihlen, heissen, helfen, horen, lassen, lernen, sehen, Ex.: I hear him sing= Ich hore ihn singen (no zu). (3) After hleihen, gehen, fahren, reiten, in certain idio- matic expressions. Thus : He keeps his seat = Er bleibt sitzen. He is taking a walk = Er geht spazieren. He is taking a ride = Er reitet spazieren. Par. 2. -THE INFINITIVE WITH ZU. The infinitive is preceded by zu : (1) When it depends on another verb; excepting, how- ever, the modal auxiliaries or the seven verbs, fUhlen, heissen, helfen, horen, lassen, lernen, sehen. See above. Ex. : I want to buy a house = lch. wiinsche ein Haus zu kaufen. He stopped working = ^1 horte aufzu arbeiten. (2) When it depends on an adjective. Thus : I am ready to go out with you = Ich bin bereit, mit Ihnen aus«i*- gehen. (3) When it depends on a noun. Ex. : The art of writing (German : to write) is very useful = Die Kunst zu schreiben ist sehr niitzlich. (4) When it depends on one of the prepositions : um, ohne, anstatt. Thus : He remains instead of goings Er bleibt, anstatt zu gehen. He praises the book without having read i< = Er lobt das Buch, ohne es gelesen zu haben. GRAMMAR. 525 rar. 5. —THE INFINITIVE WITH UM ZU. 1. Whenever to in English really means in order to, it is ren- dered by um zUf in German. He has gone to town to buy a book=E>r ist nach der Stadt ge- gangen, um ein Buch zu kaufen. 2. Um zu is also used before any infinitive depending on an adjective preceded by zu {too^ or followed by genug, Ex. : Das Kind ist zujung, um allein in den Wald zu gehen, Sie sind alt genug, um es besser zu wissen. Par. 4. -PECULIAR USES OF THE INFINITIVE. In English, an infinitive following the verb to be is generally in the passive voice. Ex. : His death is to be feared. In German, on the contrary, an infinitive following sein, is in the active voice. Thus : Sein Tod ist zu furchten (lit. : is to fear). 3. The English infinitive, following how, what, and where, is to be rendered in German by the infinitive with sollen, k'on- nen, or miissen. Thus : I do not know what to do= Ich weiss nicht was ich thun soil. 4. An infinitive dependent on a verb in a compound tense (generally), precedes the past participle. Thus : It has begun to ram = Es hat za regnen angefangen. If the infinitive, however, is modified by some other word (as : to rain heavily) it is placed last. Thus : It has begun to rain very heavily =F,s hat angefangen, sehr he/tig zu regnen. Par. 5. -THE INFINITIVE USED AS A NOUN. Any infinitive in German may be used as a noun. Thus : Eating and drinJcing = Das Essen und das Trinken, Note 1, — Nouns formed of an infinitive are always neuter, and declined like other neuter nouns. 526 GRAMMAR. Note 2. — Such nouns are always written with a capital, as all other ' nouns. Ex. : Das Essen, Note 3. — The infinitive used as a noun corresponds almost always to an English present participle (or verbal noun, i. e., a noun ending in ing). Ex. : The reading of such a book is not useful = 'DEiS Lesen nines solchen Buches ist nutzlich. Par. 6. -THE INFINITIVE USED FOR A PAST PARTICIPLE. The infinitive of the modal auxiliaries and of the five verbs, heissen, helfen, horen, sehen, and lassen is used instead of the past participle, when preceded by another verb in the infinitive. Thus : 1. I have not been able to do ^^=: Ich habe es nicht thun kon- nen [lit. : / have it not to-do to-be-able (and not gekonnt, been able), because another infinitive (thun) is present]. 2. I let the book lie on the table =lch habe das Buch auf dem Tish liegen lassen [and not : gelassen, because another in- finitive (liegen) is present]. N. B. — Should the construction just referred to (the use of the infinitive of one of the above verbs, instead of the past participle) occur in a dependent clause, the auxiliary, instead of coming at the end of the clause, according to the general rule, is placed just before the two infinitives. Ex. : I am sorry you did not do i^ = Es thut mir leid, dass ich es nicht gethan habe. Auxiliary at the end, according to the general rule. But: / assure you I could not have done it = Ich versichere Sie, dass ich es nicht habe thun konnen. Habe out of its normal place, because of the presence of the peculiar construction, thun konnen. Likewise : I did not know I had let the book lie on the table = Ich wusste nicht dass ich das Buch auf dem Tisch hatte liegen lassen (and not: liegen lassen hatte). Par. 7. -NON-USE OF THE INFINITIVE IN GERMAN. On the other hand, the English infinitive preceded by a noun or pronoun (as : I wished him to come and see me; I advised my father not to yield) is not rendered by the infinitive at all, in German, but by dass and the indicative or subjunctive. Thus : I wished him to come and see me= Ich wiinschte, dass er mich besuchte. GRAMMAR. 527 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 1. The German past and present participles may be used with a noun, Uke adjectives, as in EngUsh. Tlius: Eine Uebende Mutter = ^ loving mother. Der erwachsene Sohn = The grown-up son. So7ne participles are employed like genuine adjectives, and therefore admit also of predicate use, as reizend, charm- ing; hinreissend, overpowering ; gelelirt, learned; bekannt, known ; beriihint, renowned ; geschickt, clever, etc. Ex. : It is charming — Es ist reizend. Note 1.— The past participle of verbs of motion which de- pend on kommen is used instead of their present participle. Thus : He came running =YiY kam gelaufen (lit. : he came run). Note 2. — The past participle, by an elliptical construction, is sometimes used instead of an imperative. Thus : Stillgestanden ! = Stand still .' (lit. : stood-still). Aufgepasst ! = Attention ! 2. Both past and present participles may be used appositively as in English. Thus : Sie sass am Fenster, in einem Buch lesend = She sat at the windoiv reading a book. Vom Speer getroffen, sank er nieder = Struck by the spear, he sank to the earth. Notice, however, that the English participle is most fre- quently rendered in German by a relative clause, or by a clause beginning with conjunctions, like indemf wdhrend, da, als, nachdem, obwohl, etc. A man, having such opinions =Ein Mann, welcher solche Meinungen hat. Not finding them, I went away = Da ich sie nicht fand, ging ich fort. The tables being removed = Nachdem die Tische entfernt war en. Note. — Some modern German writers, in translating these English constructions, sometimes use nn aV)solute participle, as in a phrase like Dies gesagt, setzte er sicli= This said, he sat. But this, however, is to be avoided. 528 GRAMMAR. THE ADVERB. I. — ORIGINAL ADVERBS. 1. Most important adverbs of place : wo? where? wohin? whither f woher? whence? hier, here. aussen, outside. innen, within. oben, upstairs. unten, doum-stairs. vorn, before, iyifwnt. rechts, on the right, to the right. links, on the left, to the left. weit. fern, far, far off. 2. Most important adverbs of time: wann? when? sonst, ehedem, formerly. bald, soon. einst, once. heute, to-day. gestern, yesterday. vorgestern, the day before yesterday. morgen, to-morrow. iibermorgen, the day after to-inorrow. endlich, at last, at length. damals, then, at that time. inimer, allezeit, always. 3. Most important adverbs of modality: wie? how? beinahe, fast, almost. nur, bloss, allein, only. wenigstens, at least. anders, otherwise. sehr, recht, very, or much. ziemlich, tolerably. ungefahr, about. sonst, else. so, ebenso, so, as. ganz, quite. ganzlich, wholly. besonders, especially. ja, ja doch, yes. allerdings, by all means. gewiss, certainly. wirklich, really. gern, ivillingly. nein, no. keineswegs, by no means. warum ? why ? weshalb ? wherefore f also, so, therefore. ausserdem, besides. demnach, accordingly. kaum, scarcely. COMPARISON. Few adverbs are capable of comparison. The principal are hald, soon; gern, willingly ; oft, often; e^c Thus: GRAMMAR. 629 bald, soon. friiher, or eher, sooner, baldigst, the soonest gem, willingly, lieber, rather. am liebsten, best. oft, often. ofter, oftener. am oftesten, oftenest. viel, much. mehr, more. am meisten, most. II. — ADJECTIVES USED AS ADVERBS. Almost all adjectives may be used as adverbs. In this case the German adjectives are undeclined, so that the adverb is in fact just like the predicate adjective (see page 476). Charles is industrious = 1^2^x1 ist fleissig. Charles works industriously = Karl arbeitet fleissig, COMPARISON. Adjectives are also used as adverbs in the comparative degree. Ex. : Charles works more industriously than Henry = Karl arbeitet fleissiger als Heinrich. The Supei'lative Degree, — Adverbs of themselves have no superlative forms, but the superlative of all adverbs is or can be expressed through adjectives in one of three ways : (1) By the simple superlative of the adjective. Ex.: freund- liclist, most friendly. Not many adjectives, however, can be so used. (2) By adding am {an dem) to the superlative in the dative case. Thus: am schdnsten = most beautifully. Red roses smell best = Rote Rosen riechen am hesten. (3) When there is no comparison, but merely a high degree is to be expressed, aufs, added to the accusative of the adjective, is used. Thus : aufs drm^lichste — most poorly (poorly in the highest degree). Ex. : The boy was clad Tnost poorly = Der Knabe war aufs arinlichste gekleidet. Note 1. — Observe that the superlative adverbial form with am is used in the predicate, instead of the undeclined form. Thus: Red roses are beautiful = Die roten Rosen sind schoti {schbn, the predi- cate is undeclined, according to rule, page 476). But in tlie superl,: Red roses are most beautiful= Die roten Rosen sind am schbnsten (or, die schbnsten; but never simply, schbnst). Note 2. — A few superlative adverbs are formed in ens. Thus: bes- tens, in the best way ; hochstens, in the highest way ; meistens, mostly. 530 GRAMMAR. THE PREPOSITION. Lists of the German prepositions, according to the different cases they govern, have ah'eady been given on page 268. I. — CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ARTICLE. Some German prepositions may be contracted with the dative or accusative of the definite article, so as to form a single word with it. Thus : am, /or an dem. ans, /or an das. im, for in dem, aufs, for auf das. vom, /or von dem. durchs, /or durch das. zum, /or zu dem. furs, /or fur das. zur, for zu der. hinters, for hinter das. beim, /or bei dem. ins, /or in das. hinterm, for hinter dem. ubers, for iiber das. iibern, /or iiber den. urns, for um das. ausserm, /or ausser dem. unters, /or unter das. untern, /or unter den, etc. vors, /or vor das, etc. Note. — In some expressions the contracted form only can be used. Thus: On Sunday = Am (never an dem) Sonntag ; Frankfort-on-the-Main = Frankfurt avn Main; In earnest = Im {not in dem) Ernst; In fun = Im Scherz, For fun = Zum (not mu dem) S{)a.s.s , Luckily = Zutn GUlck ; For instance = Zum Beispiel , To sbig at sight (lit.: from sheet) = Vom (not von dem) Blatt singen. Also, as already seen on page 529, Am (never an dem) besten, schonsten ; aufs arnilichste, etc. II. — IDIOMATIC USE OF SOME GERMAN PREPOSI- TIONS. 1, Von = of, from. But: Ich werde von meinem Vater geliebt = I am loved by my father. Manche Volker leben von Fischen = 3Iany people live on fish. 2. Zu = to. But: Zu Hause, zu (in) Dresden = At home, at Dresden. GRAMMAR. 531 3. Bei=by. But: Ich war bei dem Minister = I tvas with the minister. Ich habe kein Geld bei u\\y = I have no inouetj with me. Die Schlacht bei VV^aterloo= I'he battle of Waterloo. Bei Tisch sein = At the table. Bei einem Fluss = To be on a river. 4. An = at. But: Am Hudson ; an der Kuste= On the Hmlson; on the coast. Am Sonntag = On Sunday. An einer Krankheit sterben= To die of a sickness. An seiner Stelle = In his place. 5. Auf= on, upon. But : Auf dem Markt; aw/ der Post; auf dem Ball = At the market; at the Post-office ; at the ball. Auf den Markt; a«*/die Post; auf den Ball = To market, etc. Ich gehe auf das (or aufs) Land= I (jo to the country. Ich bin auf dem Land = 1 ayn in the country. Gehe auf die Strasse = Go into the street. Er ist auf der Strasse = He is in the street. Was ist das auf deutsch ? = WJiat is that in German f 6. In — in, into. But : In die Schule, Kirche, Oper gehen = To go to school, church, etc. In einiger Entfernung = yl< some distaiice. In diesem Augenblick = On this instant. Im Gegenteil ; im ganzen = On the contrary ; on the whole. 7. Tor, nach = before, after. But: Vor alien Dingen = Above all. Vor Kummer sterben = To die of sorrow. Vor einigen Jsihven = Some years ago. Nach Deutschland reisen = To go to Germany, etc. Note. — Observe that nach, is used when speaking of a place to which we go to; but «ie, when speaking of a person to whom we go: Er geht nacU Berlin ; but, Er geht ssu nieinem Onkel. 8. Um, about, round. But : Um 8 Uhr = ^* 8 o'clock. Um Gottes willen = l^or God's sake. Um Goidi — For money. Einen Tag um den andern = ^yerji other day. 532 GRAMMAR. THE CONJUNCTION. There are two classes of conjunctions : co-ordinating con* junctions^ which connect principal clauses ; and subordi- nating conjunctions, which are used to connect a subor- dinate clause to the main clause. After the co-ordinating (excepting und, odcr, denn, aber, alleiUf and sondern) the order of the clause is inverted, as already seen on page I. — THE CO-ORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS. und, and. auch, also. ausserdem, besides. dann, then. ferner, farther, erstens, firstly. sowohl, als, both, and. teils, teils, partly, pHy. oder, or. nach, nor. entweder, oder, either, or. weder, noch, neither, nor. aber, but. allein, but. sondern, but. doch, yet, though. jedoch, yet, though. dennoch, yet, though. gleichwohl, nevertheless. dagegen, on the contrary. indessen, however. vielmehr, rather. zvvar, to be sure. wohl, indeed. denn, for. also, accordingly. daher, therefore. deswegen, " deshalb, " folglich, conse'ly. mithin, " Note 1. — The conjunctions aber, and sometimes also doch, je- doch, indessen, zwar, wo'hl, also, are not always at the beginning of the clause. Thus : The ostrich has wings, but he cannot fly = Der Strauss hat Fliigel, er kann aber nicht fliegen. Note 2. — Observe that sondern is used only after a negative clause. As regards the difference between aber and allein: allein = but, in the sense of only. Its use is much less frequent than that of aber, and it generally introduces some specific objection. II. — THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS. als, when. bevor, ehe, before. bis, until. da, siiice (reason). dass, that. damit, that, in order that. falls, in case that. obwohl, though. wiewohl, " seit, seitdem, since. so oft als, whenever. sobald, as soon as. solange, as long as. ungeachtet, notwithstanding. GRAMMAR. 533 indem, ivhile. wahrend, while. je, the (with the comp.y wenn, when, if. iiachdem, after. well, because. ob^ ivhcther. wie, how, as. ohgleicb, obschon, though. wofern, if, provided. THE INTERJECTION. ah ! ach ! hi ! ah ! oh ! halt ! halt ! stop I ach ! ah ! alas I oh dear ! au ! oh ! he ! he da ! ho ! I say ! st ! still ! hush ! hist ! oh! ho! oh! ho! leider! alas ! unhappily ! o wehe I oh dear ! alas ! heisa ! huzza ! hurrah I pfui ! fie ! pish ! juchhe ! hurrah ! APPENDIX. PECULIAR USES OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 1. It is omitted from before a predicate noun with sein or werden* Thus : He is a physician = Er ist Arzt. He became a merchant = Fjr ward Kaufman, 2. It is omitted witli kein geringerer, no less (a). Thus : No less a King than I = Kein geringerer Konig als ich. 3. It may be used or omitted with manch. In the latter case, manch is invariable. Thus: Many a day = Maucher Tag ; or, manch ein Tag. POSITION OF THE ARTICLES. The articles in German are placed not only before the noun, but also before all adjectives qualifying it. Thus : Half a minute = Eine halbe Minute. Both the parents = Die beide* Altern. Exceptions. — (1) The definite article follows all. Ex. : All the people rvcre there =Alle (or, all) die Leiite waren da. (2) The indefinite article folloius manch and welch. Many a man = Manch ein Mann. What a man ! = Welch ein Mensch ! (3) The indefi. arti, may either follow or precede solch and so, Ex. : Such a man = Solch ein Mann {or, ein solcher INhmn). So poor a woman != So ein armes Weib {or, ein so armes Weib)! * Witli heide, tlie article may be altogether omitted. Ex. : Both parents = Die beide Altern; or, simply, beide Altern. GRAMMATICAL INDEX. Abeb, allein, and sondern, 85, 632. Accent, in German, xx. , of separable verbs, 234, 523. Accusative, use§ of the, 114-117. Adjectives, declension of, 476-479. , formation, comparison, 480-482. , used as nouns, 273, 322, 479. , of nationality, 77. Adverbs, 528, 529. , of time, their place, 78. Als, 108, 443, 446. Agreement, of article, 174. , of pers. pron., 14, 52, 86, 314. , of adjectives, 16, 479. Apposition, nouns in, 32. Article, Definite, 459. , uses of, 461, 462. , place of, 533. , in stating prices, 45, 336. , with parts of body, 90, 356, 374, 429. , with names of months, 243. , with names of streets, 45. , with names of seasons, 90. , contrac. of, 6, 16, 53, 80, 90, 312. , Indefinite, 460. , omission of, 450. , repetition of, 155. , uses of, 533. Bis, used with other prep. 224, 262. Conjunctions, 532, 533. Construction of principal and depend- ent clauses, 36, 37. , no progressive forms, 76, 146, 147. , invert. & emph. forms, 84, 85, 144. , after und, aber, etc., 84, 85, 136. , no emphatic forms, 146, 147. , place of pronoun objects, 148. Da, combined with prep., 168, 200, 376. Das, dies, referring to any gender, 236. Dass, omitted, 136, 238, 240, 282, 312, 380. Dative Case, 202, 203. , use of, 206, 207. Derselbe, instead of er, 141. Dessen, deren, instead of des, der, 312, 490. Dependent Clauses, 37. Diminutive, with ohen and lein, 82. Du, when used, 34, 156. EiN, without a noun, 366. Er, sie, es, uses of, 484 ; 54, 226, 236. Es, omission of, 409, 434. , added in German, 448, 450. Es GlEBT, 276, 409. Genitive Case, 174. , uses of, 178. , omission of, 179. , none after nouns of measure, 198. Gern, 62, 212. Haben, instead of to do, 29, 76. HiN, HER, uses of, 30, 58, 140, 144. I AM to, I have to, 444. 1 ought to have, etc., how rendered, 287,330,371,374. IHR, ihr, your, 17, 28. 634 Impersonal Expressions, 56, 426. Infinitive, 524-526. , instead of participle, 176, 234. , used after sein, 177, 406. , after how, how rendered, 202. , used as a noun, 312, 354. Interjections, 533. Ja, use of, 170. Kein, not any, 116, 119. Lassen, to have done, 4, 24, 39. LlEBER, comp. of GERN, 212, 334. Mal, instead of einmal, 241. Man, use of, 24, 105. Nach, Berlin, etc., to Berlin, 13. Names, of cities and count's, gender, 19. Negatives, place of, 81. Nouns, gender of, 463-465. , strong declension of, 467-472. , weak " " 472,473. , mixed " '* 474. , proper, declension of, 475. Numbers, cardinal, 180. , ordinal, 182. , fractional, 183. Numeral Adjectives, 482. Ohne zu, 56. Participles, 527. Possessive Cask, none in Oerman, 147. Prepositions, 114, 178, 207, 224, 268, 530. Present Tense, instead of past, 256. Principal Clauses, 36. Pronouns, personal, 483. , possessive, 487, , DEMONSTRATIVE, 489. , RELATIVE, 310, 491. , INTERROGATIVE, 492. , INDEFINITE, 493. Selbst, myself, etc., 6. Sie, you, 17. Singular, of nouns of measure, 288, 482. , with money denomination, 59. So, introducing a principal clause, 330. , to be rendered by es, 444. SOLLEN, after v. of command, 354, 360. Subjunctive, 340 ; 82, 108, 138, 168, 342. Superlative, absolute, 316. Verbs, general remarks, 495-497. , auxiliary, 498-506. , WEAK, conjugation of, 507-510. , strong, " " 511-517. .reflexive, 260, 264, 518, 519. , irregular, 520, 521. , SEPARABLE, 152, 157, 164, 234, 522. , Inseparable, 159, 204, 236. , impersonal, 408, 409. , with HABEN or sein, .52, 106, 519. Wann, wenn, als, 232, 360, 404, 443. Welch (without ending), 271. Welcher, welche, welches, for et- WAS or EINIGE, 292, 355, 492. "Wenn, omitted, 331. Will = wollen, or werden, 26. Wo, combined with preposi's, 274, 491. Zu, 11, 78, 200, 524. STANDAR D GERMA N TEXTS Arnold. Ein Regentag auf dem Lande (Kern) . . . $0.25 Baumbach. Im Zwielicht. Vol. I (Bernhardt) ... .65 Im Zwielicht. Vol. II (Bernhardt) 65 Baumbach & Wildenbruch. Es War Einmal (Bernhardt) .65 Benedix. Der Prozess, and Wilhelmi. EinerMuss Heira- ten (Lambert) 30 Bernhardt. Deutsche Litteraturgeschichte . . . .75 Freudvoll und Leidvoll 65 Dillard. Aus dem Deutschen Dichterwald . . . .60 Ebner-Eschenbach. Krambambuli, and Klaussmann. Me- moiren eines Offizierburschen (Spanhoofd) . . . .25 Fahsel. Allerlei . . .25 Fouque. Undine (Senger) 50 Freytag. Die Journalisten (Johnson) 35 Grimm. Kinder- und Hausmarchen (Vos) . . . .45 Groller, Inkognito, and Albersdorf. Cand. phil. Lausch- mann (Lentz) 33 Heyse. Das Madchen von Treppi, and Marion (Bernhardt) .30 Anfang und Ende (Lentz) 30 L'Arrabbiata (Lentz) ....... .30 Hillern. Hoher als die Kirche (Dauer) 25 Keller. Bilder aus der Deutschen Litteratur . . • .75 Leander. Traumereien (Hanstein) 35 Lessing. Minna von Barnhelm (Lambert) .... .50 Nathan der Weise (Diekhoff) 80 Moser. Der Bibliothekar (Cooper) 45 Prehn. Journalistic German 53 Ranke. Kaiserwahl Karl's V. (Schoenfeld) . . . .35 Richter. Selections (Collins) ...... .60 Riehl. Die Vierzehn Nothelfer and Trost um Trost(Sihler) .30 Der Fluch der Schonheit (Frost) 30 Das Spielmannskind and Der Stumme Ratsherr (Priest) . .35 Schanz. Der Assistent and Other Stories (Beinhorn) . .35 Scheffel. Der Trompeter von Sakkingen (Buehner) . . .75 Schiller. Gustav Adolf in Deutschland (Bernhardt) . . .45 Wilhelm Tell (Roedder) Seidel. Die Monate (Arrowsmith) 25 Der Lindenbaum and Other Stories (Richard) . . . .25 Herr Omnia (Matthewman) 25 Leberecht Hiihnchen und Andere Sonderlinge (Bernhardt) .50 Spyri. Rosenresli and Der Toni von Kandergrund . . .25 Stern. Geschichten vom Rhein 85 Geschichten von Deutschen Stadten . . . . . 1.25 Stifter. Das Heidedorf (Lentz) 25 Stoltze. Bunte Geschichten 30 Storm. Immensee (Dauer) 25 Wagner. Die Meistersinger (Bigelow) 70 Wilbrandt. Der Meister von Palmyra (Henckels) . . .80 Wildenbruch. Das Edle Blut (Eggert) 30 Zschokke. Der Zerbrochene Krug (Berkefeld) . . . .25 AMERICA N BOOK COMPANY TWO NEW GERMAN READERS BY MENCO STERN (Bcfd?id?tcn von X)eutfd?en Stdbten Cloth, J2m0y 420 pages. With vocabulary, map, and illustrations. Price, $1.2^, Cloth, i2mo, J18 pages. With vocabulary, maps, and illustrations. Price, 8^ cents. IT has been found from much experience that one of the best ways of interesting the student of German in his work is to acquaint him from the very outset with the people whose language he is studying. For this purpose those stories are best adapted which in tone and contents describe faithfully the various sections of the German Empire, portraying their local color and giving their local traditions. These two volumes, each containing nearly one hundred stories, furnish reading matter of this nature, and include besides, valuable suggestive material for exercises in con- versation and composition. They are well suited for intermediate and advanced grades, and provide excellent preparation for the reading of the German classics, being widely varied in character and subject matter. The sketches all portray the romance of Germany — its scenery, cities, castles, and homes, interweaving with the descriptions the legends and folk-lore tales of the people. They do not, however, consist of fiction only, but furnish also many facts of historical, geograph(cal, and literary importance. The books have been carefully edited. The vocabularies are complete and furnish ample aid. The maps enable the student to understand the full geographical and historical significance of the tales. AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO (22s) COMMERCIAL GERMAN By ARNOLD KUTNER Hi^K School of Commerce, New York City Cloth, 12mo, 4-04- pp., tuilh -Vocabulary. Trice, ^t.OO 'T^HIS book is intended for use in commercial schools and -■■ in commercial courses of high schools, and is designed to furnish much information which will prove useful in later business life. It is the first attempt to introduce American students to a foreign language by means of its commercial vocabulary. The book, which is complete in itself, is divided into two parts. Part I. contains the elements of commercial German, and is designed to carry the student to the threshold of busi- ness correspondence. Each of the sixteen lessons contains a reading lesson, special vocabulary, exercise on grammar, and questions. Following thqse are thirty-one brief grammatical tables of the principal parts of speech, with references to the reading lessons which illustrate them. Part II. is intended to widen the commercial vocabulary by means of reading selections dealing with German business customs and institutions. It is, moreover, devoted to the study of commercial correspondence, business forms, docu- ments, newspaper articles, and advertisements. Selections I to 20 are intended to form the center of instruction and to provide material for re-translation, reproduction, composition, and conversation. A vocabulary and a list of strong, mixed, and irregular verbs completes the book. Write for illustrated descriptive catalogue of Modern Language publications. AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO BOSTON ATLANTA . DALLAS . SAN FRANCISCO (326) French Literature With Notes and Vocabularies Augier Px, Sandeau. Le Gendre de M. Poirier (Roedder). . . $0.40 Bruno. Le Tour de la France (Syms) 60 Cameron. Tales of France 1.00 Chateaubriand. Les Aventurcs du Dernier Abencerage (Bruner) 30 Cr6mieux & Dcccurcelle. L'Abbe Constantin (Fran9ois) 35 Daudet. La Belle Nivernaise and Other Stories (Jenkins). . . .50 Tartarin de Tarascon (Fontaine) 45 Dumas. La Tulipe Noire (Brandon) 40 Les Trois Mousquetaires (Fontaine) 60 Erckmann & Chatrian. Madame Therese (Fontaine) 50 Foa. Le Petit Robinson de Paris (De Bonneville) 45 Foncin. Le Pays de France (Muzzarelli) 00 Fontaine. Douze Contes Nouveaux .45 Goncourt, Edmond and Jules de. Selections (Cameron) 1.25 Goodell. L'Enfant Espion and Other Stories 45 Gverber. Contes et Legendes. Part I .• 60 Contes et Legendes, Part II 60 Hugo. La Chute (Kapp) 35 Labiche & Martin. Le Voyage de M. Perrichon (Castegnier) .35 La Br^te. Mon Oncle et Mon Cure (White) 50 La Fontaine. Fifty Fables (McKenzie) 40 Legouve & Labiche. La Cigale (Farrar) 25 Mairet. La Tache du Petit Pierre (Healy) 35 L'Enfant de la Lune (Healy) 35 La Clef d'Or (Healy) 35 Merimee. Colomba (Williamson) 40 MoliSre. Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Roi & Guitteau 35 Racine. Iphig6nie (Woodward) 60 Sand. La Mare au Diable (Randall-Lawton) 35 Sandeau. Mademoiselle de la Seigliere (White) 40 Schultz. La Neuvaine de Colette (Lye) 45 S6vigne, Mme. de. Selected Letters (Syms) 40 Syms. An Easy First French Reader 50 Le Chien de Brisquet and Other Stories 35 Voltaire. Selected Letters (Syms) '^5 American Book Company NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO (214) Text-Books in French By ANTOINE MUZZARELLI Officier d'Academie ; author of " Les Antonymes de la Langue Franyaise," " English Antonymes," " French Classics," etc. MUZZARELLrS ACADEMIC FRENCH COURSE— First Year . $1.00 Second Year 1.00 Keys to First and Second Years .... Each, 1.00 The Academic French Course embodies in two books a complete system of instruction in the French language for English-speaking pupils. The course is remarkable for the simplicity of its grammatical treatment and for the care- fully selected vocabulary employed in the exercises and translations. It is eminently practical, advancing in a constant gradation from the easiest of first steps to those more difficult. Only essential rules are given, and those in the most concise form. Besides the usual grammatical drill, it includes lessons in conversational form, entitled "A Trip to Paris," replete with information of the most practical kind and largely increasing the student's vocab- ulary with an extensive variety of expressions in daily use among the educated classes in France. MUZZARELLI'S BRIEF FRENCH COURSE . . . . $1.25 This is prepared on the same general lines, and though brief is comprehensive. The grammatical topics discussed have been wisely chosen, and all topics of primary import- ance are fully treated. The exercises in reading and writing French furnish abundant practice on all points of syntax. The book contains a valuable chapter on French Phonetics, as well as the poetry prescribed for memorizing by the Regents of the University of the State of New York. It is especially noteworthy in that it conforms in all re- spects to the radical reform incorporated in the new laws of syntax officially promulgated by the Minister of Public Instruction of the French Republic, on March ii, 1901. Copies will he sent, prepaid, on receipt of the price. American Book Company New York ? Cincinnati Chicago (212) Garner's Spanish Grammar FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES By SAMUEL GARNER, Ph.D. Recently Professor of Modern Languages, United States Naval Academy C/otbj I2m0y 415 pages. Price, $1.2^ THIS grammar contains a clear and concise outline of the essential features of the language, and is distinguished from other books of its kind by the omission of unimportant details. Be- sides the clear exposition of grammar and syntax, it includes exercises combining drill upon gram- matical points, with practice in translation, pronun- ciation, and conversation, and at the same time affords ample work in memorizing. The reading exercises contain easy and familiar dialogues and selections, together with newspaper extracts, which are particularly valuable in acquiring a practical knowledge of the language. An especially serviceable feature is the insertion of numerous business letters and forms, together with forms of addresses, epistolary formalities, and Spanish abbre- viations. English and Spanish vocabularies com- plete the book. No other grammar now published offers so attractive an introduction to the study of the commercial and social life of Spanish-speaking countries. Copies sent J prepaid, to any address, on receipt of the price by the Publishers AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO BOSTON ATLANTA DALLAS SAN FRANCISCO RETURN TO the circulation desk ot any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW A P R 3 2001 12,000(11/95) rtj 357CV